
Class 

Book ___ 

GopightN^___ 



CLOSyRIGHT DEPOSm 



Ibeatb's ^Do^ern Xanguaoe Series 



A SPANISH GRAMMAR 



BY 
E. C. HILLS AND J. D. M. FORD 

COLORADO COLLEGE HARVARD UNIVERSITY 



BOSTON, U.S.A. 

D. C. HEATH & CO., PUBLISHERS 

1904 



Two Oopies Ref.elv8<i 

SEP 3 1904 

. Oooyrrffht Entry 
CLASS 0- xXc. Na 
' COPYB 



Copyright, 1904, 
By D. C. Heath & Co. 



'^ 



A 



N^^ 



PREFACE 

In this grammar the authors have aimed to present to 
Enghsh-speaking students the more important facts of pro- 
nunciation, inflection, and syntax in a clear and adequate 
way. No attempt has been made to separate inflection and 
syntax: it is hardly necessary to keep them asunder in an 
elementary text-book. An abundance of exercise material 
has been given, and the exercises have been made as prac- 
tical as possible. The verb list is very full, and has been 
provided with ample references, in the hope that it may 
encourage drill upon one of the most difficult divisions of 
elementary Spanish grammar. 

To no slight degree drill work has been made a conscious 
feature in the preparation of the composition material. It 
will be seen, particularly in the later exercises of the book, 
that the sentences of the English part are based on the words 
and the turns of phrase occurring in the Spanish part pre- 
ceding. On this account the student needs to resort but 
rarely to the Vocabulary, when translating from English into 
Spanish. 

The grammar has been prepared with a view to facilitat- 
ing the early reading of easy Spanish texts. Teachers do 
not agree as to when reading should begin, and there can be 



iv PREFACE 

no fixed rule where conditions vary so greatly. But experi- 
ence has led us to believe that in most college classes it is 
best to begin reading almost immediately, and certainly not 
later than the end of the fourth week, and to give to reading 
at least one-half of the time thereafter during the school 
year. Accordingly, the most essential elements of inflection 
and syntax are set forth, in so far as it seemed practicable, 
in the first few lessons, the inflection of verbs, for instance, 
being taken up with the first lesson, and an explanation 
of the use and meaning of each tense being given along 
with the inflection. 

In classes composed of advanced college students it may 
be well to take an entire lesson at a time ; but in many col- 
lege classes it will be best to divide each lesson into two 
parts, and in high and preparatory school classes it may be 
best to divide each lesson into three parts. The divisions 
may be made as follows : — 



I. 



' First part, — inflection and syntax, and Spanish-English 

exercises. 
Second part, — English-Spanish exercises, and a review 

of inflection and syntax. 
First part. — inflection and syntax, with much oral 
drill based thereon. 
II. \ Second part, — Spanish-English exercises, and a review 
of inflection and syntax. 
Third part, — English-Spanish exercises. 

In each lesson-period there should be as much oral drill as 
time will permit. 



PREFACE V 

In some lessons there are rules, usually in small type, that 
may well be omitted on going through the grammar the first 
time. It has not been indicated definitely which rules should 
be thus omitted, as it was thought best to leave it to the good 
judgment of the individual teacher. As an illustration, in 
Lesson XXIII the following could be omitted : §§ 109, c and 
e\ III ; 115 ; and 116. 

Teachers will differ as to whether it is best to take or omit 
the English-Spanish exercises, on going through the grammar 
the first time. Some successful teachers prefer to omit them 
at first and to take them up with a review. By following this 
method, the student is the sooner prepared for reading, and 
he may have an abundance of written work by copying dic- 
tated passages taken from the text that is read. After going 
through the grammar once, the student may then review it, 
taking at a lesson one or more of the English-Spanish 
exercises. 

We wish to acknowledge our indebtedness to Professor 
E. S. Joynes, of South Carolina College, for reading the first 
proofs and making many valuable suggestions ; and we can- 
not sufficiently express our thanks to Mr. S. W. Clary, whose 
kindly and helpful interest in our book has far transcended 
mere business considerations. 

E. C. H. AND J. D. M. F. 

July, 1904. 



CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Pronunciation i 

LESSONS 

I. Gender of- nouns. Indefinite article. Present indicative 

of regular verbs 21 

II. Plural of nouns. Definite article. Negation ... 24 

III. Feminine and plural of adjectives. Present indicative of 

radical-changing verbs of the first and second conju- 
gations 28 

IV. Present indicative of radical-changing verbs of the third 

conjugation, and of tener and haber. Meaning and 
use of tener and haber. Participles. Idioms . . 32 
V. Personal subject-pronouns, listed. Possessive and de- 
monstrative adjectives . ' . . . . . . .36 

VI. Present indicative of ser and estar. Meaning of ser and 

estar. Idioms 39 

VII. Possessive case. Indirect object. Personal d. Inter- 
rogative sentences ....... 42 

VIII. Imperfect and preterite indicative of regular verbs. Use 

of imperfect and preterite indicative .... 46 

IX. Neuter article lo. Use of the definite article ... 49 
X. Omission of the definite and indefinite articles. Preterite 

of radical-changing verbs. Idioms .... 54 

XI. Position of descriptive adjectives. Agreement of adjectives 58 
XII. Imperfect and preterite indicative of tener ^ haber, ser, and 

estar. Pluperfect and preterite perfect. Idioms . 62 

XIII. Apocopation of adjectives. Numerals . . . .66 

vii 



Vlll 



CONTENTS 



LESSONS 

XIV. 



XV. 
XVI. 

XVII. 

XVIII. 
XIX. 

XX. 
XXI. 

XXII. 

XXIII. 

XXIV. 

XXV. 

XXVI. 
XXVII. 

XXVIII. 
XXIX. 



Future and conditional indicative of regular verbs. 
Idioms. Present, imperfect, and future indicative to 
denote an act or state that continues from one period 
into another . . ...... 

Comparison of adjectives and adverbs. "Than." Tan 
. . . conio ......... 

Adjectives used substantively. Plural number. Future 
and conditional indicative of te7ier, haber, ser, and 
estar. Future perfect. Future of probability 

Imperative mood and present subjunctive. Present sub- 
junctive to express command or entreaty 

Personal pronouns 

Tu and usted. Ello and lo. Imperative and present 
subjunctive of tener, haber^ ser^ and estar. Perfect 
subjunctive 

Subjunctive in dependent clauses. Idioms 

Prepositional forms of personal pronouns. Imperfect 
subjunctive of regular and radical-changing verbs. 
Use of imperfect subjunctive. Sequence of tenses 

Personal pronoun-objects. Imperfect subjunctive oj 
tener^ haber, ser, and eslar. Pluperfect subjunctive 
Conditions " contrary to fact." Idioms 

Se and si. Reflexive construction. Hypothetical sub- 
junctive. Use of hypothetical subjunctive. Com 
moner forms of conditional sentences ... 

Possessive adjectives. Infinitive. Present participle 
Past participle. Idioms 

Possessive pronouns. Regular verbs. Orthographic 
changes 

Demonstratives. Radical-changing verbs, first class 

Relative pronouns. Radical-changing verbs, second and 
third classes . . . . . 



Relative pronouns. Inceptive and -uir verbs 
Interrogative pronouns. Ir and venir. Idioms 



69 



74 



79 



84 



93 



102 



109 



114 

123 

128 
131 

135 
139 
143 



CONTENTS 



IX 



LESSONS 

XXX. 

XXXI. 
XXXII. 



XXXIII. 



XXXIV. 



Indefinite adjective pronouns. Negation. Querer and 
poder. Idioms 147 



Numerals. Hacer and decir. Idioms .... 

Adverbs. Por and para. Nouns used adjectively. 
Preposition a with verbs meaning " to take from," 
"to ask of," etc. Preposition retained before a 
substantive clause. Idioms. Dar^ saber, oir, and ver. 
Meaning of conocer and saber. Idioms 

Conjunctions. Agreement of subject and verb. Word 
order. Andar, caber, poner, asir, valer, salir, caer, 
traer, and -ducir. Meaning of andar and ir. Idioms 

Qualifying suffixes. Idioms ...... 



155 



162 



170 
176 



The Verb 184 

Alphabetical List of Verbs 232 

Vocabulary 245 

Index 287 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



PRONUNCIATION 

THE ALPHABET 

1. The Spanish, alphabet has thirty different signs : 

a, b, c, ch, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, 1, 11, m, n, n, o, p, q, r, rr, s, 
t, u, V, w, X, y, z. 

The Castilian pronunciation of these is taken as the norm by 
cultured speakers in Spain. It is therefore the pronunciation 
adopted here. It is fair to state, however, that certain dialect 
peculiarities (especially Andalusian) have passed over to the 
former Spanish colonies in America and the Philippines and 
now represent the pronunciation of the larger proportion of the 
Spanish-speaking peoples. The signs k and w occur mainly 
in words from foreign languages, and in them receive their 
foreign values. 

2. The following table is intended to convey a general idea 
of the Spanish sounds. Hardly any of the EngHsh or other 
equivalents mentioned are more than approximate ; yet, taken 
in connection with the more exact description to be given 
later, they should aid the student to acquire a good Spanish 
pronunciation. 



varies in quality between the a 
oi far and that oi fat. 

usually like German (bilabial) 
w : try to pronounce English 
if and z^ in one breath. 



like ^, when the Spanish letter- 
stands before a, o, u or sl 
consonant, or is final. 

like /// of t/itn, when the Span- 
ish letter stands before e or i. 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



ch 
d 



like ch of church. 

usually approximate to the /// 
of that. 

varies between the vowel sound 
in mate and that in met, 

usually like English yC 

usually like **' hard " g of gate^ 
gilty etc., when the Spanish 
letter stands before a^ o^ u^ 
or a consonant. 

like a strong English h pro- 
duced far back in the mouth 
(or like German ch of nach), 
when the Spanish letter 
stands before e or /. 

usually silent. Before Me it may 
be pronounced like a weak 
English h. 

varies between the vocalic 
sound in 7?ieet and that in mit. 

like the variety of Spanish g 
occurring before e or /. The 
j has this value everywhere. 

like English k. 

like English / pronounced on 
or close to the teeth. 



11 
m 
n 



V 

w 

X 



approximate to Hi of mitlion, 

like English m. 

like English n pronounced on 
or close to the teeth. 

approximate to ni of onion. 

varies between the vocalic sound 
in note and that in not. 

like English jz>. 

found only with a following m : 
qu = English h. 

like English r carefully uttered. 

like English r much prolonged. 

usually like English ss. 

like English / pronounced on 
or close to the teeth. 

varies between the vocalic sound 
in poo/ and that in pu/l. 

the same in sound as Spanish d. 

as in foreign languages. 

usually like English x ; occa- 
sionally like s. 

like English y; occasionally 
a vowel like Spanish i. 

like English th of thin ; cf. Span- 
ish c before e or i. 



3. Vowels. — The vowel sounds of the speech are denoted 
by a, e, i, o, u, and occasionally y (which is a vowel in the 
conjunction y, ^ and/ as well as at the end of a word, as in 
rey, 'king'). The vowel y has the same sound as Spanish i. 
There is in English a tendency to convert all long vowels into 
diphthongs ; that is, to add a final glide sound to the original 
vowel. This tendency must be avoided in Spanish, where the 
individual vowel denotes a simple vocalic sound. 

a is approximate to English a in * far,' or to a sound between the a of 
* far ' and that of * fat ' : it is never so " broad " as English a (open back 



PRONUNCIATION 3 

variety of the vowel) in * all ' nor so " flat " as a (close forward variety of 
the vowel) in *fat.' 

e is usually closed, but is moderately open in most closed syllables, or 
when followed by 11 or rr, as in §1, ser, ten, este, ella, perro, etc., and 
very open in the diphthong ue (here e approximates the French eu of 
seul) . 

i in stressed syllables is always closed; in unstressed syllables it approx- 
imates English i in * pin/ 

Open is the only one that is normal in Castilian, but it is not so open 
as open Italian o. It is like French o in nord^ and not very different 
from English o in * north.' It is more closed after labials (as in amor) 
and in open syllables, but is never so closed as in French beau. 

Stressed u is almost equal to English oo in *food' (not so rounded as 
French otC) ; in a closed syllable it generally approximates to English oo 
in *book.' The caution is to be given that Spanish u should never be 
pronounced like the diphthongal u of English * tune ' or * cube.' 

It would be futile to attempt to give here any more precise definition 
of the vowel sounds than has been given. As has been intimated, each 
vowel may have an open or a close value, similar to the open and close 
qualities of the vowels in French and Italian. But in Spanish these 
differences of quality are not of so marked importance as in those other 
languages. 

Moreover, Spanish vowels are not so " rounded " or " closed " as in 
French, but more so than in English. 

Quantity, — In Castilian there are no long vowels, properly speaking, 
all being short or of medium length. English-speaking students must 
avoid prolonging vowels, especially final vowels, as occurs so generally in 
English when the vowel is stressed. 

Elision, — Elision is common in spoken Spanish, where a vowel is 
repeated, as in de k\ (pronounced d'el), la altura (I'altura), de este 
(d'este), ya lo oigo (ya I'oigo). 

4. Diphthongs and Triphthongs. — The vowels may be 
divided into two chief classes : the strong, a, e, o ; and the 
weak, i (y) and u. 

A qombination of two or three adjacent vowels may form a 
single syllable in pronunciation ; such a combination constitutes 



4 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

a diphthong or a triphthong. The individual elements of a 
diphthong or a triphthong are all to be pronounced, but more 
rapidly than when they stand outside such a combination. 

I. Diphthongs, — A Spanish diphthong, properly so called, 
consists of a combination into a single syllable of one of the 
strong vowels (a, e, o) with one of the weak vowels (i or y, u), 
or of one (i) of the weak vowels with the other (u). The 
stress, if the syllable be the accented one of the word, will fall 
upon the strong vowel, or upon the second of the weak vowels 
where the diphthong consists of two of these latter. 

The possible combinations, governed by the relative position 
of the vowels, are given in the following list. The vowel of the 
diphthong that may bear the stress is the one in heavy type. 



ai (ay), as in baile, dance (hay, there is, 

there are). 
au, as in flauta, flute. 

ei (ey), as in reina, queen (rey, king). 
eu, as in deuda, debt. 

oi (Oy), as in oigo, I hear (doy, I give). 
Ou, as in bou, fishing-boat (a rare 

diphthong). 
iu, as in triunfo, triujuph. . 



ia, as in fiar, to trust. 

ua, as in cuatro, four. 

ie, as in sien, temple. 

ue, as in fuerte, strong. 

io, as in naciones, nations, 

uo, as in cuota, quota. 

ui, as in huir, to flee. 



a. The vowels of these combinations are of approximately equal force 
in a diphthong not bearing the accent of the word, as in bailar, * to 
dance ' ; flautero, ' flute-player ' ; reinar, * to reign ' ; deudor, * debtor ' ; 
oigamos, * let us hear ' ; triunfar, ' to triumph ' ; fiaremos, * we shall 
trust,' etc. 

b. Two adjacent strong vowels are normally regarded as forming two 
distinct syllables, and not a diphthong ; as in faena, 'labor'; caoba, 'ma- 
hogany' ; loa, ' prologue ' ; reo, 'defendant'; leer, 'to read'; roer, 'to 
gnaw,' etc. So also a combination of two weak vowels with the stress on 
the first of them (as in fliiido, 'fluid'), or of a strong and a weak vowel 
with the stress on the weak vowel (as in traido, * bought ' ; roido, ' gnawed ') ^ 
forms not a diphthong, but two separate syllables. In these two latter 



PRONUNCIATION 5 

cases the stress is usually indicated by a written accent. For metrical 
purposes even these adjacent vowels may occasionally count as a single 
syllable. 

2. Triphthongs. — A triphthong consists of a combination 
of a stressed strong vowel with two weak vowels, between which 
it is always placed. There are but four possible combinations, 
all of which end in i (written y in the final position or before 
the vowel of another syllable) . 

iai, as in fiais, you trust, 

iei, as in lieis, may you bind. 

uai (uay), as in fraguais, jj/^^/y^r^^ (g^^Y) "woe), 

uei (uey), as in continu^is, inay you continue (buey, ox ; bueyes, oxen). 

Note. — Spanish words cannot properly begin with a diphthong or a 
triphthong. Where the normal development of a Latin word into Spanish 
involved the passage of initial stressed ^ to e>, or of initial stressed o to 
ue (for Spanish usually broke up the short Latin vowels into these diph- 
thongs), the i was changed to y and an h was prefixed to the u : e.g. Latin 
errat, Spanish j^rr^ (for ie^'ra), * he errs' (cf. Latin errdre, Spanish 
errar^ * to err ') ; Latin ovum, Spanish huevo, * egg.' 

5. Consonants.^ — For the sake of convenience the conso- 
nants will be considered in several groups, determined, in 
the main, by the kind of organs that produce the sounds in 
question. 

6. Labials and labio-dentals, that is, sounds produced by the 
action, upon a current of air, of the lips alone or of the upper 
teeth and the lower lip working together : 

b, V, p, f, m, w (u in hiatus). 

1 The Spanish names of the consonants are these : be, ce, che, de, efe, ge, 
hache^jota, ka, ele, elle, erne, ene, ene^pe, cu, ere, erre, ese, te, ve (also called m de 
corazun or u consonante), ve doble, equis,ye (also Q.2i}\^dt.y griegd),zeta. To the 
consonants and vowels of these names are, of course, to be given their Spanish 
value. 



6 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

b and v, denote the same sound. This (a voiced^ bilabial 
spirant) is ordinarily one not used in English, but is akin to 
the German (bilabial) w. It is most easily pronounced by 
seeking to utter the English b without closing the Hps entirely 
(as is requisite in the true English /^), and permitting the air 
to pass out constantly through a narrow slit between the lips ; 
as in beber, ^ to drink ' ; vivir, ' to live.' The sound of the 
English V (labio-dental) does not exist in Castilian. 

After m or n (whether n be in the same word or at the end of the pre- 
ceding word) both the b and the v receive a sound like that of the 
English b (a voiced labial stop) ; as in tambien, * as well,' * also ' ; en- 
vidia, * envy ' (often spelled einbidia in Old Spanish) ; con valor, * with 
courage.' In such cases the n, even though retained in spelling, receives 
the value of m. Moreover, the English sound of b is often given to both 
b and V when initial and emphatic, as in j basta ! * enough ! ' j villano ! 
* villain ! ' Before t or s, a b approximates sometimes to p in sound {i.e. 
becomes voiceless), as in subterraneo, * subterranean'; abstenerse, *to 
abstain,' etc.; and in such cases it is often slighted entirely in popular 
speech, as in substancia, obscuro,^ etc. 

p. Approximately the EngUsh sound (a voiceless labial 
stop) ; as in papel, * paper.' 

f. Usually like the English / (a voiceless labio-dental spi- 
rant) ; as in favor, * favor.' 

Although the fact is denied by some observers, it is a question whether 
the f does not occasionally have a voiceless value corresponding to the 
voiced one of b and v {i.e. whether it is not a voiceless bilabial spirant). 

m resembles the English m (a voiced labial nasal) ; as in 
mimar, ^ to fondle.' 

1 A voiced consonant is one in the production of which the vocal cords 
vibrate, as may be ascertained by touching the throat in front of the larynx 
during the utterance of b, d, g in English. There is no such vibration in the 
production of the corresponding voiceless stop consonants, /, /, k. 

2 The b of obscuro, substancia, etc., is commonly omitted in writing, and is 
pronounced only by the pedantic. 



PRONUNCIATION 7 

w occurs usually in words from foreign languages, and in 
them it has the foreign pronunciation : thus it has the English 
sound in Wellington and the German sound in Wag7ier, Un- 
accented u in hiatus, as in fuerte, ' strong,' or cuando, ' when,' 
is, in Castihan pronunciation, only a semi- vowel ; that is, it is 
partly a consonant, and as such it approximates in value to the 
English w. 

W is found in Spanish in a few proper names that are by no means 
recent importations, but go back to the period of Visigothic dominion in 
Spain ; Wamba, Witiza. In these it receives the usual value of Spanish 
b and v : cf. the spellings Vamba and Vitiza sometimes found. 

7. Dentals or Hngua-dentals, that is, sounds produced by 
the united action of the tongue and the teeth upon a current 
of air. 

t, d, c (followed by e or i), z, 1, n. Along with these may be 
considered 11, ii, and a variety of n occurring before " hard " c, 
qu, or "hard" g, etc., although these 1 and n sounds are not 
properly dentals. 

t. Not unlike English /, except that it, as well as all the 
Spanish dentals, is produced farther forward in the mouth than 
the English dentals. 

In Spanish the point of the tongue often touches the teeth when the t 
and other dentals are produced, whereas in English the tongue is allowed 
to touch the roof of the mouth somewhat back of the roots of the upper 
teeth. There is, therefore, a very appreciable difference between the 
sounds of t and n in English ten and those in Spanish ten, * hold.' 

d. There is a marked difference between the sound of Eng- 
lish d and that of Spanish d, for the latter, without being inter- 
dental, somewhat resembles the th of EngUsh then. It may be 
compared to an English d prolonged, and uttered with the 
tongue touching the upper teeth. Ex., seda, nadie, todo. 



8 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

The English d (a voiced dental stop) is produced by the escape of air 
from the mouth after the passage of the air has first been stopped by con- 
tact between the tongue and the roof of the mouth back of the upper teeth. 
The common Spanish sound (a voiced dental spirani) is produced during 
contact between the tongue and the teeth, and the passage of the air is 
not wholly cut off. 

At the beginning of a breath-group, or after 1 or n, d has some of the 
explosive effect of the English d, as in \ diablo ! * the deuce ! ^ ; espalda, 

* shoulder'; andando, * walking.' At the end of a word the Castilian 
sound of d resembles that of th in English thin (a voiceless dental spirant, 
= 0), as in sed, * thirst'; while in Andalusia and Spanish America it 
tends to disappear entirely, as in usted, * you,' which is usually pronounced 
ustL Between vowels, d has disappeared largely in the pronunciation of 
untrained speakers, and even those who pronounce carefully show a de- 
cided tendency to suppress this intervocalic d, saying, for example, a77iao 
for amado, * loved.' Moreover, both the written and the spoken language 
have already accepted the loss of the intervocalic d of the reflexive imper- 
ative second person plural : e.g. amaos, * love one another ' (for amad, 

* love,' -f OS, * you,' *each other'). 

c followed by e or i :1 _, , , / . 

hlhese nave a common value (a voice- 
z m all positions. ) ^ 

less dental spirant) in Castilian speech, viz. a lisping sound 

approximate to that of th in English thin^ as in cielo, ^ heaven ' ; 

cena, * supper * ; zapato, ^ shoe.' Compare the value of final 

Spanish d as already described. In Southern Spain and in 

Spanish America and the Philippines, both c (e, i) and z are 

pronounced like s. 

According to some observers, a z followed by a voiced consonant {i.e, 
such a consonant as n, 1, g, etc.) may itself become voiced and have 
approximately the value of English th in then; as in portazgo, *toll'; 
hazlo, * do it '; gozne, * hinge.' 

1 and n have usually values resembling the English values 
(1, a voiced lateral fricative ; n, a voiced dental nasal), but they 
are produced farther forward in the mouth than the English 
sounds, so that there is a perceptible difference between the 



PRONUNCIATION g 

sounds of / and n in English /a7tce and those in its Spanish 
equivalent lanza, as there is between the n of English ^en and 
that of Spanish ten, ^hold.' 

Final 1 in Spanish never has the semi-vocalic, " hollow " sound of final 
English /. Compare English * dell ' with Spanish del. 

When followed by the so-called *' hard " g or k sound, by g (before e 
or i), by j, or by aspirated h (in hue-), as in vengo, *I come'; bianco, 
* white'; banquero, * banker'; rengifero, * reindeer'; naranja, * orange'; un 
hueso, * a bone,' n ceases to be dental, and acquires a value similar to that 
of no- in English sin^ (i.e. a velar nasal value). 

In some parts of Spain and of Spanish America the velar sound of final 
n is common, as in pan (pronounced pang); but this pronunciation 
should be avoided. 

11 has a sound most nearly represented in English by that 
of /// in million {i.e. it is a palatalized form of /, not a doubled 
/, in sound). 

It should be noted that while the English sound of Hi in ??iillion is that 
of / followed by that of y, the Spanish sound is that of 1 infected by y 
throughout the duration of its enunciation; i.e. it is 1 no longer dental, 
but produced with the tongue in the y position, or, in other words, with 
the middle of the tongue touching the hard palate. There is, therefore, 
some difference between the pronunciation of Hi in ??zilHon and that of 11 
in its Spanish equivalent mill6n. In some parts of Spain and Spanish 
America, 11 has become iy in sound, e.g. caballo, * horse,' is pronounced 
cabaiyo ; in the vulgar speech of certain regions, this y has disappeared 
entirely when immediately following the stressed syllable, e.g. cabai-0 for 
caballo, si-a for silla, etc. (but cabai-yito for caballito, si-yita for sillita, 
etc.). This omission of y, while very common in some parts of Mexico, 
the Argentine Republic, etc., is everywhere considered as vulgar. 

n. This (a palatalized form of n) is similarly n produced 
with the tongue in the y position. It is only approximately 
rendered by the ni of onion or the ny of canyon : this latter 
expresses in a measure, but yet not perfectly, the n of the Span- 
ish original canon. The mark over the n is termed the tilde 



lO SPANISH GRAMMAR 

8. Gutturals,! i,e, throat sounds. 



[ 



followed by a, o, or u ; 
followed by any consonant except h ; 
at the end of a word. 
qu always followed by e or i. 
k in foreign words. 
f followed by a, o, or u : 
[ followed by a consonant. 
gu when followed by e or i. 

The first three of these, ix, c in the positions indicated, 
qu, and k, have approximately the sound of English k or 
"hard" c (a voiceless guttural or palatal stop); as in carro, 
^ cart ' ; conde, ' count ' ; culto, ^ cult ' ; creador, ' creator ' ; frac, 
^ frock coat ' ; quedo, ' quiet ' ; quilla, ' keel ' ; kiosko, * kiosk ' ; 
kilometro, ^ kilometre.' 

The last two in the list, i.e. g before a, o, u, or a consonant, 
and gu before e or i, have approximately the sound of the 
" hard " English g (a voiced guttural or palatal stop) of got 
ox get; as in galante, ^gallant'; golfo, 'gulf ; gutural, 'gut- 
tural ' ; gruta, ' grotto ' ; guarda, ' guard ' ; guerrilla, ' guer- 
rilla* ; guia, 'guide.' 

In such cases as these last two (guerrilla, guia) the u is not itself pro- 
nounced, but is merely a sign that the g has the " hard " sound before the 
following e or i. Where the gu is followed by another vowel than these, 
the g has its " hard " sound, but the u is now pronounced, having to some 
degree the value of English w, as in guano, * guano.' Occasionally, even 
before e or i, the u has a pronounceable value, but in such cases it must 
be written with a diaeresis, as in antiguedad, * antiquity'; lingiiistico, 
* linguistic' 

1 Conventionally called gutturals, the k {i.e. Spanish qu) and " hard " g 
sounds may be more properly termed palatal stops when they are followed by 
e or i. 



PRONUNCIATION 1 1 

In the speech of many, perhaps most, Spaniards and Spanish Americans, 
intervocalic " hard " g tends to become slightly spirant (^i,e. a prolonged g : 
cf. b and d), except after n, as in hago, ' I make'; hormiga, * ant'; droga, 
*drug,' etc. (but not in tengo, *I have,' etc.). In some parts of southern 
Spain and Spanish America, g before u + vowel, and gu before i + 
vowel, tend to disappear in the vulgar speech, as awa for agua, * water,' 
siyendo for siguiendo, ' following,' etc. 

9. Sibilants, i,e, hissing sounds. In Castilian s is the only 
simple sign denoting a sibilant value, but there are two signs 
denoting a compound sound into which an s value enters, viz. 
ch and x. 

s. The Spanish s commonly has the sharp hissing sound of 
EngHsh initial s, as in ' sing/ and of English ss, as in ' hiss ' ; 
thus, saco, ^sack'; sal, ^salt'; pasar, 'to pass'; notas, 'notes.' 

Caution must be taken not to give to Spanish s between vowels the 
sound of English z (a voiced sibilant) or of intervocalic English s as in 
*rose.' 

With regard to the s before a voiced consonant, usage varies. In some 
parts of the Spanish-speaking world it remains unvoiced, in other parts it 
becomes voiced, as in desde, 'since'; sesgo, * slope'; mismo, *same,' 
* self,' etc. 

In Andalusia and parts of Spanish America, s before a consonant, and 
final in stressed syllables, becomes in the vulgar speech a soft aspirate, 
approximating to, but softer than, German ch in ick. Ex. : las bonitas 
muchachas becomes la' bonita' muchachas ; el compas, el compa*; dos 
ninos, do' ninos, etc. This pronunciation is rather widespread. 

ch, a compound sound (a voiceless dental plus a voiceless 
palatal sibilant), not much unlike the ch of ' church.' It is made 
up of the sound of the Spanish dental t, followed by a sound 
similar to that of English sh ; as in mucho, ^ much.' 

X, a compound sound (a voiceless guttural stop plus a 
voiceless sibilant s), usually quite Hke the x of English ^six' 
or ^ lax.' It consists of a k sound followed by the sibilant s 



12 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

sound, as in axioma, ^ axiom.' When the x stands before a con- 
sonant, the Spanish Academy insists that it be still pronounced 
as ks ; but the generality of speakers pronounce it there as s 
simply; thus, in extranjero/ stranger ' ; sexto, ' sixth.* In such 
cases there is a manifest tendency to write s instead of x, i,e, 
estranjero, sesto, etc. 

Between vowels x is, according to certain authorities, sometimes pro- 
nounced like English gs {i,e» as a voiced guttural stop plus a sibilant), so 
that the x of Spanish examen may resemble the x of its English equiva- 
lent * examination.' 

10. Aspirates, or well-breathed sounds. 

j in all positions. 

g followed by e or i. 

h followed by ue. 

j in all positions and g before e or i denote the one sound 
(a voiceless guttural or velar spirant) which is most closely 
approximated in English by pronouncing the h of ^ hot ' very 
far back in the mouth and in a very forcible way ; as in jamas, 
^ never ' ; gente, ^ people ' ; girar, ' to turn.' The sound of the 
German ch in nach^ dock, etc., affords a still closer parallel to 
the Spanish sound. 

In the production of this Spanish sound, the velar (or soft) palate 
vibrates against the back of the tongue, which is withdrawn as much as 
possible into the rear of the mouth. The Castilian sound is a harsh one, 
but it is softened in Andalusia and Spanish America to the value of a strong 
English h or the German ch of ich, 

h followed by the diphthong ue may have a slight aspiration, 
equal to that of a weak utterance of EngHsh >^ ; as in huerto, 
* garden ' ; hueso, ^ bone.* By many speakers, however, this h 
is not pronounced at all, and, in fact, for the generality of 
Castilians h never denotes a sound. 



PRONUNCIATION 1 3 

11. Tongue-trilled Consonants : r and rr. These denote a 
sound not very dissimilar to that of the Enghsh r carefully pro- 
nounced, and, upon occasion, having a well-prolonged trill. 

The sound is produced by making the forward part of the tongue vibrate 
against the palate, just back of the upper teeth. The point of contact be- 
tween the tongue and the palate is a little farther forward than in English. 

Final r in Spanish never has the semivocalic glide sound of final Eng- 
lish r. Compare English ther{e) and Spanish ser. 

There are two varieties of the sound : 

a. A weaker variety, i.e. one not very forcibly trilled, and 
yet fully as strong as a carefully pronounced English r. This 
is denoted in Spanish by a single r between vowels, as in 
pero, ' but,' and by a single r after the consonants b, c, d, f, g, 
p, t ; as in bravo, ^ wild ' ; cristiano, ^ Christian ' ; ladron, * rob- 
ber'; fresno, ^ash tree'; g^rano, ^ grain'; prado, ^meadow'; 
trato, ^behavior.' The final r, as in amar, ^ to love,' may be 
of this variety^ or it may be a trifle more prolonged in its trill. 
In any event it is to be carefully uttered, and not slurred as it 
so often is in English ; cf. ^ paper,' ' mother,' etc., in which the 
r sound is barely discernible. 

b, A reenforced variety, i,e, one with a well-prolonged trill. 
It is not a doubled consonant, but rather a prolongation of the 
other variety. It is denoted by rr between vowels, as in perro, 
^ dog ' ; parra, ' vine ' (cf. pero, ' but,' and para, ' for,' in which 
the weaker variety occurs), and by single r at the beginning 
of a word, as in roble, ' oak,' or within a word after n or s, as 
in enredo, ' entanglement ' ; Israelita, ^ Israelite.' Within a word, 
after b or 1 marking the end of a prefix, this same strong r oc- 
curs, as in subrayar, ' to underline ' (cf. raya, ' line,' with initial 
strong r), and malrotar, ^to squander.' The fact that initial 
single r denotes the same reenforced variety as intervocalic rr 
is shown by words like rota, ' rout,' and its derivative derrota. 



14 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

12. Spirant y (a voiced palatal spirant or fricative), not 
much unlike English y in sound, except that its enunciation 
is somewhat stronger, as in ya, ^ already ' ; yo, ^ I ' ; yeso, 
' gypsum.' ^ 

Unaccented i in hiatus is often but a semivowel ; i\e,, it is 
partly consonantal and tends to become y. This is especially 
so in the case of the diphthong ie : cf. yerra, ' he errs,' for ierra, 
and the spelHng yerba, ^ herb,' and hierba, side by side. As 
already stated, y is a vowel in the conjunction y, ^ and ' ; it is a 
vowel (or at least a semivowel) wherever it occurs in a diph- 
thong or triphthong, as in bocoy, ^ hogshead ' ; buey, ^ ox.' 

13. Non-phonetic Orthography. 

(i) Spanish orthography is not consistently phonetic, though 
much more so than English orthography. According to the 
rules of the Spanish Academy, only two letters are ever mute, 
viz. h and u, as follows : 

h is regularly silent, as in hado, ^ fate ' ; hilo, ^ thread ' ; but 
before ue it may be shghtly aspirated, as in hueso, ^ bone.* In 
the digraph ch it has no individual value. 

u is silent, or at least has no individual value, in the combi- 
nation qu. It is also not pronounced in the combination gu 
followed by e or i; it is there but a sign of ^' hard " g: cf. 
sigue, *he follows/ siguio, ^he followed,' with sigo, ^I follow,' 
siga,^ let me follow.' If it happen that the u of the combination 
gue or gui is actually pronounced, a diaeresis is written over 
it ; e.g, argiiir, ^ to argue ' ; averigiie, ' 1 ascertained ' (cf. the 
infinitive averiguar, in which the u is of course pronounced). 

(2) In addition to h and u, there are several letters that, in certain 
combinations, are usually not pronounced in colloquial Spanish, viz. : 

i The tongue should not touch the palate, in the production of Spanish y, 
in such a way as really to stop the breath. In dialect pronunciation it does so, 
and the result is a sound similar to that of English 7. 



PRONUNCIATION 1 5 

b is mute in obscuro, obsceno, obstdculo^ obstinarse, etc. ; abstracciSuj 
abstener, etc. ; substancia, subscribir, etc. That is, b before s is usually 
silent; if it is pronounced, it is as p, e.g. absoluto > apsoluto (cf. bt > pt, 
as in subterrdneo) , In written Spanish also this b is commonly omitted in 
obscuroj substancia, etc. 

C, before a consonant, is often mute, as in diccionario, leccidn, afectisimo, 
etc. Students are advised to pronounce this c. 

d is often silent in the final position, and between vowels when it follows 
stressed a, 0, or u (less often after e or i), as in Madrid, amado, 7tada, todo, 
toda, d menudo, etc. ; also before s, as in adscribir, adstringir, etc. The 
student should pronounce medial d. As to final d, see § 7. 

g, before a consonant, is often mute, as in digno, 7?iagndniiJio, etc. The 
student had best pronounce this g. 

j is mute only in reloj (occasionally written reld'). In the plural, relojes, 
j is pronounced. 

n is usually mute in the prefix trans- before a consonant, as in tran- 
scribir, transmitir, etc.; but it is often pronounced in transatldntico, etc. 

p is mute usually in stibscripcion, septi?)io, Septievtbre, psetido, psicologia, 
etc. (2.^., before t or s, p is usually silent). In written Spanish also this p 
is commonly omitted in septi?no, Septiembre, etc. 

t is usually mute in istmo. 

(3) Some other non-phonetic peculiarities of Spanish orthography are 
as follows : 

b = V. See § 6. 

n, before p or v, has the sound of m, as in un perro, U7t vaso, etc. ; cf. § 7. 

X, before a consonant, is usually pronounced as s, as in extremo, expo- 
sicidn, etc. Regularly between vowels, and often before C, X = cs, as in 
exito, excelente, etc. (but in exacto, x = s). 

Note. — The Spanish Academy has attempted of late years to put back 
into Spanish many sounds that had disappeared or changed, as the x of 
experiencia in place of s, the b of obscuro, the p of septimo, the d of adscri- 
bir, the t of istmo, etc., and the Academy has asked the Spanish people to 
use these restored sounds in their speech. To some extent the sounds have 
been adopted, and they may be heard on the stage and in the pulpit, but 
practically never in colloquial Spanish (except x, which is making headway), 
and in some cases their use would be considered ridiculously pedantic. 
Similarly, the Academy asks that b and v be pronounced like English or 



1 6 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

French b and ?7, but no Spaniard can do this unless he knows English 
or French. The coming together of b and v into one sound is very old 
in Spain, for even in the days of ancient Rome a Latin wit said that for 
the Spaniards vivere was the same as bibere. 

14. Doubled letters. — The general statement may be made 
that the doubling of consonants is not favored in Spanish. LI 
and rr do not represent double sounds, and they figure in the 
alphabet as distinct signs, for 11 denotes a peculiar quality of 
1 (the palatalized 1), and rr denotes a prolongation of the 
simple r sound. Two consonants, however, may be written 
double, viz. c and n, and in the refined pronunciation of Castile 
each of the two c's or two n's is carefully articulated : as in 
accidente, ^ accident ' (of which the first c sounds like k^ and 
the second like th of thui), and in innoble, ' ignoble.' 

No other consonant is doubled in writing or pronunciation in modern 
Spanish. To the frequent mm of English (mostly in words of Latin and 
Romance origin) there corresponds the Spanish nm; as in inmenso, ^ im- 
mense.' Of the vowels only e occurs doubled with any frequency, and 
each e is pronounced in a distinct syllable : as in creer, * to believe' ; leer, 
* to read.' Some of the double e's of early. Spanish are now reduced to 
single e : cf. ser, *to be,' for original seer; ver, * to see,' for original veer. 
We occasionally find a and doubled and pronounced accordingly; the 
first a or usually belongs to a prefix, as in contraalmirante, *rear 
admiral'; cooperar, * to cooperate.' 

ACCENTUATION 

15. For certain words it is necessary to indicate the place 
for the stress of the voice by a written accent put over the vowel 
of the syllable bearing it ; for many others this written accent is 
not necessary, as, in accordance with rules laid down by the 
Spanish Academy, the mere aspect of the word clearly indi- 
cates the place of the chief stress* The leading rules are 
these : 



PRONUNCIATION 1 7 

(i) Words ending in a vowel, or in the consonants n or s, 
normally stress the second last syllable (the penult), and they 
require no written accent, as in : 

carta, letter. respiro, / breathe. hablan, they speak. 

palabra, mord, sollozo, sob. cartas, letters. 

dulce, sweet. tribu, tribe. naciones, nations. 
hijo, son. 

Words ending in n or s normally receive the same treatment as those 
ending in a vowel, because the n or s is often but a sign of pluralization, 
or of verbal inflection, and is added to forms that regularly end in a vowel: 
cf. carta, * letter,' and cartas, * letters'; ama, 'he loves,' and aman, 
*they love.' 

(2) Words ending in a consonant except n or s (cf. Rule I) 
normally stress the last syllable and need no written accent, as : 

verdad, truth. igual, equal. 

For accentual purposes, final y (which can never be accented itself) 
may be regarded as a consonant : hence, bocoy, 'hogshead'; mf/y, 'very.' 

(3) All words stressed on a syllable preceding the second 
last, and all not obeying the two rules already given, must have 
a written accent over the vowel bearing the stress ; e.g. : 

ejercito, army. mama, fuatmna. interes, interest. 

higado, liver. rubi, ruby. lapiz, lead pencil. 

telegrafo, telegraph. nacion, natioyi. marmol, inarble. 

sofa, sofa. amais, you love (cf. amas, thou lovest). 

As a result of the addition of the plural sign -es (but not -s), a word 
not bearing a written accent in the singular may now have to take one; 
as in cr/men, 'crime ' (cf. Rule i), pi. crimenes (cf. Rule 3); or, again, 
an accent written in the singular may not need to be written in the plural, 
as in naci6n (cf. Rule 3), pi. naciones (cf. Rule i). It is the general 
principle that the addition of the plural sign should not affect the place 
of the accent. This principle is violated in the case of caracter, * char- 
acter ' (cf. Rule 3), and regimen, 'regime' (cf. Rule 3), which in the 
plural shift their accent one syllable farther on: caracteres (Rule i) and 
regimenes (Rule 3). 



1 8 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

16. Diphthongs and Triphthongs. — If the stressed syllable 
of the word have a diphthong, this will bear the accent (written 
or unwritten) on the strong vowel, if there be one, or on the 
second of two weak vowels, as in : 

baile, dance. buitre, vulture. argiiis, you argue. 

amais, you love. huis, you flee. 

xA triphthong will always bear the accent (written or unwritten) 
on the strong vowel : 

averigudis, you ascertain. fieis, may you trust, 

17. Monosyllables normally take no written accent : 

huis, you flee, plan, plajt. / 

ruin, vile. fieis, may you trust. 

Occasionally, however, a written accent is found in monosyllables (or 
words usually monosyllabic ; cf. aun), and then its use is ( i ) that of a diacritic, 
intended to distinguish the sense or the particular employment of words 
written and pronounced identically alike, as in c6niO, ' how,' as distinguished 
from como, * as ' ; in mi, * me,' as distinguished from mi, * my * ; in este, 
'this one' (a pronoun), as distinguished from este, * this ' (an adjective); 
in qui6n, 'who' (an interrogative), as distinguished from quien, 'who' 
(a relative), etc.; or (2), merely arbitrary, as u, 'or,' and a, 'at,' and e, 
'and' (which do not need the accent to distinguish them from ha, 'he 
has,' and he, ' I have.') The analogy of other preterites explains the use 
of the accent in certain monosyllabic preterites, such as fui, ' I was,' 
fu§, * he was.' When aun, ' still,' * yet,' is emphatic, it may become a 
dissyllable, and will then stress its u, which (cf. § 15, Rule 3) must bear a 
written accent, aun. 

18. Compound words, felt as such, normally stress the proper 
syllable of each component part, especially in the case of ad- 
verbs in -mente (the Spanish equivalent of English adverbial -ly) 
and of compound numerals ; and any accent that had to be 
written in one of the parts standing alone will continue to be 
written in the compound : 

facilmente, easily (cf. facil, easy). decimoseptimo, seventeenth (cf. d6- 
dulcemente, sweetly. cimo, tenths and septimo, seventh). 



PRONUNCIATION 1 9 

The addition of a pronoun-object to a verb form will not lead to the 
omission of any written accent that the verb form had when standing alone, 
as in amele, *I loved him' (cf. ame, *I loved'), even though without the 
writing of the accent its position is clear enough. 

On the other hand, a verb form which does not normally need a written 
accent will take one if, by the addition of one or more object-pronouns, its 
stress is placed more than two syllables from the end of its whole combi- 
nation, thus : diciendo, * saying,' but diciendomelo, * saying it to me ' ; 
haga, *do' (polite imperative), but hagalo, *do it.' 

Note. — The accent of the stressed syllable of a word is as strong as in 
English ; but the unstressed vowels must not be slurred in pronunciation, 
as they so often are in English. 

SYLLABIFICATION 

19. A single consonantal character and the digraphs ch, 11, 
rr (these three being inseparable combinations) are, in a syl- 
labic division, passed over to the following vowel ; so, also, are 
most combinations of a consonant with an ensuing 1 or r (ex- 
cept rl, si, tl, and sr, which are separable) : 

la-bio, lip, cu-brir, to cover. cu.3.-tro, /our. 

]B.-C3LfPony. su-frir, to suffer. no-ble, noble. 

la-do, side. re-pri-mir, to repress, mo-fle-tu-do, chubby-cheeked^ 

ne-xo, knot. la-cre, sealing-wax, su-plir, to supply, 

mu-cho, much, ma-gro, meagre, te-cla, key. 

bu-llir, to boil, ma-dre, mother, si-glo, century, 

pa-rra, vine, 

Cf. mer-lu-za, cod, es-la-bon, link. 

At-lan-ti-co, Atlantic, Is-ra-e-li-ta, Israelite, 

20. With the exception of the inseparable combinations 
mentioned in the foregoing rule, two consonants between vowels 
are so divided that one remains with the preceding, the other 
goes to the following vowel : 

ap-to, fit. mas-til, mast. in-no-ble, ignoble^ etc. 

cor-te, court, ac-ci-den-te, accident. 



20 ^ SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Where the combination of consonants between vowels is of 
more than two, there is a tendency to pass over to the second 
vowel only a single consonant or one of the inseparable com- 
binations mentioned in § 19 ; e,g. : 

par-che, plaster. cons-truc-cion, construction, 

pers-pi-ca-cia, perspicacity, 

21. Prefixes felt as .such are usually kept intact, contrary to 
the rule in § 19 ; e.g, : 

des-es-pe-rar, to despair (cf. esperar, to hope). 
sub-le-var-se, to rebel (cf. levar, to raise). _ 

ab-ro-ga-cion, abrogation (cf. rogar, to ask). 

PUNCTUATION 

22. The only notable points here are the double use of 
question marks and exclamation points, which not only end 
their clause, but in an inverted form usually precede it (e.g. 
<iC6mo esta Vd.? ^ How are you?' iQue hermosa mujer! 
^ What a beautiful woman ! ') and the frequency of suspension 
points ( . . • ) in narrative or dramatic style. 

CAPITALIZATION 

23. Capitals are less commonly used in Spanish than in 
English. Unless they begin a sentence, a Hne of verse, or a 
quotation, proper adjectives and the pronoun yo, ^I,' are not 
capitalized. National or other locative adjectives used as nouns 
may take a capital when they denote persons (although usage 
varies in this respect) : when they denote languages, they 
usually take no capital, even though used substantively : los 
Franceses {or franceses) toWan frances^ ^Frenchmen speak 
French.' 



LESSON I 

24. Gender of Nouns. — All Spanish nouns are either 
masculine or feminine ; thus, grammatically speaking, 
drbol, 'tree,' is mascuhne, and casa, * house,' is feminine. 

(i) Names of male beings are masculine, and names of 
female beings are feminine, as in English. 

(2) Names of things are masculine if they end in 0, and 
feminine if they end in a. If they end otherwise, it is usually 
best to learn the gender of each noun separately. 

libro, 7fiasc.y book. pluma, fein.^ pen. 

plato, 7nasc.j plate. taza, fem.^ cup. 

a. But mano, *hand,' is feminine; and dia, 'day,' mapa, * map,' and 
several words of Greek origin ending in -ta and -ma are masculine. ^ 

25. Many names of living beings have both a masculine and 
a feminine form, the latter ending in a. 

hijo, son. hija, daughter. 

hermano, brother. hermana, sister. 

gato, cat (male). gata, cat (female). 

monje, monk. monja, nun. 

hu^sped, guest (male). huespeda, guest (female). 

26. Indefinite Article. — The Spanish indefinite article 
is un before a masculine, una before a feminine noun. . 

un hombre, a man. una mujer, a woman. 

un arbol, a tree. una casa, a house. 

'^E.g.: cometa, comet; planeta, planet; poema, poem; programa, pro- 
gramme; sistema, system. 

21 



22 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



a. In Spanish the indefinite article must be repeated before each noun 
to which it refers : una casa y un jardin, ' a house and garden.' 

b. Una sometimes loses its a before a noun beginning with stressed a 
or ha : un alma, ' a soul.' In Spain the full form is more usual. 

27. The Regular Conjugations. — Spanish verbs are 
conveniently divided, according to the infinitive endings 
-ar, -er, and -ir, into three conjugations : 

I II III 

hablar^ (to) speak. temer, (to) fear. vivir, (to) live. 

Like these are inflected all regular verbswith corre- 
sponding infinitive endings. 

28. Indicative. Present Tense. 

Hablar 

Singular 

1. hablo, I speak, I do speak, I am speaking. 

2. hablas, you speak, do speak, are speaking. 

3. habla, he, she, or it speaks, does speak, is speaking. 

Plural 

1. hablamos, we speak, do speak, are speaking. 

2. hablais, you speak, do speak, are speaking. 

3. hablan, they speak, do speak, are speaking. 

Temer 

Singular Plural 

1. temo, I fear, do fear, etc, i. tememos 

2. temes 2. temeis 

3. teme 3. temen 

Vivir 

Singular Plural 

1. vivo, I live, do live, ^/<:. I. vivimos 

2. vives 2. vivis 

3. vive 3. viven 



LESSON I 



23 



Note that the Spanish verb may be expressed in English in three 
different ways ; thus, hablo means * I speak,' * I ,do speak,' or * I am 
speaking.' Note also that the subject-pronouns may be omitted in 
Spanish though required in English. 

Vocabulary 



a, to. 

amigO, -a, m. and f., friend. 

Antonio, w., Anthony. 

aprender, (to) learn. 

bien, well.' 

carta, /, letter. 

comprar, (to) buy. 

con, with. 

en, in. 

escribir, (to) write. 

Espanol, -ola, m, and f,, Spaniard, 

Spanish woman. 
espanol, -ola, Spanish. 
estudi^r, (to) study. 
ingles, -esa, English. 
Juan, ;;/., John. 
lapiz, w., pencil. 



leer, (to) read. 

mal, badly. 

Maria,/, Mary. 

mucho, much, a-great-deaL 

muy, very. 

papel, m.y paper. 

papel secante, w., blotting paper. 

para, in-order-to. 

pero, but. 

pluma,/, pen. 

pOCO, little. 

Senor, -ora, w. a^idf., Sir, Madam. 

si, yes. 

sobre, w., envelope. 

tambien, also. 

tinta,/, ink. 

trabajar, (to) work. 



Exercise I 

A, I. Escribimos mucho. 2. Compro papel y un lapiz. 
3. Juan compra tinta y una pluma. 4. Maria compra papel 
secante y un sobre. 5. ^j Escribes ^ una carta? 6. Si, senor ; 
escribo una carta a un amigo. 7. Maria escribe tambien 
una carta k una amiga. 8. Escribo a un Espaiiol. 9. Maria 
escribe a una Espafiola. 10. Escribo con una pluma. 

II. Maria escribe con un lapiz. 12. jiLeeis mucho? 

13. Si, sen ora ; leemos mucho para aprender. 14. ^Aprendeis 
mucho? 15. Si, senora ; aprendemos a leer y a escribir. 

16. Leem.js y escribimos mucho para aprender a leer y a 
escribi^. 17. Juan, (i estudias mucho ? 18. Si, senor; estudio 



24 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

mucho y aprendo bien. 19. Antonio estudia poco y aprende 
mal. 20. Juan trabaja mucho, pero Antonio trabaja muy poco.. 
21. Hablo ingles y espaiioL^ 22. Aprendemos a leer en 
espanol. 

B. I. I speak Spanish. ^ 2. Do you speak English? 3. Yes, 
sir; I speak English and Spanish. 4. Mary reads and writes in 

Enghsh. 5. John and Anthony read and write in Spanish. 

6. Are you (//.) writing a letter? 7. Yes, sir; we are writing a 
letter to a Spaniard. 8. Are you {sifig?) buying a pen and ink? 
9. Yes, madam ; I am buying a pen, ink, and paper. 10. Mary 

is buying an envelope and blotting paper. 11. We are writing 
a letter to a friend {fern.). 12. Do you (//.) write much? 

13. We write very little. 14. John writes with a pencil and 
Anthony writes with a pen. 15. We study much in-order-to 
learn to^ speak Spanish. 16. Mary studies much and learns well. 
17. Anthony studies little and learns badly. 18. We work a great 
deal in-order-to learn. 19. We learn much and we work much. 

1 Note that an inverted interrogation mark is. required in Spanish at the 
beginning of an interrogative sentence or clause. 2 Note that a Spanish 

name of a language, like a Spanish proper adjective, is written with a small 
initial letter. 3 Use a, see J 120 (i), a. 



LESSON II 



29. Plural of Nouns. — The plural of nouns is formed 
by adding s or es to the singular. 

(i) If the noun ends in an unstressed vowel or diphthong, 
s is added. 

amigo, friend. amigos, friends. 

rosa, rose. rosas, roses. \ 

labio, lip. labios, lips. 

especie, species, sg, especies, species,^/. 



LESSON II 



25 



(2) If the noun ends in a consonant or in a stressed vowel 
or diphthong, es is added.-^ 



flor, flower. 
mes, month. 
rubi, ruby. 
baja, pashaw. 
rey, king. 



flores, flowers. 
meses, months. 
rubies, rubies. 
bajaes, pashaws. 
reyes, kings. 



Exceptions : — 

a. Nouns ending in stressed -e add s to form the plural: pie, 'foot'; 
pies, *feet.' 

b. Nouns ending in unstressed -es or -is have the same form in the plural 
as in the singular : lunes, * Monday ' ; lunes, * Mondays ' ; but Ingles, * Eng- 
lishman'; Ingleses, * Englishmen ' ; crisis, * crisis'; crisis, * crises.' 
Family names, especially those ending in z, generally remain unchanged 
in the plural; e.g.^ Gonzalez, los Gonzalez. 

c. Some nouns ending in stressed or u take either -s or -es. Papa 
and mama add -s. There are a few other exceptions, which are best 
learned by observation. 

Note. — Final z is changed to c before es : cruz, * cross'; cruces, 
* crosses '; VOZ, * voice ' ; voces, * voices.' 

30. Definite Article. — In Spanish the definite article 
changes its form according to the gender and number 
of the noun it modifies. 





Singular 


Plural 


Masaclifte : 


el 


los 


Feminine : 


la (el) 


las 



el padre, the father. 
la madre, the mother. 
el plato, the plate. 
la taza, the cup. 



los padres, the fathers. 
las madres, the mothers. 
los platos, the plates. 
las tazas, the cups. 



1 In pluralizing, y final may be regarded as a consonant : it is really the last 
element of a stressed diphthong or triphthong, as in bocoy, ' hogshead,' and 
buey, ' ox.' 



26 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



a. When el is preceded by de, * of,' or by a, * to,' the preposition and 
the article are contracted into one word ; de and el become del, and a 
and el become al : del padre, ' of the father '; al padre, * to the father.' 

b. El is used instead of the form la before a feminine singular noun 
beginning with stressed a or ha : el agua, ' water ' ; el hacha, ' the axe.' 

Note. — Observe that el is not used before a feminine noun beginning 
with a or ha unless the first syllable is stressed, nor is it used before a 
feminine adjective : la hacienda, * the estate ' ; la alta casa, ' the high house.' 



negative 



by 



31. Negation. — A sentence is made 

placing no, *not,' before the verb. 

no hablo, I do not speak, or I am not speaking. 

no vendo flores, I do not sell flowers, or I am not selling flowers. 

32. The Enghsh auxihary * do,' which is usual in 
negative or interrogative constructions, is ordinarily not 
translated into Spanish. Compare hablas, ' you speak ' ; 
no hablas, ^ you do not speak ' ; ^hablas? ' do you speak 1 ' 
In past tenses, 'did' is similarly not expressed in Spanish. 



Vocabulary 
agua, /, water. 
aritmetica, /, arithmetic. 
beber, (to) drink. 
cafe, w., coffee. 
comer, (to) eat. 
con, with. 

desear, (to) desire, wish. 
ensenar, (to) teach. 
escuela,/, school. 
Espana,/, Spain. 
frances, -esa, French. 
geografia,/, geography. 
gramatica, /, grammar. 
huevo, w., ^gg. 
Inglaterra, /, England. 
leche,/, milk. 



libro, ;;/., book. 

llevar, (to) carry, take./ 

maestro, w., teacher. 

mantequilla,/, butter. _ 

manzana,/, apple. 

ni, nor. 

no, no, not. 

6, or. 

Pablo, m,, Paul. 

pan, ;;2., bread. 

pizarra,/, slate. y 

por, for, through':^ 

que, what {interrog.). 

tambien, also. 

te, in., tea. 

viajar, (to) travel. 



LESSON II 27 

Exercise II 

A, I. Compramos lapices y plumas. 2. ^lEscribis las 
cartas con las plumas 6 con los lapices? 3. Escribimos las 
cartas con pluma y tinta. 4. Juan y Maria compran libros 
para leer. 5. Leen los libros para aprender a leer. 6. Deseo 
aprender a hablar espafiol. 7. Deseamos viajar por Espaiia. 
8. Hablamos ingles y aprendemos a leer y a escribir en 
ingles. 9. En Espafia hablan espanol : en Inglaterra hablan 
ingles.- 10. Deseamos aprender a hablar espanol para viajar 
por Espaiia. 11. Llevo a la^ escuela libros, una pizarra^ y 
un lapiz. ±2. Leo en los libros. 13. Escribo en la pizarra 
con el lapiz. 14. Tambien llevamos a la escuela pan y 
mantequilla, huevos, y manzanas. 15. Comemos el pan, la 
mantequilla, los huevos, y las manzanas. 16. Bebemos agua 
6 leche : no bebemos cafe ni te. 17. ^Que estudiais en la^ 
escuela? 18. Estudiamos ingles, aritmetica, gramatica, y geo- 
grafia. 19. Pablo, ^inoestudias eP espai^ol? 20. Si, senor; 
el maestro enseiia eP espaiiol y eP frances. 21. Aprendo eP 
espanol, pero no aprendo eP frances. 22. Juan aprende tam- 
bien eP frances. 

B. I. Do you (^/.) wish to travel in Spain? 2. We wish to 
speak Spanish in-order-to travel through Spain. 3. A Spanish 
woman is learning to speak English. 4. She is learning to speak 
English in-order-to travel through England. 5. Do they speak 
English or Spanish in Spain? 6. They speak English in England 
and Spanish in Spain. 7. We take bread, butter, and apples to 
school.^ 8. We eat the bread, the butter, and the apples, and 
drilnk milk. 9. Paul and John take bread and eggs to school.^ 
ID. They eat the bread and the eggs, and drink water. 11. I 
drink milk. 12. We do not drink tea nor coffee. 13. Do 
you (//.) not take books to school?^ 14. Yes, sir; we take 
books, slates, and pencils. 15. Do you {pL) write letters at 
school? 2 16. No, sir; we do not write letters. 17. We read 
in the books in order to learn to^ read. 18. We write on the 



28 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

slates in order to learn to ^ write. 19. What do you {sing.) study 
at school?-^ 20. I study Spanish, grammar, arithmetic, and geog- 
raphy. 

1 Do not translate. 2 Use the definite article. For the article before the 
name of a language, cf. ^ 55 (4). ^ Use d. 



LESSON III 



33. Feminine of Adjectives. — Many Spanish adjec- 
tives change their form according as the noun they 
modify is mascuUne or feminine, singular or plural. 

(i) Adjectives ending in -0 in the masculine singular change 
-0 to -a to form the feminine. 

un caballo bianco, a white horse. una vaca blanca, a white cow. 

(2) But adjectives ending in a consonant or in a vowel other 
than -0 have the same form for the masculine and the feminine. 

un libro azul, a blue book. 

una casa azul, a blue house. 

un hombre cortes, a polite man. 

una mujer cortes, a polite woman. 

un muchacho inteligente, an intelligent boy. 

una muchacha inteligente, an intelligent girl. 

Exceptions : — 

a. Adjectives of nationality ending in a consonant add -a to form the 
feminine: ingles, inglesa, * English'; espanol, espanola, ' Spanish.' 

b. Adjectives ending in -an, -on, or -or (except comparatives in -or) add 
-a to form the feminine : holgazan, holgazana, * lazy '; burl6n, burlona, 
* roguish'; traidor, traidora, * treacherous.' 

Note that in Spanish a qualifying adjective usually follows its 
noun. 



LESSON III 



29 



34. Plural of Adjectives. — The plural of adjectives, 
like the plural of nouns, is formed by adding -s or -es to 
the singular. 

bianco, blancos, blanca, blancas, white. azules, blue. 

35. Radical-changing e and o Verbs.^ — Many verbs 
of the first and second conjugations, while otherwise 
regular, change the radical vowels e and to ie and ue 
respectively, whenever the stress falls on the stem. 
The following will serve as models of these verbs. 

Present Indicative. 

Temblar, (to) tremble 



Singular 








Plural 


I. tiemblo 






I. 


temblamos 


2. tiemblas 






2. 


temblais 


3. tiembla 

Singular 


Perder. 


, (to) lose 


3. 


tiemblan 

Plural 


1. pierdo 

2. pierdes 

3. pierde 

Singular 


Contar, 


(to) count 


I. 

2. 
3. 


perdemos 

perdeis 

pierden 

Plural 


I. cuento 






I. 


contamos 


2. cuentas 






2. 


contais 


3. cuenta 

Singular 


Volver, 


(to) return 


3- 


cuentan 

Plural 


I. vuelvo 






I. 


volvemos 


2. vuelves 






2. 


volv§is 


3. vuelve 






3. 


vuelven 



Note that e becomes ie and becomes ue only in the singular and the 
third person plural, since the stress falls on the inflectional endings of the 
first and second persons plural, and not on the stem. 

1 All verbs that make these phonetic changes will be found in the list of 
verbs, § 271. 



30 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



amarillo, -a, yellow. 

corregir,! (to) correct. 

correr, (to) run. 

cuando, when. 

Cuba,/, Cuba. 

Cubano, -a, m. a^id f., Cuban. 

deber, ought (to), should. 

demasiado, too, too much. 

dif icil, difficult. 

discipulo, -a, m. and f., pupil. 

ejercicio, w., exercise. 

encarnado, -a, (bright) red. 

error, w., mistake. 

escuchar, (to) listen. [States. 

Estados Unidos, 711. pL, United 

facil, easy. 

frio, m., cold. 

grande, large. 

hallar, (to) find. 



Vocabulary- 
Ingles, 



esa, 7?i. and f.. Englishman, 

Englishwoman. 
Juana,/, Jane. 
jugar,! (to) play. 
leccion, f,, lesson. 
Mejicano, -a, m. andf., Mexican. 
Mejico, 771., Mexico. 
negro, -a, black. , 
Norte-Americano, -a, w. and /, 

American, North-American. 
palabra,/, word. 
pequeno, -a, small. 
preferir,! (to) prefer. 
querer,2 (to) wish. 
rojo, -a, red. 

tanto, so much, as much. 
tiempo, w., time. 
verde, green. 
vivir, (to) live. 



Exercise III 

A, I. Tiemblo de {with) frio. 2. No estudio : pierdo 
el^ tiempo. 3. Deseo estudiar : no deseo perder eP tiempo. 
4. Cuento los libros, las plumas y los lapices. 5. Vivo en 
una casa blanca. 6. Juan y Maria viven en una casa ama- 
rilla. 7. Escribes mucho con el lapiz azul. 8. Juan 
escribe con tinta negra en papel bianco. 9. Los Espanoles, 
los Mejicanos, y los Cubanos hablan espanol. 10. Quiero 
aprender eP espanol para viajar por Espana, Mejico, y Cuba. 

11. I^os Ingleses y los Norte- Americanos^ hablan ingles. 

12. Los Espanoles, los Mejicanos, y los Cubanos aprenden el 

1 Radical-changing. 

2 Radical-changing in the present tenses, and also otherwise irregular in 
some other tenses. 



LESSON III 31 

ingles para viajar por Inglaterra y por los Estados Unidos. 
13. Los Ingleses y los Norte-Americanos viajan mucho, pero 
los Espanoles no viajan tanto. 14. Los discipulos de la 
escuela no quieren estudiar mucho. 15. Prefieren correr y 
jugar. 16. Corren y juegan^ mucho, pero trabajan poco. 

17. El discipulo no debe estudiar demasiado. 18. Debe 
correr y jugar, pero debe tambien estudiar. 19. El disci- 
pulo corre y juega mucho : la discipula corre y juega poco. 

20. Cuando no trabajo, juego ; y cuando no juego, trabajo. 

21. No quiero estudiar demasiado, ni jugar demasiado. 

22. Juana escribe con una pluma pequeiia, y Juan escribe con 
una pluma grande. 23. Estudia mucho, pero no aprende 
la leccion. 24. Cuando el maestro de espanol habla, escu- 
chamos para aprender las palabras. 25. Escribimos los 
ejercicios con tinta negra, pero el maestro corrige los errores 
con tinta encarnada (roja). 

B, I. I am buying a white horse and a black cow. 2. An 
intelligent boy learns to count. 3. I study a-great-deal, but 
John loses his ^ time. 4. I live in a w^hite house and John lives 
in a green house. 5. Are you trembling with the cold ? 6. I 
am not trembling with the cold. 7. I buy English books and 
Spanish books in-order-to read in English and Spanish. 8. Paul 
does not study Spanish ; •'' he studies French.^ 9. The teachers 
teach French^ and Spanish.^ 10. I prefer Spanish ^ to French.^ 
II. Do they speak French or Spanish in Cuba? 12. They speak 
Spanish in Cuba and Mexico. 13. The Cubans and the Mexi- 
cans do not speak English. 14. They wish to learn EngHsh ^ in 
order to travel through the United States. 15. The Americans 
wish to learn Spanish^ in order to travel through Cuba and Mexico. 
16. The pupils run and play too much, but they do not study too 
much. 17. The pupil {fe?n.) should not study too much. 

18. We nm and play and study a great deal, but not too much. 

19. The Spanish books are yellow, blue, or red. 20. Are you 
(sing.) writing the Spanish exercises?^ 21. Yes, sir; and I find 
the Spanish exercises very difficult. 22. I find the Spanish 



32 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



lessons very easy. 23. 
writes Spanish "^ well.'^ 



The. Spanish teacher speaks, reads, and 
24. He does not speak, read, and ^ write 



English well. 



1 Translate ' my.' 2 Do not translate. ^ In Spanish-America the people 
of the United States are usually called Norte- Americanos (" North Americans "). 
4 In jugar the u becomes ue when stressed. 5 Use the definite article. 
^ Say : ' the exercises in Spanish.' "> Translate : ' well the Spanish.' 8 Use 
nl (lit. ' nor'). 



LESSON IV 

36. Radical-changing Verbs. — Some verbs of the 
third conjugation change the radical e to ie or to i, and 
to ue, whenever the stress falls on the stem.^ The fol- 
lowing will serve as models of these verbs : — 

Present Indicative. 





Sentir, 


(to) 


feel 




Singular 








Plural 


1. siento 

2. sientes 

3. siente 








1. sentimos 

2. sentis 

3. sienten 




Pedir, (to) ask for 


Singular 








Plural 


1. pido 

2. pides 
3- Pide 








1. pedimos 

2. pedis 

3. piden 


Singular 


Dormir, 


(to) sleep 

Plural 


1. duermo 

2. duermes 

3. duerme 




• 




1. dormimos 

2. dormis 

3. duermen 




1 Cf. \\ 


. 229, 


230, 





LESSON IV 33 

37. The Irregular Verbs Tener and Haber. 
Indicative. Present Tense. 

Tener, (to) have 



Singular 








Plural 


I. tengo 








I. tenemos 


2. tienes 








2. tenets 


3. tiene 








3. tienen 




Haber, 


(to) 


have 




Singular 








Plural 


I. he 








I. hemos 


2. has 








2. habeis 


3. ha (hay) 








3. han 



38. Meaning and Use of Tener and Haber. 

(i) Tener means ' (to) have ' in the sense of ^ (to) possess * ; 
tengo una pluma, ' I have a pen.' It also retains its Latin 
sense of ' (to) hold.' 

(2) Haber is chiefly used as an auxiliary verb with past 
participles in the formation of compound tenses. Thus, the 
perfect tense of hablar is : 

' I have spoken,' or ' I have been speaking.' 

Singular Plural 

1. he hablado i. hemos hablado 

2. has hablado 2. habeis hablado 

3. ha hablado 3. han hablado 

a. Hay ^ means * there is,' or * there are'; hay uno, * there is one'; 

hay dos, ' there are two.' The form hay is used only as an impersonal 

, verb; ha, not hay, is used in the formation of compound tenses, as, 

ha habido, 'there has been,' and in temporal expressions, as mucho 

tiempo ha, ' there is much time,' i.e. Mong ago.' 

1 Composed of ha, ' it has,' and y, an old adverb meaning ' there.' Cf. 
French il y a. 



34 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



39. Participles. 

hablar : hablando, speaking, 

temer : temiendo, fearing, 

vivir : viviendo, living, 

tener: teniendo, having, 

haber : habiendo, having. 



hablado, spoken. 
temido, feared. 
vivido, lived. 
tenido, had. ^ 
habido, had. 



40. Idiomatic Expressions. 

(i) tengo que, I have to, or I must. 

tengo que estudiar mucho, I have to (or * I must ') study a great deal. 

he de, I am to, I shall.i 

ha de partir manana, he is to leave tomorrow. 
(2) tengo calor, I am warm. tengo cuidado, I am careful. 

tengo mucho calor, I am very tengo los ojos cansados, my eyes 



warm. 
tengo frio, I am cold. 
tengo hambre, I am hungry. 
tengo sed, I am thirsty. 
tengo sueiio, I am sleepy. 
tengo miedo, I am afraid. 
tengo prisa, 1 am in a hurry. 



are tired. 
tengo rota la pierna derecha, my 

right leg is broken. 
tengo diez anos, I am ten years 

old (lit., ' I have ten years '). 
^cuantos anos tienes? how old 

are you ? 



Note that these expressions refer to the physical or mental condition 
of a person or animal, not of inanimate objects; e.g. 'the water is hot,' 
el agua esta (from estar, ' to be ') caliente, and not el agua tiene calor. 



Vocabulary 



empezar,2 (to) begin. 
lengua,/, language. 
muchos, -as, many. 



todavla, still, yet. 
vender, (to) sell. 



Exercise IV 



A. I. Tengo papel bianco y tinta negra. 2. Tenemos 
plumas grandes y plumas pequeiias. 3. Tengo una lecci6n 
facil, pero tengo un ejercicio dificil. 4. i Habeis comprado 

1 Or, ' I hJk to,' not indicating external obligation. 2 Radical-changing. 



LESSON IV 35 

un libro espanol? 5. Si, senor ;^^^s comprado un libro 
espafiol y un libro ingles. 6. T^^o libros espanoles muy 
dificiles y libros ingleses muy faciles. 7. ^Hallas la lengua 
espanola muy dificil? 8. Para aprender a hablar espanol, 
he tenido que estudiar mucho. 9.- Hemos aprendido 

muchas palabras espanolas, pero no hablamos bien : hablamos 
muy mal. 10. Juan tiene un libro azul, y Maria tiene un 
libro amarillo. 11. Hemos comprado muchos libros, y 

tenemos libros azules, amarillos, rojos, verdes, y negros ; pero 
no tenemos libros blancos. 12. He vendido los libros 

ingleses, pero tengo todavia los libros espanoles. 13. (iHas 
escrito^ la carta con tinta negra 6 con tinta encarnada (roja)? 
14. He escrito la carta con tinta negra : no tengo tinta encar- 
nada (roja). 15. Cuando tengo suefio, no puedo^ estudiar 
mucho : quiero dormir. 16. Juan duerme mucho, y trabaja 
poco. 17. No puedo leer ni escribir cuando tengo los ojos 
cansados. 18. Maria ha leido mucho, pero no tiene los 
ojos cansados. 19. Antonio tiene diez afios, y no puede 
leer bien. 20. Tengo hambre y sed, y quiero comer y 
beber. No tengo calor : tengo mucho frio. 

^. I. I am cold, hungry, and thirsty. 2. I must eat and drink. 
3. When I have eaten, I am sleepy. 4. You are ten years old, 
and you cannot speak Spanish. 5. I must learn Spanish ^ in 
order to read Spanish books. 6. I have sold the English books, 
and I have bought Spanish books. 7. I have white paper and 
blue paper. 8. I have bought black ink and red ink. 9. I write 
on the white paper and on the blue paper with black ink. 10. The 
teacher must correct the mistakes with red ink. 11. We have 
found the English exercises very easy. 12. Do you (//.) find 
the Spanish lessons'* difficult? 13. When the teacher speaks 
Spanish, I listen in order to learn to speak well. 14. Have you 
(//.) written a Spanish letter^ to the Spaniard? 15. Yes; and 
we have written an English letter to the Englishwoman. 16. John 
writes with a large pen, but Mary writes with a small pen. 17. 



36 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

study, much ; but, when I am sleepy, I cannot study. i8. I do not 
eat a great deal ; but, when I am hungry, I wish to eat. 19. When 
I am thirsty, I drink water or milk ; I do not drink tea or ^ coffee. 

1 Escrito, past part, of escribir. 2 Poder, 'to be able,' 'can,' is irregular 
(cf. 5 243) . 3 Use def. art. ^ gay : ' lessons of Spanish.' & Say : ' letter 
in Spanish.' 6 Use ni. 



LESSON V 



41. Personal Subject-Pronouns. 

yo, I. nosotros (-as), we. 

tii, you. vosotros (-as), you. 

ella, she. ) „ ^ x 1 

el, he. ; ellos(-as),they. 

a. Note that nosotros, vosotros, and ellos have the feminine forms 
nosotras, vosotras, and ellas. 

b. El and ella also mean ' it ' when referring to things ; thus, speaking 
of arbol, ' it ' is el ; and speaking of casa, * it ' is ella. 

c. In Spanish, the subject-pronouns may usually be omitted. 

42. listed. — In familiar address, ^ you ' is tu (sing.), or 
vosotros (pi.) ; but in formal address, ^ you ' is usted (sing.), 
or ustedes (pi.), used with the third person singular or plural 
of the verb. Thus, in the singular, ^ you have ' is tii tienes, or 
usted tiene, and in the plural it is vosotros teneis, or ustedes 
tienen. Usted is usually not omitted, although with a series of 
verbs of address it occurs only at intervals. 

43. Possessive Adjectives. 

mi (mis), my. nuestro (-a, -os, -as), our. 

tu (tus), your. vuestro (-a, -os, -as), youi. 

su (sus), his, her, its, your. su (sus), their, your. 

a, * Your ' : tu corresponds to tu, vuestro to vosotros (-as), and su to 
usted or ustedes. 



LESSON V 37 

44. Demonstrative Adjectives. 

este (-a, -os, -as), this, these (near to or appertaining to the speaker 
or writer)^ this ... of mine, etc. 

ese (-a, -os, -as), that, those {near to or appertaining to the person 
addressed), that . . . of yours, etc. 

aquel (aquella, -os, -as), that, those (remote from the person ad- 
dressed)., that . . . of his, hers, etc., or that . . . over there. 

a. The possessive and demonstrative adjectives are usually repeated 
before each noun to which they refer. 

mi padre y mi madre, my father and mother. 
este hombre y esta mujer, this man and woman. 



alto, -a, high. 
ancho, -a, wide. 
bola,/, marble. 
cantar, (to) sing. 
dibujo, w., drawing. 
edificio, w., building, 
flor,/, flower. 
hablador, -ora, talkative. 
musica,/, music. 



Vocabulary 

nino, -a, w. and f.^ (small) boy, girl ; 
child. 

pelota, /, ball. 

piano, m.y piano. 

tio, -a, m. and f.^ uncle, aunt. 

tocar, (to) play (a musical instru- 
ment). 

tomar, (to) take. 

ventana,/, window. 

Exercise V 



A, I. Yo estudio, pero tii pierdes el tiempo. 2. Usted 
ciienta bien, pero yo cuento mal. 3. Juan y Maria hallan la 
lecci6n dificil. 4. EUos no estudian mucho. 5. Nosotros 
estudiamos mucho y hallamos la lecci6n facil. 6. Esta mu- 
chacha grande corre y juega mucho. 7. Ella no desea 
estudiar sus Hbros. 8. Pero la nina pequena estudia mucho 
y aprende bien. 9. Usted escribe sus cartas con tinta encar- 
nada. 10. Maria y yo escribimos nuestras cartas con tinta 

negra. 1 1 . Este hombre lee mucho y tiene los ojos cansados. 



38 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

12. Aquella mujer habladora habla mucho. 13. Este hom- 
bre inteligente habla poco. 14. Mi padre y mi madre ban 
vivido en Espana. 15. Ellos hablan espanol, ingles y 

frances. 16. Yo tomo lecciones de dibujo; tu tomas lec- 
ciones de musica. 17. 6I toca bien el piano, pero ella 

toca mal. 18. Este edificio tiene ventanas altas y anchas. 

19. Hay muchas flores en aquellas ventanas. 20. ^iQuieres 
tu tambien jugar a la pelota? 21. No; yo prefiero jugar a 
las bolas. 22. Mi padre y mis tios ban estudiado en esta 
escuela. 23. Esta mujer canta muy bien, pero aquella mujer 
canta mal. 

B. I. You (/<2;;^.,j-/;^^.^) run and play, but he studies. 2. You 
(^form.^ sing.) talk much, but she talks little. 3. You {fam.j pi.) 
study much, and we study little. 4. You {form.j pi.) count well, 
and they count badly. 5. This large man does not wish to play 
with that small boy. 6. This large woman plays with that small 
girl. 7. I lose my books, but you {fam., sing.) do not lose your 
books. 8. I write with black ink, but you {for77t. sing.) write 
with red ink. 9. We speak Spanish well, but you {fa7n.,pl.) 
speak badly. 10. We buy Spanish books, but you {for7n.^ pi.) 
buy French books. 1 1 . My father and mother are cold and hungry. 
12. When my father has eaten, he is sleepy. 13. When I am 
thirsty, I drink milk. 14. When you {fa7n.^ sing.) are thirsty, 
you drink water. 15. This boy plays much, but that boy plays 
little. 16. This book (of mine) is English ; that book (of yours) 
is French; and that book (of his) is Spanish. 17. We {7nasc.) 
play ball, and you {fe7n. pl.^ fa77i.) play the piano. 18. These 
boys prefer to play marbles. 19. He wishes to take drawing 
lessons, but she prefers to take music lessons. 

1 ' Familiar singular ' refers to the 2d pers. sing., with or without til ; ' familiar 
plural' to the 2d pers. pi, with or without vosotros {^-as) ; 'formal singular* to 
usted, and ' formal plural ' to ustedes. 



LESSON VI 39 



LESSON VI 

45. The Irregular Verbs Ser and Estar. 

(i) Indicative. Present Tense : 

Ser, (to) be 



Singular 






Plural 


I. soy 






I. somos 


2. eres 






2. sois 


3. es 

Singular 


Estar, (to) 


be 


3. son 

Plural 


1. estoy 

2. estas 






1. estamos 

2. estais 


3. esta 






3. estan 


2) Participles: 








ser : siendo, 


, being, 




sido, been. 


estar : estando, being, 




estado, been. 



46. Meaning of Ser and Estar. 

Ser and estar both mean ^ (to) be.' Ser expresses what is 
inherent or permanent ; estar, what is accidental or temporary. 

Ex. la taza es de oro, the cup is of gold. 
la taza esta limpia, the cup is clean, 
soy viejo y estoy enfermo, I am old and ill. 
es cojo, he is (permanently) lame. 
hoy esta cojo, he is lame today, 
soy libre, I am free (a free man) . 
ahora estoy libre, I am now free (disengaged) . 

a. Estar is also used to express position, whether temporary or per- 
manent : mi hermano esta en Mejico, * my brother is in Mexico '; Mejico 
esta en la America del Norte, * Mexico is in North America.' 

b. Ser alone permits of a predicate noutt Wiih. it: su hermano es 
soldado, * his brother is a soldier.' 



40 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



Some adjectives have one meaning when used with ser and another 



meaning when used with estar. 

ser bueno, (to) be good. 

ser malo, (to) be bad. 

ser cansado, (to) be tiresome. 

47. Idiomatic Expressions. 

(i) yo soy,i it is I. 

tu eres, it is you. 

§1 es, it is he. ") 

ella es, it is she. / 

usted es, it is you. 
(2) es lastima, it is a pity. 

es mentira, it is false. 

es verdad or es cierto, it is true. 



estar bueno, (to) be well. 
estar malo, (to) be ill. 
estar cansado, (to) be tired. 



nosotros (-as) somos, it is we. 
vosotros (-as) sois, it is you. 

ellos (-as) son, it is they. 

ustedes son, it is you. 
I no es verdad ? isn't it so ? 
esta bien, it is well, all right. 
i esta bueno ! good ! 



Vocabulary 



k causa de, on account of. 

activo, -a, active. 

alegre, merry, joyous. 

amable, kind, lovable. 

c6mo, how {interrog?), 

decidido, -a, decided, determined. 

dejar, (to) leave. 

d6nde, where {interrog^, 

fresco, -a, fresh. 

frio, -a, cold. 

fuerte, strong. 

gracias,///., thanks, thank you. 

haragan, -ana, lazy. 

hermano, -a, m, andf.^ brother, sister 

hijo, -a, m, and f.^ son, daughter. 

invalido, -a, disabled. 

invierno, m., winter. 

joven, young. 

Julio, 7n.^ Julius. 

1 Or, soy yo, 



llamar, (to) call. 

llegar, (to) arrive. 

otro, -a, other, another. 

pais, m,, country. 

perezoso, -a, idle. 

porque, because. 

preguntar, (to) ask. 

pregunt6n, -ona, inquisitive. 

puesto, m,y situation, position. 

que, that. 

qui§n, who (interrog.), 

regalo, m.^ present, gift. 

severo, -a, severe. 

si, if. 

siempre, always. 

soldado, m., soldier. 

triste, sad. 

viento, ;;?., wind. 

viudo, -a, m. and f.^ widower, widow. 

eres tii, etc. 



LESSON VI 41 

Exercise VI 

A. I. Los maestros de nuestra escuela son muy severos. 
2. Los discipulos de la escuela no son malos. 3. El maestro 
pregunta si tu estas enfermo. 4. Nosotros estudiamos 
mucho, pero vosotras sois muy perezosas. 5. El es viejo, 
y esta hoy muy triste. Ella es joven y esta alegre. 6. Este 
soldado es viejo y esta invalido. 7. Esta sefiora es viuda 
y esta enferma. 8. Este pan no esta fresco : es demasiado 
viejo. 9. Estoy decidido a dejar el puesto que tengo. 
10. Julio es muy fuerte y activo, y quiere jugar con los otros 
ninos. 11. Antonio es haragan, y dice^ siempre que esta 
cansado. 12. Esa nina es haragana, habladora, y pre- 
guntona. 13. ^C6mo^ esta usted? Estoy muy bien ; 
gracias. 14. ^iQuien^ es? Soy yo. ^Quien llama? Es ella. 
15. Tengo un regalo para su hijo, senora. Gracias ; es usted ^ 
muy amable. 16. ^iD6nde ha estado usted, seiior, este in- 
vierno? He estado en Madrid. 17. <iC6mo estan ustedes, 
senoras? Estamos buenas, senor. 18. Somos americanas, y 
en nuestro pais estamos siempre buenas. 19. Pero en Madrid 
hemos estado muy malas a causa del viento frio. 

B. I. Are you {sing., form.) sad today? 2. Yes, sir; I am 
sad because I am old. 3. He is old and (is) ill. 4. She is young 
and (is) well. 5. This water is very cold. 6. I am very cold and 
very hungry. 7. He is lazy, but he says that he is tired. 8. Are 
you {fern, sing., fain.) well today? No, I am ill. 9. How 
are your {pi., fain.) friends? They are very well, thank you. 
10. Who has arrived ? It ^ is my father. 11. Who is it*? It* is 
he. 12. We are English, but we are always ill in England. 

13. You {pi., form.) work much and play little, do you not?^ 

14. Those windows are high and wide. 15. This building is large 
and high. 16. I am a pupil {masc.) in ^ this school, and you {sing., 
fain.) are a pupil {fern.) in^ that school. 17. This teacher is 
very severe when I am bad. 18. Your {sing., fam.) brother 



42 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

has a gift for your sister. He is very kind. 19. My friend has 
been in Madrid this winter. 20. He has been very ill, but he is 
now well. 

1 dice, pres. ind. of decir, ' to say.' 2 Note that interrogative adverbs and 

interrogative pronouns take the accent mark. ^ in Spanish, the subject often 
follows its verb. 4 This ' it ' cannot be translated into Spanish. 5 Say : ' is 
it not so? ' 6 Use de. 



LESSON VII 



48. Possessive Case (Genitive). — Spanish nouns have 
only one form for the singular and one for the plural : 
they have no ending that corresponds to the English 's. 
Possession is denoted by the preposition de, ^ of.' 

el libro del hombre, the man's book (lit., ' the book of the man '). 
la hermana de Maria, Mary's sister (lit., ' the sister of Mary'). 

a. The English possessive case is sometimes elliptical for * the house, 
church, or shop of ' ; in Spanish the full construction occurs. 

estd en casa de mi tio, he is at my uncle's. 

voy k la iglesia de San Pablo, I am going to Saint Paul's. 

en la tienda de Garcia, at Garcia's. 

49. Indirect Object (Dative Case). — The indirect ob- 
ject is always expressed by a before the noun, without 
regard to its position. 

Maria di6 un libro a Pedro, Mary gave Peter a book, or Mary gave 
a book to Peter. 

a. In Spanish, verbs meaning to take fro77t or ask of are followed by 
the dative of the person. 

pido un favor a mi madre, I ask a favor of my mother. 
compre el caballo a mi primo, I bought the horse of my cousin, 



LESSON VII 43 

50. Personal d. — In Spanish the preposition a, 'to,' 
is often required before the direct object of a verb. It 
is so required whenever the object is a proper noun, or 
any noun or pronoun^ that denotes a specific person, 
higher animal, or personified thing. 

Ex. Pablo ama a Sofia, Paul loves Sophia. 

he visitado a Paris, I have visited Paris, 
llama a su hijo, he is calling his son. 

Compare the following : 

halle el libro, I found the book, 
halle al nino, I found the child, 
busco un hombre (not specific) que hable ^ espanol, I am looking for 

a man who speaks Spanish. 
conozco a un hombre que habla espanol, I know a man who speaks 

Spanish. 

a. The "personal a" is usually omitted after tener, *to have': tengo 
un padre y una madre, ' I have a father and a mother.' Observe also the 
following : 

querer, to wish. perder, to lose. 

querer a, to hke, to love. perder a, to ruin. 

b. The " personal a " is sometimes omitted when the verb governs an 
indirect object also : llevo el nino a su papa, ' I am taking the child to 
his father.' Also before a word beginning w^th the a sound : conozco 
aquel hombre, * I know that man.' 

c. The preposition a is sometimes placed before the direct object 
merely to distinguish the latter from the subject: a la guerra sigue la 
paz, * peace follows w^ar.' 

51. Interrogative Sentences. — In an interrogative 
sentence the subject, if expressed, usually follows the 

1 Except the personal pronouns me, te, etc., and the relative que. 

2 Present subjunctive. 



44 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



verb, and if a compound tense is used,, the subject 
usually follows the past participle. 

Ex. <; habla Juan? does John speak? is John speaking? 
I habl6 Pablo ? did Paul speak ? 
I ha vendido usted su caballo ? have you sold your horse ? 



Vocabulary 



barato, -a, cheap. 

biblioteca, /, library. 

casa,/, house; en casa, at home. 

ciudad,/, city. 

COCina,/, kitchen. 

COmedor, w., dining room. 

c6modo, -a, comfortable. 

contener,! (to) contain. 

cosa, /., thing. 

costoso, -a, costly, expensive. 

criado, -a, m. and f., servant. 

cuadro, w., picture. 

demas, others. 

estatua,/, statue. 

estudio, w., study. 

magnifico, -a, magnificent, splendid. 



molestia,/, trouble. 

muebles, m. pL, furniture, pieces-of- 

furniture. 
nuevo, -a, new. 
pasar, (to) pass. 
pedir,2 (to) ask (a favor, etc.). 
pensar,2 (to) think, intend. 
perd6n, w., pardon. 
piso, m., floor, story. 
primer (o), -a, first. 
rico, -a, rich. 
segundo, -a, second. 
Sevilla,/, Seville. 
sombrero, w., hat. 
todo, -a, all. 



Exercise VII 

A. I. Tienes tu libro? — No; tengo el libro de mi her- 
mano. 2. ^D6nde esta tu madre? — Esta en casa de mi tio. 
3. <:D6nde compra usted sus sombreros? 4. Compro mis 
sombreros en la tienda de Herrera. 5. El vende los som- 
breros muy baratos. 6. ^No pod^is hallar a vuestro padre? 
7. Si; hemos hallado a nuestro padre, pero no a nuestra 
madre. 8. He perdido todos mis libros. 9. Yo he ha- 
llado tus libros en la biblioteca. 10. ^Busca usted a sus her- 



1 Inflected like tener. 



2 Radical-changing. 



LESSON VII 45 

manos? ii. No; busco una pluma que he perdido. 

12. (jEsta Juan en casa? — No, senor; esta en casa de Pablo 
Martinez. 13. Pido a usted perdon por la molestia. 

14. Tengo en Sevilla un amigo muy rico. 15. Este amigo 
tiene una casa magnifica. .16. En su casa hay muchas 
cosas costosas. 17. Ha viajado mucho. 18. Siendo 

muy inteligente, ha comprado libros, muebles, cuadros y 
muchas estatuas. 19. La casa de mi amigo es grande y 
c6moda. 20. La biblioteca esta en el segundo piso. 21. El 
comedor y la cocina estan en el primer piso. 22. La biblio- 
teca contiene muchos hbros en ingles, espafiol y francos. 
23. Mi amigo prefiere los libros en espanol a todos los demas 
hbros. 

B. I. Have you {fam.ysing.) found your books? 2. Yes; 
I have found my books, but I can't ^ find my father. 3. Where 
do you buy your pens? 4. I buy my pens at Montejo's. 5. I 
buy my pens from my uncle John. 6. Where is your brother? 
7. He and my sister are at their aunt's. 8. Paul loves his 
brother and sister, but he does not love his books. 9. How is 
your (^form.^ sing.^ friend, sir? 10. He is very well. He is in 
this city, and he is buying many things. 11. Your friend is rich, 
is he not? 12. Yes; he has a costly house. 13. Being rich, 
he has travelled and has bought many pieces-of-furniture and books. 
14. He is an 2 American, and he intends to pass this winter in 
America. 15. He has splendid .pictures, it is true; but I prefer 
his statues. 16. He has books in many languages. 17. But 
he prefers the English and French books to all the others. 

18. His library is on the first floor; it is large and comfortable. 

19. Have you {fam., sing.) a servant that speaks^ Spanish? 

20. No, sir; I have a servant who speaks Enghsh. 21. John 
loves his father and his mother ; but he does not love his studies. 
22. Where is your {form., pi.) brother? He is at our uncle's. 

1 no puedo. 2 Omit. 3 \j^q hable (pres. subj.). 



46 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



52. Indicative. 
Hablar : 



LESSON VIII 
Imperfect and Preterite. 



IMPERFECT TENSE 





Singular 




Plural 


I. 


hablaba, I was speaking or used to speak. 


I. 


hablabamos 


2. 


hablabas 


2. 


hablabais 


3. 


hablaba 

PRETERITE TENSE 


3. 


hablaban 




Singular 




Plural 


I. 


hable, I spoke or did speak. 


I. 


hablamos 


2. 


hablaste 


2. 


hablasteis 


3- 


habl6 


3- 


hablaron 


Temer : 








IMPERFECT TENSE 








Singular 




Plural 


I. 


temia, I was fearing or used to fear. 


I. 


temiamos 


2. 


temias 


2. 


temiais 


3- 


temia 

PRETERITE TENSE 


3- 


temian 




Singular 




Plural 


I. 


temi, I feared or did fear. 


I. 


temimos 


2. 


temiste 


2. 


temisteis 


3. 


temi6 


3. 


temieron 


Vivir : 








IMPERFECT TENSE 








Singular 




Plural 


I. 


vivia, I was living or used to Hve. 


I. 


viviamos 


2. 


vivias 


2. 


viviais 


3- 


vivia 

PRETERITE TENSE 


3. 


Vivian 




Singular 




Plural 


I. 


Vivi, I lived or did live. 


I. 


vivimos 


2. 


viviste 


2. 


viviste is 


3. 


vivi6 


3. 


vivieron 


Note that the accent remains on the same vowel throughout the imper- 


fect tense; and that, in both tenses, the stress never 


falls 


on the stem. 



LESSON VIII 47 

53. Use of the Imperfect and Preterite Indicative. — 

The imperfect indicative is used (i) to tell what was 
happening when something else intervened, or (2) to 
represent a state or action as protracted or habitual. 
The preterite is used to tell what happened on one or 
more occasions in the past without involving duration 
or extension of time. 

llovia, y los caminos estaban malos, it was raining, and the roads 

were bad. 
el aSo pasado fumaba mucho, last year I used to smoke a great deal. 
no fume ayer, I did not smoke yesterday. 

vendi mi casa y compre otra, I sold my house and bought another. 
yo escribia cuando Juan entr6, I was writing when John entered. 
mi padre tenia dos hermosos perros, pero los vendi6, my father had 

two handsome dogs, but he sold them. 

a. Sometimes * I spoke,' * I did speak,' or ' I would speak,' mean * I 
used to speak.' They are then to be expressed in Spanish by the imper- 
fect : hablaba espanol todos los dias cuando estaba en Cuba, ' I spoke 
(* did speak,' * would speak,' or ' used to speak ') Spanish every day when 
I was in Cuba.' 

b. In Spanish the perfect indicative is sometimes used instead of the 
preterite to express an act that occurred recently: ayer he matado un 
lobo, * I killed a wolf yesterday'; ha partido anteayer, ' he left day before 
yesterday'; he creido que usted era f ranees, *I thought that you were 
French.' This construction is not so common in Spanish America as it is 
in Spain. 



Vocabulary 



aleman, -ana, German. 
avariento, -a, m. and f.^ miser. 
ayudar, (to) help. 
bicicleta, /, bicycle. 
calle,/, street. 
cinco, five. 
como, as. 



comiin, common; por lo comun, 

commonly, usually, 
cortar, (to) cut. 
cuarto, w., room. 
dia, V?., day; todos los dias, every 

day. 
dinero, m,^ money. 



48 SPANISH GRAMMAR 



encontrar,! (to) meet. 

favor, w., favor. 

idioma, w., language. 

Iadr6n, -ona, m. andf,, thief. 

lavar, (to) wash. 

lena, /, wood. 

partir, (to) depart ; trans. ^ to split. 

planchar, (to) iron. 

1 Radical-changing 



primo, -a, /;/. and f.^ cousin. 

profesor, -ora, m, and f.^ professor. 

prometer, (to) promise. 

remendar,! (to) mend, repair. 

ropa,/, clothes. 

tren, ;;/., train. 

varies, -as, several, various. 



Exercise VIII 

A, I. Juan escribia cuando yo entre en el cuarto. 
2. Ahora no fa mo, pero he fiimado mucho. 3. Cuando 
vivia en Cuba, fumaba demasiado. 4. Vend! mi bicicleta y 
compre otra al senor Martinez. 5. Ella leia un libro 
cuando llegue.^ 6. Por lo comun comia mucho, pero ayer 
no comi6 nada.^ 7. Mi padre llam6 al criado un ladr6n. 
8. Buscabamos un hombre que hablase ^ espanol. 9. Halla- 
mos a un hombre que hablaba aleman. 10. Buscamos un 
criado. 11. Ayer buscamos a un criado por toda la ciudad.^ 

12. Los ladrones mataron varios hombres, ^ino es verdad? 

13. Si, senor; mataron a dos hombres que iban^ a tomar el 
tren. 14. El profesor de idiomas ha llegado ayer. 
15. El hablo ayer con mi padre. 16. El profesor y yo 
hablabamos espanol todo el tiempo. 17. Estudiabamos las 
lecciones cuando tu llegaste. 18. Por lo comian, el avariento 
contaba todos los dias su dinero ; pero ayer no lo ^ cont6. 
19. Como pasabamos por la calle de Peregrinos, encontramos 
a nuestro tio. 20. Todos trabajaban : el padre cortaba y 
partia lena. 21. La madre remendaba la ropa. 22. Las 
hijas lavaban y planchaban. 

B, I. I was not working when you (^forni.j sing.) entered. 
2. When I lived in Mexico, I smoked every day. 3. I did not 
smoke yesterday. 4. I sold my French books, and bought Spanish 



LESSON IX 49 

books at Garcia's. 5. I bought the book from a Spaniard. 

6. When she entered (into) the room, I was writing a letter. 

7. Did you (^for^n., pi.) find your father? 8. Yes, we found 
our father and mother at our cousin^s. 9. I was looking for a 
friend who promised to help me. 10. He was looking all over 
town for the child. 11. He found many children ; but he did not 
find the child that he was looking for. 12. My father used to call 
me at six o'clock in the morning."^ 13. But yesterday he called 
me at five o'clock. 14. I was reading a Spanish book when my 
cousin arrived. 15. I spoke Spanish when I lived in Mexico, and 
I spoke English when I lived in England. 16. I used to smoke 
a great deal ; but I do not smoke now. 17. Did you (^fam.^ pi.) 
not have ^ expensive pieces-of-furniture ? 18. Yes; but we sold 
them^ to our rich friend. 19. Have you sold your house also? 
20. No, sir ; we have sold the furniture, but not the house. 21 . Did 
you (/br;//., sing.) buy your new hat at Garcia's? 22. No; I 
bought the hat of a friend. 23. John used to ask many favors of 
his teacher. 24. But today the teacher has asked a favor of John. 

1 Pret. oi llegar (see \ 214 (2)). 2 ■ anything.' 3 « spoke,' imp. subj. of 
hablar. ^ ' all over town.' ^ ' were going,' imp. ind. of ir. 6 • jt.' 

" a las seis de la man ana. ^ teniais. 9 los vendinios. 



LESSON IX 



54. Neuter Article io. — In addition to the forms of 
the definite article already given, there is another form, 
lo, which is required before the masculine form of an 
adjective, when the adjective is used substantively as 
the name of a color or as an abstract noun. This is 
generally called the neuter article, since it cannot be 
used with a masculine or a feminine noun. 

se ruboriz6 hasta lo bianco de los ojos, he colored to the white of his 

eyes. 
lo infinito y lo eterno, the infinite and the eternal. 



50 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

a. Note also the following idiomatic expressions : 

conocemos lo buenas que son ellas, we know how good they are. 
sabemos ^ lo mucho que nos quiere, we know how much he loves us. 

55. Use of the Definite Article. — The definite article 
is used oftener in Spanish than in Enghsh. It is re- 
quired in the following cases : 

(i) Before an abstract noun, or one used in a general sense 
to denote all of the thing or class it names. 

la ambici6n es peligrosa, ambition el hierro es util, iron is useful, 
is dangerous. ama las flores, he loves flowers. 

But, if ' some ' or ' any ' is expressed or understood before the 
English noun, the article is omitted in Spanish. 

no tiene ambici6n, he hasn't any ambition. 
compra hierro, he is buying (some) iron. 
compra flores, he is buying flowers. 

(2) Before a title, or a proper noun modified by a descrip- 
tive adjective. 

el senor Morales, Mr. Morales. la pequena Maria, little Mary. 

el general Martinez, General Martinez, el Asia rusa, Russian Asia. 

But in direct address the article is omitted, and seiior, seiiora, 
or senorita is usually prefixed to a title. 

buenos dias, senor general Martinez, good day, General Martinez. 

a. The article is never used before Don or Dona^: Don Antonio 
habla, ' Anthony is speaking.' 

1 Conocer means 'to know' in the sense of 'to be acquainted with/ *to 
realize ' ; saber is ' to know * in the sense of ' to be aware of,' ' to have learned 
by study.' 

2 Don and Dona are used only before the Christian or given name (nombre 
de bautismo) , as Dona Maria, 'Miss [or Mrs.) Mary.* One also meets with 
Senora Dona Maria, Senora Dona Maria Martinez, etc. 



LESSON IX 51 

b. The article is required before a noun used in apposition with a 
personal pronoun (expressed or understood) : nosotros los americanos 
creemos, or los americanos creemos, * we Americans believe.' 

(3) Before a word or expression of time that is modified. 
Ileg6 el martes de la semana pasada, he arrived (on) Tuesday of last 

week. 
la semana pr6xima, next week. 

(4) Before an adjective of nationahty used to denote a language. 

el ingles no es dificil, English is not difficult. 

I ensena usted el espanol ? do you teach Spanish ? 

But after hablar, *to speak' (sometimes after aprender), the 
article is usually omitted except before castellano.^ After en, 
* in/ the article is usually omitted. 

hablamos f ranees, we speak French ; en aleman, in German ; 
^^^^ I hablas el castellano ? do you speak Spanish ? 

(5) Usually before the unmodified names of countries and 
continents, except when the name is used with en, a, de, para, 
etc., to form an adjectival or adverbial phrase. 

la Inglaterra, England ; la Francia, France, etc. ; 

but, 

vivo en Espana, I live in Spain ; voy a Italia, I am going to Italy. 

a. The article is always required before the names of some countries 
and cities. 

el Brasil, Brazil. la China, China. 

el Canada, Canada. la Florida, Florida. 

el Ecuador, Ecuador. la Gran Bretana, Great Britain. 

el Jap6n, Japan. la Habana, Havana. 

el Paraguay, Paraguay. la Suiza, Switzerland, etc. 

el Peru, Peru. 

1 Several languages are spoken in Spain : Castilian (el castellano), Catalan 
(el Catalan), Galician (el gallego), etc.; but Castilian is the official language 
of Spain, and is therefore often called Spanish (el espanol) , although in most 
Spanish-speaking countries the name Castilian (el castellano) is considered 
more correct. 



52 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



(6) Usually before a noun denoting a bodily characteristic, 
when the object of tener, ' to have.' 

tiene el pelo negro, he has black hair. 
tengo los pies frios, my feet are cold. 

(7) The masculine article sometimes modifies an infinitive 
or a subject clause. 

el comer demasiado es malo, it is bad to eat too much. 
no puede ser mera casualidad el que sean todas bonitas, it cannot be 
mere chance that they are all pretty. 

(8) The definite article is sometimes used instead of a pos- 
sessive (see § 119), as in 

he perdido el sombrero, I have lost my hat. 



Vocabulary 



agradable, pleasing, agreeable. 

agradar, (to) please. 

alguno, -a, some. 

bello, -a, beautiful. 

brazo, ;;?., arm. 

creer, (to) believe. 

dedo, w., finger. 

deleitar, (to) delight. 

desgracia, /, misfortune. 

familia,/, family. 

felicidad, /, happiness. 

feo, -a, ugly. 

fuego, 7n., fire. 

guantes, m. pL, gloves. 

guerra,/, war. 

izquierdo, -a, left. 

juez, m., judge. 

lirio, m., lily. 

lunes, w., Monday. 



mano,/, hand. 

manana, tomorrow. 

mundo, w., world; todo el mundo, 

everybody. 
odiar, (to) hate. 
oro, m,, gold. 
paz,/, peace. 
pobre, poor. 
presente, present. 
probar,! (to) prove, test, 
salud,/, health. 
saludable, healthful. 
sano, -a, healthy. 
uno, -a, one. 
una,/, finger-nail. 
vano, -a, vain. 

vecino, -a, m. and f., neighbor, 
visitar, (to) visit. 
ya, already. 



1 Radical-changing verb. 



LESSON IX 53 

Exercise IX 

A, I. El senor Martinez ensenaba el castellano y el francos. 
2. Hablaba el castellano, pero no hablaba frances. 3. El 
castellano es facil, pero el aleman es dificil. 4. Puedo es- 
cribir cartas en espanol (castellano), pero no en aleman. 
5. He vivido en Inglaterra y en Francia, pero no he vivido en 
el Canada. 6. Visits a Cuba, pero no a la Habana. 

7. Los Cubanos y los Mejicanos hablan el castellano. 

8. Los Norte-Americanos y los Ingleses hablan ingles. 

9. El frances es el idioma de Francia. 10. Cuando uno 
sabe ya algunas lenguas, no es dificil aprender el castellano. 

11. Amo la paz, y odio la guerra. Dejame^ en paz. 

12. El fuego prueba el oro ; la desgracia prueba al hombre 
y a los amigos. 13. La paz y la salud, y no el dinero, con- 
stituyen^ la felicidad de la familia. 14. Tengo las manos y 
los pies frios. 15. El pobre muchacho se ha caido," y tiene 
roto el brazo izquierdo. 16. El discipulo tiene que escribir 
dos ejercicios en frances para mafiana, y ya tiene los ojos can- 
sados. 17. El senor Siguerroa ha perdido el sombrero. 
18. En lo pasado estudiaba poco : en lo presente estudio 
mucho. 19. Lo bueno agrada : lo bello deleita. 20. Pre- 
fiero lo bueno a lo malo, lo bello a lo feo. 21. Odiaban lo 
malo, y amaban lo bueno. 22. Todo el mundo deja lo util, 
y busca lo vano. 

B. I. Have you lived in Cuba? 2. Yes ; I have lived in 
Cuba, but not in Havana. 3. In England and in Canada they 
speak English. 4. In Mexico and in Peru they speak Spanish. 
5. Spanish is an easy language, but German is difficult. 6. Mr. 
Herrera and his daughter Jane speak English and Spanish. 

7. When I Uved at Mr. Herrera's, I spoke Spanish every day. 

8. Mr. Herrera departed for* Spain last Tuesday. 9. His son 
and daughter are in France. 10. Mr. Herrera does not speak 
French. 11. Women love flowers. This little girl sells flowers. 



54 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

12. He prefers what is beautiful and agreeable^ to what is good and 
useful. 13. The North Americans desired ^ peace, and not war. 

14. They desired to live in peace with their neighbors. 15. The 
judge feared wickedness"^ and loved goodness. 16. Lilies are 
beautiful flowers. 17. Little Paul is the son of Mrs. Morales. 
18. He arrived last Tuesday, and leaves next Monday. 19. He 
has found his hat; but he has not found his gloves. 20. My 
finger is broken, ^ and I have lost the finger-nail. 21. Do you 
{fa/n., sijtg.) not drink tea or^ coffee ? 22. No; I drink water. 

1 'leave me.' 2 Pres. Ind. of constituir, *to constitute.' 3 «has fallen. 
^ pa7'a. 5 Say : 'the beautiful and the agreeable.' 6 Use Imp. Ind. 

''Say: 'The wicked (= bad) and the good.' 8 gay : 'I have the finger 

broken.' 9 ni. 



LESSON X 



56. Omission of the Definite Article. — The definite 
article is omitted in Spanish, although required in 
English. 

(i) Usually before a noun in apposition. 
Washington, capital de los Estados Unidos, Washington, the capital 
of the United States. 

(2) Before a numeral modifying a title. 

Carlos quinto, Charles the Fifth. 
Luis diez y seis, Louis the Sixteenth. 

57. Omission of the Indefinite Article. — The indefi- 
nite article is used less often in Spanish than in Eng- 
lish : it is regularly omitted before an unmodified noun 
in the predicate used like an adjective to denote nation- 
ality, occupation, rank, etc. 

es americano, he is an American, es sastre, he is a tailor, 
es general, he is a general. 



LESSON X 



55 



It is also usually omitted, 

a. Before a noun in apposition : Sevilla, ciudad en Andalucia, ' Se- 
ville, a city in Andalusia.' 

b. Before otro, 'another' ; cierto, 'a certain'; ciento, *a hundred'; 
mil, * a thousand '; after tal, ' such a,' etc. 

c. Note also such expressions as the following : dos pesos la botella, 
*two dollars a bottle '; tres veces al dia, 'three times a day'; mil pesos 
por ano, ' a thousand dollars a (d?r per) year.' 

58. Radical-changing Verbs. — The radical-changing 
e and o verbs of the third conjugation change the 
radical vowels e and o to i and u respectively in the 
third person singular and plural of the preterite. 







PRETERITE 








Singular 


Sentir 




Plural 


I. 


senti 




I. 


sentimos 


2. 


sentiste 




2. 


sentisteis 


3- 


sinti6 

Singular 


Pedir 


3- 


sintieron 

Plural 


I. 

2. 

3- 


pedi 

pediste 

pidi6 

Singular 


Dormir 


I. 

2. 

3- 


pedimos 
pedisteis 
pidieron 

Plural 


I. 


dormi 




I. 


dormimos 


2. 


dormiste 


•^ 


2. 


dormisteis 


3- 


durmi6 




3- 


durmieron 



It should be noted that the radical-changing e and verbs of the first 
and second conjugations are regular in the preterite. 

59. Idiomatic Expressions. 

buenos dias, good morning, or good day. 
. buenas tardes, good afternoon, oi- good evening (until dark). 
buenas noches, good evening (after dark), or good night. 



56 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



hasta manana, farewell until tomorrow. 
hasta luego, farewell for a while. 
adi6s, good-by. 



Vocabulary 



abrigo, m,^ wrap, overcoat. 

anoche, last night. 

bobo, -a, m. and f.^ fool. 

cerveza,/, beer. 

cielo, m., sky, heaven. 

coger, (to) catch. 

comerciante, w., merchant. 

enfermedad, /, illness. 

esperar, (to) hope. 

espOSO, -a, m. and f., husband, wife. 

ganar dinero, (to) make money. 

gastar, (to) spend. 

grave, serious. 

guardar cama, (to) stay in bed. 



intenci6n, /., intention. 

1 Inflected like tener. 2 Radical-changing verb. 



mandar, (to) send. 

mantener, 1 (to) support. 

medicamento, m,, drug, medicine, 

medico, m., physician. 

mentir, 2 (to) lie. 

miedo, ;//., fear. 

pagar, (to) pay. 

resfriado, m., cold. 

salir,^ (to) go out. 

saludable, healthful. 

sanar, Tto) cure. 

sano, -a, healthy. 

soldado, in., soldier. 

tres, three. 

vino, m., wine. 



3 Irregular." 



Exercise X 

A, I. He vivido en Toledo, ciudad de Espaiia. 2. Pero 
no he vivido en Madrid, capital del pais. 3. Compr6 el 
vino al seiior Martinez. 4. Pague tres pesos la botella por 
el vino. 5. El es francos, pero vive en los Estados Unidos. 

6. El sefior Gonzalez es sastre, y su hermano es comerciante. 

7. Don Juan Siguerroa habla bien ingles y francos. 8. Juana 
pidi6 un favor a su madre. 9. Anoche dormi en el cuarto 
de mi hermano. 10. <iEs hombre 6 mujer? — Es hombre, 
y es un hombre inteligente. 11. ^Es bobo? — Si, senor ; es 
un bobo.^ 12. ^Erespobre? — Si, sefior; soy una pobre. 
13. El hombre debe beber agua, leche, cafe 6 te, y no vino 
ni cerveza. 14. El niiio debe beber agua 6 leche. 15. Me 



LESSON X 57 

puse^ el abrigo, el sombrero y los guantes, y sail a la calle. 
.t6. Buenos dias, senor General; ^icomo esta usted hoy? 
17. Buenos dias, Don Luis, (Jes usted? Estoy bueno. 18. Y 
la senora L6pez esta buena tambien, ^ no es verdad ? 19. No ; 
esta enferma : la semana pasada cogio un resfriado, y ahora 
tiene que guardar cama. 20. Es lastima. Yo tenia siempre 
la intenci6n de visitar a la buena senora. 21. Oh, no hay 
miedo. La enfermedad no es grave. 22. Con los medica- 
mentos esperamos sanar a la enferma. 23. El hermano de la 
senora L6pez es medico, y ha mandado buenos medicamentos. 

B. I. Did you sleep well last night? No; I slept badly. 
2. Did you (form., sing.) ask a favor of little Paul ? 3. No ; I 
asked several favors of his father. 4. Last year we lived in To- 
ronto, a city in Canada. 5. Our cousin was living in Havana, a 
city in Cuba, when he died. 6. My brother is a physician. 
7. My father and my uncles are merchants. 8. Did you (form., 
pi.) pay two or three dollars a bottle for the wine ? 9. I bought 
the wine of my uncle. 10. I paid three dollars a bottle for the 
wine. 1 1 . This gentleman is a Spaniard. He lives in Barcelona, 
a city in Spain. 12. That man is a merchant. He makes a 
great deal of money, but spends Httle. He is a regular miser. 
13. Medicines are good for the sick. 14. We love the blue (color) 
of the heavens. 15. Mr. Garcia died last year. His wife is a 
poor woman,^ and works hard* to ^ support her family. 16. Last 
week my father slept well; but last night he did not sleep much. 
17. I believe that water and milk are healthful, and that tea and 
coffee are not healthful. I wish to be healthy. 18. Do you 
{fonn.^ sing.) believe that Mr. Men^ndez lied? No, sir; he did 
not He. 19. Good evening, Mrs. Lopez. How are you (/^r;//.)? 
20. Oh, is that you {fa^n.), Mary? I am not very well. I caught 
a cold last Tuesday. 21. That's a pity. My brother is also ill. 
22. His illness is serious, and he has to stay in bed. 23. He is 
a physician, is he not? No; he is a judge. 24. We visited my 
mother yesterday. She has been ill, but is now well. 

1 Translate ; ' he is a regular fool.' 2 < j put on.' ^ Qmit. 4 mucho^ 

^ para. 



58 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

LESSON XI 

60. Position of Descriptive Adjectives.^ — In English 
a descriptive adjective used with a noun nearly always 
precedes it; in Spanish a descriptive adjective com- 
monly follows its noun. 

un muchacho fuerte, a strong boy. agua fria, cold water. 

una muchacha cubana, a Cuban girl. ojos azules, blue eyes. 

61. Most Spanish descriptive adjectives, however, may pre- 
cede their noun, if the quality named by the adjective is charac- 
teristic of the noun, or if the language is poetic or figurative. 

la Santa Biblia, the Holy Bible. la blanca nieve, the white snow. 
el ronco trueno, the hoarse thunder. 

a. Many adjectives may usually be placed either before or after their 
noun, although an adjective is more literal and distinctive when it follows : 
bueno, 'good'; malo, 'bad'; bonito or lindo, 'pretty'; hermoso, 'beau- 
tiful' or ' handsome '; pequeno, ' small'; viejo, ' old,' etc. 

una pequena nina or una nina pequena, a little girl. 

un hermoso caballo or un caballo hermoso, a handsome horse. 

b. The position of the adjective is sometimes determined by euphony, 
or the necessity of avoiding ambiguity; and an adjective which ordinarily 
follows its noun may stand before a noun modified by an adjective phrase. 

cuatro magnificos caballos blancos, four splendid white horses. 
los escasos honorarios del gobierno, the inadequate salaries of the gov- 
ernment. 
un patri6tico libro de lectura cubano, a patriotic Cuban reader. 

c. A few adjectives have one meaning before, and another after, their noun. 

un grande amigo, a great friend. diferentes personas, different 
una manzana grande, a large apple. (= several) persons. 

el pobre hombre, the poor man (an vestidos diferentes, different 
object of pity), (= dissimilar) costumes, 

1 Or " qualifying" adjectives. 



LESSON XI 59 

un hombre pobre, a poor (poverty- un nuevo libro, another {or a 
stricken) man. different) book. 

mi cara madre, my dear mother. un libro nuevo, a new book 

una silla cara, a dear (expensive) (fresh from the press.) 

chairo varios hombres, several men. 

cierta epoca, a certain period. papeles varios, miscellaneous pa- 

noticia cierta, authentic news. pers; etc. 

d. When the adjective precedes, it is usually repeated before each 
noun to which it refers. 

mi viejo padre y mi vieja madre, my old father and mother. 

e. An English noun used as an adjective is usually expressed in 
Spanish by a noun preceded by de (or para). 

un reloj de oro, a gold watch. 

una estatua de marmol, a marble statue. 

un vaso para vino, a wineglass (un vaso de vino is a glass of wine) . 

62. Agreement of Adjectives. 

(i) If an adjective modifies several singular nouns, the plural 
form of the adjective is used. 

el padre y el hijo son buenos, the father and the son are good. 

la madre y la hija son buenas^ the mother and the daughter are good. 

(2) If some of the nouns are mascuHne and some are femi- 
nine, the adjective is usually in the mascuhne plural. 

el padre y la madre son buenos, the father and the mother are good. 
la plata y el oro americanos, American silver and gold. 

a. If the nouns denote inanimate things, and the noun nearest the 
adjective is feminine plural, the adjective takes the feminine plural form. 

el escritorio y las sillas estaban rotas, the desk and chairs were broken; 

su sombrero y sus botas son viejas, his hat and boots are old; 

but, 

mi coraz6n y mi alma son suyos, my heart and my soul are his. 

b. Sometimes a plural noun is modified by several singular adjectives. 
This occurs when each adjective modifies only one of the individuals 



6o 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



denoted by the noun : las lenguas inglesa y castellana, * the English 

and Spanish languages.' 

c. An adjective usually agrees in gender and number with the nearest 
noun if the nouns are disconnected : muestra un valor, una capacidad 
un talento extraordinario, *he displays extraordinary courage, ability, 
talent.' 

d. When an attributive adjective precedes its noun, it is repeated before 
each noun if the nouns denote distinct persons or things ; if the nouns 
denote collectively a state or action, a group of persons or things, or desig- 
nate the same person or thing, the adjective is not repeated, and agrees 
with the nearest noun. 

la madre y la hija, the mother and (the) daughter. 
el cuchillo y el tenedor, the knife and fork. 
una bella casa y un bello jardin, a beautiful house and garden. 
su extremado talento y habilidad, his unusual talent and skill. 
todos los maestros y discipulos, all the teachers and pupils. 
el pie y pierna de los animales se llaman * pata,' the foot and lower 
part of the leg of animals are called ' pata.' 

e. In Spanish a predicate adjective is often used where an adverb is 
used in EngUsh : parti6 alegre, ' he departed joyfully.' 



Vocabulary 



Alejandro, w., Alexander. 

aqui, here. 

aunque, although. 

billete, m,, ticket; billete directo, 

through ticket. 
cinco, five. 
costar,! (to) cost. 
cuchara,/, spoon. 
cucharita,/, teaspoon. 
cuchillo, w., knife. 
despacho, m., office. 
estaci6n, /, station. 
industrioso, -a, industrious. 

1 Radical-changing verb. 

2 Irregular verb : cf. ^ 247. 



instante, ;«., instant; al instante, 

at once. 
ir,2 (to) go. 
mesa,/, table. 
milla,/, mile. 
pertenecer,^ (to) belong. 
plata,/, silver. 
porque, because. 
porque, why {interrog?), 
primo, -a, m. and f., cousin, 
sopa,/, soup. 
taza,/, cup. 
tenedor, w., fork. 

3 Verb with inceptive endings : cf. \ 2.2.0. 



LESSON XI 6 1 



Exercise XI 



A, I. iQu^ compraste? — Compre un reloj de plata. 
2. ^ Porque no compraste un reloj de oro? 3. Porque 
los reloj es de oro cuestan mucho. 4. Quiero una cucha- 
rita : no quiero una cuchara para sopa. 5. Traigame ^ usted 
un vaso de agua. 6. ^iNo quiere usted una taza de caf^? 
7. Si ; traigame una taza de caf^ con leche. 8. Traigame 
tambien un cuchillo de mesa y un tenedor. 9. El viejo 
soldado tiene mucha hambre y mucha sed. 10. Leo todos 
los dias en la Santa Biblia. 11. La casa blanca pertenece d 
Don Alejandro. 12. La blanca nieve es muy linda. 13. El 
senor Morales compr6 dos magnificos caballos negros. 14. Sus 
nuevos caballos son muy hermosos. 15. Mi vieja tia vivia 
en aquella casa verde. 16. Ahora vive en la casa amarilla. 
17. La muchacha alemana tiene ojos azules. 18. La mucha- 
cha espanola tiene ojos negros. 19. El pobre hombre esta 
muy enfermo y tiene que guardar cama. 20. Este mucha- 
cho italiano es muy pobre, pero es industrioso y quiere trabajar. 
21. Compramos una mesa grande para la cocina. 22. El 
senor Martinez es un grande amigo de nuestra familia. 
23. Mi primo tiene que ir a Malaga, y teniendo prisa quiere 
partir al instante. 24. Hay tres millas de aqui a la estaci6n 
donde toma el tren. 25. Aunque tiene hambre, no quiere 
comer antes de llegar^ a Malaga. 26. Ayer compr6 un 
billete directo en el despacho de billetes. 

B. I. Bring me a soup spoon and a table knife. 2. Bring me 
also a cup of black coffee and a teaspoon. 3. Tea cups are large, 
but coffee cups are small. 4. I sold my silver watch and bought a 
gold watch. 5. Bring me a wine glass. I wish a glass of wine. 
6. Bring me a coffee cup. I wish a cup of coffee with milk. 7. The 
white house is covered with^ the white snow. 8. Bring me the 
black ink and the blue paper. 9. Bring me also a small pen and 
blotting paper. 10. When I am hungry I eat a large apple and 



62 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



take a glass of milk. ii. The little Mexican girl has black 
eyes. 12. I wish to buy four handsome black horses. 13. Hand- 
some black horses are dear. 14. This white house is ugly. The 
white snow is beautiful. 15. The other day we bought two 
splendid black horses. 16. He is a great man; but he does not 
live in a large house. 17. -^-^aLd-^fty-si^rer^wa^teh-att d -bought a ■ 

goW'^iv'atefe. 18. She got^ a coffee cup and took a cup of coffee. 

19. Have your cousins bought through tickets for^ Malaga? 

20. Yes ; they were taking the train when we arrived at the station. 

21. Being in a hurry, we passed through Peregrinos Street. 

22. The station is in that street. 

1 ' bring me.' 2 • before arriving.' s ^std cubierta de. ^ fue a buscar 



(lit., •' went to look for '). 5 



para. 



LESSON xn 



63. Indicative. Imperfect and Preterite. 




Tener : 

IMPERFECT TENSE 






Singular 




Plural 


I. tenia, I was having, or used to have. 


I. 


teniamos 


2. tenias 


2. 


teniais 


3. tenia 

PRETERITE TENSE 


3. 


tenian 


Singular 




Plural 


I. tuve, I had, or did have. 


I. 


tuvimos 


2. tuviste 


2. 


tuvisteis 


3. tuvo 


3. 


tuvieron 


Haber : 

IMPERFECT TENSE 






Singular 




Plural 


I. habia, I had. 


I. 


habiamos 


2. habias 


2. 


habiais 


3. habk 


3- 


habian 





LESSON 


XII 






Singular 


PRETERITE 


TENSE 




Plural 


I. hube, I had. 






I. 


hubimos 


2. hubiste 






2. 


hubisteis 


3. hubo 






3. 


hubieron 


Ser: 

Singular 


IMPERFECT 


TENSE 




Plural 


I. era, I was, or 


used to be. 




I. 


eramos 


2. eras 






2. 


erais 


3. era 

Singular 


PRETERITE 


TENSE 


3. 


eran 

Plural 


I. ful, I was. 






I. 


fuimos 


2. fuiste 






2. 


fuisteis 


3. fue 






3. 


fueron 


Estar : 










Singular 


IMPERFECT 


TENSE 




Plural 


I. estaba, I was, 


or used to be. 




I. 


estabamos 


2. estabas 






2. 


estabais 


3. estaba 

Singular 


PRETERITE 


TENSE 


3. 


estaban 
Plural 


I. estuve, I was. 






I. 


estuvimos 


2. estuviste 






2. 


estuvisteis 


3. estuvo 






3. 


estuvieron 



63 



64. The Pluperfect and Preterite Perfect. 

(i) The pluperfect tense is formed with the imperfect tense 
of haber. 



Hablar : 



PLUPERFECT TENSE 



I. habiahablado,|^^^^^P^^'^^'^^ 
C had been spea 



I. 



habiamos hablado 



2. habias hablado 

3. habia habladp 



speaking. 



2. habiais hablado 

3. habian hablado 



64 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



(2) The Preterite Perfect is formed with the preterite of 
haber : hube hablado, ^ I had spoken/ etc. This tense is used 
only after expressions meaning ^ as soon as/ * after/ etc. In 
colloquial Spanish the preterite usually replaces the preterite 
perfect. 

luego que hube leido {or luego que lei) la carta, la devolvi, as soon as 
I had read the letter, I returned it. 

Note also the following idiom : 

llegado que hubo a la costa, as soon as he had arrived at the coast ; 
terminado que hubo su discurso, as soon as he had finished his speech; etc. 

a. Habia also means * there was,' * there were,' or * there used to be ' ; 
hubo, * there was ' or * there were ' ; habia (hubo) habido, * there had 
been.' 



65. Idiomatic Expressions. 

(i) hace^ calor, it is warm. 

hace mucho calor, it is very 
warm. 

(2) hay sol (or hace sol), it is 

sunny; the sun is shining. 
hay luna, the moon is shining. 



hace frio, it is cold. 
hace fresco, it is cool. 
hace viento, it is windy. 

hay neblina, it is foggy. 
hay polvo, it is dusty. 
hay lodo, it is muddy. 



Note that these expressions have to do with the state of the weather. 



Vocabulary 



asesinar, (to) assassinate. 

haul, w., trunk. 

bien de salud, in good health. 

Bruto, m., Brutus. 

buz6n, ?;?., letter box. 

carb6n, w., coal. 

ciego, -a, bhnd. 

c6mplice, m. andf.^ accomplice. 



descansar, (to) rest. 

diez, ten. 

echar, (to) throw, put. 

falta,/, lack, scarcity. 

feliz, happy. 

Godo, -a, m, and f., Goth. 

hierro, m,^ iron. 

huelga,/, strike. 



1 hace is Pres. Ind., 3d. sing., of the irregular verb hacer, ' to make ' : of. § 246. 



LESSON XII 65 

joven, m. and f., young man, young redondo, -a, round. 

regalar, (to) present, give. 



woman. 
junto, -a, together. 
luna,/, moon. 
llover,^ (to) rain. 
maleta, /, travelling-bag. 
nevar,^ (to) snow. 
ni . . . ni, neither . . . nor. 
ocupado, -a, busy. 



Romano, -a, m. and f.^ Roman. 

salida, /, rising. 

salir,2 (to) go out. 

sol, w., sun. 

sordo, -a, deaf. 

tierra,/., earth. 

tomo, m.^ volume. 



1 Radical-changing verb. 2 irregular verb : cf. § 252. 

Exercise XII 

A, I. El sol es redondo, y la tierra y la luna son tambi^n 
redondas. 2. Este nino es industrioso, pero no es cortes : 
aquella nifia es industriosa y cortes. 3. El esta enfermo y 
triste : ella no esta ni enferma ni triste. 4. Los jovenes 

partieron alegres. Ahora viven felices. 5. Los Godos y los 
Romanos vivieron juntos en Espana. 6. Su padre era viejo, 
y su madre era ciega y sorda. 7. Ella era siempre buena 

con (or, para con) los pobres. 8. Cuando Maria estaba en- 
ferma, le ^ regalaban muchas flores. 9. Siempre era usted 
mi amiga, Sefiora. 10. ^jQuien lleg6 en el tren? — Era la 
senora (la esposa) de Don Alejandro. 11. Julio Cesar fu6 
asesinado por Bruto y sus c6mplices. 12. Estuve diez anos 
en Madrid, y estaba bien de salud. 13. Eran las cinco de 
la manana cuando el tren lleg6. 14. Creo que es rico. 

Creia que era rico. 15. Ya habia leido yo la carta, cuando 
lleg6 mi hermano. 16. Luego que hubo escrito las cartas, 
las^ ech6 al buz6n. 17. Teniamos mucho frio a causa de 
la huelga y la falta de carb6n. 18. Hace frio ; el nino tiene 
frio ; el agua esta fria. 19. Hace calor ; el nino tiene calor ; 
el agua esta caliente. 20. En el invierno, cuando hace 
mucho frio, no hay lodo. 21. A la salida del sol hay mucha 
neblina. 



66 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

B, I. The sun is shining and it is warm. 2. The wind is 
blowing and it is snowing. 3. Bring me a large glass of water. 
I am very thirsty. 4. Bring me also some apples. I am hungry. 
5. This man and this woman are tired and wish to rest. 6. Gold 
and silver are more costly than^ iron. 7. The trunks and the 
travelling-bags were (/////. Iiid.^ broken. 8. We have read the 
first and second volumes. * 9. They {fe/n.) lived happily ^ in 
Madrid for many years. ^ 10. John and his sister Mary were very ill. 
When they were ill, they did not go out on"^ the street. 11. It 
was six o'clock in the morning when my father called me. 12. The 
mother had been so ^ busy that ^ she had not had time to ^^ mend 
the clothes. 13. ,As soon as the father had cut and split the 
wood, he brought it ^^ into the house. 14. In Colorado it is warm 
in winter when the sun shines. . 15. When the sun is not shining 
and the wind is blowing, it is very cold. 16. It is usually warm 
when it is raining or when it is foggy. 17. It is so^^ windy and 
so ^2 cold this week that everybody is catching cold. 18. When 
I am very cold, I do not wish to drink very cold water. 19. My 
cousin's wife was very sleepy, and she wished to rest a little in the train. 

1 ' her.' 2 « them.' ^ fji^s costosos {c.ostosas?) que. 4 Say: ' the volumes 
first and second.' 5 Say : ' happy.' 6 Say : ' many years in Madrid ' (do 

not translate ' for '). ^ a. ^ tan. 9 que. 1*^ de or para. ^ la trajo, 
12 ta7ito. 



LESSON XIII 



66. Apocopation of Adjectives. — The following adjec- 
tives lose the final of the masculine singular when they 
precede their noun : 

bueno, good. ninguno, no, none. 

malo, bad. primero, first. 

uno,i one, an or a. tercero, third. 

alguno, some. postrero,^ last. 

1 The numeral uno and the indefinite article are the same word. 

2 Postrero is little used ; ' last ' is usually ultimo (but ' last month,' for in- 
stance, is el mes pasado). 



LESSON XTII 67 

un buen hombre, a good man. algun dia, some day. 

mal cafe, bad coffee. el primer tomo, the first volume. 

a. If bueno and malo are separated from their noun, they retain the 
final : mi bueno y carinoso padre, * my good and affectionate father.' 

67. Grande, used in the sense of ^ grand ' or ^ great/ usually 
becomes gran before a singular noun of either gender. 

un gran presidente, a great president. una gran cosa, a grand affair. 

a. Before a noun beginning with a vowel, or when the adjective is em- 
phatic, the full form is sometimes used. 

un grande acto de caridad, a grand act of charity. 
un grande sacrificio, a great sacrifice. 

b. When grande means * large ' or *'big,' it follows its noun. 

un muchacho grande, a big boy. una casa grande, a large house. 

68. Santo, ' saint,' ' holy,' usually becomes san before the 
mascuHne name of a saint. The full form remains before a 
name beginning with To- or Do-. 

San Pablo, Saint Paul. Santo Tomas, Saint Thomas. 

San Pedro, Saint Peter. But the name of the island 

Santo Domingo, Saint Dominick. is San Tomas. 

Otherwise the full form is used. 
Santa Ana, Saint Anne. un hombre santo, a holy man. 

69. Ciento, ^one hundred,' becomes cien before the noun 
it modifies, even if an adjective intervenes. 

cien soldados, one hundred soldiers. 

cien hermosos caballos, one hundred handsome horses. 

cien mil pesos, one hundred thousand dollars. 

But the full form ciento is required in forming numerical expres- 
sions above one hundred (except cien mil, cien millones, etc.). 

ciento y diez, one hundred and ten. 

ciento veinte y cinco, one hundred and twenty-five* 



68 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

70. Numerals. — Learn the Cardinal Numerals, § i68; 

and the Ordinal Numerals from * first ' to * twelfth,' 

§ 169. 

Exercise XIII 

A, I. Las manzanas grandes cuestan diez centavos la 
docena. 2. Las pequenas cuestan s61o cinco centavos la 
docena. 3. Las buenas naranjas de la Florida cuestan 30 
centavos la docena. 4. Yo tengo 10 naranjas y tu tienes 
15. ^Cuantas tenemos? 5. 10 y 15 son 25. 6. El afio 
tiene 12 meses y 365 dias. 7. El mes tiene desde 28 hasta 
31 dias. 8. La semana tiene 7 dias. 9. El dia tiene 24 
horas 10. Cada bora tiene 60 minutos. 11. Cada 
minuto tiene 60 segundos. 12. ^Cuantos segundos bay en 
una bora? 13. i Cuantas boras bay en una semana? 14. Los 
meses siguientes tienen 31 dias: enero, marzo, mayo, Julio, 
agosto, octubre, y diciembre. 15. Los meses que tienen s61o 
30 dias son: abril, junio, se(p)tiembre, y noviembre. 16. El 
mes de febrero tiene generalmente solo 28 dias. 17. En el aiio 
bisiesto el mes de febrero tiene 29 dias. 18. Los dias de la 
semana son : domingo, lunes, martes, miercoles, jueves, viernes 
y sabado. 19. El domingo es dia de descanso. 20. Los 
demas dias son dias de trabajo. 21. Un nino estudia, y uno 
no estudia. 22. Tengo uno 6 dos limones y una 6 dos 
naranjas. 23. Un hombre grande no es siempre un gran 
hombre. 

(In this exercise write out all numerals in full.) 

B. I. We do not work Sundays. 1 2. Mondays, Wednesdays, 
and Fridays we have lessons in ^ English, Spanish, and mathematics. 
3. Tuesdays, Thursdays, and Saturdays we have lessons in Latin^ 
Greek, and philosophy. 4. The months of ^ Spring are : March, 
April, and May. 5 . How many days are there in ^ Spring ? 6. The 
months of^ Summer are: June, July, and August. 7. The 
months of ^ Autumn (Fall) are : September, October, and November. 
8. And the months of^ Winter are: December, January, and Feb- 



LESSON XIV 69 

ruary. 9. January is the first month of the year. 10. Decem- 
ber is the last month. 11. February has only twenty-eight or 
twenty-nine days. 12. In^ leap year it has twenty-nine days. 

13. Mr. Martinez used to sell oranges at ten cents a dozen. 

14. Now he sells oranges at from twenty to thirty cents a dozen. 

15. And his oranges are not good. 16. They are not sweet and 
they are too small. 17. If John had twelve books and Mary 
had thirteen, how many did they have? 18. Twelve and thirteen 
are twenty-five. 19. How many days has January? 20. How 
many minutes are there in a day? 21. My good grandfather, 
my good and kind father, and my dear mother have just arrived.^ 
22. The enemy lost one ^ hundred horses, one ^ hundred and twenty- 
one mules, and one^ hundred thousand rifles. 23. We used-to- 
have good neighbors when we were in Mexico. 24. When (= as 
soon as) they had sold the books, they bought a copy of the Holy 
Bible. 25. The boy's cap and coat were soiled: he had fallen ^ 
into the mud of the street. 

1 los domingos (why Def. Art.?) . '^ de. 3 Use Def. Art. ^ acaban de 
llegar. 5 Omit. 6 se habia caido. 



LESSON XIV 

71. Indicative. Future and Conditional.^ 

Hablar : 

FUTURE TENSE 
Singular Plural 

1. hablare, I shall speak, or shall be speaking. i. hablaremos 

2. hablaras 2. hablar§is 

3. hablara 3. hablaran 

1 The Spanish indicative future tense is formed by postfixing to the infinitive 
the indicative present tense of haber, the conditional by postfixing the imperfect 
tense. 

hablar (h)e hablar (h)emos hablar (hab)ia hablar (hab)iamos 

hablar (h) as hablar (hab)^is hablar (hab)ias hablar (hab)iais 

hablar (h) a hablar (h) an hablar (hab)ia hablar (hab)ian 

Note the disappearance of hab-. 



70 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



CONDITIONAL TENSE 



Singular 




Plural 


I. hablaria, I should speak, or should be speaking. 


I. 


hablariamos 


2. hablarias 


2. 


hablariais 


3. hablaria 


3. 


hablarian 


Temer: future tense 






Singular 




Plural 


I. temere, I shall fear, or shall be fearing. 


I. 


temeremos 


2. temeras 


2. 


temereis 


3. temera 


3- 


temeran 


CONDITIONAL TENSE 






Singular 




Plural 


I. temeria, I should fear, or should be fearing. 


I. 


temeriamos 


2. temerias 


2. 


temeriais 


3. temeria 


3. 


temerian 


'^^^^^^ FUTURE TENSE 






Singular 




Plural 


I. vivire, I shall live, or shall be living. 


I. 


viviremos 


2. viviras 


2. 


vivireis 


3. vivira 


3- 


vivirdn 


CONDITIONAL TENSE 






Singular 




Plural 


I. viviria, I should live, or should be living. 


I. 


viviriamos 


2. vivirias 


2. 


viviriais 


3. viviria 


3. 


vivirian 



a. The English auxiliary verb * will ' may denote future tmie, as in * he 
will go tomorrow,' or it may express willingness, as in ' I will go if you 
wish.' When *will' means * to be willing,' it is generally to be translated 
into Spanish by the proper form of querer : i quiere usted venir con 
nosotros ? ' will you come with us ? ' comprare la casa si quieres ven- 
derla, * I shall buy the house if you will sell it.' 

b. The auxiliary verb * should' may be merely conditional, as in *I 
should speak if I knew what to say,' or it may mean * ought to,' as in * I 
realize that I should ( — ought to) speak, but I do not wish to do so.' 
When * should ' means * ought to,' it is usually expressed in Spanish by 
the proper form of deber : yo debo (debiera) hablar, ' I should, or ought 
to, speak.' 



LESSON XIV 



71 



72. Idiomatic Expressions. 

es temprano, it is early. 

es tarde, it is late. 

dla una,i at one o'clock. 

a las dos, at two o'clock. 

a las tres y media, at half-past 
three. 

a las cuatro y cuarto, at a quarter- 
past four. 

d las cinco menos cuarto, at a 
quarter to five. 

d las seis y diez (minutos) , at ten 
minutes past six. 

d las siete de la manana, at seven 
o'clock in the morning. 



a las dos de la tarde, at two o'clock 
in the afternoon. 

es la una, it is one o'clock. 

son las nueve, it is nine o'clock. 

I que hora es ? what time is it ? what 
o'clock is it? 

en ocho dias, in a week. 

hace quince dias, two weeks (a fort- 
night)' ago. 

el primero de enero, the first of 
January. 

el dos (tres, cuatro, etc.) de fe- 
brero, the second (third, fourth, 
etc.) of February. 



Note that, except the first, the cardinal numbers are used to denote the 
days of the month. 

73. In order to denote an act or state that continues from 
one period into another, the present, iinperfect, and future 
tenses are used in Spanish ; while in English the perfect, plu- 
perfect , and future perfect tenses are used. Ex. : 



hard 2 un ano que viviremos en 
Madrid, we shall have been 
living in Madrid for a year. 

mucho tiempo ha que vivimos en 
Madrid, we have been living 
in Madrid for a long time. 



hace quince anos que vivimos en 
Madrid, we have been living 
in Madrid for a year. 
hacia seis meses que viviamos en 
Madrid, we had been living 
in Madrid for six months. 

desde entonces viviamos en Madrid, 
we had been living in Madrid 
since then. 

Compare these sentences with the following : 

1 After la una and media, hora is understood ; after las dos, las tres, etc., 
horas is understood. Cuarto is a noun. 

2 Future indicative of hacer : of. § 246. 



72 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

hace un mes que partieron, it is hace ocho dias que no he fumado, 

a month since they left, or it is a week since I have 

they left a month ago. smoked, or I have not smoked 

hacia ocho dias que habian par- for a week. 

tido, it was a week since they hacla diez anos que no habia fu- 

had left. mado, it was ten years since I 

hard un ano que partieron, it had smoked, or I had not 

will be a year since they left. smoked for ten years. 

poco ha que partieron, they left desde entonces no he fumado, I 

a little while ago. have not smoked since then. 

a. In expressions of time ha (sometimes written ha) is generally 
used as an impersonal verb instead of hay; but hace is used much 
oftener than ha. As a rule, ha follows and hace precedes the noun (or 
adjective) denoting time. Ha is generally used in indefinite expressions 
of time, as poco ha, *a short time ago'; while hace is more correct in 
definite expressions, as hace ocho dias, * a week ago.' 

Exercise XIV 

A, I. La reina parti6 antes de ayer. El rey partira pasado 
mafiana. 2. Esta noche dor mire aqui, y partire mafiana. 

3. Dijo^ que dormiria aqui esta noche y partiria maiiana. 

4. Me escriben que volveran pronto. Me escribieron que 
volverian pronto. 5. ^Supongo^ que el senor Garcia no 
tardara en volver a casa? 6. Poco ha que parti6, y volvera 
dentro de media hora. 7. ^iCuanto tiempo hace que usted 
vive aqui? — Hace tres meses. 8. i Cuanto tiempo hace que 
estudias el espanol? — Hace s61o quince dias. 9. Hace dos 
dias que no la veo.^ — Yo la vi* hace dos horas. 10. Mi vida 
desde hace algunos dias es una lucha constante. 1 1 . No hemos 
recibido cartas desde que estamos en Sevilla. 12. Hacia 
ocho dias que mi hermano y yo estabamos en Sevilla cuando 
mi padre lleg6. 13. ^ Desde cuando esta su amigo en 
Toledo? 14. Desde hace dos aiios, y tiene la intenci6n 
de quedar alii. 15. Hace ocho dias que estoy en Malaga. 



LESSON XIV 73 

— Hace ocho dias que no he estado en Malaga. i6. Desde 
entonces no he fumado. — Desde entonces fumo todos los dias. 

17. Desde aquella noche no he vuelto^ a su casa. — Desde 
aquella noche vuelvo a su casa todos los dias. 18. Mi reloj 
esta parado. ^ Que hora es en tu reloj ? 19. Tengo las diez y 
veinte ; pero mi reloj no anda bien : adelanta. — Mi reloj atrasa. 
20. Crist6bal Col6n descubrio la America el 12 de octubre 
de 1492. 21. La carta empieza asi : '^Madrid, 21 de enero 
de 1904.'* 22. (iCuando es tu cumpleanos (dia de cum- 
pleaiios)? — El 17 de marzo. 23. ^iCuando es el dia de tu 
santo^? 24. Mi nombre de bautismo es Silvestre, y resulta 
que mis dias son el 31 de diciembre. 25. Los dias de Jacinto 
son el 1 1 de setiembre. 

B. I. Will you (/am., sing.) sell your horse? 2. I will sell 
the horse if you (fam., sing.) will pay five hundred American dollars 
for him."^ 3. I shall pay five hundred dollars for the horse 

tomorrow.^ 4. I should pay one thousand dollars for that horse 

if you asked it.^ 5. What time is it by your (fain., sing.) watch? 
It is half-past one. 6. By my watch it is a quarter to two ; but 
my watch is fast. 7. The father used-to-call his children at 
quarter-past five in the morning. 8. He calls them ^^ now at ten 
minutes to six. 9. Will it be long before your (fain.., sing.) 
brother returns ^^ to Madrid ? He will return in a week. 10. They 
left for i'-^ Paris a month ago, and they have not arrived yet. 1 1 . It 
will be a month tomorrow since they left. 12. I wrote to my friend 
two days ago. 13. I am fifty-five years old, and I have hved in 
this house fifty-one years. 14. Since then I have written daily to 
my mother; but I have not written to my father. 15. He had 
spoken Spanish for many years ; but he had not learned to ^^ speak 
it^^ well. 16. How long had you (forin.., pi.) been in Malaga 
when I arrived? Only two weeks. 17. Have you (fani., pi.) not 
received a letter from your mother since you have been in Spain? 

18. No, sir ; we have written to our mother ^very day since we have 
been here ; but we have not received letters from her.^^ 19. My 
birthday is the 28th of June, and my saint's day is the first of May, 



74 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

20. If the owner will sell the horse, I shall buy it.^^ 21. He said 
that if the owner would ^^ sell the horse, he should buy it. 22. He 
should write his Spanish exercises instead of playing 1^ ball ; but he 
prefers to play ball. 

1 ' he said.' 2 Pres. Ind., ist pers. sing., of suponer, ' to suppose.' 3 Pres. 
Ind. of ver, ' to see.'. 4 Pret. of ver. 5 Past Part, of vo/ver, ' to return.' 6 in 
Spain and Spanish America, the day of the saint after whom one is named is 
celebrated much oftener than one's birthday. ' My saint's day ' is el dla de ini 
santo, or mis dias. '^ por el. ^ Place mahana first in the sentence. ^ si 

lo pidiera. "^^ los (placed before the verb). n Say : ' will your brother be 
slow (/<zr^ar«') in returning? * (Infin.). '^'^ para. '^^ d hablarlo. '^^ ella. 

15 lo (placed before the verb). 16 Use queria (Imp. Ind. of querer), l'' Use 
Infin, 



rich, richer, richest. 



LESSON XV 

74. Comparison. — Spanish adjectives form their com- 
parative by prefixing mas, ' more,' to the positive, and 
their superlative by prefixing the definite article to the 
comparative. 

rico, mds rico, el mas rico, 
rica, mas rica, la mas rica, 
ricos, mas ricos, los mas ricos, 
ricas, mas ricas, las mas ricas, . 

a. A possessive adjective may be used instead of the article, to form 
the superlative : su amigo mas rico, * his richest friend.' 

b. The article or the possessive adjective precedes the noun when the 
superlative adjective foUov^^s it : la flor mas hermosa, * the most beautiful 
flower.' 

c. When several comparatives or superlatives modify the same word, 
mas (or el mas, la mas, etc.) is placed before the first and omitted before 
the others : el arbol mas alto y viejo, ' the tallest and oldest tree.' 

d. Correlative * the . . . the,' followed by comparatives, is expressed in 
Spanish by cuanto . . . tanto,^ or by mientras ... — : cuanto mas dinero 

1 The tanto may sometimes be omitted, as in cuanto mas tiene, mas quiere, 
' the more he has, the more he wants.' 



LESSON XV 75 

gana, tanto mas gasta, ' the more money he earns, the more he spends'; 
cuanto mas viejo es el vino, tanto mas vale, ' the older the wine is, the 
more it is worth'; mientras mas tiene, mas quiere, ' the more he has, the 
more he wants.' 

e. The EngUsh preposition * in ' after a superlative is usually expressed 
in Spanish by de : el rio mas largo del mundo, * the longest river in the 
world.' 

f. The article is omitted before a superlative adjective in the predicate 
when its noun is compared with itself: esta mujer sonrie cuando esta 
mas triste, * this woman smiles when she is saddest.' 

g. When the noun is in apposition, both the article and the superlative 
follow the noun : Nueva York, ciudad la mas opulenta de los Estados 
Unidos, ' New York, the wealthiest city in the United States.' 

h. When there is no real comparison, * most ' is usually expressed by 
muy, or the suffix -isimo : es muy litil, or utilisimo, * it is most useful.' 

75. (i) The adjectives bueno and malo are irregularly com- 
pared. 

bueno, mejor, el mejor, good, better, best. 
malo, peor, el peor, bad, worse, worst. 

The regular comparative forms mas bueno and mas malo are some- 
times used. 

(2) Grande and pequeno, while usually compared regularly, 
have also the irregular comparative forms mayor and menor. 
When appHed to persons, mayor means ' older,' and menor, 
' younger.' Mas grande and mas pequeno are preferred for the 
literal and physical use. 

Juan es mas grande que Pedro, John is taller than Peter. 
Juan es mayor que Pedro, John is older than Peter. 

(3) Mucho and poco are compared irregularly, and in the 
superlative they are used only in the neuter singular and in 
the plural. 

mucho, mas, lo (los, las) mas, much (many) , more, most, 
poco, menos, lo (los, las) menos, little (few), less, least. 



'je SPANISH GRAMMAR 

las mas noches, or las mas de las noches, most nights. 
lo menos que he perdido, the least that I have lost. 
en vano buscan los mas el bien que gozan los menos, in vain do the 
many seek for the happiness which the few enjoy. 

a. * Most,' used with a noun, is usually best expressed by la mayor 
parte de : la mayor parte de mis amigos, * most of my friends ' (lit., 

* the greater part of my friends '). 

76. Spanish adverbs form both their comparative and 
superlative by prefixing mas to the positive. There is 
usually no difference in form between the comparative 
and the superlative. 

despacio, slowly. mas despacio, more {or most) slowly. 

a. The neuter article lo is often prefixed to a superlative adverb when 
it is followed by a word or clause expressing possibility. 

lo mas pronto posible, the soonest possible, or as soon as possible. 
lo mas pronto que pudo, as soon as he could. 

77. The following adverbs are compared irregularly : 

bien, mejor, well, better or best. 

mal, peor, badly, worse or worst. 

mucho, mas, much (a great deal), more or most, 

poco, menos, little, less or least. 

a. Mas bien means * rather ' : esta cansado mas bien que enfermo, 

* he is tired rather than ill.' 

78. Than is usually expressed in Spanish by que. 

§1 es mas alto que usted, he is taller than you. 

tiene mas libros que dinero, he has more books than money. 

a. Before a numeral, * more than ' and * less than,' meaning * a greater 
number than ' and * a smaller number than,' are expressed by mas de and 
menos de : hay mas de cinco, * there are more than five ' ; tiene menos 
de veinte anos, * he is less than twenty years old ' ; but el caballo es mas 
fuerte que cinco hombres, * a horse is stronger than five men,' since mas 
doea not here mean * a greater number.' 



LESSON XV y*J 

b. No mas . , . que usually means * only.' Compare : 

no gastaron mas de cien pesos, they did not spend more than one hun- 
dred dollars. 
no gastaron mas que cien pesos, they spent only one hundred dollars. 

c. Before a clause, *than' is usually expressed by del (= de + el) que, 
and its dedined forms, de la que, de los que, de las que, when the com- 
parison is with a noun (expressed or understood) of the main clause; or 
by de lo que when the comparison is with a statement or idea. 

me ha dado mas dinero del que le preste, he has given me more money 

than (that which) I lent him. 
tiene mas libros de los que tenia, he has more bo£>ks than (those which) 

he had. 
es mas rico de lo que crees, he is richer than (what) you believe. 

d. But, if the action of one verb is compared wdth that of another, 
' than ' before a clause is que : habla mas que trabaja, he talks more 
than he works. 

79. Tan . . . como = as . . . as, ^r so . . . as. 

Tanto (-a) . . . como = as much ... as, or so much ... as. 
Tantos (-as) como = as many ... as, or so many ... as. 

tan bianco como la nieve, as white as snow. 

tanto oro como plata, as much gold as silver. 

no tiene tanta plata como oro, he hasn't so much silver as gold. 

tantas manzanas como peras, as many apples as pears. 

Exercise XV 

A. I. Tu eres mayor que el, pero el es el mas alto. 
2. Si ; ^1 es mas alto de lo que yo creia. 3. Juan dijo^ 

que cuanto mas gastaba, tanto mas tenia. 4. La verdad es 

que cuanto mas tenia, mas gastaba. 5. Ya ha gastado la 

mayor parte de su fortuna. 6. Yo tengo tres hermosos 

perros. 7. Don Jorge tenia cinco perros el ano pasado. 

8. En este momento Don Jorge tiene mas perros que 
yo. 9. Pero tiene menos de los que tenia el ano pasado. 



78 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

^Cuantos tiene? lo. <jCuantos anos tiene su senor padre? 
II. Tiene 75 aiios, — 45 mas que yo. 12. He escrito^ lo 
mas de prisa posible. 13. Pero no he tenido tiempo de acabar 
la carta. 14. ^Esta usted cansada, sefiora? 15. Estoy 
enferma mas bien que cansada. 16. Ella pesa mas que el, 
y ^1 pesa mas de cien libras. 17. El caballo es el animal 
mas util, y el perro es el animal mas fiel. 18. El oro vale 
mas que el hierro, pero el hierro es el mas util. 19. La 
muchacha mas linda de la ciudad se cas6 con^ el joven mas 
feo. 20. El mayor mal de los males es tratar con animales 
(refran espafiol). 2 1 . Costaba mas trabajo de lo que parecia ; 
pero de lo peor ha sucedido lo mejor. 22. La vaca da mas 
leche de la que daba el ano pasado. 23. Tenemos menos 
criados de los que teniamos cuando usted nos visit6.* 24. 6I 
no sufre tanto como usted cree : no sufre tanto como ella. 

B, I. You (^fam,^ sing.) are the best friend in the world. 
2. No, I am not the best friend in the world. 3. I am the 
best friend that you have or have had. 4. He has more friends 
than L 5. I have more books than he. 6. And my books 
are, and have always been, my best friends. 7. This house is 
larger than that house, but that house is the higher. 8. He is 
older than I, but not so old as my brother. 9. He is richer and 
more independent than you (^forin,^ ^^^^g-)^ but he is not so happy. 
10. The more he works, the more he has ; and the more he has, the 
more he spends. 11. London is the largest and the wealthiest 
city in the world, but it is not the most beautiful. 12. She is older 
than I, but I am taller than she. 13. He is the most unfortunate 
man that I know ^ ; he has lost most of the money that he earned last 
month. 14. He is writing more slowly than you {form., sing.), 
but he is writing as fast as he can.^ 15. The firm of Gonzales 
Brothers has more employes than the firm of Herrera and Com- 
pany. 1 6. Gonzales Brothers employ more than two hundred men. 

17. Herrera and Company do not employ more than one hundred. 

18. But the firm of Gonzales Brothers has less employes this year 
than it had last year. 19. He lent me'' fivo, dollars more than I 



LESSON XVI 79 

asked-for. 20. But he did not lend me so much as 1 wished. 

21. I have more than seven cents and less than nine. How many 

have I ? 22. It is colder outdoors than I thought.^ 23. But it 
is not so cold today as it was yesterday. 

1 Pret. of decir. 2 Past part, of escribir, 3 « married.* "* • visited us.' 
^ que conozco. ^ puede, ^^ ^^^^ (^before the verb) . ^ creia. 



LESSON XVI 



80. Adjectives used Substantively. — In English, ad- 
jectives are sometimes used substantively; as, 'the old 
and the young.' This construction is commoner in 
Spanish than in English. If a noun is understood, 
the adjective takes the gender and number of the noun 
it represents. *One,' or *ones,' after the English adjec- 
tive, is usually not to be translated into Spanish. 

los ricos y los pobres, the rich prefiero el caballo negro al bianco, 
and the poor. I prefer the black horse to the 

el viejo, the old man. white one. 

a. If the adjective is used substantively as the name of a color or as an 
abstract noun, it requires the article lo. See § 54. 

81. The Plural Number. — (i) The masculine plural form 
of adjectives and pronouns may denote male and female beings 
considered collectively. 

los viejos, the old men and the old women, or the old man and the 

old woman, or simply the old men. 
ellos tienen miedo, they are afraid (referring to men and women, or 

to a man and a woman, or to men alone) . 

The plural of most nouns denoting male beings may be used 
in the same way. 



80 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

los hermanos, the brothers and sisters, or the brother and the sister, 

or the brothers. 
los padres, the fathers and mothers, or the father and the mother 

(= the parents), or the fathers. 

(2) In treating collectively of a number of persons or 
things, a singular noun is generally used in Spanish to denote 
something that belongs to every member of a group if, in the 
case of each member, but one object of the kind is concerned. 

los ninos se lavaron la cara y las manos, the children washed their 

faces and hands. 
todos los discipulos levantaron la mano, all the pupils raised their 

hands {i.e. each raised one of his two hands) . 

(3) Abstract nouns are frequently used in the plural in a 
concrete sense. 

terneza, tenderness. ternezas, tender words or deeds. 

82. Indicative. Future and Conditional. 
Tener : 

FUTURE TENSE 
Singular Plural 

1. tendr§, I shall have, or shall be having. i. tendremos 

2. tendras 2. tendrils 

3. tendrd 3. tendrdn 

CONDITIONAL TENSE 
Singular Plural 

1. tendria, I should have, or should be having. i. tendriamos 

2. tendrias 2. tendriais 

3. tendria 3. tendrian 

Haber : 

FUTURE TENSE 
Singular Plural 

1. habri, I shall have. i. habremos 

2. habras 2. habreis 

3. habra 3. habran 



LESSON XVI 



8i 



CONDITIONAL TENSE 

Singular 

1. habria, I should have. 

2. habrias 

3. habria 



Sen 

Singular 

1. sere, I shall be 

2. seras 

3. sera 

Singular 

1. seria, I should be. 

2. serias 

3. seria 

Estar : 

Singular 

1. estare, I shall be. 

2. estaras 

3. estara 

Singular 

1. estaria, I should be. 

2. estarias 

3. estaria 



FUTURE TENSE 



CONDITIONAL TENSE 



FUTURE TENSE 



CONDITIONAL TENSE 



Plural 

1. habriamos 

2. habriais 

3. habrian 

Plural 

1. seremos 

2. sereis 

3. seran 

Plural 

1. seriamos 

2. serials 

3. serian 

Plural 

1. estaremos 

2. estar § is 

3. estaran 

Plural 

1. estariamos 

2. estariais 

3. estarian 



83. Indicative. Future Perfect. 
Hablar : 

I shall have spoken, 07- I shall have been speaking. 

Plural 

1. habremos hablado 

2. habreis hablado 

3. habran hablado 



Singular 

1. habr§ hablado 

2. habrds hablado 

3. habrd hablado 



a. Habrd also means, * there will be' 
have been.' 



habra habido, * there will 



82 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

84. The future may be used instead of the present, and the 
conditional instead of the imperfect, to denote probabiUty or 
conjecture. 

I que hora es ? — seran las once. * what time is it ? it is probably 

(about) eleven o'clock.' 

I que hora era ? — serian las doce. * what time was it ? it was probably 

(about) twelve o'clock.' 

a. Similarly the future perfect may be used instead of the perfect: 
I quien ha abierto la puerta? — habra sido Jose. * who opened the door ? 
it was probably Joseph.' 

Exercise XVI 

A. I. ^Prefiere usted la casa blanca a la amarilla? 2. Si, 
senor; prefiero la blanca a la amarilla. 3. Los ricos viven 
bien : los pobres sufren. 4. Un viejo y una vieja han en- 
trado aqui, y quieren hablar a usted. 5. ^iCuantos hijos tiene 
usted, senora? 6. Tengo tres, dos hijos varones y una hija. 
7. ^iCuantos gatitos tiene la gata? 8. Tiene cinco, dos 
machos y tres hembras. 9. Alfredo tiene cuatro abuelos, los 
dos padres de su papa y los dos padres de su mama. 10. ^ A 
qui^n tendr6 por companero? — A mi,^ que sere siempre tu 
amigo. II. ^j Quien llama a la puerta? — Probablemente 

sera el medico. 12. ^Cuantos anos tiene el nino? — Tendra 
unos^ diez anos. 13. ^iCuantos anos tenia el muchacho 

cuando muri6? — Tendria unos diez y seis anos. 14. No 
dudo que sera rico. 15. i Habra desgracia mayor para un 
joven de talento ! 16. (iQue hora era cuando parti6? — 
Serian las once de la noche. 17. Serian las cuatro de la tarde 
cuando oimos un gran ruido por^ la calle. 18. Serian las diez 
de la mafiana cuando lleg6 el general. 19. Parecia un hombre 
que tendria unos cincuenta anos. 20. ^Cuanto perdi6? — 
Perderia mas de mil pesos. 21. Juan es muy bobo : dice que 
cuanto mas estudia, tanto menos sabe, y cuanto menos estudia, 
tanto mas sabe. 22. ^A qu6 distancia de aqui esta la casa 



LESSON XVI 83 

de usted ? — A una manzana (cuadra) y media. 23. No es tan 
lejos como yo creia. 24. Miguel Cervantes, autor inmortal de 
" Don Quijote de la Mancha/' era, es, y sera uno de los au tores 
mas celebres de Espafia. 25. Cervantes naci6 a mediados 
del siglo diez y seis, y muri6 a principios del siglo diez y siete. 

B, I. God loves the old (//.) and the young, the large and the 
small, the good and the bad. 2. The red book is prettier than 
the black one. 3. The black one is more interesting than the red 
one. 4. Alfred lives with his parents, his grandparents, and his 
brothers-and-sisters. 5. He has three grandparents, the father- 
and-mother of his father and his mother's mother. 6. He has 
four brothers-and-sisters, two brothers and two sisters. 7. Now 
that I am a man, I have more friends and more enemies than I had 
when I was a boy. 8. I haven't so much money nor so many 
friends as you (^forni,^ sing,') ; but I have more books than you 
have. 9. Asia is the largest continent, and Australia is the largest 
island, in the world. 10. North America is twice as large as* 
Europe. 11. He has more influence than he had five years ago. 
12. You (^fam., sing.) were, are, and always will be^ my best 
friend. 13. What o'clock is it ? I t-is-probably-about four o'clock. 
14. What time was it when you returned home ? ^ It-was-probably- 
about ten o'clock at night. 15. How old is he ? I-should-say- 
that-he-is-probably-about fifteen years old. 16. How old was he 
when he came "^ to this country ? He was-about six years old. 
17. This parrot will live perhaps one hundred years ; but we shall 
not live so long a time.^ 18. There are one hundred and seVenty- 
five pages in this book. 19. I have read as-far-as the eighty-ninth 
page.^ 20. The horse is more useful than the dog; but the dog 
is the most faithful of all animal s.^^ 21. I do not suffer more 
than you (^fam.^ sing.) ; but I suffer more than I used-to-suffer. 
22. The Mexican dollar has one hundred cents ; the Spanish peseta 
has one hundred centimes. 23. The Mexican dollar is worth two 
and a half Spanish pesetas, or the half of an American dollar. ^^ 

1 ' me.' 2 < some.' 8 * in.' 4 Say : ' is two times {yeces) larger than.' 
S Say : ' will be always.' 6 d casa. "^ vino. 8 Say : ' so much time.* 

9 Say: ' the page eighty-nine.' l^ Say : ' of all the animals.' ^^ Say ; ' or 

half dollar American-" 



84 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



LESSON XVII 



85. Imperative Mood. 



Singular 
2. habla 

Singular 
2. teme 

Singular 
2. vive 



Hablar 



Temer 



Vivir 



Plural 
2. hablad 

Plural 
2, temed 

Plural 
2. vivid 



With habla, teme, and vive, tii is understood ; while vosotros (-as) 
is understood with hablad, temed, and vivid. 

86. The imperative mood is limited to the second person 
singular and plural. It is also limited to positive commands or 
entreaties. See § Sj, a. 

a. The final -d of the plural imperative is lost before the object-pronoun 
OS, *you, yourselves' (cf. § 89); preparaos (for preparad-os), * prepare 
yourselves.* 



87. Subjunctive 


Present Tense. 






Singular 


Hablar 




Plural 


I. hable 




I. 


hablemos 


2. hables 




2. 


hableis 


3. hable 

Singular 


Temer 


3. 


hablen 

Plural 


I. tema 




I. 


temamos 


2. temas 




2. 


temais 


3. tema 

Singular 


Vivir 


3. 


teman 

Plural 


I. viva 




I. 


vivamos 


2. vivas 




2. 


vivdis 


3. viva 




3- 


vivan 



LESSON XVII 



85 



The present subjunctive is often used in Spanish to 
express command or entreaty. 

hable el, let him speak. hablemos, let us speak. 

hable ella, let her speak. que Juan hable, let John speak. 

Note that the present subjunctive in these expressions is usually to be 
translated into English by * let ' and the infinitive ; but when used with 
usted (or ustedes), it is translated by the imperative. 

hable usted, speak. abra usted la puerta, open the door. 

a. In the second person, singular and plural, the present subjunctive is 
used to express a negative command or entreaty, while in a positive com- 
mand or entreaty the imperative is used; thus: 

habla, or hablad, speak. no hables, or no hableis, do not speak. 

b. The final -s of the first person plural of the present subjunctive is 
omitted before the object-pronoun nos, * us,' ' ourselves ' : sentemonos (for 
sentemos-nos), Met us seat ourselves.' 



88. Radical-changing Verbs. 




Imperative : 






FIRST AND 


SECOND CONJUGATIONS 




Temblar 




Singular 




Plural 


2. tiembla 


Perder 


2k temblad 


Singular 




Plural 


2. pierde 


Contar 


2. perded 


Singular 




Plural 


2. cuenta 


Volver 


2. contad 


Singular 




Plural 


2. vuelve 




2. volved 



86 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



THIRD 


CONJUGATION 




Sentir 




Singular 




Plural 


2. siente 


Pedir 


2. sentid 


Singular 




Plural 


2. pide 


Dormir 


2. pedid 


Singula.^ 




Plural 


2. duerme 




2. dormid 



Present Subjunctive: 



FIRST AND SECOND CONJUGATIONS 



Singular 

1. tiemble 

2. tiembles 

3. tiemble 

Singular 

1. pierda 

2. pierdas 

3. pierda 

Singular 

1. cuente 

2. cuentes 

3. cuente 

Singular 

1. vuelva ' 

2. vuelvas 

3. vuelva 



Temblar 



Perder 



Contar 



Volver 



Plural 

1. temblemos 

2. tembl6is 

3. tiemblen 

Plural 

1. perdamos 

2. perdais 

3. pierdan 

Plural 

1. contemos 

2. conteis 

3. cuenten 

Plural 

1. volvamos 

2. volvdis 

3. vuelvan 





LESSON XVII 






THIRD 


CONJUGATION 




Singular 




Sentir 




Plural 


1. sienta 

2. 'sientas 

3. sienta 

Singular 




Pedir 


I. 
2. 

3. 


sintamos 

sintais 

sientan 

Plural 


1. pida 

2. pidas 

3. pida 

Singular- 




Dormir 


I. 

2. 
3- 


pidamos 

pidais 

pidan 

Plural 


1. duerma 

2. duermas 

3. duerma 






I. 

2. 
3. 


durmamo 

durmais 

duerman 



87 



Note that the radical-changing verbs of the third conjugation change 
e to /, and to ti^ in the first and second persons plural of the present 
subjunctive, even though the syllables in question are not accented. 



Exercise XVII 

A, I. Evita la mala compafiia, y busca la buena. 2. Nino; 
no hables tan alto : habla bajo. 3. Silvestre ; cierra la ven- 
tana. La luz del sol me ciega. 4. Enciende la vela, que ^ 
ya es tarde : no enciendas la lampara. 5. Apaga la vela, pero 
no apagues la lampara. 6. Tomemos el tranvia (el carro el^c- 
trico). No puedo andar mas. 7. Dios quiera que tus 
anos sean^ colmados de toda prosperidad. 8. No tema 
usted nada : aqui esta usted en seguridad. 9. No mientas, 
nino. Siempre es laverdad mejor que la mentira. 10. Suba 
usted a la biblioteca. Alii hallara una carta para usted. 
II. No dejes de estudiar la lecci6n para mafiana, porque es 
bastante dificil. 12. El orador dijo : temed a los traidores 



88 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

de la patria, pero no temais a los enemigos. 13. Ni- 

nes, bebed agua pura : no bebais cafe, te, vino, ni cerveza. 

14. Leamos la carta. Tengo ganas de saber lo que dice.^ 

15. Sentemonos aqui, y hablemos. Yo no entiendo de suavi- 
dades y hablo con mucha franqueza. 16. Madrid es una 
hermosa ciudad : tiene muchos edificios magnificos y calles y 
paseos espl^ndidos. 17. En la parte antigua las calles son 
estrechas y tortuosas; pero en la parte nueva son anchas y 
derechas. 18. La peseta espanola tiene cuatro reales 6 cien 
c^ntimos. 19. El peso mejicano tiene cien centavos. 
20. Una peseta espanola tiene el valor de veinte centavos 
americanos. 21. Un peso mejicano tiene el valor de 
cincuenta centavos americanos.* 22. En Espafia, toman 
generalmente el cafe 6 el chocolate a las ocho de la ma- 
nana. 23. Almuerzan a las once 6 a las doce, y comen 
a las seis de la tarde. 24. Cenan despues del teatro 6 de 
la 6pera. 

B. I. Let us avoid the bad (neut. sing.) and seek the good. 
2. Children, wash ^ your ears, eyes, and noses, and clean your finger- 
nails. 3. Work {fa7n., pL), but do not work too long ; sleep, but 
do not sleep more than nine hours. 4. Eat {fa7n., pi.) enough, but 
do not eat too much ; eat healthful foods, but do not eat sweets and ^ 
pastry. 5. Drink (fam., pi.) water and milk, but do not drink 
coffee, tea, wine, beer, or^ brandy. 6. Read {fam., sing.) this 
letter, if you wish; but do not read the other. 7. Write {fam., 
sing.) to your friends, but do not write to your enemies. 8. Run 
{fam., sing.) and play, but do not run and^ play when you should 
be-studying. 9. Buy {form., sing.) the white horse, but do not 
buy the black one. 10. Sell {for7n., pi.) the large house, but do 
not sell the small one. 11. Let us light the lamp, and put out 
the candle. 12. Let us shut the door, and open the window. 
13. Let"^ John shut the door, and open the window. 14. May"^ 
the boys avoid bad company, and seek good company.^ 15. Let 
us write to our uncles-and-aunts, but let us not write to our cousins. 

16. Write {fam., pi.) to your brothers-and-sisters, but do not write 



LESSON XVIII 



89 



to your uncles-and-aunts or^ your cousins. 17. Write (^fam.^ 
sing.) short letters; do not write long letters. 18. Write {forjn.^ 
sing.) Spanish letters; do not write English letters. 



1 'for.' 2 ' rnay be.' 

approximate. 5 lavaos. 

seek the good,' 



3 ' what it says.' 
6 Say: 'nor.' 



4 This is, of course, only 
'^ Use que. 8 gay : ' and 



LESSON XVIII 



89. Personal Pronouns. — The Spanish personal pro- 
nouns used as the subject or object of verbs are^: 



I. 

2. 



C m 

If- 



Subject 

yo, I. 

tii, you, thou. 
el, he, it. 
ena, she, it. 



Singular 

Direct Object 

me, me. 
te, you, thee. 
le or lo, him, it. 
la, her, it. 

Plural 



Indirect Object 
me, to me. 
te, to you, to thee. 
le, to him, to her, to it. 
(la), (to her). 



I. 

2. 



Subject Direct Object 

nosotros (-as), we. nos, us. 

vosotros (-as), you, ye. os, you. 

in. ellos, ) los, 

/. ellas, I ^^^>'- las, 



::f 



them. 



Indirect Object 
nos, to us. 
OS, to you. 
les, to them, 
(las), (to them,/.). 



a. In English a subject-pronoun is rarely omitted ; in Spanish it 
is regularly omitted unless required for emphasis or clearness : hablo, 
' I am speaking^ ; yo hablo, ^/am speaking.' The pronoun is some- 
times required when the form of the verb would not make it clear 
what pronoun is understood ; thus, yo (§1, ella) hablaba, 'I (he, she) 
was speaking.' 

1 Usted and ustedes, the neuter pronouns ello and lo, and the reflexive 
pronouns se and si, will be treated separately in subsequent paragraphs. 



go SPANISH GRAMMAR 

b. In English an object-pronoun regularly follows the verb ; in 
Spanish it usually precedes. 

nos aman, they love us. 

ella me teme, she fears me. 

Antonio te da un libro, Anthony gives you a book. 

If the sentence is negative, no immediately precedes the object- 
pronoun : ella no me teme, ' she does not fear me. ' 

c. But sometimes the object-pronoun follows the verb, and is 
attached to it so that the verb and pronoun form one word. This 
occurs when the pronoun is the object of an infinitive, a present 
participle, or a positive imperative (including the positive subjunc- 
tive used with imperative force) . 

temerle, (to) fear him ; Uamandome, calling me ; 

c6mpralo, buy it ; sent^monos, let us sit down ; 

but 

no lo compres, do not buy it ; no nos sentemos, let us not sit down. 

d. When a present participle or an infinitive is used with an auxiliary 
verb, the object-pronoun may usually either precede the auxiliary or follow 
its main verb. 

me esta aguardando or esta aguardandome, * he is waiting for me.' 
la quiero ver or quiero verla, * I wish to see her.' 

e. If the sentence (or clause) begins with the verb, the object-pronoun 
may follow ; but this rarely occurs if the verb is future, conditional, or the 
second person of the preterite. 

dmame, he loves me ; am6me, he loved me ; 

amdbame, he used to love me ; 

etc. (but rarely amarame, amariame, amdsteme, etc.). 

f. In English one may say, * give me the book,' or * give the book to 
me ' ; both expressions are to be translated into Spanish by dame el libro, 
if the * me ' is not emphatic : cf. § 103, a, 

g. It should be noted that the English pronouns * him,' *her,' and 
* them ' may be used as either direct or indirect object ; and that, if used 



LESSON XVIII 91 

as direct object, they should be expressed in Spanish by one set of pro- 
nouns, while if used as indirect, they should be expressed by another set. 

la teme, he fears her, 

le da un libro, he gives her a book. 

los ama, he loves them. 

les da el libro, he gives them the book. 

The masculine singular le, however, is used as either direct or indirect object. 

h. In order to avoid ambiguity by indicating gender, the feminine direct 
object-pronoun (accusative) is sometimes used instead of the indirect 
object-pronoun (dative) : el la (or las) qued6 fiel hasta la muerte, * he 
remained faithful to her {or them, fem^ till death.' 

i. The masculine singular pronoun of the third person has two forms, 
le and lo. It is usually considered best to use le when referring to a 
person, and lo when referring to a thing ; but some speakers and writers 
use only le, while others prefer lo. 

Exercise XVIII 

A, I. Ella me teme, pero no me ama. 2. Yo la amo yla 
temo tambi(§n. 3. Yo los buscaba, y ellos me buscaban. 
4. Yo no los halle, y ellos no me hallaron. 5. Tu las 
aborrecias, y ellas te aborrecian. 6. Juan las apreciaba, y ellas 
le (^r lo) apreciaban. 7. i Quiere usted vender su bicicleta? 

8. Si, senor ; quiero venderla. 1^0 quiere usted comprarla? 

9. No, sefior; yo no la quiero comprar. 10. V^ndala a su 
primo Don Jos^ : no la venda al sefior Morales. 11. Lla- 
male. No ; espera un momento : no le (or lo) llames ahora. 

12. La encontr^ en la calle de Preciados, y le di^ la carta. 

13. Le {or lo) halle en su casa, y le devolvi el libro. 14. Los 
vi^ esta manana, y les dije^ que usted estaba en la ciudad. 
15. Las buscaba por todas partes para decirles que usted estaba 
aqui. 16. Pero no las hall^, y por consiguiente no les dije 
nada.* 17. ^Nos aguarda Juan? — Si; os aguarda hace 
dos horas. 18. Quiere pagaros lo que^ os debe. 19. ^Te 
pag6 la cuenta? — No la pag6, y creo que no quiere pagarla. 



92 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

20. <J Me biisca el sefior Santilla ? — Si ; te busca para pedirte un 
favor. Evitale. 21. ^ Ha escrito usted el ejercicio? 22. No 
lo (o7' le) he escrito todavia. Lo {or le) escribir^ esta tarde. 
23. ^Cuando escribiras la carta a tu mama? 24. La escribir^ 
manana por la manana. 25. ^i D6nde ha comprado usted estas 
naranjas? 26. Las compre esta manana en la tienda de Garcia. 

B. I.I wish to see him and to speak to him. 2. You {fa7n.^ 
sing.) wish to see her and speak to her, do you not ? 3. We 
wish to see them {inasc.) and speak to them as soon as possible. 
4. Do you (^forni,^ pi.) not wish to see them (^fe^n.) and speak to 
them today ? 5. We have already seen them {fern.) and have 
spoken to them. 6. Did you (^fam.^ sing.) see ^ the girl? I saw'^ 
her. 7. Did you see the boy? I saw him. 8. Did you (/i2;;;^., 
sing.) see the boys ? I saw them. 9. Did you see the girls ? I 
saw them. 10. Did you (^fam.^ pi.) find the book? We found 
it. II. Did you find the pen? We found it. 12. Did you 
{fam., pi.) find the pens? We found them. 13. Did you find 
the books ? We found them. 14. Did you {form.y sing.) sell 
the house? I did not sell it, and I do not wish to sell it. 15. Did 
you (^form.^ pi.) buy the carriage ? We did not buy it, but we wish 
to buy it. 16. If you (^fam.., sing.) wish to buy the hat, buy it; 
if you do not wish to buy it, do not buy it. 17. If you (^farn.j 
pi.) wish to sell the bicycle, sell it ; if you do not wish to sell it, do 
not sell it. 18. If you {form.^ sing.) prefer to sell the horses, sell 
them ; if you do not prefer to sell them, do not sell them. 19. If 
you {form.^ pi.) prefer to buy the cows, buy them; if you do not 
prefer to buy them, do not buy them. 20. Did you {fam., sing.) 
speak to John? I did not speak to him, and I do not wish to speak 
to him. 21. Did you {fam.^ pi.) speak to Mary? We did not 
speak to Mary, but we wish to speak to her. 22. If you {form.^ 
sing.) wish to lend the boys ten dollars, lend them ten dollars ; do 
not lend them more. 23. If you {form., pi.) prefer to lend the 
girls the pens, lend them the pens. 24. If you do not prefer to 
lend them the pens, do not lend them the pens. 

1 ' I gave/ Pret. of dar. 2 « i saw,' Pret. of ver, ^ ' I said/ Pret. of decir. 
4 ' anything.' ^ < what.' 6 visU. "^ vi. 



LESSON XIX 93 



LESSON XIX 

90. Tu and usted, — English ^you' may be expressed in 
Spanish by tii, //., vosotros (-as), or by usted, //., ustedes. 
Usted (//., ustedes) is a contraction of vuestra merced, 'your 
grace'; it is treated as a noun and requires the verb, object- 
pronouns, and possessives in the third person singular or plural. 
Thus, addressing a woman one would say : 

I como estd usted ? how are you? (lit., ' how is your grace? ^). 

yo la vi esta manaha, I saw you this morning (lit., 'I saw her/ 

referring to the noun element in usted). 
vi tambi^n a su hermana, I saw your sister also (lit., * I saw her 

sister'). 

It will be observed that usted has all the attributes of a noun 
except gender : it assumes the gender of the person addressed. 
Usted and ustedes may be abbreviated in writing to V. and VV., 
or to Vd. and Vds. 

When ' you ' stands for the name of a near relative, an intimate friend, 
a small child, an animal, or an inanimate object, it is usually to be trans- 
lated by tu. The word tii corresponds also to English * thou,' used in 
poetic and sacred language. The plural of tii is vosotros (-as). In all 
other cases 'you' should be expressed by usted (//., ustedes). Thus it 
would be rude to address a stranger or mere acquaintance as tii ; while, on 
the other hand, to address an intimate friend as usted would indicate scorn 
or anger. 1 

a, Vosotros, instead of ustedes, is sometimes used by orators in ad- 
dressing an audience. 

1 In some parts of the Spanish-speaking world vosotros and the corre- 
sponding form of the verb are no longer used in colloquial language. Thus, a 
Cuban or Mexican father would address one child as tu, but two or more as 
ustedes. 



94 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

b. Nos and vos may occur, instead of yo and tii, in royal proclamations 
and official documents : nos el rey mandamos . . ., ' I, the king, com- 
mand.' Vos instead of usted occurs commonly in the older Spanish 
works. 

91. Tlllo and io. — There is no pronoun in Spanish exactly 
corresponding to English ^it.' All Spanish nouns are either 
masculine or feminine ; hence, if 4t * represents a noun, it is 
expressed in Spanish by a masculine or feminine pronoun, ac- 
cording to the gender of the noun represented. Thus, speak- 
ing of el libro, ' it ' would be el, lo, or le ; while speaking of 
la pluma, ^ it ' would be ella, la, or le, according as ' it ' is sub- 
ject, direct object, or indirect object. 

If *it' does not represent a noun, but a whole phrase, sen- 
tence, or idea, it may be expressed by ello (subject-pronoun or 
object of a preposition) or lo (object-pronoun), as in convengo 
en ello, * I agree to it,' no lo creo, ' I do not believe it.* 

But *it,' when the subject of a verb, is usually not expressed 
in Spanish at all. Thus, speaking of la casa, one would say, 
es muy alta, ' it is very high ' ; or speaking of something that 
happened, one would say, no es importante, ^it is not im- 
portant.' If ^ it ' represents nothing definite, but is merely 
expletive, it can not be expressed in Spanish : Uueve, ' it is 
raining ' ; nieva, ^ it is snowing.' 

a. As a subject-pronoun the neuter ello occurs commonly only in the 
expression ello es que (cf. the French c'est que) — * the fact is that.' 

b. Lo is often used in the predicate to refer to a preceding noun or 
adjective : ^ es el huerfano ? — Si, lo es, * Is he an orphan ? Yes; he is 
(one) '; sus ojos parecen negros sin serlo, *his eyes appear black with- 
out being so.* 

But if the preceding noun refers to a definite person, the personal 
pronoun agrees in gender and number with the noun : ^ eres tu la hija 
del senor Garcia ? — ^\, la soy, * Are you the daughter of Mr. Garcia ? 
Yes; I am.* 



LESSON XIX 

92. Imperative : Tener, Saber, Ser, JEstar. 

Tener . 



95 



Singular 




Plural 


2. ten 


Haber 


2. tened 


Singular 




Plural 


2. h^l 


Ser 


2. habedi 


Singular 




Plural 


2. se 


Estar 


2. sed 


Singular 




Plural 


2. esta 




2. estad 



93. Subjunctive Present : Tener y Haber , Ser, Estar. 

Tener 



Singular 






Plural 


1. tenga 

2. tengas 
3- tenga 

Singular 


Haber 


I. 
2. 

3- 


tengamos 

tengais 

tengan 

Plural 


1. haya 

2. hayas 

3. haya 

Singular 


Ser 


I. 

2. 
3. 


hayamos 

haydis 

hayan 

Plural 


I. sea 




I. 


seamos 


2. seas 




2. 


sedis 


3. sea 

Singular 


Estar 


3. 


sean 

Plural 


I. est6 




I. 


estemos 


2. estes 




2. 


estlis 


3. este 




3. 


estin 


1 Rarely used. 


Some regard he as 


not a part of haber. 



96 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Subjunctive. Perfect Tense. 

Hablar 

Singular Plural 

1. haya hablado i. hayamos hablado 

2. hayas hablado 2. hayais hablado 

3. haya |iablado 3. hayan hablado 

a, Haya, used as an impersonal verb, means * there may be,' * let there 
be,' etc.; haya habido, 'there may have been.' 



Exercise XIX 

A, I. Paguele usted lo que le debe, pero no le pague un 
real mas. 2. Amigo mio ^ : prestame diez pesos. 3. Nopuedo 
prestarte diez pesos, porque no los tengo. 4. La quiero ver 
para hablarle de un asunto importante. 5. ^iTe gustan las 
manzanas ? — Si ; me gustan mucho. 6. i Os gustaba el clima 
de Madrid? — No nos gustaba : era malisimo. 7. Desperte- 
mosla, que ya es tarde. 8. No la despertemos todavia. La 
pobre nifia no esta buena. 9. ^Vendiste los cabailos? — 
Si; los vendi a mi primo Onofre. 10. ^Vendiste las vacas 

tambien? — Si; las vendi. 11. ^Quieres llamar a los ninos? 
— Ya los llame hace dos horas. 12. Bueno ; ten la bondad 
de llamarlos otra vez. 13. Quitaronme el uniforme de militar. 
i Dios tenga piedad de mi !^ 14. Ten los oidos y los ojos 
abiertos; pero no tengas miedo de nada.^ 15. Tenga usted 
la bondad de cerrar la ventana. Tengo frio. 16. Haya 
paces, y dejen ustedes de disputar. 17. Sean francos, y 
diganme^ la verdad. 18. Hemos de estudiar desde la linea 

diez de la pagina cincuenta hasta la linea veinte y ocho de la 
pagina cincuenta y siete. 19. Caballero ; usted habla dema- 
siado pronto. No le {or lo) puedo entender. 20. Caba- 
lleros ; ustedes hablan demasiado pronto. No los puedo 
entender. 21. Buenos dias, Don Jorge. ^ Como esta usted ? 



LESSON XIX 97 

Yo le {or lo) busque ayer sin poder^ hallarle {or hallarlo). 
22. Desee pagarle lo que ^ le debo. 23. Sefiora; perd6neme 
usted. Quiero hablarle de un asunto desagradable, pero no 
quiero irritarla. 24. Hable usted; caballero. Digame^ lo 

que^ quiera decir : no me irritara ello. 25. Senoras; 

£ustedes me permiten que las acompane? 

B, Write the first four sentences twice, making < you ' masculine 
in one set and feminine in the other. 

I. Good day! How are you {fain., sing. ^'^. I met you yester- 
day, but I did not speak to you. Are you well?''^ 2. Good day! 
How are you {form., sing.)}. I met you yesterday, but I did not 
speak to you. Are you well?''' 3. Good day! How are you 
{fam., pi.)} I met you yesterday, but I did not speak to you. 
Are you well? "^ .4. Good day! How are you {form., pi.)} I 
met you yesterday, but I did not speak to you. Are you well?'' 
5. Did you {form., sing.) buy the hat? I bought it. 6. Did you 
{form., sing.) sell the chair? I sold it. 7. Do you {fam., sing.) 
beHeve it? I believe it. 8. Do you {fain., sing.) agree to ^ it? 
9. Is the door higher than I? It is higher than you {fam., sing.), 
ID. Is the trunk larger than I? It is larger than you {fam., 
sing.). II. I saw him, and I spoke to him; but I did not 
see her, and consequently I did not speak to her. 12. I found 
them {masc.)j and I gave them the letter; I did not find them 
{fem.), and I did not give them the book. 13. Did you {fam.j 
sing.) ask pardon of your uncle? I did not ask pardon of-him, 
and I do not intend to ask pardon of-him. 14. Have {form.^ 
sing.) the kindness to burn the letter. I do not wish to keep it. 
15. Do {form.., sing.., jnasc.) not be fooHsh ; tell us the truth. Do 
not He to us ever.^ 16. Be {fain., sing.) afraid of traitors; but 
do not be afraid of your enemies. 17. He found us, and he gave 
the letter to us. 18. Did she meet you {fam.., pi.) and give the book 
to you? 19. He met me and asked me for twenty-five pesetas. '^^ 
20. I did not have them, and, moreover, I did not want to lend him 
2ireal. 21. Do you {fam., sing.) like oranges ^i? Yes; but I 
like peaches better. ^^ 22. Do you {fam., pi.) like to read Span- 



98 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

ish books? 23. Yes ; we like to read Spanish and English books 
very much.^^ 24. Read {forfn,^ pi.) from page twenty-seven, 
line fifteen, to page thirty-three, Hne twenty-two. 

1 • my friend.' 2 « on me.' 3 « anything.' 4 « tell me,' Pres. Subj. of 

decir, 5 ' being able.' 6 'what.' ^ Use bueno. 8 convienes en. 

9 nunca. 10 gay : ' asked of-me (dative) twenty-five pesetas' n Say : ' do 

the oranges please {gustar) you ? ' 12 gay : ' but please me more the 

peaches.' 13 < very much,' mMchisimo. 



LESSON XX 



94. Subjunctive in Dependent Clauses. — The general 
difference between the Spanish indicative and subjunc- 
tive moods is that the indicative states or denies a fact, 
while the subjunctive expresses (i) a wish, (2) doubt or 
uncertainty, or (3) the cause of emotion. 

95. The Spanish subjunctive may be used independently to 
express command or entreaty (as explained in Lesson XVII), 
but it is used much oftener in dependent clauses. There is no 
mood (or but few survivals of one ; cf. * if I were ') in English 
corresponding to the Spanish subjunctive. In cases where the, 
Spanish language requires the subjunctive in subordinate clauses, 
the English has generally the indicative, but sometimes the 
infinitive, the present participle, or the compound forms with 

* should,* ^may,* or ^ might.' 

96. Some of the commoner uses of the dependent 
subjunctive are : 

(i) After expressions oi willing ox forbidding, 

quiero que el escriba la carta, I wish him to write the letter.^ 
prohibo que entres, I forbid your entering. 



LESSON XX 99 

(2) After expressions of doubting ox fearing, 

dudo que seas feliz, I doubt that (whether) you will be happy, or 

I doubt your bei7ig happy. 
temo que no llegue i tiempo, I fear that he will not arrive in time.^ 

A negative or an interrogative verb may express doubt : no creo que 
seas culpable, *I do not beUeve that you are guilty '; i crees que yo sea 
culpable ? * do you beheve that I am guilty ? ' 

(3) After expressions of joy or sorrow, 

siento que usted este enfermo, I am sorry that you are ill. 
me alegro de que estudies el inglls, I am glad that you are studying 
English. 

(4) After expressions of necessity, and after impersonal 
expressions not stressing a fact. 

es necesario que usted estudie mucho, it is necessary that you should 

study a great deal.^ 
es posible que yo vaya, it is possible that I 7nay go ; c/., es verdad 

que fu6, it is true that he went. 

(5) After certain conjunctions when the verb denotes future 
or indefinite time. The commonest of these conjunctions 
are : 

para que, in order that. antes que, before. 

cuando, when. hasta que, until, 

mientras or mientras que, while, as long as. aunque, although, even if. 
luego que, as soon as. 

para que lo creas, in order that you ??iay believe it. 
mientras dure la vida, as long as life lasts. 

1 But, yo quiero escribir la carta, ' I wish to write the letter ' ; temo no llegar 
a tiempo, ' I fear that I shall not arrive on time,' etc. Here the infinitive is 
used because the main and the dependent verbs have the same subject. 

2 But, es necesario estudiar mucho, ' it is necessary to study much.* 
The infinitive is used here because its subject is not expressed and the obli- 
gation is a general one. 

LofC. 



lOO SPANISH GRAMMAR 

no lo vendas antes que yo llegue, do not sell it before I arrive. 
no lo acabare aunque trabaje todo el dia, I shall not finish it although 
(even if) I work all day.^ 

(6) After a relative with an indefinite antecedent (subjunc- 
tive of characteristic). 

busco un hombre que hable espa- no encuentro k nadie que hable 
nol, I am looking for a man espanol, I do not find any one 

who speaks Spanish. who speaks Spanish. 

Note also the following : 

^^. The present subjunctive may denote either present or future time. 
b. Que is rarely omitted in Spanish : teme que no lleguemos a tiempo, 

*he fears (that) we shall not arrive on time.' 

But it is sometimes omitted after verbs denoting request, permission, etc. 

te suplico tengas la bondad de decirmelo, I beg you to be kind enough 

to tell me. 
permita le diga que no es verdad, let me tell you that it is not so. 

97. Idiomatic Expressions. 

por malo que sea, however bad he sea lo que sea, whatever it may 

may be. be. 

por mas dinero que gane, lo gasta dure que dure, however long it may 

todo, whatever money he earns, last; let it last as long as it will. 

he spends it all. 

Exercise XX 

A, I . El esta enamorado : y si lo esta, i que mal Kay en 
ello? 2. Ella prefiere vivir sola aunque para ello tenga que 
trabajar dia y noche. 3. Este nino es mi hijo, 6 lo mismo 
que si lo fuera.^ 4. Siento estar enfermo ; siento que tii 
est^s enfermo; tu sientes que yo est^ enfermo. 5. No 
quiero escribir la carta : quiero que Pablo la eScriba. Digale 
usted que la escriba. 6. El sastre quiere que tu pagues el 

1 But the indicative, not the subjunctive, is used if the verb does not denote 
future or indefinite time. Compare: ire aunque Uueva, ' I shall go even if it 
should rain ' ; ire aunque llueve, ' I shall go even if it is raining (now),' 



LESSON XX lOI 

vestido mafiana. — Bueno ; lo paga;re manana. 7. Tengo 
miedo de morir. Tengo miedo de ^ que ella muera, y ella tiene 
miedo de ^ que yo muera. 8. Yo no deseo perder un mo- 
mento, y deseo que tu no pierdas tampoco un momento. 
9. Yo no puedo consentir en^ que estos j6venes gasten el di- 
nero, pierdan el tierapo, y no aprendan nada.^ 10. Cortar6 
todos estos arboles para que tengamos lefia para el in- 
vierno. 11. Yo no he nacido para amar, ni para que me 
amen. 12. ^jPartira usted manana? — Es posible que yo 
parta manana? 13. ^Cree usted que sea ella feliz? — Parece 
serlo : tal vez lo sera tambien. 14. <i Crees que nuestro padre 
llegue hoy? — No; creo que llegara manana. 15. ^iQui^n 
habra que resista al invencible poder de Dios? 16. ^ Conoce 
usted alguna persona de este pueblo que hable y escriba bien 
el castellano ? 1 7- Si, sefior ; conozco a una mujer que habla 
y escribe muy bien el castellano. 18. Llamar^ un criado 
que lleve esta carta al correo. 19. Segiin dice^ el refran, no 

hay mal que dure cien afios. 20. Pedid lo que querais, y 
OS lo dare^ si lo tengo. 21. Voy^ esta noche a la 6pera 
aunque llueva, pero creo que no llovera. 22. Pero, \ hom- 
bre ! Ya llueve. — Bueno ; voy a la 6pera aunque llueve. 

B. I. It is lightning (there is lightning), and I fear that it will 
rain. I do not think'' so. 2. Is she unhappy? She appears to 
be [so], but I can not beheve that she is [so]. 3. Is your (/am., 
sing.) mother very ill ? Yes; she is [so]. 4. I regret that she is 
ill, and I hope that she will be well soon. 5. He is sorry (he 
regrets) that he is ill, and I also am sorry that he is ill. 6. I wish 
to write the letter. I do not wish you (form., sing.) to write it. 
7. My father has forbidden my smoking, and I shall not smoke any ^ 
more. 8. Do you (/am., sing.) believe that they are happy? 

9. I beheve that he is happy, but I fear that she is unhappy. 

10. I doubt whether s he will arrive on time, but I do not doubt 
that he will try^ to do so. 11. Have (form., sing.) the kindness 
to wait here until I return. 12. I desire to speak to you, and I 
know 10 that you desire to speak to me. 13. As soon as you (/am.. 



102 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

sing.') read this letter, throw it into the fire. 14. As soon as 1 
had read the letter, I threw it into the fire. 15. He says ^^ that he 
will work even if^^ ^g ^ndiy be tired. 16. He is working now 
although he is very tired. 17. I shall give you the money so that 
(in order that) you may buy whatever ^^ you wish. 18. It is 
necessary to work hard to^^ earn one's ^^ living. 19. It is not 
necessary for Mr. Montejo to work hard^^ to earn his^^ living. 
20. Who is there that will help me? I know ^^ one person that will 
help you {fam., sing.). It is I. 21. Can you {fam.^ sing.) find 
a boy to take^^ this letter to the postoffice? 22. I have found a 
boy who will take the letter to the postoffice. 23. I beg you 
{fonn., sing.) not to be angry with your brother. There is no 
cause for^^ it. 24. Do (^fonn., sing.) not worry, Madam. Your 
son will accompany you if you will permit him to accompany you. 
25. Who has arrived? I do not know^^ who has arrived. You 
ought to know [it] : it is your father. 

1 • were. ' 2 Do not translate. 3 « anything.' 4 Pres. Ind. of decir, 

5 • I shall give it to you.' 6 ' \ am going.' ^ Use creer. 8 Use que, 

9 Use the Ind. Mood after ' I do not doubt.' 10 ^e. H dice, 12 aunque, 
13 lo que. 14 para. 15 Use the Def. Art. 16 Say : ' that Mr. Montejo 

should-work hard.' '^'^ conozco, i^Say: ' that may-take.* '^^ motivo para. 



LESSON XXI 



98. Prepositional Forms of the Personal Pronouns. — 

When personal pronouns are governed by a preposition, 
the following forms are used : 

Singular Plural 

\st Pers, mi, me. nosotros (-as), us. 

id Per s, ti, you, thee. vosotros (-as), you. 

' T X. f Masc, el, him, it. 1 „ ^ x .-. 

-xdPers.i ^ „ , • ^ ellos (-as), them. 

^ I Fern, ella, her, it. j ^ ^ 

ello, it {referring to an idea or statement) . 

Note that these are the same in form as the subject-pronouns, with the 
exception of mi and ti. 



LESSON XXI 



103 



Usted and si, * himself/ 'herself/ etc., are also used with 
prepositions. 

compre el caballo para ti (para usted), I bought the horse for you. 
quiero hablar con el (con ella), I wish to speak with him (with her). 

a. When con, * with,' governs mi, ti, or si, the preposition and the 
pronoun unite to form one word, and the combination ends with the syllable 
-go : conmigo, * with me '; contigo, ' with you '; and consigo, ' with him° 
self (herself, etc.).i 

99. Subjunctive. Imperfect Tenses, 
(i) Regular Verbs. 
Hablar : 



Temer : 



Singular 
I. hablase 


First Form 


I. 


Plural 
hablasemos 


2. hablases 




2. 


hablaseis 


3. hablase 
I. hablara^ 


Second Form 


3. 
I. 


hablasen 
hablaramos 


2. hablaras 




2. 


hablarais 


3. hablara 




3. 


hablaran 


Singular 
I. temiese 


First Fo7'm 


I. 


Plural 
temiesemos 


2. temieses 




2. 


temieseis 


3. temiese 




3. 


temiesen 


I. temiera 


Second Form 


I. 


temi^ramos 


2. temieras 




2. 


temierais 


3. temiera 




3- 


temieran 



1 In early Spanish, 'with me,* 'with thee * 'with himself* (etc.), were migo,,. 
tigo, sigo (from Latin, mecum, tecum, secum). Later, con was prefixed, so 
that the modern forms conmigo, contigo, consigo, express ' with ' twice. 

2 The imperfect subjunctive in -ra is derived from the Latin pluperfect in- 
dicative \ama{ve)ra{7}i) > afnara], and it is sometimes still used in Spanish, 
with the force of an indicative pluperfect or preterite. 



104 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



Vivir : 



Singular 

1. viviese 

2. vivieses 

3. viviese 

1. viviera 

2. vivieras 

3. viviera 



First Form 



Second Form 



Plural 

1. viviesemos 

2. vivieseis 

3. viviesen 

1. vivi^ramos 

2. vivierais 

3. vivieran 



Note that the imperfect subjunctive has two forms, that in -se and that 
in -ra. In dependent clauses there is usually little choice between the 
two. The form in -se is perhaps used the oftener in Spain, while in some 
parts of Spanish America only the form in -ra is in common use. 

(2) Radical-changing Verbs. 

THIRD CONJUGATION 
Sentir : 



Pedir : 



Singular 


First Form 




Plural 


I. sintiese 




I. 


sinti6semos 


2. sintieses 




2. 


sintieseis 


3. sintiese 


Second Form 


3. 


sintiesen 


I. sintiera 




I. 


sintieramos 


2. sintieras 




2. 


sintierais 


3. sintiera 




3- 


sintieran 


Singular 


First Form 




Plural 


I. pidiese 




I. 


pidiesemos 


2. pidieses 




2. 


pidieseis 


3. pidiese 


Second Form 


3. 


pidiesen 


I. pidiera 




I. 


pidieramos 


2. pidieras 




2. 


pidierais 


3. pidiera 




3- 


pidieran 



LESSON XXI 



105 



Dormir : 



Singular 

1. durmiese 

2. durmieses 

3. durmiese 

1. durmiera 

2. durmieras 

3. durmiera 



First Form 



Second Form 



Plural 

1. durmiesemos 

2. durmieseis 

3. durmiesen 

1. durmieramos 

2. durmierais 

3. durmieran 



a. The subjunctive imperfect tenses are built up on the same stem as 
that of the third person, singular or plural, of the preterite. This is true 
of all irregular verbs. 

b. The radical-changing e and verbs of the first and second conju- 
gations are regular in the imperfect subjunctive. 

c. The -ra subjunctive is sometimes called the Conditional Subjunctive. 
Note that the accent remains on the same vowel throughout the tvv^o im- 
perfect subjunctives. 

100. In dependent clauses the imperfect subjunctive 
is used instead of the present, when the verb of the 
main clause is past. Compare the following sentences : 

deseo que el escriba la carta, I wish him to write the letter. 

desear§ que 61 escriba la carta, I shall wish him to write the letter. 

deseaba que el escribiese, or escribiera, la carta, I wished (was wish- 
ing) him to write the letter. 

desee que el escribiese, or escribiera, la carta, I wished him to write 
the letter. 

prohibo que entres, I forbid your entering. 

prohibir6 que entres, I shall forbid your entering. 

prohibia que entrases, or entraras, I forbade (was forbidding) your 

entering. 
prohibi que entrases, or entraras, I forbade your entering. 

temo que usted no llegue k tiempo, I fear that you will not arrive on 
time. 



I06 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

temere que usted no llegue a tiempo, I shall fear that you will not 
a7'rive on time. 

temia que usted no llegase, or llegara, a tiempo, I feared (was fear- 
ing) that you would not arrive on time. 

temi que usted no llegase, or llegara, a tiempo, I feared that you 
would not arrive on time. 

101. Sequence of Tenses. — A present or future tense 
in the main clause is followed by the present subjunc- 
tive, and a past tense by the imperfect. (See the ex- 
amples given in the preceding paragraph.) 

a. The perfect and the conditional are followed by the present or 
imperfect subjunctive according to the meaning of the sentence. 

el general ha mandado que los prisioneros sean fusilados, the general 

has commanded that the prisoners (should) be shot. 
ayer he escrito a Juan que volviese (volviera) a casa, yesterday I 

wrote to John to return home. 
preferiria que usted la escribiese (escribiera) , I should prefer that you 

(should) write it. 
podria creer que este enfermo, I could believe that he is ill. 

b. After a present or a future tense the imperfect is used to denote a 
past action : siento que usted no llegase, or llegara, a tiempo, I am 
sorry that you did not arrive on time. 

Exercise XXI 

A, I. Nuestra madre compr6 este libro espanol para ti y no 
para mi. 2. Quiere trabajar contigo y conmigo, pero no con 
^1. 3. Cartero; ^ tiene usted algo para mi? 4. Si, senor; 
tengo cartas para usted y periodicos y un paquete grande para 
su senor padre. 5. ^iTe permitieron las senoras que las 
acompafiases {or acompanaras) ? 6. Si ; me permitieron que 
las acompanara {or acompanase). 7. Tengo miedo de morir, 
y tengo miedo de^ que mi madre muera. 8. Dijo^ que tenia 
miedo de morir, y tenia miedo de que su madre muriera {or 



LESSON XXI 107 

miiriese). 9. Hoy vendi mi casa de campo, y siento muchi- 
simo que tu padre no la comprase (or comprara). 10. Dijo 
que sentia mucho que mi padre no la comprara {or comprase). 
II. Yo no desearia perder el tiempo, y no desearia que 
usted lo perdiera tampoco.^ 12. El maestro de idiomas no 
podia consentir en^ que sus discipulos gastasen (or gastaran) 
el dinero, y no aprendieran (or aprendiesen) el castellano. 
13. Le pregunte si partiria manana, y me respondi6 que 
era posible que partiera (or partiese) hoy. 14. Mi hermano 
creia que nuestra madre llegaria hoy, pero yo no creia que 
ella llegase {or llegara) tan pronto. 15. Yo lo sentia 

muchisimo, y le suplique que me perdonara (or perdonase). 
16. Dijo que iba^ a la 6pera aunque lloviese (or lloviera), y 
fue^ aunque llovia. 17. Tu madre y yo rogabamos a Dios 
todos los dias que te conservase (or conservara) la vida y que 
protegiese (or protegiera) tu alma. 18. Yo he prohibido que 
tu fumes tabaco, £no es verdad? 19. Si, seiior ; usted prohibi6 
que yo fumara (or fumase) tabaco, y no fumare mas. 20. Les 
aconsej6 que estudiasen (or estudiaran) el castellano; pero 
no querian estudiar ningun^ idioma extranjero. 21. Mi tio 
me aconsej6 que no llevara (or llevase) todo mi dinero conmigo. 

22. Me dijo que no llevaba nunca^ todo su dinero consigo. 

23. Copiar^ la carta para que mi padre la lea. 24. Dijo que 
copiaria la carta para que su padre la leyese^ (or leyera). 
25. Cuando Uegamos al palacio, no habia portero ni criados 
que impidiesen (or impidieran) la entrada. 26. Prometi6 
pagarme cien pesos cuando tuviese (or tuviera) el dinero. 
27. Le escribi que no vendiese (or vendiera) el ganado antes 
que yo llegara (or llegase) ; pero lo vendi6 antes que yo llegu6. 

B. I. He has presents for you (^fa?n.y sing.) and for her, and 
she has presents for him and for me. 2. They (masc) can't ^ 
live without us (/^;//.), and we can't ^^ live without them. 3. I 
am content with you {fam.^ sing,) and with her, but I am not con- 



I08 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

tent with him. 4. This house is very large, and many people live 
in it. 5. This tree is very high, and there are many birds in it. 

6. We {fern.) run and play a great deal, but what harm is there in it? 

7. My father says ^^ it is a pity that I don't study more. 8. He 
says it is a pity that I didn't study more last year. 9. It is true 
that I don't study much : I should study more. 10. We were very 
sorry, ladies, that you did not permit Mr. Navarro to accompany you. 
1 1 . My mother wished to speak to the stranger, but my father did 
not wish her to speak to him. 12. Did you {fam., pi.') believe 
that Mr. Herrera would leave for ^^ Madrid today? 13. Yes ; we be- 
lieved that he would leave today, and he has already left. 14. She 
asked me to pardon her, and I promised to pardon her. 15. There- 
fore, I shall pardon her. 16. Wasn't it necessary to He? No; it 
wasn't necessary for you (^fam.^ sing.) to He. Never ^^ lie. 17. He 
asked me to wait here until he returned, and I did wait until he 
returned. 1^ 18. He promised me that he would write the exercise for 12 
tomorrow even if he found it difficult. 19. And, although he found 
it very difficult, he wrote it. 20. My father has forbidden my run- 
ning and playing so-much. ^^ 21. He had already forbidden my 
smoking tobacco. 22. Your (^fa^ji.^ sing.) mother would prefer that 
you return home at once. She wishes to see you. 23. John, I 
bought this book that^^ you (^fani.., sing.) might read it, and I wish 
you to read it. 24. My mother said that she had bought the book 
that I might read it, and she wished me to read it. 25. I shall pay 
the bill whenever ^^ the tailor desires me to pay it. 26. He said 
that he would pay the bill whenever the tailor desired him to pay it ; 
but he hasn't paid it yet. 

1 Omit. 2 Pret. of decir. 3 « either.' 4 imp. Ind. of ir. 5 Pret. of 
e> (3d pers. sing.). 6 « any.' 7 'ever.' ^ leyese = le-iese {^ 216) . ^ no 
pueden. 10 no podemos. H dice. '^'^ para. 13 j^o . . . nunca (placing the 
verb between) . 1^ in this and similar sentences use the subjunctive only 
when the time is indefinite and future with regard to the main verb. 15 tanto, 
'^^ para que. 17 cuando. 



LESSON XXII 109 

LESSON XXII 

102. When a verb has two personal pronoun objects, 
the indirect precedes the direct object. 

me lo da, he gives it to me. os las da, he gives them to you. 

te la da, he gives it to you. damelo, give it to me. 

nos los da, he gives them to us. danoslos, give them to us. 

a. If both pronoun objects are in the third person, se is used as 
indirect object in the place of le or les. Thus, instead of either le lo da, 
or les lo da, one says se lo da. This se is derived from an old dative 
form of the personal pronoun of the third person,^ and is in no way 
related to the reflexive pronoun se. 

b. When the direct object is a pronoun of the first or the second per- 
son, the indirect object is usually separated from the verb and assumes 
the prepositional form after a, * to.' 

me presenta a ellos, he presents me to them. 
te presenta a mi, he presents you to me. 
nos presentan a usted, they present us to you. 
pres^ntame a el, present me to him. 

103. Each of the indirect object-pronouns le, les, and se 
(= le or les) has several meanings : hence, to avoid asmbiguity, 
it is often necessary to use two pronouns to express the same 
idea, — an indirect object-pronoun and the corresponding 
prepositional form with a. 

le da el libro d el (d ella, a usted), he gives the book to him (to her, 

to you). 
les da la casa k ellos (a ellas, k ustedes), he gives the house to them, 

masc. (to them,/^;;/. ; to yow, phir.), 
se lo da k el (a ella, a usted, a ellos, a ellas, k ustedes), he gives it to 

him (to her, to you, to them, masc. ; to them,/^;;/. ; to you, plur.) . 

a. This double construction is also used with either direct or indirect 
object-pronouns of the first, the second, or the third person, to add einphasis, 

1 Written ge in old Spanish. 



no 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



The pronouns me, te, le, la, lo, nos, os, los, las, les, and se can not be made 
emphatic by being stressed: 'give it to w^,' with the stress on * me,' can 
not be translated by damelo, with the stress on me, but must be expressed 
by damelo a mi, with the stress on mi. 

te lo da d ti, he gives it to you. me quiere educar k mi tambiln, he 
ddnosla a nosotros, give it to us. wishes to educate me too. 

The prepositional pronoun may precede the verb (except an imperative), 
and it is then still more emphatic. 

k mi me lo da, he gives it to me. 

This usage is often extended to nouns : a mi padre no le gusta, * it 
doesn't please my father.' 

104. Subjunctive Imperfect : Tener, Haber, Ser, Estar. 

Tener : 



Singular 

1. tuviese 

2. tuvieses 

3. tuviese 

1. tuviera 

2. tuvieras 

3. tuviera 



First Form 



Second Form 



Haber : 



Singular 

1. hubiese 

2. hubieses 

3. hubiese 

1. hubiera 

2. hubieras 

3. hubiera 



First Form 



Second Form 



Plural 

1. tuviesemos 

2. tuvieseis 

3. tuviesen 

1. tuvieramos 

2. tuvierais 

3. tuvieran 



Plural 

1. hubi§semos 

2. hubieseis 

3. hubiesen 

1. hubilramos 

2. hubierais 

3. hubieran 



LESSON XXII 



III 



Sen 



Estar 



Singular 


First Form 


Plural 


I. fuese 




I. fu§semos 


2. fueses 




2. fueseis 


3. fuese 


Second Form 


3. fuesen 


I. fuera 




I. fu6ramos 


2. fueras 




2. fuerais 


3. fuera 




3. fueran 


r:. 
Singular 


First Form 


Plural 


I. estuviese 




I. estuviesemos 


2. estuvieses 




2. estuvieseis 


3. estuviese 


Second Form 


3. estuviesen 


I. estuviera 




I. estuvi^ramos 


2. estuvieras 




2. estuvierais 


3. estuviera 




3. estuvieran 



105. Subjunctive. Pluperfect Tense. 
Hablar : 



Singular 

1. hubiese hablado 

2. hubiese s hablado 

3. hubiese hablado 

1. hubiera hablado 

2. hubieras hablado 

3. hubiera hablado 



First Form 



Second Form 



Plural 

1. hubi§semos hablado 

2. hubieseis hablado 

3. hubiesen hablado 

1. hubi^ramos hablado 

2. hubierais hablado 

3. hubieran hablado 



a. Hubiese and hubiera, used impersonally, mean * there might be,' etc.; 
hubiese, or hubiera, habido, * there might have been.' 



112 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

106. A present condition " contrary to fact '' may be 
expressed in either one of the following ways : 

si tuviese, or tuviera, dinero, lo compraria, ^ if I had moneyj I should 
si tuviese, or tuviera, dinero, lo comprara, | buy it. 

Note that the imperfect subjunctive in -ra may occur in the result 
(apodosis) as well as in the condition (protasis), while the imperfect in 
-se occurs only in the condition, and the conditional indicative only in 
the result. 

a. The condition may, of course, either precede or follow the result : 
si tuviese tiempo, iria, * if I had time, I should go,' or iria si tuviese 
tiempo, * I should go if I had time.' 

b. The conjunction si is sometimes followed by a conditional indica- 
tive, and si then means * whether': no supe si vendria, 'I did not know 
whether he would come.' 

107. Idiomatic Expressions. 

I ojala que viva mil anos ! oh, that he may, or I hope he will, live a 

thousand years ! 
i ojala que viviese, or viviera, mil anos ! oh, that he might, or I wish 

he would, live a thousand years ! 
quisiera ^ estudiar el frances, I should like, or I should be glad, to study 

French, 
quisiera que tu estudiases, or estudiaras, el frances, I should like you 

to, or I wish you would, study French. 
I quien escribiera ! oh, if I could only write ! 

Exercise XXII 

^. I. fil nos ama a nosotros, y nosotros le amamos a d. 
2. Lo {or le) matare, 6 me matara el a mi. 3. Me quieren 
educar a mi tambien ; pero yo no quiero que me eduquen. 
4. Ahora te toca a ti. — Si ; ahora me toca a mi. 5. Luego 
OS tocara a vosotros. — Si ; luego nos tocara a nosotros. 6. No 
la entiendo a usted, sefiora. — Caballero, yo no le entiendo a 

1 Imperf. Subj. of querer. 



LESSON XXII 113 

usted tampoco. 7. Se lo he dicho ^ a el y no a ella. No he 
querido decirselo a ella. 8. ^Quieres prestarme tu bicicleta? 
— Si; te la quiero prestar con mucho gusto. 9. Mi padre 
queria que yo se lo prometiese, y se lo prometi. 10. Ella 
queria que yo le leyera la carta ; pero yo no queria leersela. 
II. ^iPuedo pedirle a usted un favor? — i No, hombre, no! 
Siempre me pide usted favores. 12. Tu no eres hijo de mi 
hermano. Si lo fueras, no me insultarias como me has insul- 
tado. 13. J Cuanto siento que no estuviera usted a mi lado ! 
14. Hijo mio^; yo quisiera que tu me acompanaras esta 
noche. 15. Si lo hubiese hallado, te lo hubiera entregado. 

16. Si usted la amara, no la trataria asi. 17. Si usted no 
me quisiera^ a mi, no la querria yo a usted. 18. La gra- 

matica seria buena, si no hubiese tantas faltas en ella. 19. Yo 
se lo habria pedido a usted, si hubiera sabido que usted lo 
tenia. 20. Vivo en Espana desde hace diez afios, y no he 
aprendido bien el espafiol. 21. Me sorprende que usted 
viva en Espana desde hace diez afios, y no haya aprendido el 
espafiol. 22. El senor Pelayo dijo que le sorprendia que 
yo viviera en Espafia desde hacia diez afios, y no hubiese apren- 
dido bien el espafiol. 

B, I. Will he give^ the book to you {fa?n.y st7tg.)l Yes; he 
will give it to me. 2. Will he give the house to us? No ; he will 
not give it to us. 3. Will he give these chairs and tables to you 

(/^;//.,//.) ? We believe that he will give them to us. 4. Will 
he give his two black horses to you {fa7n., sijig.)"^ Yes; he will 
give them to me. 5. Did I present him to you {fain.^ si7ig.)l 
Yes ; you {fam., sing.) presented him to me. 6. Did we present 
you (^fam., sing.) to her? Yes; you (^fam.., pi.) presented me to 
her a short while ago. 7. If you (^fam.^ sing.) are-willing to lend 
me your umbrella, lend it to me. 8. If you are not willing to 
lend it to me, do not lend it to me. 9. If you (^forr?i.^ si7tg.) are- 
willing to lend us two chairs, lend them to us. 10. If you are not 
willing to lend them to us, do not lend them to us. 11. If I 



114 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

am-willing to present you (^farn.^ sing.) to her, I shall present you 
to her. 12. Do {fain.^ sing.') not present me to her, if you do 
not wish to do so.^ 13. I shall send him Mty pesetas, and I shall 

send her one hundred pesetas. 14. Will you {forjn., sing.) not 
send me also fifty pesetas ? 15. Yes ; I will send them to you 
{form., sing.) if you promise me that you will not spend them the 
first day. 16. I do not like^ this weather, but you {fam., sing.) 
do like it. 17. We do not like this lamp, but you (fa^n., pi.) 
do like it. 18. He doesn't like to live in Madrid, but she does.' 
19. You {form., pi.) like to study Spanish, but they do not like 
to.^ 20. I love him, but I love her more. She loves me, but she 
loves him more. 21. If I had the money, I should buy this dog; 
but I haven't the money, and consequently I shan't buy it. 22. I 
wish 9 you {form., si?tg.) would lend me your bicycle. I shall be 
glad to ^° lend it to you. 23. Will you {fain., pi.) not present us 
to the French ladies? We should present you {fam., pi.) to them, 
if you spoke French. 24. But you do not speak French, and they 
do not speak English. 25. I should like to study Spanish and 
French, and I should like you {form., pi.) to study these languages. 
We should study them if we had the time. 

1 Past Part, of decir. 2 <■ my son.' 3 Querer d means 'to love,* * to be 

fond of.' 4 dard. ^ hacerlo. 6 Use gustar. "* Say : ' but she does 

like (it).' 8 Omit. 9 quisiera. 10 Say: ' I shall have much pleasure in' 
(followed by the Infin.). 



LESSON XXIII 



108. He and Si. — The reflexive pronouns se and si 
are masculine or feminine, singular or plural. Se is 
used as the direct or indirect object of a verb ; si as the 
object of a preposition. Whenever the subject of a verb 
is a noun or a pronoun of the third person, and is repre- 
sented as acting, either directly or indirectly, on itself, 
se is used as the object-pronoun and si as the preposi- 
tional form. 



LESSON XXIII 



115 



el se alaba, he praises himself. 
usted se engana, you deceive 

yourself. 
Antonio se compr6 un sombrero, 

Anthony bought himself a hat. 



Onofre habla siempre de si, Ono- 
fre is always talking about 
himself. 

sirvase Vd. decirme, please tell 
me. 



a. Reflexive se, whether direct or indirect object, always precedes 
another object-pronoun : se me figura, ' it seems to me.' (Here se is the 
direct, me the indirect, object.) 

109. In the first and second persons there is no especial form 
of reflexive pronoun, but the object- pronouns may become 
reflexive. Thus, the indicative present tense of enganarse, ' to 
deceive one's self,' is 



me engano, I deceive myself. 

te enganas, you deceive your- 
self. 

se engana, he (she) deceives him- 
self (herself) . 



nos enganamos, we deceive our- 
selves. 

OS enganais, you deceive your- 
selves, [selves. 

se enganan, they deceive them- 



a. If Enghsh * myself,' 'ourselves,' 'thyself,' etc., are emphatic, they 
are to be expressed in Spanish by the reflexive pronoun in the preposi- 
tional form, modified by mismo (-a, -os, -as). 

me engano k mi mismo, I deceive myself. 

usted se engana a si mismo, you deceive yourself, 

Onofre habla siempre de si mismo, Onofre is always talking about hi77iself 

In these expressions propio may replace mismo. 

ella se ama a si propia, she loves herself 

b. Many verbs require the reflexive construction in Spanish, but not in 
English. 



acostarse, (to) go to bed (lit., *to 

recline one's self). 
levantarse, (to) arise, or to get up 

(lit., to raise one's self). 
sentarse, (to) sit down, or to be 

seated (lit., 'to seat one's self). 
hacerse, or ponerse, (to) become. 



acordarse (de), (to) remember. 

olvidarse, (to) forget. 

alegrarse (de), (to) rejoice (at), 

or (to) be glad (of). 
atreverse (a), (to) dare, 
reirse (de), (to) laugh (at), etc,^ 

etc. 



Il6 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

c. Some intransitive verbs may be used as reflexives, with change of 
meaning. 

ir, (to) go. dormirse, (to) fall asleep. 

irse, (to) go away. morir, (to) die. 

dormir, (to) sleep. morirse, (to) be dying, etc, 

d. The reflexive construction is often used in Spanish where the passive 
voice is required in English. 

se dice, it is said. aqui se habla espanol, Spanish is spoken here. 

e. The direct reflexive substitute for the passive is usually to be avoided 
if there is a personal subject. Thus, se admira el hombre means '• the 
man admires himself,' and not * the man is admired'; but one can say, se 
admira al hombre, ' the man is admired,' se la trata con distinci6n, *she 
is treated with distinction,' se te llama, ' some one is calling you,' etc. 
If a masculine pronoun of the third person is used, it is in the dative, 

se les admira, they are admired. 

110. In the plural a reflexive verb may become reciprocal; 
that is, several persons or things may be represented as acting 
on one another. Usually no distinction of form is made in 
Spanish between reflexive and reciprocal verbs ; thus, nosotros 
nos enganamos may mean ^we deceive ourselves/ or ^we de- 
ceive one another.' Often, however, the meaning determines 
whether the verb is reflexive or reciprocal, as in la primera vez 
que se vieron y se hablaron, ^ the first time they saw each other 
and spoke to each other.' 

a. A reciprocal verb may be strengthened and made explicit by the use 
of el uno al otro (la una a la otra, los unos a los otros, las unas k las 
otras, or el uno a la otra, la una al otro, etc.). 

OS enganais el uno al otro, you deceive each other, 
se aman las unas k las otras, they love one another. 
se burlan el uno del otro, they make fun of each other. 

The article may be omitted, as in se aborrecen unos k otros, * they hate 
one another.' 



LESSON XXIII 



117 



la gata cogi6 un rat6n y se 
lo comi6, the cat caught a 
mouse and ate it. 



111. The following facts should also be noted : 

a. The ethical dative, or " dative of interest," is much commoner in 
Spanish than in English. 

me tomo la libertad, I take the liberty. 

me lo temo, I fear so. 

no te lo mates, do not kill him. 

b. The forms la and las (cosa or a similar word being understood) may 
be used with the force of an indefinite pronoun. 

el me la habra de pagar, he will pay me for it. 

los pretendientes se las prometen siempre f elices, suitors always promise 
themselves happiness. 

112. Hypothetical Subjunctive. (Also called Fut, Subj.) 
(i) Regular Verbs. 



Singular 

1. hablare 

2. hablares 

3. hablare 

Singular 

1. temiere 

2. temieres 

3. temiere 

Singular 

1. viviere 

2. vivieres 



Hablar 



Temer 



Vivir 



Plural 
hablaremos 
hablareis 
hablaren 

Plural 

temieremos 

temiereis 



3. temieren 

Plural 

1. vivieremos 

2. viviereis 



3. viviere 3. vivieren 

(2) Radical-changing Verbs. 

THIRD CONJUGATION 
Sentir 



Singular 

1. sintiere 

2. sintieres 

3. sintiere 



Plural 

1. sinti^remos 

2. sintiereis 

3. sintieren 



ii8 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



Pedir 



Singular 

1. pidiere 

2. pidieres 

3. pidiere 

Singular 

1. durmiere 

2. durmieres 

3. durmiere 



Dormir 



Plural 

1. pidieremos 

2. pidiereis 

3. pidieren 

Plural 

1. durmieremos 

2. durmiereis 

3. durmieren 



a. The hypothetical subjunctive of the radical-changing e and verbs 
of the first and second conjugations is regular. 

b. It should be noted here that the radical-changing e and verbs of 
the first and second conjugations are regular in all tenses except the 
present indicative, present subjunctive, and imperative ; while those of the 
third conjugation have irregular forms in all tenses except the imperfect, 
future, and conditional indicative. 



(3) Tener, Haber, Ser, Estar. 

Tener 



Singular 

1. tuviere 

2. tuvieres 

3. tuviere 

Singular 

1. hubiere 

2. hubieres 

3. hubiere 

Singular 

1. fuere 

2. fueres 

3. fuere 



Haber 



Ser 





Plural 


I. 


tuvieremos 


2. 


tuviereis 


3. 


tuvieren 




Plural 


I. 


hubieremos 


2. 


hubiereis 


3. 


hubieren 




Plural 


I. 


fueremos 


2. 


fuereis 


3. 


fueren 



LESSON 


XXIII 








Estar 






Singular 








Plural 


I. estuviere 






I. 


estuvieremos 


2. estuvieres 






2. 


estuviereis 


3. estuviere 






3- 


estuvieren 



119 



Note that the hypothetical subjunctive, like the imperfect subjunctive, 
is built up on the preterite (3d person) stem. 

113. Hypothetical Perfect Subjunctive. 

Hablar 



Singular 
I. hubiere hablado 



Plural 

1. hubieremos hablado 

2. hubiereis hablado 

3. hubieren hablado 

a, Hubiere is also used as an impersonal verb. 



2. hubieres hablado 

3. hubiere hablado 



114. Use of the Hypothetical Subjunctive. 

The hypothetical subjunctive always denotes a condition or 
hypothesis. Like the present subjunctive, it denotes either 
present or future time. In the spoken Spanish of today the 
hypothetical subjunctive is rarely used except in proverbs, 
legal expressions, etc. Its place is regularly taken by the 
present subjunctive, or by the present indicative if used with 
si, ' if.' 



si tal pensare (piensa), se en- 

gana, if he thinks so, he is 

mistaken. 
si lo hubiere (ha) dicho, ha men- 

tido, if he has said so, he has 

lied. 
si tuviere (tengo) dinero, lo com- 

prare, if I have money, I shall 

buy it. 



mientras durare (dure) la vida, 
trabajare, as long as life lasts, I 
shall work. 

creelo si quisieres (quieres), be- 
lieve it if you wish. 

es necesario aceptar lo que nos 
dieren (den), it is necessary to 
accept what they give us. 



I20 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



115. In Spanish the commoner forms of conditional sen- 
tences are as follows : 



1. gasto mucho si gano mucho, I 

spend much if I earn much. 

2. gastare mucho si gano (ga- 

nare) mucho, I shall spend 
much if I earn much. 

3. gastaba mucho si ganaba 

mucho, I spent much if I 
earned much. 

4. gasti mucho si gane mucho, 

I spent much if I did earn 
(earned) much. 

5. gastaria mucho si ganase 

mucho, I should spend much 
if I earned much. 

6. gastaria mucho si ganara 



10. 



mucho, I should spend much 
if I earned much. 

gastara mucho si ganase 
mucho, I should spend 
much if I earned much. 

gastara mucho si ganara 
mucho, I should spend 
much if I earned much. 

he gastado mucho si he ga- 
nado mucho, I have spent 
much if I have earned 
much. 

habia gastado mucho si habia 
ganado mucho, I had spent 
much if I had earned much. 



116. When the verb of the conclusion (apodosis) is thrown 
into the subjunctive, the present and future indicative become 
the present subjunctive ; the imperfect, preterite, and con- 
ditional indicative become the imperfect subjunctive ; and the 
perfect and pluperfect indicative become the perfect and plu- 
perfect subjunctive respectively. Thus (cf. parallel sentences 
in preceding paragraph) : 



1. teme que yo gaste mucho si 

gano mucho, he fears that I 
spend much if I earn much. 

2. teme que yo gaste mucho si gano 

(ganare) mucho, he fears that I 
shall spend much if I earn much. 

3. teme que yo gastara (gastase) 

mucho si ganaba mucho, he 
fears that I spent much if I 
earned much. 



teme que yo gastara (gastase) 
mucho si gane mucho, he 
fears that I spent much if I 
did earn (earned) much. 
, 6, 7, 8. teme que yo gastara 
(gastase) mucho si ganase 
(ganara) mucho, he fears 
that I should spend much if 
I earned much. 



LESSON XXIII 121 

9. teme que yo haya gastado 10. teme que yo hubiera (hu- 

mucho si he ganado mucho, biese) gastado mucho si 

he fears that I have spent habla ganado mucho, he 

much if I have earned fears that I had spent much 

much. if I had earned much. 

Note that the verb of the condition (protasis) is not attracted into the 
subjunctive in i, 2, 3, 4, 9, and 10. 

Exercise XXIII 

A, I. Cuando era nifio me acostaba y me levantaba tem- 
prano. 2. Ahora que soy hombre me acuesto y me levanto 
tarde. 3. El hombre se acuesta ; la vaca se echa. 4. Aqui 
se cambia dinero. 5. No se permite fumar aqui. 6. Una 
casa se vende ; la otra se alquila. 7. Se habla mucho de la 

guerra. 8. Se dice que ya se han muerto^ muchos soldados. 
9. El se queja de ella, y ella se queja de el. 10. Parece que 
se odian. 11. El hombre que no se respeta a si mismo no 
es digno de ser^ respetado por los otros. 12. Los ninos 
pueden reirse y llorar casi al mismo tiempo. 13. El cama- 
le6n se puede poner bianco, negro, 6 verde. 14. La ira 
puede llamarse la peor de las pasiones. 15. Se sintio algo 
cansado y se sent6 al pie de un arbol. 16. Las dos mujeres 

se abrazaron y besaron ; pero todo el mundo sabe que no se 
amaban. 1 7. El ano pr6ximo pienso marcharme a Espana, y 
es probable que me quede alH por algunos afios. 18. \ Como 
se parece la nifia a la mujer ! 19. No son parientes ; pero 
se parecen mucho una a otra. 20. Este hombre es muy 
vanaglorioso : se alaba siempre a si, habla mucho de si y con- 
sigo, y no piensa sino en^ si mismo. 21. Si me casase con 
usted seria menester que usted me gustara, y la verdad es que 
usted no me gusta. 22. ^[Se ha marchado ya tu primo? — 
Si, senor; se hallaba sin ocupaci6n. 23. Nosotras nos bur- 
lamos de ellos, y ellos se burlan de nosotras. 2^., Se^ te^ 



122 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

llama, nino : vete.^ — No me importa que me 11am en : no 
quiero irme. 25. Callate, nino, si no quieres que me enfade. 

26. En caso que lo Kallare {or halle^), se lo enviare a usted 
por correo. 27. Si el no estuviere (or esta^) en casa, se 
lo entregare a su mujer. 28. Te acompanaremos si tu lo 
deseares {or deseas^). 

B, I. I feeP sad; you (^fam.^ sing.) feel sad; he feels sad; we 
feel sad; you {^fa^n., pL) feel sad; they feel sad. 2. I wash my 
hands ^ ; you {fain., sing.) wash your hands; she washes her 
hands; we wash our hands; you {fam., pi.) wash your hands; 
they wash their hands. 3. I speak about myself; you {fain., 
sing.) speak about yourself; you {form., sing.) speak about yourself; 
we speak about ourselves; you {fain., pi.) speak about yourselves; 
they speak about themselves. 4. It seems ^ to me; it seems to 

you {fain., sing.) \ it seems to him; it seems to us; it seems to 
you {fam., pi.) ; it seems to them. 5. I go to bed^^; you {fain., 
sing.) go to bed; she goes to bed; we go to bed; you {fain., pi.) 
go to bed; they go to bed. 6. I am glad^^ of it; you {fain., 
sing.) are glad of it ; you {form., sing.) are glad of it ; we are glad 
of it; you {fam., pi.) are glad of it; they are glad of it. 7. I am 
going to sleep ^^; you {fam., sing.) are going to sleep; he is going 
to sleep ; we are going to sleep ; you {fam., pi.) are going to sleep ; 
they are going to sleep. 8. My name is ^^ Mary ; your {fam., sing.) 
name is John ; her name is Frances ; our names are Peter and Paul ; 
your {fam., pi.) names are Sophia and Trinity; their names are 
Henry and George. 9. I am frightened ^^ ; you {fam., sing.) are 
frightened; you {form., sing.) are frightened; we are frightened; 
you {fam., pi.) are frightened; you {form., pi.) are frightened. 
10. We {masc.) hate each other; you {fam., pi., fem.) hate each 
other; they {masc. ^Vi^ fem.) hate each other. 11. We {fem.) 
embrace and kiss each other; you {fam., pL, fem.) embrace and 
kiss each other; you {form., pi., masc. 2ind fem.) embrace and kiss 
each other. 12. We {masc.) remember ^^ one another; you 

{fam., pi., fem.) remember one another; they {masc. 2ind fem.) 
remember one another. 13. French and Spanish are spoken here, 
but English is not spoken. 14. I go to bed at 9 p.m. and I arise 



LESSON XXIV 123 

at 6 A.M.i^ 15. Please^' {for?H., shig.) sit down if you feel tired. 
16. The father and the son look like each other, but the son is the 
handsomer. 17. The two children poured warm water into the 
wash-basin, and washed their hands and faces with soap. 18. They 
then dried their hands and faces ^^ with a towel, and combed and 
brushed their hair. 

1 Past Part, of morir. 2 ' being.' 3 « of.' 4 < one ' or ' some one.' 

5 Imperative, 2d pers. sing., of irse. ^ The more usual Subj. or Ind. form is 

given in parenthesis. ' Use sentirse. 8 gay : ' I wash me the hands.' 

^ \J)SQ. fig ur arse. '^^ Vi's^^ acostarse. ^'^ Use a /egr arse (de). ^'^ Use dor ?nirse. 
13 Use llamarse. ^^ Use asustarse. 15 Use acordarse [de), 16 Usually 

'A.M.' is expressed by de la mafiana, and ' P.M.' by de la tarde or de la noche. 
1' sirvase usted. 18 Say : ' dried the hands and face and combed them and 
brushed them the hair.* 



LESSON XXIV 

117. Possessive Adjectives. 

Singular 
\st Pers. mio (-a, -os, -as) or mi (mis), my. 
id Pers. tuyo (-a, -os, -as) or tu (tus), your, thy. 
3^ Pers. suyo (-a, -os, -as) or su (sus), his, her, its, your. 

Plural 
\st Pers. nuestro (-a, -os, -as), our. 
id Pers. vuestro (-a, -os, -as), your. 
-^d Pers. suyo (-a, -os, -as) or su (sus), their, your. 

a. Before nouns, the apocopated forms mi, tu, and su are used; and 
after nouns the full forms, mio, tuyo, and suyo. Nuestro and vuestro 
are used either before or after nouns. 

b. Mio (mi) is the possessive corresponding to yo, tuyo (tu) corre- 
sponds to tu, nuestro to nosotros (-as), vuestro to vosotros (-as), and 
suyo (su) to el, ella, ellos (-as), usted, and ustedes. 



124 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

118. Possessive adjectives regularly precede their 
noun, and agree in gender and number with the thing 
possessed, not with the possessor. 

nuestro cabano, our horse. nuestra casa, our house, 

nuestros cabaUos, our horses. nuestras casas, our houses. 

a. In certain indefinite expressions, and sometimes when emphatic, 
the possessive follows its noun. 

cierto amigo mio, a certain friend of mine, 
algunos discipulos nuestros, some pupils of ours. 
los vicios tuyos, your vices. 

b. In direct address, mio is generally used with an unmodified noun in 
the singular, and either mi or mio with a noun modified by an adjective. 

amigo mio, my friend. 

mi querido amigo, or querido amigo mio, my dear friend. 

119. When the thing possessed forms part of the possessor, 
and is the object of a verb, the possessive adjective is generally 
replaced by an indirect object-pronoun and the definite article. 

me corte el dedo, I cut my finger. se quit6 el sombrero, he took 

te salv6 la vida, he saved your life. off his hat. 

The same usage obtains with nouns. 

(le) salv6 la vida a su amigo, he saved his friend's life. 

el viento (le) llev6 el sombrero al cochero, the wind carried away the 

driver's hat. 
voy a romper (le) la cabeza a ese abogado, I am going to break that 

lawyer's head. 

<2. When the possessor is the subject of the verb, and no ambiguity is 
possible, the pronoun is omitted and the definite article alone is used 
instead of a possessive adjective. 

perdi el sombrero, I lost my hat. 

la nina abri6 los ojos y levant6 la cabeza, the girl opened her eyes and 

raised her head. 
tengo los pies mojados y frios, my feet are wet and cold. 



LESSON XXIV 125 

120. Infinitive. 

(i) 'To' before an infinitive is either not expressed in 
Spanish, or it is expressed by a or de. 

quierohablar con usted, I wish to speak with you. 

^spero llegar a tiempo, I hope to arrive on time. 

aprende a escribir, he is learning to write. 

estoy obligado a trabajar mucho, I am obHged to work a great deal. 

tratare de hacerlo, I shall try to do so. 

tengo vergiienza de pedirlo, I am ashamed to ask it. 

a. Most verbs (especially the " modal auxiliaries," deber, querer, etc.) 
take no preposition before a following infinitive; a is required after a verb 
of beginnings teaching, and learning, and after most verbs of motion, 
before a following infinitive ; de is often used to connect a noun or adjec- 
tive with a following infinitive, and is found occasionally between verbs 
(tratar de ver, alegrarse de ir, etc.) . 

b. But * to,' meaning * in order to,' is para : COmo para vivir : no vivo 
para comer, * I eat to live : I do not live to eat.' 

(2) After a preposition, the English present participle^ is to 
be translated usually by the Spanish infinitive. 

antes de comer, before eating. 

partid sin decir adi6s, he left without saying good-bye. 

estoy cansado de leer, I am tired of reading. 

(3) Used as a noun, the infinitive usually takes the definite 
article. 

el comer es indispensable, (to) eat {or eating) is indispensable. 
el saber es util, knowledge is useful. 

121. Present Participle.^ — The present participle is 
invariable ; that is, it may agree, w^ithout changing its 

1 No attempt is here made to distinguish between the present participle and 
the gerund, either in English or in Spanish. 



126 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

form, with a masculine or feminine, a singular or plural, 
noun. 

hablando asi las ninas . . . , the girls speaking thus ... . 
gana el pan cosiendo y bordando, she earns her bread (by) sewing 
and embroidering. 

a. We have seen that hablo means * I speak,' * I do speak ' (^emphatic), 
or *I am speaking' (^progressive)-, hablaba means *I was speaking' 
(^progressive) or ' I used to speak '; hablare means ' I shall speak ' or * I 
shall be speaking' (^progressive), etc. But progressive action may also be 
expressed in Spanish by estar and the present participle : estoy hablando, 
'I am speaking'; estaba hablando,'! was speaking'; estare hablando, 
* I shall be speaking,' etc. The progressive form with estar, however, is 
used less often, and is more emphatic, than the English progressive form 
with 'be.' It is rarely used with the present participles of ser, estar, ir, 
venir, and many other verbs. Instead of estar, the verbs ir, venir, andar, 
are sometimes used to form a periphrastic progressive tense ; va oscure- 
ciendo, 'it is growing dark.' 

122. Past Participle. — Past participles used as adjec- 
tives are inflected like adjectives. 

mi amada patria, my beloved country. 

las cartas estan acabadas, the letters are finished. 

When used to form the perfect tenses, past participles 
are invariable. 

mi madre ha venido, my mother has come. 

las manzanas que he comprado son buenas, the apples that I have 
bought are good. 

a. The following otherwise regular verbs have irregular past parti- 
ciples : 

abrir, (to) open. abierto, opened. 

cubrir, (to) cover. ' cubierto, covered. 

escribir, (to) write. escrito, written. 

imprimir, (to) print, impreso, printed. 



LESSON XXIV 127 

123. Idiomatic Expressions. 

(i) a fe mia, upon my word. 

a pesar nuestro, in spite of us (ourselves). 

no es culpa mia, it is not my fault. 
(2) al leer la carta, upon reading the letter. 

al leer yo la carta, upon my reading the letter. 

Exercise XXIV 

A, Algunos historiadores han creido hallar el origen de los 
Indios americanos en aquellas diez tribus de Israel que fueron 
conquistadas por un rey de Asiria, unos setecientos aiios antes 
de Cristo. Muchos de los vencidos fueron llevados en cautiverio 
y, mezclandose con los conquistadores, perdieron su nacionali- 
dad. Pero, segiin dice ^ Esdras, hubo algunos que formaron el 
proyecto de abandonar la multitud de los Gentiles e irse a un 
lejano pais en donde los hombres nunca habian morado. Al- 
gunos opinan que los desgraciados restos de estas tribus lleva- 
ron a cabo su designio, pasando a la America, y que fueron los 
progenitores de la raza india. La historia s61o dice que avan- 
zaron hasta la Media, y fuera de esto no sabemos nada mas de 
sus viajes, ni aparece prueba alguna de que se estableciesen 
finalmente en la America, excepto una pequena semejanza 
entre las costumbres y ceremonias religiosas de los Indios y los 
antiguos Israelitas. Ambos tenian sus sacerdotes y profetas, 
sus fiestas, festines y sacrificios. Pero ni estos ni otros puntos 
de semejanza que se alegan son bastantes para probar la teoria. 

B. I . Certain plans of yours are good, but our designs are bet- 
ter. 2. In a letter which he has written, John says to me : " My 
dear friend : I am proving a resemblance between the Indians and 
the ten tribes of Israel." 3. They know that it is not your fault, 
but they are tired of carrying out your theories. 4. Before leav- 
ing the land of the Gentiles the tribes had lost their nationality. 
5. To form a plan is easy; to carry it out is difficult. 6. John 
lost his Hfe in America. 7. The wind has carried off the man's 



128 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

hat. 8. When I had (^preterite) opened my eyes, I spoke to the 
Indians. 9. Raising his head, the boy who was weeping said 2; 
"I have cut my hand." 10. Our letter is ^ written. We are 
sending the letter and a present to our beloved sister. 11. Some 
friends of his have printed his book of poems. 12. We were 
speaking to a certain pupil of yours. 13. Upon my word, it is 
not our fault that the door is^ open. 14. We cannot^ live with- 
out eating. 15. Writing is useful, and speaking is not always 
indispensable. 16. In spite of ourselves we are obliged to work 
a-great-deal. 17. Upon my saying good-by, the girls raised their 
heads {sing.). 18. Our hands are cold and our feet are wet. 
19. We know that the ten tribes of Israel were conquered by the 
king of Assyria, and some believe that-they-can ^ (infin.) find the 
origin of the Indian race in these conquered men. But the points 
of resemblance that some historians allege are not sufficient to prove 
our theory. History only says that the conquerors carried (^pret.) 
the tribes into captivity; and that later-on^ the remnants of the 
ancient Israelites left the country of the Gentiles to ^ go to a distant 
country. Apart from their religious customs and ceremonies, there 
appears to be '^ no proof that these unfortunate IsraeHtes were ^ the 
progenitors of the American Indians. But Esdras has written a 
history which says that the Israelites, advancing as far as Media and 
carrying out a certain design of theirs, passed-over to a land where 
the Gentiles were not dwelling. He knows nothing more of their 
plans nor of their journeys. We think that they established {pret.) 
themselves in America. 

1 ' says.' '^ dijo. ^ estd. ^ Use. poder. ^ luego. ^ para. 

7 Omit. ^ fuesen. 



LESSON XXV 

124. Possessive Pronouns. 

Singular 
\st Pers. el mio (la mia, los mios, las mias), mine. 
id Pers. el tuyo (la tuya, los tuyos, las tuyas), yours, thine. 
3^ Pers. el suyo (la suya, los suyos, las suyas) , his, hers, its, or yours. 



LESSON XXV 129 

Plural 
1st Pers. el nuestro (la nuestra, los nuestros, las nuestras), ours. 
2d Pers, el vuestro (la vuestra, los vuestros, las vuestras), yours. 
3^ Pers. el suyo (la suya, los suyos, las suyas), theirs or yours. 

Note that the Spanish possessive pronouns usually require the definite 
article, while the English do not. 

a. Possessive pronouns, like possessive adjectives, agree in gender and 
number vv^ith the things possessed. 

mi casa es mas grande que la tuya, pero prefiero la tuya a la mia, 

my house is larger than yours, but I prefer yours to mine. 

b, Los mios often means ' my people ' ; los tuyos, ' your people,' etc. 
Lo mio means 'mine,' *vv^hat is mine'; lo tuyo, * yours,' *what is 

yours,' etc. 

125. Suyo and su have several meanings ; hence, in order to 
avoid ambiguity, it is often necessary to use de and the proper 
personal pronoun instead of suyo and su. 

(i) Instead of tengo su libro one would then say : 

tengo el libro de el, I have his book.^ 

tengo el libro de ella, I have her book. 

tengo el libro de usted, I have/^//r book. 

tengo el libro de ellos, I have their (jnasc.) book. 

tengo el libro de ellas, I have their {fejn.) book. 

tengo el libro de ustedes, I have your (^plur.) book. 

(2) And instead of tengo el suyo one would say : 

tengo el de el, I have his. 

tengo el de ella, I have hers. 

tengo el de usted, I have yours. 

tengo el de ellos, I have theirs (jnasc.^. 

tengo el de ellas, I have theirs {feju.). 

tengo el de ustedes, I h2i\ tyoiirs {plur.). 

1 One may also say tengo su libro de el (ella, ellos, ellas, usted, ustedes). 



130 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

a. The same construction is used with the possessive case of nouns. 
tengo el libro de Miguel, I have Michael's book. 

tengo el de Miguel, I have Michael's. 

b. The definite article is usually omitted before a possessive pronoun 
(or noun) in predicate. 

esta pluma es mia, this pen is mine. 

esa pluma es de usted, that pen is yours. 

aquella pluma es de Miguel, that pen (over there) is Michael's. 

But the article is used to make an emphatic distinction. 

esta pluma es la mia (la de usted, la de Miguel), this pen (not the 
other) is the one that belongs to me (to you, to Michael^, 

126. Regular Verbs : First, Second, and Third Con- 
jugations. Study §§ 207-212. 

127. Orthographic Changes that occur in the inflection 
of both regular and irregular verbs. Study §§ 213-217. 

Exercise XXV 

A. I. Saque Vd. la pobre mosca del agua en que ha caido. 
2. Averiglie ayer la razon de la conducta de ella. 3. Tu 
tio y el nuestro son amigos intimos del padre de ellos. 4. Co-^ 
nozco a su primo de Vd. 5. Pague Vd. las cuentas que nos 
trajeron^ el sastre y la lavandera, y cojamos el tranvia para ir 
al despacho. 6. Temamos al hombre que no ama a su 
patria. 7. Esta casa es mia ; pague seis mil duros por ella. 

8. Tu tema, el de Carlos, y el mio no tienen las mismas faltas. 

9. Creyendo falsas las noticias de la muerte de ella, mis sobrinas 
no me dijeron^ nada del asunto. 10. Si yerro en lo que 
digo,^ corrijan Vds. los pormenores de mirelaci6n. 11. Dis- 
tingamos lo bianco de lo negro. 12. Las aguas hirvientes 
bulleron en torno del nadador, y pronto desapareci6. 13. No 
arguyamos en favor de semejante sistema. 14. Rece Vd. 
nor el alma del difunto. 15. El capitan se retir6 porque 



LESSON XXVI 131 

muchos de los suyos habian caido, heridos por las balas de los 
enemigos. 16. Continue Vd. su obra segun el plan original, 
y nolavarie en nada. 17. Este aceite hueie mal. 18. No 
delincamos, quebrando esta ley antigua. 19. Venzan los 

soldados a los enemigos de la patria, y sus conciudadanos los 
alabaran. 20. Lo mio no es lo tuyo. 

B. I. My cousins thought that the news of his death was false. ^ 
2. The tailor and the laundress brought their bills yesterday;^ 
let-US-pay them. 3. This letter is ours; that-one is John's. 

4. (Let) the soldier conquer the enemy of his country. 5. Let- 

us-ascertain now the reason of their behavior. 6. This theme 

is mine; let-us-correct the mistakes in it. 7. Your nieces and 

his err in what they say.^ 8. Let them not vary their work in 

any-way ; Charles is continuing his according-to our original plan. 

9. Let them pray for the soul of the soldier who has fallen. 

10. The captain praised his-men, because they had {i7nperf.) 
conquered the enemy. 11. I distinguish what-is-mine from 
what-is-yours. 12. I do not argue in favor of that system, be- 
cause I do not know the details of it. 13. John has Peter's hat, 
Peter has mine, and I have John's. 14. The soldiers burnished 
the metal of their weapons. 15. With my story I drew^ {pret.) 
Charles from his melancholy. 16. Let our fellow-citizens know ^ 
us, and they will say^ that we love our country. 17. These 
flowers are ours and not his ; they smell good.^^ 

1 Pret. oitraer. 2 « told.' ^ < \ say.' 4 gay : ' thought false the news 
of his death.' ^ Put the adverb immediately after the verb. 6 dicen. 

"* Use sacar, ^ conozcan, 9 dirdn. 10 blen. 



LESSON XXVI 

128. Demonstrative Adjectives. 

este (-a, -os, -as), this. 
ese (-a, -os, -as), that. 
aquel (aquella, -os, -as)^ that. 



132 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

a, A demonstrative adjective regularly precedes its noun : esta mujer, 
* this woman.' 

129. Este denotes what is near the speaker ; ese, what is 
near the person addressed ; and aquel, what is remote from 
both. In reference to time, este denotes present time ; ese, a 
near period ; and aquel, remote time. 

esta pluma que yo tengo, this pen aquella pluma que el tiene, that 
which I have. pen which he has. 

esa pluma que tii tienes, that pen esta semana, this week, 
which you have. ese mes, that month. 

aquel ano, that (remote) year. 

130. Demonstrative Pronouns. 

6ste (-a, -OS, -as), this (one). esto, this. 

6se (-a, -OS, -as), that (one). eso, that. 

aquel (aquella, -os, -as), that aquello, that, 
(one). 

The mascuHne and feminine forms take the accent ; the 
neuter (esto, eso, aquello) do not. The neuter pronouns do 
not represent a noun, but a whole phrase, sentence, or idea 
(compare with alio). 

aquella casa es mas alta que §sta, that house is taller than this one. 
no me gustan estas manzanas ; prefiero aqu611as, I do not Hke those 

apples; I prefer those (over there). 
esos son mios, those (near you) are mine. 
^crees esto? do you believe this (which I have just told) ? 
no comprendo eso, I do not understand that (which you have just 

told me) . 
aquello parece imposible, that (affair of which we are told) seems 

impossible. 

a. Este sometimes means * the latter,' and aqu61 * the former.' 

b. The English pronoun *that ' (not denoting a specific object) is esto, 
when it denotes what has to do with the speaker: ,icrees esto? *do you 



LESSON XXVI 133 

believe that (which I have just told you) ? ' An unemphatic * that ' is often 
not to be expressed in Spanish : sera magnifico, * that will be fine.' 

c. In correspondence, en (de, a) esta means ' in (from, to) the writer's 
town,' and en (de, a) esa means * in (from, to) the correspondent's town,' 
ciudad, ' town,' or plaza, ^ ' market,' being understood : sail ayer de esa y 
llegue hoy a esta, * I left your town yesterday, and arrived here to-day.' 

131. Before a relative clause, and before a phrase introduced 
by de, the definite article is generally used instead of a demon- 
strative or personal pronoun.^ 

el que desea mucho siempre es pobre, he who desires much, is always 

poor, 
esta muchacha es la que usted buscaba, this girl is the one (that) 

you were looking for. 
aquellos caballos son los que vimos ayer, those horses are the ones 

(thaf) we saw yesterday. 
lo que dice es verdad, what {or that which) he says, is true. 
el de la barba, the one with the beard. 
la pluma de acero y la de oro, the steel pen and the gold one (lit., 

* the pen of steel and that of gold '). 
el perro de usted y el de su amigo, your dog and that of your friend 

(your dog and your friend's) . 
lo de ayer, the affair of yesterday. 

a. The demonstrative adjective aquel may replace the article. This 
occurs often when the following relative is the object of a preposition. 

aquella a quien he escrito la carta, the one to whom I have written the 

letter. 
aquel de la capa verde, that one with the green cloak, 
aquello de ayer, that affair of yesterday. 

1 In Mexico, plaza often means ' village,' or ' small town.' 

2 When thus used, el is sometimes called a pronoun, but it seems best to 
call it an adjective (the article) when it limits the application of an adjective, a 
phrase, or a clause, used substantively : as in el bianco, * the white one ' ; el de 
la capa- verde, ' the one with the green cloak ' ; el que vino ayer, ' the one that 
came yesterday.' Note the same use of the adjective aquel, given below in a, 

I 



134 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

132. Radical-changing Verbs. — First Class. Study 
§§ 221-228. 

Exercise XXVI 

A, I. ^No entiende Vd. lo que prueba este argumento? — 
Si, pero no lo creo bastante fuerte. 2. Hay dos manzanas 
maduras en este plato : esta es la mia y aquella es la de Juan. 

3. Este invierno nieva muchisimo y hiela muy a menudo. 

4. Cu^ntenos Vd. lo que aconteci6 ayer tarde. 5. Al pre- 
sente llueve en ^sta y a menudo truena ; espero que haga buen 
tiempo en esa. 6. El bibliotecario desea que Vds. le devuel- 
van el libro que les presto esta manana. 7. Los historia- 
dores nos recuerdan los hechos de los que eran personajes 
principales en el tiempo pasado. 8. Aunque el soldado se 
defiende con atrevimiento heroico, no vencera al enemigo 
poderoso que le acomete. 9. Despiertate, Enrique, ya son 
las ocho. 10. Como me duelen la cabeza y los dientes, no 
pienso salir hoy. 11. <iQue piensan los Franceses y los 
Ruses de la nueva coalici6n entre los Ingleses y los Alemanes? 
12. Nuestra madre piensa siempre en nosotros cuando estamos 
ausentes. 13. No es la vanidad lo que mueve a esta mujer, 
sino su terquedad. 14. El duque de Jicara es aquel de quien 
hablamos : desciende de un guerrero celebre de la Edad Media. 
15. A causa de la fiebre amarilla el ejercito americano pierde 
muchos hombres en Cuba. 16. Nuestras hermanas vier- 
ten un raudal de lagrimas cuando piensan en su buena tia. 
1 7. Esta criada y la de la nariz remangada no son bonitas, pero 
son hacendosas. 18. El que no guarda las leyes humanas, 
no obedece tampoco las leyes divinas, y pierde la estimaci6n de 
sus compatriotas. 

B. I. He has a toothache and is shedding a lot of tears. 
2. We hope that our friends are thinking of us when we are absent 
in the ^ PhiUppines.^ 3. They do not understand what-you-say ^ ; 
tell them what happened today. 4. I awake always at six o'clock 



LESSON XXVII 135 

in^ the morning. 5. What do you think of the coalition between 
the French and the Russians ? 6. This historian is one ^ of those 
who recall to us the deeds of heroic personages of the Middle Ages. 
7. This is the book that I lent to Charles ; the-one-that-you-have is 
John's ; and that-one on the table is Mary's. 8. He who attacks 
well defends himself well. 9. Vanity and obstinacy move that 
woman (of-whom-you-speak), and the one with the snub nose also. 
10. The Duke of Tetuan is-descended (^pres. indic.^ from the warrior 
of whom the historians have spoken so often. 1 1 . Your maid is 
the one of whom we w^ere speaking. 12. The librarian does not 
desire me to return^ the book today. 13. It is snowing or rain- 
ing all-the-time ^ in this-town ; we hope that the weather is good in 
yours. 14. We do not mean to go out when there-is-thunder."^ 

15. Prove your argument, and we shall believe it strong enough. 

16. Those who do not obey the human law^s, do not observe the 
divine laws either, and they lose the respect of all their compatriots. 

1 Omit. 2 piiipinas. ^ eso. ^ de. 5 Say : " that I return," using 

pres. subj. 6 siefnpre, 7 Use troiiar in the pres. indie. 



LESSON XXVII 



133. Relative Pronouns. 

que, who, which, that. quien, who. 

el cual and el que, who, which. cuanto, all that. 

a. A relative pronoun agrees in gender and number with its antecedent. 

b. A relative pronoun is sometimes omitted in English, but never in Span- 
ish : * the man I saw ' = ' the man that (whom) I saw,' el hombre que vi. 

c. An English relative clause sometimes ends with a preposition; in 
Spanish the preposition must precede the pronoun it governs : * the house 
that we live in ' = ' the house in which we live,' la casa en que vivimos. 

134. Que, Svho, which, that/ is invariable, and as subject 
or object of a verb it may refer to persons or things ; it is the 
most common of the Spanish relative pronouns. 



136 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

la muchacha que cose, the girl la facilidad con que escribe, the 

that is sewing. ease with which he writes. 

el indio que ^ mataron, the Indian la viuda, que amaba tiernamente 

whom they killed. a su marido, le olvid6 en breve, 

los libros que estan sobre la mesa, * the widow who dearly loved 

the books that are on the table. her husband soon forgot him.' 

a. After a preposition, que refers to things, and quien (quienes) to 
persons. 

la casa en que vivo, the house in el hombre a quien escribi, the 

which I live. man to whom I wrote. 

135. el cual (la cual, los cuales, las cuales, lo cual), 

el que (la que, los que, las que, lo que), who, which. 

The masculine and feminine forms refer to persons or things ; 
the neuter forms refer only to a whole phrase, sentence, or idea. 

Instead of que, either el cual (la cual, etc.) or el que (la 
que, etc.) is regularly used in cases of ambiguity, emphasis, or 
the separation of antecedent and relative. 

he escrito a la hija del senor Martinez, la cual esta enferma, * I have 

written to Mr. Martinez' daughter, who is ill.' 
halle en el bolsillo cincuenta pesos en moneda de oro y plata, los 

cuales (los que) di a mi padre, I found in the purse fifty dollars in 

gold and silver coin, which I gave to my father. 
el profesor me escribe que te comportas bien, lo cual (lo que) me 

agrada muchisimo, your master (teacher) writes me that you behave 

well, which pleases me greatly. 

a. Moreover, el cual or el que is generally used when the relative is 
governed by por or sin,'^ or by a preposition of two or more syllables. After 
a compound preposition, el cual is preferable to el que. 

las razones por las cuales (las que) se decidi6, the reasons on account 
of which he decided. 

1 Note the omission of a, although que refers to a specific person. 

2 In referring to persons, quien may be used with por and sin. 



LESSON XXVII 137 

la ciudad hacia la cual (la que) marchaba el ejercito, the city toward 

which the army was marching. 
el edificio en f rente del cual me estaba esperando mi amigo, the building 

in front of which my friend was awaiting me. 

b. Lo cual or lo que is regularly used as the neuter relative ; que is 
rarely neuter : le preste todos mis libros, lo cual (lo que) le di6 mucho 
placer, * I lent him all my books, which pleased him greatly.' For the 
use of lo que, meaning * that which, what,' see Demonstrative Pronouns, 

§ 131. 

c. There is usually little choice between el cual and el que, except that 
el cual is used the oftener in literary language. 

Remark. — It should be noted that el que has two meanings, * who ' 
(as explained above) or 'he who' (as explained in § 131). In the first 
case, the article modifies only the relative pronoun; in the second case it 
modifies the entire relative clause. 

136. Radical-changing Verbs. — Second and Third 
Classes. Study §§ 229-234. 

Exercise XXVII 

A, I. Prefiero que muramos a que no sacudamos el yugo 
del extranjero. 2. El hombre que no se arrepiente de sus 
pecados no se convierte jamas en buen cristiano. 3. Son- 
riendose, el soldado, sin la ayuda del cual yo no hubiera esca- 
pado del peligro, parti6 para la ciudad. 4. Yo no hubiera 
creido que consintieran sus hermanas de Vd. en la proposici6n 
de quedarse aqui, la cual les hizo^ su tio. 5. En el presente 
de indicativo y de subjuntivo, asi como en el singular del 
imperativo, ergiiir pertenece a dos conjugaciones : podemos 
decir yergo, yerga, yergue 6 irgo, irga, irgue, 6. Sentiria 
muchisimo que Vd. no durmiese bien esta noche. 7. Yo no 
concibo que Vd. pida tanto dinero por una cosa que no 
cuesta mucho. 8. De esta fuente el agua sale hirviendo. 
9. Tengo una pluma tintero, sin la cual no podria apuntar las 



138 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

cosas que advierto. 10. Las hijas de mi tia con las cuales 
hablabamos ayer no refieren chismes a sus vecinas. 11. Los 
mozos se despidieron de su madre y siguieron a su hermano 
mayor a la guerra. 12. El muchacho a quien hemos dado 
el premio no miente nunca. 13. Este es un refran espanol : 

" Medio mundo se rie del otro medio, y yo solo me rio del 
mmido entero." 14. El herido no gimio, lo cual me sor- 
prendi6. 15. Los rayos del sol hieren los cristales de la 
ventana y aclaran el interior del aposento. 16. Los tertu- 
lianos que estaban reunidos junto a la puerta dejaron entrar a 
Maria, la hija mayor del conde, a la cual el duque conducia por 
la mano. 1 7. Las naranjas de que hablabais no estan madu- 
ras, lo que nos obliga a botarlas. 18. Este es el arbol debajo 
del cual hemos hallado las monedas. 19. Aunque se vista de 
seda la mona, mona se queda. 20. Este muchacho rine 
siempre con la hermana de su amiguito Carlos, la cual es una 
niiia discola. 21. Si consiguiese hallar un buen libro, lo 

leeria hoy. 

B. I . The duke does not conceive how ^ Mary should quarrel 
{pres. subj.^ with her brother. 2. The guests did not consent 
to the proposition of remaining near the window. 3. If the count 
succeeds in escaping from the peril, he will laugh at the whole world. 

4. This is the tree near which the Christians were assembled. 

5. The water is boiling and the sunbeam is striking it. 6. I do 
not talk gossip and I smile at the sins of my brother, which sur- 
prises my aunt's neighbors, who are always gossiping and lying. 
7. Let us take leave of the wounded-man ; he slept well yesterday 
and he is not moaning tonight. 8. The soldier repented and 
became-converted into a ^ good Christian. 9. Yergiie 2^\^ irgue 
belong to the imperative of erguzr, which in the singular of the 
subjunctive has irga and yerga, 10. Charles's elder sister, who 
is under the tree, dresses well. 11. Let us follow the soldier to 
the city toward which the army is marching. 12. The man did 
not consent to the proposition which the count made him ; he pre- 
ferred to die. 13. Never lie, and always repent of your sins. 



LESSON XXVIII 139 

14. This is a Spanish proverb : '^Although the monkey dressed in 
silk, she remained a^ monkey." 15. The prize which we are 

giving to the boy does not cost much. 16. We started for the 
city, which obhged them to follow us. 17. The soldiers who 

found the books gave them to the men to whom they belonged. 
18. We threw away the oranges which were not ripe; the lads 
regretted it, although it did not surprise them. 19. If I asked- 
for {iniperf. subj,) money, without which I should not be able to 
start for the city, you would laugh. 20. This is the fountain under 
which the boy found the book and the coins. 

1 ' made.' 2 q^^^ 3 Omit. 



LESSON XXVIII 



137. Quien (quienes), 'who/ in modern Spanish refers only 
to persons or personified things. 

(i) After a preposition/ quien is used instead of que, in 
referring to persons ; as in el amigo de quien hablamos ' the 
friend of whom we are speaking/ 

(2) When the subject or the direct object of a verb, quien 
either introduces a clause which is not restrictive of the ante- 
cedent, or it includes its antecedent. 

vi a tu senor padre, quien me lo cont6 todo, I saw your father, who 

told me all. 
me lo cont6 todo tu senor padre, a quien vi poco ha, your father, 

whom I saw a short while ago, told me all. 
quien te adula te agravia, he who flatters you, insults you. 
no tengo a quien dirigirme, I have not any one to whom to apply. 

Cf. vi al hombre que te lo cont6 todo, ' I saw the man who ' (restric- 
tive) ' told you all.' 

1 After a compound preposition, el cual is preferable to quien. 



I40 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

a. Quien sometimes serves to indicate the number of its antecedent, 
or the fact that the antecedent is a person. 

me tope con el abuelo de estos ninos, quien los buscaba en todas partes, 

I ran across the grandfather of these children, who was looking for 
them everywhere. 
ayer vi al dueno de la casa, quien esta en esta ciudad, yesterday I saw 
the owner of the house, who is in this city. 

b. Quien is equivalent to either one of the two el que's (see §§131 
and 135). 

quien (el que) calla otorga, he who is silent gives consent. 
llam§ a un mozo, a quien (al que) entregue la carta, I called a waiter, 
to whom I gave the letter. 

But in colloquial language, quien is rarely used as the subject or the direct 
object of a verb, save in a few proverbial expressions ; in its stead el cual 
or el que is used. 

c. Correlative quien . . . quien means * one . . . another ' : quien 
lloraba, quien gemia, ' one was weeping, another was groaning,' or *some 
were weeping and some were groaning.' 

138. Cuanto (-a, -os, -as), ^how much/ ^how many/ ^ all 
that/ is used as pronoun or adjective. 

le ofreci cuanto dinero tenia, ^I offered him all the money that I had.' 
cuantos entraron en el buque, perecieron, all that entered the ship 
perished. 

139. Cuyo (-a, -os, -as), ^ whose,' ^of whom,' ^ of which,' 
is a relative possessive adjective. It agrees in gender and 
number with the thing possessed, and it may refer to persons 
or things. 

la seiiora cuyas amigas han llegado, the lady whose friends have 

arrived, 
un lugar de cuyo nombre no me acuerdo, a place the name of which 

I do not remember. 



LESSON XXVIII 141 

140. The adverb donde, ' where,' is often used as equivalent 
to a preposition plus a relative, and sometimes with the prepo- 
sition expressed, as in la casa donde (en donde) vivo, ^ the house 
in which I live.' 

141. Verbs with Inceptive Endings and -uir Verbs. — 

Study §§ 220 and 235. 

Exercise XXVIII 

A. I. Agradezcamos a quien nos favorece. Siempre agra- 
decemos a las personas de quienes hemos recibido favores. 
2. Mariana visitare la casa donde naci6 el gran poeta. S-i No 
quiere Vd. decirme el nombre del caballero cuya tarjeta de 
visita la criada acaba de darle? — Si, la tarjeta lleva el nombre 
del Senor Suarez, quien (or el que) escribi6 la mas interesante 
novela del ano pasado. 4. Estoy pidiendo a mi librero una 
novela mas corta que la suya y que no carezca de interns ; no 
me importa que no instruya con tal que no me entristezca. 
5. Sentiriamos muchisimo que Vd. atribuyera a este autor 
defectos que no tiene. 6. No es cosa nueva calumniar las 
mejores acciones, atribuyendoles viciosas causas. 7. Los 
ciudadanos pidieron que se disminuyesen las contribuciones y 
que se distribuyesen mas uniformemente las cargas publicas. 
8. A los tiranos no les gusta que nazcan hombres libres en 
sus dominios. 9. Hay muchos proverbios espanoles como 
^stos : quien a los suyos se parece, honra merece ; nunca bien 
sirve quien (or el que) con su dueno arguye ; muchas veces 
quien huye del fuego da en las brasas. 10. No nos gusta 
que el autor de este Hbro luzca tanto sus conocimientos lingtiis- 
ticos. II. El discipulo merece un duro castigo, porque 
su mala conducta influye en la de toda la clase. 12. Ano- 
checer en un lugar significa llegar 6 estar en un lugar al empe- 
zar la noche 6 antes de que anochezca completamente. 



142 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

13. He hablado con el maestro de estos discipulos, quien 
me ha dado cuantos informes deseo acerca de la conducta de 
ellos. 14. Escribo al Senador Cisneros, a quien {or al que) 
tengo que felicitar por su brillante discurso en pr6 de la re- 
forma arancelaria. 15. (iHa estado Vd. en la ciudad de 
Waltham, donde se fabrican muy buenos relojes? — Si, como 
aficionado a la relojeria, me inter esa (todo) cuanto se relaciona 
con esta arte. 16. En este mundo, quien ^ {or el que) juzga 
por apariencias, hasta lo bianco le puede parecer negro. 

B. I.I like that Spanish proverb : " To him who judges by 
appearances even white may seem black." 2. We shall reach the 
city of Waltham before night comes on. 3. The senator whom 
I congratulated has just made ^ a speech : he asked that the taxes 
be diminished. 4. Has the bookseller given you all the informa- 
tion that you wish about the novel ? 5 . We do not like to have 
authors displaying their faults in their books. 6. The teacher to 
whom I spoke will punish the pupil for^ his bad behavior. 7. A 
good man does not ascribe vicious causes to good deeds. 8. I do 
not think ^ that the conduct of the pupil deserves {pres. subj.) a 
severe punishment. 9. Provided a man is born free, it does not 
matter that he has faults. 10. There is a Spanish proverb : '^ Out 
of the frying pan into the fire." 1 1 . (By) distributing the public 
burdens, the senators will show that all relating to the needs of the 
citizens interests them. 12. He who is ^ fond of brilliant speeches 
often judges by appearances. 13. With their teacher the pupils 
have visited a house in which fine watches are made. 14. The 
author whose book I have just received argues in favor of tariff 
reform, but he does not influence the feelings of the citizens, be- 
cause his book is wholly without interest. 15. He who argued 
with his master never served him well. 16. I should be sorry 
that you should argue with the poet in-order-to ^ show off your 
attainments. 17. Mr. Cisneros is the gentleman whom I thank- 
for that favor. 18. Ask the bookseller for a book which shall 
instruct {pres, subj.) us and shall not sadden us. 19. The maid 
has given me the visiting card of Mr. Sudrez ; he is the man 
whom watch-making and all related to that art interests very much. 



LESSON XXIX 143 

20. I ascribe the behavior of the citizens to the taxes which the 
tyrant will not diminish. 21. It is no new thing to calumniate 
a man and to ascribe faults to him who hasn't anyJ 

1 ' if one.' 2 Use hacer. 3 por. 4 Use creer. 5 estd. ^ para. ^ los. 



LESSON XXIX 



142. Interrogative Pronouns. 

que, what. cual, which. 

qui^n, who. cuanto (-a), how much. 

The interrogatives take the accent in both direct and indirect 
questions. 

143. Que, ^ what,' may be used as pronoun or adjective. As 
a pronoun, it refers to things, and is neuter. 

^que es eso? what is that? 
^que dijo? what did he say? 
^qu6 hora es? what time is it? 
^que hombre es este? what man is this? 

pregunta que pasajeros han llegado, he asks what passengers have 
arrived. 

a. In exclamations, qui is * what (a) ' before an attributive, and * how ' 
before a predicate adjective: |qu6 lindaluna! *what a pretty moon!' 
i que palido estas ! ' how pale you are ! ' To add emphasis, tan, * so,' or 
mas, * more,' may be placed before the attributive adjective, which then 
follows its noun : \ que dia tan hermoso (mas hermoso) ! * what a beau- 
tiful day ! ' 

144. Quien (quienes), 'who/ is used only as a pronoun, and 
refers only to persons. Interrogative ' whose ' is usually de 
quien. 



144 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

iquien llama? who is knocking? 

pregunta quienes eran las senoras, he asks who the ladies were. 
ide quien es aquella hermosa casa? whose is that beautiful house? 
^de quien es este caballo? whose horse is this? (lit., ^of whom is 
this horse ? ') . 

145. Cual (cuales), ^ which/ is chiefly used as a pronoun; 
it may refer to persons or things. 

I cual de las plumas quiere usted ? ^ a cuales de mis amigos ha visto 
which pen (lit., ' which of the usted hoy? which of my friends 

pens') do you wish? have you seen to-day? 

a. Cual maybe used adjectively, as in <: cual casa prefieres ? ^ which 
house do you prefer ? ' but i cual de las casas prefieres ? is the more 
common construction. 

d. When * what ' stands in the predicate, it is usually to be expressed by 
cual: icual es la fecha de la carta? *what is the date of the letter?' 
^cual es la ciudad capital de los Estados Unidos ? * what is the capital 
city of the United States?' Que is used if a definition is wanted: ^que 
es la filosofia griega? *what is Greek philosophy?' 

146. The interrogative possessive ciiyo, ^ whose/ is little 
used ; it refers only to persons, and is, as a rule, used only 
in the predicate. Interrogative ' whose ' is generally de quien. 

^cuya (better, de quien) es esta ^cuyo (better, de qui6n) es aquel 
casa ? whose house is this ? . caballo ? whose horse is that ? 

Remark. — One does not say: icuya casa habita usted? * whose 
house do you occupy?' but ^ciiya (de qui§n) es la casa que usted 
habita? 

147. Cuanto (-a) is * how much ' ; cuantos (-as), ' how 
many.* Cuanto (-a, -os, -as) may be used as adjective or 
pronoun. 

^cuantos hay? how many are there? 

icuanto dinero necesita usted? how much money do you need? 

^cuantas vacas vendiste? how many cows did you sell? 



LESSON XXIX 145 

148. Irregular Verbs: Ir, '(to) go/ and Venivy *(to) 
come.' Study §§ 247 and 248. 

a. ' Go and ' (followed by a verb) is ir a; ' come and ' is venir a. 
vaya usted a decirselo, go and tell him. venga a verlo, come and see it. 

149. Idiomatic Expressions. 

va a Hover, it is going to rain. la nina iba creciendo, the little girl 

vamos a ver, let us see. kept growing. 

la noche va oscureciendo, the night iba montado en una mula, he was 
keeps (is) growing darker. riding a mule. 

la semana que viene, next week. 

E2:ercise XXIX 

A, I. <iQu^ hora es? — Son las once y media. 2. ^Que 
es la aritmetica? — Es una de las ciencias exactas. 3. ^jCual 
es la mejor aritmetica? — La del Sefior Cisneros. 4. i Cuanto 
dinero ha gastado Vd.^ esta manana? — Unos quince duros. 
5. Si su primo de Vd. viniera a verme, iria con el a visitar al 
sefior catedratico en cuyas clases hemos estudiado. 6. <:De 
cual catedratico habla Vd.? — Del Senor Martinez, el que en- 
sefia las lenguas orientales en la Universidad Central. 7. La 
noche iba oscureciendo como caminabamos montados en nues- 
tras mulas, y nos parecia que iba a Hover ; pero pronto el viento 
se hizo^ frio y los copos de nieve vinieron volando del cielo. 
8. Venga lo que viniere, emprendere esta tarea. 9. Ven- 
dremos esta tarde ; aguardenos Vd. 10. <iQue calle es esta? 
— La calle de Alcala. 11. ^Cual es el mejor modo de 

dirigirme a la Puerta del Sol? — Soy extranjero ; preguntelo 
Vd. a ese guardia en la acera. 12. ^iQuien es Vd.? — Soy 
un turista norte-americano. 13. £ Cuanto tiempo hace que 
esta Vd. en la corte (Madrid)? — Llegue anteayer y quizas 
me marche manana. 14. j Que visita mas corta ! — Pienso 
volver aqui a mi regreso del Escorial y entonces ver^ lo que 



146 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

ahora no he visto. 15 • Y (ique le ha gustado mas a Vd. de. 

lo que ha visto en Madrid? 16. Vamos a ver ; como artista, 
me ha encantado el gran Museo del Prado, que en mi concepto 
gana al Louvre, y como arque61ogo, la Armeria Real, cuya 
colecci6n de armaduras es la mas completa que he visto. 
17. Pues, venga Vd. a ver una corrida de toros ; es la diversion 
mas esencialmente espaiiola, y habra una grande corrida la 
semana que viene. 18. ^Quien es aquel hombre que va por 

la calle montado en una mula ? — Es un campesino. 1 9. \ Qn6 
modo tan raro de pasearse ! — No es raro en Espaiia. 20. Sin 
duda en su pais todo el mundo monta a caballo. Si Vd. fuera 
al campo, veria mas mulas y asnos que caballos. 21. Ire 
a visitar algunas aldeas castellanas antes de partir de este pais. 
22. ^Cuya (De quien) es aquella casa en la esquina de esta 
calle? 23. (jCual casa? ^iQuiere Vd. decir el gran palacio? 
Pues, es el palacio del Duque de Villarica. 24. Venga con- 
migo, iremos a Uamar a la puerta, y nos dejaran entrar a ver las 
hermosas pinturas de Goya que posee el duque. 25. j Cuantas 
obras maestras ha pintado ese gran pintor ! — Si, no se puede 
decir cuantas. 26. Dondequiera que vaya Vd., vera las obras 
de aquel insigne pintor, 6 de otros artistas mas antiguos, como 
Velazquez, Murillo y Zurbaran. 

B. I. Who teaches Oriental languages in the University ? 
2. The professor in whose class your cousin studied ; come with me 
and see him. 3. I shall go with you, if it is half-past eleven. 

How many classes has the professor? 4. Ask your cousin this 

evening ; I am not going to tell you how many. 5. Which tourist 
arrived the-day-before-yesterday ? 6. What is a tourist ? 7. The 
night will soon be growing dark. 8. What a strange amusement! 
Do you mean the bullfight ? We shall go and see it next week. 
9. If you should go and visit a Spanish village, you would see peas- 
ants going along the streets riding on mules. 10. In^ what way 
do they go-about in your country ? 11. They ride on horseback. 
12. In Madrid everybody likes to go and visit the Museum of the 



LESSON XXX 147 

Prado and the Royal Armory. 13. Come what may come {i.e. 
Happen what may), the strangers will take-their-way to the Puerta del 
Sol. 14. To what street did you go this morning? 15. Let's 
see ; I went to the street on whose corner the Duke^s palace is.^ 
16. To my mind, the Spaniards have great painters. On my return 
from the country, I mean to visit the museums and see the paintings 
of Veldzquez and Murillo. What beautiful works those illustrious 
artists have painted! 17. Yes ; wherever w^e may-go, we shall see 
them. 18. Before going to the Prado, I shall come to the Puerta 
del Sol. 19. What (Which) is the North American way of going- 
about? We ride on horseback. We do not go riding on donkeys 
and mules. 20. Who owns more paintings than the archaeologist 
whose collection is in that house on the corner? 21. How long 
have-you-been-visiting (^pres. indie.) the capital? 22. It is not 
going to rain ; the snow will come with the cold winds. 23. The 
masterpieces in the Museum of the Prado surpass those of the Louvre. 
24. Are you going to knock at the door? What a strange way of 
entering a palace ! 25. Perhaps we shall come tomorrow, if you 
return ^ here. 26. One cannot say how-much money the strangers 
are going to spend. 27. In Spain, everybody likes to see a bull- 
fight. 28. What artists are older than Zurbaran? 29. What 
exact sciences did you study in the classes of Mr. Cisneros ? 
30. How much armor is there in the Royal Armory? 31. Soon 
the flakes of snow will come flying down from the sky. 32. If you 
went {imperf. subj.) to the Escurial, its collections of beautiful 
paintings would delight you. 

1 Abbreviation of usted : cf. \ 90. 2 Pret. Indie, of hacer, 3 De, 

4 Say : ' is the palace of the Duke.' 5 Radical-changing verb, ist class : vuelve. 



LESSON XXX 



150. Indefinite Adjective Pronouns. 

Alguien, ^some one/ ^somebody/ ^any one/ ^anybody,' 
algo, * something,' * anything,' are pronouns and invariable. 
Alguien refers only to persons ; algo is neuter. 



148 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

alguien toca a la puerta, some one is knocking at the door. 
I hallaste algo? did you find something (anything) ? 

a. * Not — any one,' * not — anybody,' is no — nadie ; * not — any- 
thing ' is no — nada. See "Negation," § 165. Alguien and algo are 
never combined with negatives. 

151. Alguno (-a, -os, -as), ^some/ ^any/ *a few/ is used as 
adjective or pronoun. 

algiin 1 dia, some day. 

algunos de los amigos'de usted, some of your friends. 

tiene algunos libros muy raros, he has a few very rare books. 

a. * Not — any ' is usually no — ninguno or no — alguno (after noun). 
d. In partitive expressions, unemphatic * some ' and * any,' used as 
adjectives, are generally not to be expressed in Spanish. 

tengo pan, pero no tengo mante- quiero comprar manzanas y na- 
quilla, I have some bread, but ranjas, I wish to buy some ap- 

I haven't any butter. pies and oranges. 

In answer to a question, * some ' or * any ' is then expressed by a personal 
pronoun object, or the noun is repeated. 

ino tiene Vd. peras? haven't you any pears? hoy no las tengo, I haven't 

any to-day. *• 

i tiene Vd. vino? have you any wine? no tengo vino (or vino no tengo), 

I haven't any. 
^hay uvas? are there any grapes? si, las hay, yes, there are some. 
<j hay pan? is there any bread? no lo hay (or no hay pan), there isn't 

any. 

152. Unos (-as) means ^ some ' : 

tengo unos quinientos pesos, I have some five hundred dollars. 

Unos sometimes seems to mean little more than ^ a pair of.' 

el elefante tiene unas orejas enormes, the elephant has * a pair of ^ 
enormous ears. 

1 See " Apocopation of Adjectives," § 66. 



LESSON XXX 149 

153. Nadie, 'no one/ ^nobody/ ^not any one/ *not anybody/ 
nada, 'nothing/ 'not anything/ are pronouns and invariable. 
Nadie refers only to persons ; nada is neuter. See " Negation/' 

§ 165. 

nadie ha venido hoy, no one has come to-day. 

nada veo, I do not see anything. 

154. Ninguno (-a, -os, -as), ' none/ ' no/ ' not any/ is used 
as adjective or pronoun. 

ninguna casa, no (not any) house. 
ninguno de los ninos, none of the children. 

a. English * no/ * not any,' is often expressed by no, ' not,' before the 
verb. 

no tengo tiempo, I have no (not any) time. 

no tiene enemigos, he has no (not any) enemies. 

155. Mucho (-a), ' much/ muchos (-as), ' many,' is used as 
adjective or pronoun. 

mucho tiempo, much (a great deal of) time. 

muchos anos, many years. 

muchos han partido, many have left. 

a, * Very much ' is muchisimo (rather than muy mucho). 

156. Poco (-a), 'little' (meaning 'a small quantity'), pocos 
(-as), ' few,' is used as adjective or pronoun. 

tengo poco dinero, I have little money, 
pocos han venido, few have come. 

a, Un poco de is * a little ' : tengo un poco de vino, * I have a little 
wine ' ; cf. tengo poco vino y mucha leche, ' I have a little {i.e, only 
a little) wine and much milk.' 

157. Todo (-a, -os, -as), 'all, 'every/ is used as adjective or 
pronoun. 



I50 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

todo aquel dia, all that day. todos los hombres, all the men.^ 
toda mujer, every woman. todas las noches, every night. 

todo el mundo, everybody. todos lo dicen, all say so. 

a. * All,' meaning ' the whole,' is todo (-a, -OS, -as) el (la, los, las) : toda 
la semana, * all week.' 

b. The neuter pronoun todo means * all,' * everything ' : todo es vanidad 
en este mundo, * all is vanity in this world.' 

158. Mismo (-a, -os, -as), ^same/ Wery/ ^self/ 'himself* 
(' herself,' etc.), is used as an adjective. 

el mismo dia, the same day. 

el exceso mismo de mi felicidad me matara, the very excess of my 

happiness will kill me. 
k\ mismo me lo dijo, he told me so himself. 
creo que es usted la misma virtud, I believe that you are virtue itself. 

In the sense of * self,' it often follows the noun or pronoun. 

a. El mismo (la misma, los mismos, las mismas, lo mismo), 'the 

same,' is used as pronoun. 

159. Ambos (-as), los dos (las dos), 'both (of)/ are used as 
adjectives or pronouns. 

tengo las dos (ambas) manos heladas, both of my hands are frozen, 
nos ama a los dos, he loves us both. 

160. Cada, ' each/ is used as adjective, and cada uno (-a) or 
cada cual, 'each (one),' as pronoun (cada is invariable). 

cada vez, each time. 

dl un peso a cada uno (cada cual), I gave each one a dollar. 

161. Otto (-a, -OS, -as), ' other,' ' another,' is used as adjective 
or pronoun ; it does not admit the indefinite article. 

1 Todos los hombres is ' all men ' (generally speaking) if the noun denotes 
all of its kind. 



LESSON XXX 151 

el otro dia, the other day. otra semana, another week. 

quiero otro caballo, I wish an- no tei^o otros, I have no others 
other horse. (I haven't any others). 

Note the position of otro in otros muchos, ' many others,' otros ties, 
* three others,' etc. 

162. Uno (-a) y otro (-a), 'both' (in the sense of 'each'), uno 
(-a) li otro. (-a), 'either (one),' ni uno (-a) ni otro (-a), 'neither 
(one)/ 'not either (one),' el uno — el otro (la una — la otra), 
' each other,' los unos — los otros (las unas — las otras), ' one 

another,' are used as adjectives or pronouns. 

personas de uno y otro sexo, persons of both sexes. 

aceptare uno u otro, I will accept either (one). 

no quiero ni uno ni otro, I wish neither (one), or I do not wish 

either (one). 
se burlan el uno del otro, they make sport of each other. 

163. Tal (tales), ' such,' ' such a,' is used as adjective or pro- 
noun ; it is never followed by the indefinite article. 

tales hombres, such men. tal muchacho, such a boy. 

a, Un tal is ' one,' * a certain ' ; el tal is ' the said ' : me lo cont6 un tal 
Manzanares, * one (a certain) Manzanares told me '; el tal G6mez era un 
picaro, * the said Gomez was a rascal.' 

164. Cosa, 'thing,' is used in the formation of many com- 
pound indefinite pronouns, which occur frequently in colloquial 
language. 

alguna cosa, something, anything. 

ninguna cosa or cosa alguna, nothing, not anything. 

la misma cosa, the same thing. 

otra cosa, something else, anything else. 

tal cosa, such a thing, etc.^ 

1 Also in interrogative que cosa, ' what thing.' 



152 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

165. Negation. — The pronouns nadie, ^no one/ nada, 
' nothing/ ninguno, ^ notie/ and the adverbs ni — ni, ' neither — 
nor/ nunca and jamas, ' never/ ^ and tampoco, ' not either/ 
require the verb to be made negative when they follow the 
verb. They are negative in themselves if they precede the 
verb or if no verb is expressed^^ 

no temo nada or nada temo, I su hijo no es, ni sera nunca nadie, 

fear nothing (I do not fear her son is not nor ever will be 

anything) . anything. 

no tengo ni pluma ni papel or ni no quiero aquel caballo tampoco 

pluma ni papel tengo, I have or tampoco quiero aquel ca- 

neither pen nor paper (I ballo, I do not wish that horse 

haven't either pen or paper). either. 

no le vi nunca or nunca le vi, I c Quien viene? — Nadie. Who is 

never saw him. coming ? — No one. 

nadie se acordaba de el, ni el se i Que dice Vd.? — Nada. What 

acordaba de nadie, no one are you saying ? — - Nothing. 

remembered him, nor did he 

remember any one. 

a. As a rule, negative pronouns and adverbs are used instead of positive 
ones if the sentence is in any way negative, or expects a negative answer, 
or if the pronoun or adverb follows a comparative. 

es imitil decir nada, it is useless to say anything, 
sin olvidarte nunca, without ever forgetting you. 
I hay nada mas sublime ? is there anything more sublime ? 
el viejo parece mas feliz que nunca, the old man seems happier than 
ever. 

d. In a negative sentence, alguno may be used instead of ninguno, in 
which case alguno follows its noun : no tiene enemigo alguno, * he has 
no enemy.' 

1 ' Never ' is commonly expressed by nunca. Jam^s after a positive verb is 
positive : ^ ha visitado Vd. jamas a Mejico ? ' have you ever visited Mexico ? ' 

2 In colloquial language, the negative (except no) usually follows the verb, 
e.^. no tengo nada is more common than nada tengo, ' I have nothing,* or ' I 
haven't anything.' 



LESSON XXX 153 

166. Irregular Verbs. 

Querer, ' (to) wish,' and poder, ^ (to) be able (can).' 
Study §§ 242 and 243. 

167. Idiomatic Expressions. 

el nino puede caerse, the child el puede mas que yo, he is stronger 

may fall. than I. 

no puedo mas, I can't do any more, i quiere usted venir conmigo ? will 

I am played out. you come with me ? 

no pudo menos de sonreirse, he la quiere mucho, he is very fond 

couldn't help smiUng. of her. 

puede que, it is possible that. i que quiere decir esto ? what does 

this mean ? 

Exercise XXX 

A. I. Alguien tiene que responder del resultado. 2. Al- 
gun dia nos veremos frente a frente j podremos ver quien de 
los dos puede mas. 3. £ Tiene Vd. cambio por un peso? — 
^Cuanto necesita Vd. pagar? — Una peseta (veinte centavos). 
— Aqui tiene Vd. — Muchas gracias. 4. Nadie sabe lo que ha 
de suceder mafiana. 5. Ninguno de los cuatro nifios sabe leer 
6 escribir. 6. Mas vale poco que nada. 7. El y yo iba- 
mos en el mismo tren. 8. Este retrato es el mismo Antonio. 
9. Ambos contendientes perecieron. Cada uno pele6 con valor ; 
otro caballero quiso intervenir y sali6 herido. 10. Pasemos 
a otra cosa. 11. Nadie dudaba del ^xito. 12. ^rPodria 
Vd. facilitarme su diccionario ? — Si, pero quisiera que Vd. se 
sirviera devolvermelo cuanto antes. 13. La maestra quisiera 
a cada nifia, si estudiase sus lecciones. 14. ^i Quiere Vd. 
darme un poco de pan y queso? 15. Todos los caminos 

llevan a Roma. 16. Hay muchisimos alfileres en esta caja, 
pero no los puedo hallar nunca. 17. Ellos mismos no quisie- 
ron venir, porque yo no pude convidarlos. Tal cosa jamas se ha 



154 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

visto. 1 8. Estaba en la sala un tal Herreros. 19. No es 
oro todo lo que reluce. 20. Sobre todo, ^1 no quiso hablar 
con nadie. 21. No podemos mas : estamos mas fatigados que 
nunca. 22. A nadie quiere recibir el hombre malo : ni sus 
amigos, ni sus parientes pueden entrar a verle. 23. £ Hay nada 
mas interesante que el Don Quijote de Cervantes? 24. No 
podemos menos de quejarnos cuando consideramos nuestra 
condici6n desgraciada. 25. Juan no sabe lo que quiere 
decir esto ; ni su hermano tampoco. 26. i Quien le ha dicho 
a Vd. que no queremos a nuestros padres? — Nadie. 27. No 
tenemos duda alguna acerca del exito de la empresa. 28. Sin 
duda alguna no pudieramos derrotar al enemigo, si no tuviese- 
mos un fuerte ejercito. 29. Es posible que haya algo en la 
cesta, pero no podemos hallar nada. 30. Alguien llama a la 
puerta : sin duda algunos de nuestros amigos quieren entrar. 
31. Si quieres ser bien servido, sirvete a ti mismo. 32. Yo 
podria hacer ese favor, pero no quisiera molestar a mi amigo. 
^^. Puede que llueva mafiana. 34. Ahorraremos nuestro 
dinero por lo que pudiere tronar. 35. ^ Quien habla? — Nadie. 

B, I.I can see each (every) gentleman in the room ; John can- 
not see each (every) one of them. 2. Who doubts the result? 
Nobody ; v^^e can all answer for the outcome. 3. We need twenty 
cents. That ^ is Httle. Yes ; but a little is better than nothing. 
4. Can there be anything more wretched than the condition of the 
said Herreros? 5. We are played out: do you know Avhat that 
means ? 6. One or another of the armies will be able to rout the 
enemy. Of this I have no doubt whatever. 7. Some of our enter- 
prises could not have any success. 8. We do not wish to com- 
plain because we have no gold ; and everybody knows that all is 
not gold that gUstens. 9. It is possible that you may be well 
served if you serve yourself. 10. I should not like to do a favor 
for Antonio, nor for John, either. 1 1 . This gentleman could fight 
well, if he had another opponent. 12. Never have I been able to 
find any pins in your box. 13. Both wished to go with us in the 
same train ; but we could invite neither. 14. We should like you 



LESSON XXXI 



155 



to-be-kind-enough to pass to something else. 15. The men could 

not help saying that they had no cheese and that they desired but 
little bread. 16. Is anybody knocking at the door? Yes; some 
of our friends wish to come in and see us, but we shall be unable to 
receive them. 17. It is possible that nobody may-wish {pres. 
stibj.) to do us that favor. 18. Each of the roads leads to Rome. 
19. The said Herreros says that he has seen a certain Sanchez and 
another man with him. 20. Could you oblige me with twenty 
pesetas? — Many thanks. I shall pay you as soon as possible. 
21. I should not like to see my enemy face to face; one or other 
of us might perish. 22. Save your money against contingencies.- 
23. Both of the contestants fight valorously. Which of the two is 
the stronger? 24. I cannot say what will happen tomorrow if 
you do not study your lessons. 25. They wished to return us our 
box, but they could not find it. 26. We might enter into the 
room if we wished to speak with somebody. 27. The enemies 
were fighting ; our friends sought ^ to interfere, and came-out (of it) 
with-a-wound.^ 

1 eso. *^ Cf. A 34. 3 Use querer. ^ heridos : cf. A 9. 



LESSON XXXI 



168. Cardinal Numerals. 



cero, 




0. 


nueve, 


9. 


uno (-a),i 




I. 


diez, 


10. 


dos. 




2. 


once, 


II. 


tres, 




3. 


doce, 


12. 


cuatro, 




4. 


trece, 


13. 


cinco, 




5. 


catorce, 


14. 


seis, 




6. 


quince, 


15- 


siete, 




7. 


diez y seis,^ 


16. 


ocho. 




8. 


diez y siete, 


17- 


1 See ^S 66. 










2 These numbers 


are alsc 


written in one word, as, dieciseis, 


veinti 


treintaiuno, etc. 











156 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



diez y ocho, 
diez y nueve, 
veinte, 
veinte y uno, 
veinte y dos, 
veinte y tres, 
veinte y cuatro, 
veinte y cinco, 
veinte y seis, 
veinte y siete, 
veinte y ocho, 
veinte y nueve, 
treinta, 
treinta y uno, 
cuarenta, 
cincuenta, 
sesenta, 
setenta, 
ochenta, 
noventa, 



1 8. 
19. 



23. 
24. 

25. 
26. 
27. 
28. 
29. 
30. 
31. 
40. 
50. 
60. 
70. 
80. 
90. 



ciento,! 


100. 


ciento y uno, 


lOI. 


ciento y diez, 


no. 


doscientos (-as), 


200. 


trescientos (-as). 


300. 


cuatrocientos (-as), 


400. 


quinientos (-as), 


500. 


seiscientos (-as). 


600. 


setecientos (-as) ,2 


700. 


ochocientos (-as). 


800. 


novecientos (-as), 2 


900. 


mil. 


1,000. 


mil y ciento, 


1,100. 


mil y doscientos (-as 


), 1,200. 


dos mil. 


2,000. 


cien 1 mil. 


100,000. 


doscientos (-as) mil. 


200,000. 


un mill6n. 


1,000,000. 


dos millones, 


2,000,000. 



a. The cardinals are invariable, except uno (-a), -cientos (-as) in 
the combinations from doscientos (-as) to novecientos (-as) inclusive, 
and quinientos (-as): doscientos hombres, *two hundred men'; dos- 
cientas mujeres, 'two hundred women'; doscientas mil personas, *two 
hundred thousand persons.' 

b. In compound numerals, uno (-a) drops the final vowel before a 
masculine or a feminine noun ; treinta y un soldados, ' thirty-one sol- 
diers '; cincuenta y un casas, * fifty-one houses.' 

c. Mill6n takes un, but ciento and mil do not : cien estudiantes, 
' one hundred students ' ; mil pesos, * one thousand dollars ' ; un mill6n 
de pesetas, * one million pesetas.' 

But ciento un, doscientos un, etc., may occur before mil : ciento un 
mil tr^ientos veinte y cinco, 101,325. 

d. The conjunction y is used to connect the last of a series of numerals 
with the foregoing numeral : mil doscientos ochenta y cinco, 1285. 

1 See 5 69. 
• 2 In colloquial language one sometimes hears sietecientos and nuevecientos. 



LESSON XXXI 



157 



e. Counting by hundreds is not carried above nine hundred in Spanish ; 
beginning with ten hundred mil is used: mil ochocientos noventa y 
tres, 1893. 

/. As substantives, ciento or centenar, mil or miliar, are used; but 
only ciento and miliar are regularly used to express rate : centenares de 
caballos, * hundreds, of horses '; dos pesetas el ciento, *two pesetas per 
hundred'; miles de aves, * thousands of birds'; a peso el miliar, 'at 
one dollar per thousand.' ^ 



169. Ordinal Numerals. 



primero, -a (primo, -a), 


1st. 


segundo, -a, 


2d. 


tercero, -a (tercio, -a), 


3d. 


cuarto, -a, 


4th. 


quinto, -a, 


5th. 


sexto, -a or sesto, -a. 


6th. 


septimo, -a or setimo,^-s 


I, 7th. 


octavo, -a, 


8th. 


noveno, -a (nono, -a), 


9th. 


d§cimo, -a. 


loth. 


undecimo, -a, 


nth. 


duodecimo, -a. 


1 2th. 


dicimo tercio, -a,^ 


13th. 


d^cimo cuarto, -a. 


14th. 


d^cimo quinto, -a. 


15th. 


decimo sexto, -a. 


1 6th. 


d^cimo siptimo, -a. 


17th. 


decimo octavo, -a, 


1 8th. 


ddcimo nono, -a, 


19th. 


vig^simo, -a, 


20th. 


vigesimo primo, -a, 


2 1 St. 


vigesimo segundo, -a. 


22d. 


vigesimo tercio, -a. 


23d. 



trigesimo, -a, 
cuadragesimo, -a, 
quincuagesimo, -a, 
sexagesimo, -a, 
septuag6simo, -a, 
octogesiijio, -a, 
nonagesimo, -a, 
centesimo, -a, 
centesimo primo, -a, 
centesimo undecimo, -a 
ducentesimo, -a, 
trecentesimo, -a, 
cuadragentesimo, -a, 
quingentesimo, -a, 
sescentesimo, -a, 
septengesimo, -a, 
octogentesimo, -a, 
nonagent^simo, -a, 
mil^simo, -a, 
dosmilesimo, -a, 
diezmilesimo, -a, 
millon6simo, -a, 



30th. 

40th. 

50th. 

60th. 

70th. 

80th. 

90th. 

1 00th. 

loist. 

I nth. 

200th. 

300th. 

400 th. 

500th. 

600th. 

700th. 

800th. 

900th. 

1, 000th. 

2,000th. 

io,oooth. 

1, 000,000th. 2 



1 In mercantile language uno is usually omitted, as here, before the name of 
the coin. 

2 These are also written decimotercio, decimocuarto, etc. 

3 The use of the ordinals in Spanish is daily becoming less. It is hardly an 
exaggeration to say that only trained persons know them from ' twentieth ' on. . 



158 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

a. The shorter forms, primo, tercio, and nono are used in compound 
ordinal numerals. Sexto and septimo are usually pronounced and often 
written sesto and setimo. For the apocopation of primero and tercero 
see § 66. 

b. The ordinals agree in gender and number with the noun they 
modify. A single ordinal may precede or follow its noun; a compound 
ordinal regularly follows : el primer dia, * the first day'; el siglo decimo 
sexto (or el siglo diez y seis), ' the sixteenth century.' 

c. After primero, the cardinals are generally used in Spanish instead 
of the ordinals, to specify the number of a volume, book, chapter, lesson, 
century, etc. : el tomo veinte, ' the twentieth volume ' {or * volume 
twenty ') ; el siglo diez y nueve, ' the nineteenth century.' 

d. The ordinals are used up to decimo (or undecimo) to indicate the 
order of succession of sovereigns; but from that number on the cardinals 
are regularly used : Carlos quinto, * Charles the Fifth ' ; ^ Leon trece, 
'LeoXIIL' 

e. In dates, the cardinals are used instead of the ordinals, with the ex- 
ception of primero : el primero (el dos, el tres, etc.) de junio, ' the first 
(the second, the third, etc.) of June.' 

170. Fractional Numerals. 

un medio, J. un undecimo, onzavo, or once-avo, xt 

un tercio, \, un dozavo or doce-avo, 

dos tercios, f . un trezavo or trece-avo; tV 

un cuarto, J. un catorzavo or catorce-avo, xV 

tres cuartos, f. un quinzavo or quince-avo, xV- 

un quinto, \, un diez y seisavo (seis-avo), . x^^ 

un sexto, |. un diez y sietavo (siete-avo), xV- 

un septimo, \, un veintavo or veinte-avo, ^. 

un octavo, \. un treintavo, ■^. 

un noveno, \, un centesimo or centavo, xio« 

un decimo, xV ^^ milesimo, xoVo 

un millonesimo, to^ooo 

a. Fractional numerals may also be expressed by the ordinals with 
parte, especially when a partitive expression follows or is understood: 
la tercera parte de ellos, ' one-third of them.' 

1 Note the omission of the article in Spanish. See \ 56 (2). 



LESSON XXXI 



159 



b. 'Half (*a half,' * one-half,' 'half a '), as a substantive, is expresseH 
by la mitad; as an adjective, by medio (-a). In calculations, medio (-a) 
is used. 

la mitad de mis bienes, ' one half of my goods.' 

medio dia, * half a day.' 

ima hora y media, * an hour and a half.' 

171. Collective Numerals. 



un par, a pair. 
una decena, ten. 
una docena, a dozen. 
una quincena, fifteen. 



una veintena, twenty, a score. 

una sesentena, sixty. 

una centena or un centenar, one hundred. 

un miliar, one thousand. 



a. The ending -ena may make the numeral indefinite : e.g, una veintena, 
some twenty, about twenty. 



172. Multiplicative Numerals. 

simple, single. 

doble or duplicado, double.^ 

triple or triplicado, treble. 

cuadruplo or cuadruplicado, quadruple.^ 

quintuplo or quintuplicado, quintuple. 

sextuplo, sextuple. 



septuple, septuple. 
6ctuplo, octuple. 
decuplo, decuple. 
centuplo or centuplicado, 

centuple. 



173. Numeral Phrases. 

una vez, once. 

dos veces, twice. 

tres veces, three times (thrice). 



diez veces, ten times. 

cien veces, a hundred times. 

mil veces, a thousand times. 



174. Irregular Verbs. 

Hacer, * (to) make,' * (to) do,' and decir, * (to) say,' ' (to) tell.' 
Study §§ 246 and 257. 

1 Doble, triple, etc., may also be translated 'two-fold,' 'three-fold,' etc. 
There are also the forms diiplice and triplice, and cuadruple, quintuple, etc. 



l6o SPANISH GRAMMAR 

175. Idiomatic Expressions. 

hagame usted el favor de cerrar hace de portero, he is acting as 

la puerta, please shut the door. porter. 

el huracan hizo temblar la casa, hace frio (calor)^it is cold (warm). 

the hurricane made the house hace un mes (dos meses), a month 

tremble. (two months) ago. 

hizo (mand6) hacer un traje, he hago construir una casa, I am 

had a suit of clothes made. having a house built. 

haz entrar al hombre, have the se hizo amar por todo el mundo, 

man come in. he made himself loved by every- 

no hagas caso de eso, never mind body. 

that. se hace el tonto, he plays the 

hare por verle manana, I shall try fool. 

to see him tomorrow. se dice que, dicen que, it is said 

I te hace falta dinero ? do you that, people say that. 

need money ? 

Exercise XXXI 

A, I. Digame Vd. ^Cuantas son las partes del mundo? 
2. Haga el favor de decirme su gracia (nombre). 3. Quisiera 
que el me dijera cuales son sus verdaderos prop6sitos. 
4. Digale que venga aca inmediatamente. 5. (iQue hace 
Vd. alii? — Estoy haciendole un cofre a Don Julian. 6. Hacia 
tanto frio que se hel6 el agua en nuestro cuarto. 7. Dicen 
que volvera pronto. 8. Se hace el tonto por conveniencia. 
9. La torre Eiffel tiene trescientos metros de altura. ^iSabe 
Vd. que anchura tiene? 10. Col6n descubri6 la America el 
doce de Octubre de mil cuatrocientos noventa y dos. 11. Este 
afio es el mil novecientos y cuatro. Por lo tanto, hace cuatro- 
cientos y doce aiios de dicho acontecimiento y de dicha fecha. 
12. El peso tiene cien centavos, 6 diez reales de plata, 6 cinco 
pesetas. 13. ^Cuantos anos tiene Vd. ? — Veinte anos. 

14. Hagannos Vds. el favor de repasar dos veces la lecci6n de 
los niimeros cardinales y ordinales desde uno hasta sesenta 
y cuatro. 15. Un quebrado consta de dos guarismos; el 



LESSON XXXI l6l 

numerador, que es un numero cardinal, y el denominador, que 
puede ser un numero ordinal. i6. El rio tiene una anchura 
de quinientos pies, y tiene diez millas de largo. 1 7. Voy a 
hacerme hacer un traje. 18. Un medio mas dos quintos son 
nueve decimos. 19. El nino tiene tres manzanas y media. 
20. El criado estuvo aqui hace una hora y media. 21. Ka- 
game Vd. el favor de decirle que haga entrar al hombre. 
22. No importa que digamos tres quinzavos (quince-avos) 6 un 
quinto. 2^. Algunas veces nos hacia falta dinero. 24. La 
sala tiene cincuenta y cinco pies de largo (longitud) y treinta y 
seis de ancho (anchura). 25. A Pio Nono sigui6 Le6n Trece. 
•26. (iQue hora es? — Son las diez y media. A la una 
vendre aqui. 27. El hijo mayor de Felipe Primero era como 
emperador Carlos Quinto de Alemania y como rey Carlos 
Primero de Espana. 

B. I.I should like you to tell {iuiperf. si(bj.) me whether^ you 
need (any) money. 2. Julian told us three months ago that he 
was having a house built. 3. Never mind what'^ he says: we 
shall try to see her tomorrow, if it is not too^ cold. 4. We shall 
make ourselves beloved by everybody. 5. What^ is the date? — 

It is the fourth of October, nineteen hundred and three. 6. How 
old is your father? He is fifty-two years old. 7. There are two 
figures in a Spanish fraction : three-sevenths has a numerator, which 
is a cardinal, and a denominator, which is an ordinal. Sometimes 
the denominator is a cardinal with -avo. 8. Two-thirds and (plus) 
one-sixth are five-sixths. 9. Alphonsus the Thirteenth is the 

Spanish king. 10. That servant was acting as porter three months 
ago. II. The river is five hundred miles long and six hundred 
feet w4de. 12. It was so warm that we did not go in. 13. I 
should not like him to play {iuiperf, stibj.) the fool. 14. What 
time was it? — It was half-past eight. 15. Please give me three 
and (a) half apples. 16. He did us the favor of telling us his 
name. 17. They would like us to tell them how many the parts of 
the world are. 18. The servant is packing your four trunks. 



1 62 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

19. The numerator of that fraction is the numeral seventeen. 

20. It is so cold here, that we shall go into ^ your room ; [it] is not 
freezing there. 

1 si, 2 lo que, 3 detnasiado. ■* sCudl? 5 Use entrar en. 



LESSON XXXII 

176. Adverbs. 

aqui, aca, here. alii, alia, there (distant from 

ahl, there (near the person ad- both the speaker and the per- 

dressed). son addressed) . 

estoy muy bien aqui, I am very comfortable here. 
a dos pasos de aca, two paces (steps) from here. 
alia iremos todos, we shall all go there. 

a. With verbs of motion, ' here ' is usually aca, and * there ' is alia ; 
but aqui and alii are used to denote a definite, specific place : ven aca, 
' come here '; ven aqui, ' come right here.' 

b. * Here in ' is aqui en, and ' there in ' is ahi en or alia en : alia en 
Puerto Rico, * over there in Porto Rico.' 

c. English expletive * there ' is not to be expressed in Spanish : hay, 

* there is,' ' there are ' ; han salido de este pueblo mas de veinte familias, 
' there have left this town more than tw^enty families.' 

177. Mucho, ^ much/ ' a great deal * ; muy, ' very.' 

trabaja mucho, he works a great deal, 
estoy muy cansado, I am very tired. 

Before past participles, ^ much,' ' very much,' is muy. 

es muy estimado, he is much esteemed. 
. te estoy muy agradecido, I am very much obliged to you. 

But with the past participle of a perfect tense, ^ much ' is mucho : 
ha escrito mucho, ^ he has written much (a great deal).' 

a. * Very,' when standing alone, is mucho : I es interesante el libro ? 

* is the book interesting ? ' si, muchO, * yes, very.' 



LESSON XXXII 163 

178. Ya, ' already/ ^ now ' ; with a negative, ' no longer/ ' no 
more.' 

ya es tarde, it is already late. ya no fuma, he doesn't smoke 

ya acabe, I have already fin- any longer (any more). 

ished. ya no tengo dinero, I have no 

ya entiendo, I understand more money (I haven't any 

now. more money). 

179. -mente. — In Enghsh many adverbs of manner are 
formed by adding the termination -ly to adjectives, as ^quickly' 
(from ^ quick '), ' correctly ' (from ' correct '), etc. In Spanish 
many adverbs are similarly formed by adding -mente to the 
feminine singular of descriptive adjectives, as severamente (from 
severe), ' severely,' facilmente (from facil), ' easily,' etc. 

a. When several adverbs in -mente modify the same word, -mente is 
omitted from all but the last : habla docta, concisa y elegantemente, ' he 
speaks learnedly, concisely, and elegantly.' 

180. The Prepositions JPor and Par a. — ' For ' is expressed 
by por or para. If ' for ' means ' for the sake of,' 'on account 
of,' or ' in exchange for,' it is expressed by por ; if it denotes 
purpose or destination, it is expressed by para. 

daria la vida por el, I would give my life for him. 
los sacrificios que hizo por ella, the sacrifices that he made for her. 
peleaba por la vida, he was fighting for his life. 
le castigue iK)r haberme dicho una mentira, I punished him for hav- 
ing told me a lie. 
he pagado diez pesos por el perro, I have paid ten dollars for the dog. 
este libro es para ti, this book is for you. 
parte para Madrid, I am leaving for Madrid. 

a. Por also means * through,' ' by,' ^ ^ per.'' 

1 ' By ' is usually de, after passive verbs and participles that express feeling 
or emotion : es amado de todos, ' he is beloved by all.' 



164 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

por temor, through fear. 

entr6 por la ventana, he entered through the window. 

este arbol ha sido plantado por mi abuelo, this tree was planted by my 

grandfather. 
me C0gi6 por la mano, he caught me by the hand. 
diez por ciento, ten per cent. 
mil pesos por ano, a thousand dollars per year (a year). 

b. Before an infinitive, * to,' meaning ' for the sake of,' * in exchange 
for,' is por, and meaning ' in order to ' is para. 

pugnando por entrar, fighting to enter. 

lo hizo para enganarme, he did it to deceive me. 

c. Note also the following ways of expressing * for ' in Spanish : 

estuve alii un ano, I was there for a year. 
hace un ano que estoy aqui, I have been here/?r a year. 
voy a Madrid por un ano, I am going to Madrid /7r a year. 
tengo que escribir un ejercicio en castellano para manana, I must write 
a Spanish exercise for to-morrow. 

181. In English nouns are often used adjectively, as in ^ a 
wheel chair/ * a saw-mill/ etc. A noun used adjectively in 
EngHsh is usually expressed in Spanish by a noun preceded 
by de or para. 

una estatua de marmol, a marble statue. 

una vela de cera, a wax candle. 

una maquina de coser, a sewing-machine. 

un vaso para vino, a wineglass. 

una cuchara para sopa, a soup spoon. 

182. With verbs meaning to take (from), to ask (of), etc., 
' of or ' from ' is expressed in Spanish by a. 

el capitdn quit6 al soldado el punal, the captain took the dagger from 

the soldier. 
hemos pedido un favor k tu senor padre, we asked a favor of your 

father. 
ik qui6n compraste el caballo? of whom did you buy the horse? 



LESSON XXXII 165 

a. A personal pronoun object is put in the dative case (indirect object). 

me han robado mucho dinero, they have stolen a great deal of money 

from me. 
se lo quite, I took it av^^ay from him. 

183. A preposition is usually retained before a substantive 
clause in Spanish, but omitted in English. 

estoy convencido de mi error, I am convinced of my error. 

estoy convencido de que no dijo la verdad, I am convinced that he 

did not tell the truth. 
me alegro de eso, I am glad of that. 

me alegro de que no pueda venir, I am glad that he cannot come. 
no me acuerdo de su nombre, I do not remember his name. 
me acuerdo de que se llama Pedro, I remember that he is called Peter, 
estoy seguro del hecho, I am certain of the fact, 
estoy seguro de que no dara nada, I am certain that he will give nothing. 

184. Idiomatic Expressions : 

ir escalera arriba (abajo), (to) go rio abajo, down-stream, 

upstairs (downstairs). dlas antes, days before. 

tierra adentro, inland. meses despues, months afterward. 
mar afuera, seaward. 

dice que si (que no), he says so (not). 

creo que si (que no), I believe so (not). 

espero que si (que no), I hope so (not). 

me parece que si (que no), it seems to me so (it doesn't seem to me so). 

acaba de partir, he has just left. 
acababa de partir, he had just left. 

no volver6 a mentir, I shall not lie again. 

poco falt6 para que se cayese (cayera), he almost fell. 

hoy mismo, this very day. 

ayer mismo, even yesterday. 

por la tarde, in the evening. 

manana por la manana, tomorrow morning. 



l66 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

<: vive usted por aqui ? do you live about here ? 

voy por pan, I am going after bread. 

he enviado por el medico, I have sent for the physician. 

te pagare para el 5 de mayo, I shall pay you (by) the 5th of May. 

Iey6 la carta para si^ he read the letter to himself. 

este nino es pequeno para su edad, this child is small for his age. 

no sirve para nada, it is good for nothing. 

estudia para medico, he is studying to be a physician. 

estoy para partir, I am about to leave. 
estoy por partir, I am incUned to leave. 

185. Irregular Verbs. 

Dar^ (to) give. Oir, (to) hear. 

Saber, (to) know. Ver, (to) see. 

Study §§ 241, 245, 254, and 258. 

186. Saber. ' (To) know/ meaning ' (to) have knowledge of,' 
^ (to) be aware of,' is saber (saber does not take a personal 
object) ; meaning ' (to) be acquainted with/ it is conocer. 

I sabes que es verdad ? do you i conoces a aquel joven ? do you 

know that it is true ? know that young man ? 

a. Saber also means * (to) know how,' ^ * (to) learn ' (in the sense of 
* (to) get knowledge of); saber a means * (to) taste of,' * (to) savor of.' 

no sabe nadar, he doesn't know how to swim. 

supe que no pudiste venir, I learned that you couldn't come. 

sabe a pescado, it tastes of fish. 

b. CaUi meaning 'know how,' is saber: * can he read and write?' 
isabe leer y escribir? 

1 ' To know how ' is saber como, when the main and the dependent verbs 
have different subjects, as in no se como viven, ' I do not know how they live.' 
And also when the dependent clause is an indirect question, as in no se como 
puedo hacerlo, ' I do not know how I can do it.' 



LESSON XXXII 167 

187. Idiomatic Expressions : 

dar voces, (to) call out, (to) shout. no sabe nada, he doesn't know 

dar los buenos dias, (to) wish good anything. 

day. [marry him. hacer saber, (to) make known. 

eila le di6 el si, she agreed to no s6 que contestar, I do not 

dar a saber (a conocer), (to) make know what to answer, [clare ! 

known. joye! jOiga! listen! hear! I de- 

lya. diste de comer d los caba- oigo subir^ a alguno, I hear some 

llos? have you already fed the one coming up. 

horses? oy6 gemir a los pobres cautivos, 

dar un paseo, (to) take a walk. she heard the poor captives 

di6 en el bianco, he hit the mark. groan. 

la ventana da a la calle, the win- me oi Uamar por alguno, I heard 

dow faces the street. some one call me; I heard 

me doy por vencido, I give it up. myself called by name. 

luego daran las doce, it will soon vi caer 1 a mis companeros, I saw 

strike twelve. my companions fall. 

me di6 la fiebre amarilla, I caught no tengo nada que ver con eso, I 

the yellow fever. haven't anything to do with that. 

Exercise XXXII 

A, I. Venga Vd. aca y si^ntese aqui, y digame lo que estaba 
haciendo alii. 2. Vaya Vd. otra vez para alia, y ens^neme lo 
que estaba arreglando. 3. ,i D6nde esta mi diccionario? — 
Por ahi anda, pero no s^ donde esta. 4. Lo siento mucho ; 
estoy muy aburrido de su abandono. 5. Ya lleg6 su amigo, 
y esta muy impaciente por verle a Vd. ; viene elegantemente 
vestido. 6. Mariana parto para Sevilla por tener que asistir 
a las fiestas reales. 7. Emple6 su capital en un negocio al 
ocho por ciento. 8. " Las enfermedades entran por toneladas 
y salen por onzas." 9. " Come para vivir, pero no vivas para 
comer.'* 10. Un puente de acero, una sortija de diamantes, 
una silla de montar, una prensa de imprimir, — ^cual vale mas? 
II. Dame un lapiz : quiero escribir una carta en castellano y 
otra en ingles. 12. ^jSabe Vd. que su amigo va a dar una 

1 Note that a dependent infinitive immediately follows oir or ver. 



1 68 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

recepci6n? 13. Hagame Vd. el favor de darme un poco de 
agua templada con agua. 14. No le he visto a Vd. hace un 
ano ; asi es que a primera vista no le conoci. 15. Dar de 
comer al hambriento es obra de misericordia. 16. La ventana 
de mi cuarto da al mar : asi es que hace alii siempre fresco. 
1 7- <i Q^^ hora es ? — Acaban de dar las tres en el reloj de la 
catedral. 18. Suba Vd. a mi cuarto y bajeme mis gemelos de 
6pera, que se los quiero dar a este seiior. 19. Si le escribe Vd. 
a su familia, sirvase darle mis recuerdos. 20. Un amigo intimo 
me dice : "<jqu^ quieres? " Una persona que no conozco bien 
me dice : "^qu^ quiere Vd.?'^ En la fonda el mozo me dice : 
"^ique quiere el senor?" 

21 Madrid, el 10 de Enero de 1905. 

May Seiior mio : ^ 

Tengo el gusto de acusar a Vd. el recibo de su apreciable carta 
fechada el 2 del corriente, y en contestaci6n le aviso que no es 
posible aceptar la proposici6n que Vd. me hace. 22. Sirvase 
Vd. dispensarme el que no haya contestado a vuelta de correo. 
Tengo el honor de suscribirme de Vd. S. S. Q. B. S. M.^ 

23. Querido Jacinto : 

Acabo de recibir tu carta del 25 del ppdo/ en la cual me 
pides te envie cincuenta pesos (^50) por carta certificada 6 por 
giro postal. 24. Siento decirte que no puedo adelantarte ni 
un centavo antes del 2 del proximo mes. Entretanto ten cuidado 
con no gastar mas de lo necesario. « rp r 4 . 

25. Sr. Dn. Jose Morales. 

Muy Seiior mio y amigo : 

Por la ultima de Vd. del 1 1 del corriente he sabido la des- 
gracia que acaban Vds. de pasar perdiendo su querido padre. 
26. Acompano a Vds. en su sentimiento y les brindo mi per- 
sona para en lo que ^ les pueda ser util. 

Quedo de Vd. afmo. 



LESSON XXXII 169 

B. I . He made many sacrifices for his friend, and I believe that 
he would give his life for him if it were necessar}^ 2. He said that 
he paid five hundred dollars for the horse ; but he lied, and I shall 
punish him for having told me a lie. 3. The letter is for you, and 
the package is for your brother. 4. Tomorrow I leave for the City 
of Mexico. I have been here for six months, and I am going to 
Mexico for a year. 5. Are you very tired ? — Yes, very ; I am 
going into^ the country to rest for a month. 6. I have already 

taken ten lessons in Spanish, but I have no more money, and I shall 
take no more lessons. 7. Go and get'' a wineglass, and give me 
a glass of wine. 8. A soup spoon is larger than a teaspoon, and a 
table knife is larger than a penknife. 9. He asked several favors 
of me, but I could not, or rather would not, grant them.^ 10. The 
thief stole ten dollars from a rich man, and gave them to a poor man 
who needed them more. Will he be punished for that ? 11. I 
have bought a new bicycle for you, John. I bought it of Mr. 
Navarro. 12. He bought a typewriter of Miss Montoya for his 
daughter, who will now learn to write on it. I3- I cannot remem- 
ber your name, but I remember that I saw you and talked with you 
for an hour last summer. 14. Did the porter go up to my room 
and bring down my trunk ? — He says so, but I don't beheve it. 
15. He almost died, but a skilful physician saved his life. 16. I 
have just seen him, and I do not wish to see him again. ^ 17. Come 
here, child, and sit down at my side. Do you feel tired after running 
and playing so much ? 18. The boy is very large for his age, anS 
he has already decided to study to be a lawyer. ^^^ 19. First he 
read it to himself, and then he read it aloud. 20. When I was 
ill, I sent for Dr. Menendez y Garcia, but he was good for nothing 
and did not cure me. 21. I know him well, and I know that he 
tells the truth. 22. I saw him go into the house, and I saw him 
come out ; but he did not speak to me. 

23. Dear Sir: 

I have just 11 received your letter dated the 7th inst., in which 
you are kind enough ^2 ^q acknowledge the receipt of the draft 
for^* three hundred and twenty-four dollars in^^ American gold. 
24. I am very sincerely yours. ^^ 



I/O SPANISH GRAMMAR 

25. Dear Friend : 

Your very kind ^^ letter of the 3d inst. came ^"^ to hand ^^ the 5th5 
and I now have the pleasure of answering ^^ it. 

It remains for me ^^ to thank you ^^ for your many acts of kind- 
ness 22 toward me and my son. 

26. With affectionate regards I am very truly yours.^^ 

1 Dear Sir. 2 ^, ^. q^ b. S. M. = seguro servidor que besa sus manos. 
3 proximo pasado. ^ afectisimo. ^ para en lo que is better than para lo en 
que, ' for that in which,' ' for anything in which.' 6 ^\ 7 buscar. 8 Say : 
'grant him them.' 9 \5sQvolver, 10 Say: ' for a lawyer.' H Use 

acabar de. 12 se sirve. 13 Omit. l* ^^, 15 Se reitera de Vd. con la 

mds distinguida consider acion su a/mo S. S. Q. B. S. M. 16 apreciable or 

atenta. ^"^ fue. 18 a mis manos. 19 corresponder . 20 restame. 

21 darle miles de gracias. 22 < many acts of kindness,' bondades. 23 « very 

truly yours,' de Vd. S. S. Q. B. S. M. 



LESSON XXXIII 
Conjunctions. 

188. y, e (before initial i or hi), ' and.' 

padre y madre, father and mother, padre 6 hijo, father and son. 

a. y is used before y and the diphthong (li)ie. 
tu y yo, you and I. corta y Mere, it cuts and wounds. 

189. 6, u (before initial or ho), ^or/ 

cinco 6 seis, five or six. siete u echo, seven or eight. 

a. u may also be used between two vowels, the first of which is 6, as in 
leyendo u escribiendo, ' reading or writing,' but 6 is the more usual here. 

190. pero, mas, sino (after a negative), 'but.'^ 

somos los servidores del rey, pero no sus esclavos, we are the king's 

servants, but not his slaves. 
lo dice, mas no lo creo, he says so, but I do not believe it. 
no voy k Paris sino a Madrid, I am not going to Paris, but to Madrid. 

1 Colloquially, pero is used much oftener than mas. 



LESSON XXXIII 171 

a, ' But,' as adverb or preposition, is often expressed by no . . . sino, 
and * no . . . but ' by no mas que. 

no nos visita sino raramente, he visits us but rarely. 
no tengo mas amigo que tu, I have no friend but you. 

191. cuando (interrogatively, cuando^), ^when.' 

se lo dire cuando venga, I shall tell him when he comes, 
^cuando lo hara usted ? when will you do it ? ^ 

a. Que is used instead of cuando to introduce a clause that limits the 
meaning of an adverb or adverb-phrase of time. 

en el momento que venga, se lo un dia que estuve en Barcelona, 
dare, the moment (that) he one day when I was in Barce- 

comes I shall give it to him. lona. 

192. donde (interrogatively, donde), ^ where,' is often made 
more specific by prefixing a, en, or de. 

ik d6nde va usted? where are you going? 

la casa (en) donde vive, the house in which he lives. 

<:de d6nde viene? where does he come from? 

porque, ^because,' porque, ^why '^ (also written per que). 

no lo hice porque no queria hacerlo, I did not do it because I did not 

want to do it. 
I porqu6 no vino usted ayer ? why did you not come yesterday ? 

193. Agreement of Subject and Verb. — A verb agrees with 
its subject in number and person. 

yo soy, I am ; tu eres, you are, etc. 

(i) Two or more singular subjects take a verb in the plural : 61 y ella 
son, * he and she are.' 

1 Strictly speaking, the interrogatives cuando, d6nde, and porque are adverbs 
rather than conjunctions. 



1/2 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

(2) When subjects are of different persons, the verb is in the first 
person plural if any of the subjects is of the first person; and it is in the 
second person if the subjects are of the second and third persons. 

tu y yo somos, you and I are. 
§1 y yo somos, he and I are. 
tu y el sois, you and he are. 

194. Word Order. 

(i) In an affirmative sentence, the subject may precede 
or it may follow the verb. 

el hombre esta enfermo, the man is ill. 

ya lleg6 mi amigo, my friend has already arrived. 

(2) In an interrogative sentence, the subject regularly fol- 
lows the verb. 

I lo compr6 Juan ? did John buy it ? 

195. When the subject follows the verb : 

(i) A noun object usually precedes a noun subject. 
I compr6 la casa tu senor padre ? did your father buy the house ? 

But if the object is the longer, it follows. 

I compr6 tu padre todas estas casas ? did your father buy all these 
houses ? 

(2) A predicate adjective usually precedes a noun subject. 

I es interesante el libro ? is the book interesting ? 

(3) A pronoun subject immediately follows the verb and 
precedes a noun object or a predicate adjective. 

no quiero yo el caballo, I do not want the horse. 
I esta usted enfermo ? are you ill ? 

196. If an adverb does not come first in the sentence, it 
usually follows the verb immediately. 



LESSON XXXIII 173 

manana hablaremos el gobernador y yo, tomorrow the governor 

and I shall have a talk. 
aqui se habla ingles, English is spoken here. 
dice siempre la verdad, he always tells the truth. 
contest6 muy tranquilamente el joven, the young man answered 

quite calmly. 

197. Irregular Verbs. 

andar, (to) go. salir, (to) go out. 

caber, (to) be contained in. caer, (to) fall. 

poner, (to) put. traer, (to) bring. 

asir, (to) grasp. -ducir, (to) lead, 
valer, (to) be worth. 

Study §§ 240, 244, 249, 250, 251, 252, 253, 25s, and 
256; and review Ser, Haber, Estar, and Tener, §§ 236, 
237, 238, and 239. 

198. Andar, ^(to) go/ ' (to) walk ' : ^ (to) go ' in a definite 
direction, or to a definite place, is ir. 

el reloj no anda, the v/atch doesn't go. 
voy a la ciudad, I am going to town. 

199. Idiomatic Expressions. 

se cay(3, he fell down. 

lo deje caer, I dropped it. 

la levita te cae (sienta) bien, the coat fits you well. 

este color cae bien con este otro, this color matches well with this other. 

ya caigo en eso, now I understand that. 

se pone pAlida, she is growing pale. 

el caf6 se pondra frio, the coffee will get cold. 

,;has puesto la mesa? have you set the table? 

el sol se pone, the sun is setting. 

esta gallina no pone huevos, this' hen doesn't lay eggs. 

la nina se puso a llorar, the little girl began to cry. 



1 74 SPANISl 5 I > 1 : VMMAR 

I quien sali6 ? who won ? 

salir a luz, (to) be published. 

I cudnto vale ? how much is it worth ? 

no vale nada, it's good for nothing. 

no vale la pena, it isn't worth while. 

mas vale tarde que nunca, it is better late than never, 

tiene raz6n, he is right. 

no tiene raz6n, he is wrong. 

tengo ganas de visitar a Cuba, I am anxious to visit Cuba. 

I tenga usted cuidado ! look out ! take care ! 

no tenga usted cuidado, don't worry. 

no tiene remedio, there's no help for it. 

no tiene nada de particular, there's nothing strange about it. 

tenga usted la bondad (de), please. 

tengo que hacerlo, I have to do it. 

tengo escrita la carta, I have the letter already written. 

no lo hay, there isn't any. 

hay que tener cuidado, one must take care. 

I que he de hacer ? what am I to do ? 

ha de ser muy pobre, he must be very poor. 

soy de Madrid, I am a native of Madrid. 

esta finca es del Senor G., this plantation belongs to Mr. G. 

es de notar, it should be noted. 

estar en (or de) pie, (to) stand. 
estarse parado, (to) stand still. 

ir a pie, (to) go afoot, (to) walk. 
ir d caballo, (to) ride horseback. 
ir en coche, (to) drive (in a carriage). 

huele d tabaco, it smells of tobacco. 
sabe a ajo, it tastes of garlic. 

de dia, by day. de noche, by night. 

Exercise XXXIII 

A, I . ^ Cuando dijo el senor medico que visitaria al enfermo ? 
— Cuando sus clientes le den una hora de libertad. 2. En 
las horas que lo trat^, lo conoci a fondo. 3. £D6nde encon- 



LESSON XXXIII 175 

trarias mas chistes y mas filosofia que en el Quijote ? 4. El 
pais de donde vengo esta favorecido por un clima ideal. 
5. Era un joven fino ^ inteligente, aunque sus deberes y sus 
gustos eran corapletamente opuestos. 6. Las mejores califi- 
caciones de un estudiante son " sobresaliente " u "6ptimo." 

7. No es Vd. a quien he llamado, sino a su senor padre. 

8. No nos saluda sino de cuando en cuando. 9. Sera su 
compafiera mas no su esclava. 10. Deseo mucho verla, pero 
me es imposible. 11. No serviras a nadie mas que tu Dios y 
Senor. 12. ^Porque no me aviso Vd. con anticipaci6n? — 
Porque no quise molestar su ocupada atenci6n. 13. El tom6 
el mando de las tropas, y di6 las 6rdenes necesarias. 14. Tu, 
el, y yo somos de la misma edad, pero yo soy mas alto que 
vosotros. 15. No puedo negar que ella y yo nos amamos. 
16. Venci6 Napole6n, pero perdi6 sus famosos Guardias 
Nobles. 17. ^Ha terminado su carrera el hijo de Vd.? — 
Todavia no. — i Estudia ingeniatura 6 medicina ? — Estudia 
para medico. 18. Es favorable a nuestra causa la decisi6n 
del Juzgado? — Si; es favorable. 19. Caballero, no deseo 
yo la amistad de Vd. Su comportamiento es inexplicable. 
20. De ese asunto para Vd. tan importante, pronto sabremos 
los detalles. 21. Vivia en la margen este del rio ; al otro lado 
vivia mi primo Antonio. 22. Viste a la francesa ; camina a 
la americana; y vive a la inglesa. 23. ^A c6mo se vende la 
tela china? — Barata, caballero, peso al metro (a la vara). 
24. ^iCuanto gana Vd. alii? — Quinientos pesos al afio poco 
mas 6 menos. 25. Esta sopa sabe a cebolla y limon. El 
paiiuelo de Vd. huele a tabaco. 26. A la vista de su hogar 
cay6 de rodillas y or6 en silencio. 

B. I . He says that he is not going to Seville, but to Malaga ; 
but I do not believe it. 2. We have no friend but John, and he 
visits us but rarely. 3. One day when I was in Paris I went to 
the house in which he lives, but he was not at home. 4. It will 
not be long before he returns, and I shall tell him what you say 



> 



176 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

when he comes. 5. You and I Hve happily,^ but you and John do 
not agree. 6. Did your brother buy the horse? ^ — No ; my father 
bought it ; but he bought it for my brother. 7. Is your brother ill? 
— No; he is in better health than he was last year. 8. Shall you 
walk^ or ride?^ — I prefer to ride, but my sister prefers to drive. ^ 
9. I shall leave this city ^ the last of March or the first of April, if 
the weather permits."^ 10. After being in Buenos Ayres a few 
months, I spoke Spanish well ; or, at least, I thought ^ that I did.^ 
II. He smells of garlic and tobacco, and I do not like to sit by ^^ his 
side. 12. Please change for ^ me ^^ this ten-dollar bill. — I can give 
you two five-dollar bills for it. 13. He speaks Spanish almost 
every day with a Spanish friend, and in this way he is learning to 
speak Spanish well. 14. I went to a neighbor's to borrow a book 
which I wished to read. 15. The neighbor was not at home, and 
his wife said that she didn't know when he would return. 16. She 
said that as soon as he returned, she would send the book to me^ 
17. Poor Peter! He was blind with rage and trembling with cold, 
and he couldn't say a word. 18. In autumn the sun sets earlier 
each day. 19. When they gave him the news, he became ^*^ very 
sad and began ^^ to weep. 20. Go to Mr. Garcia's and^^ learn i^ 
the news of the day. 21. The Indian served me as guide in these 
forests. 22. His son works as tailor in Valles' workshop. 23. Your 
handkerchief smells of oranges. Have you any in your pocket? 
24. We should work by day and sleep by night, but I usually work, 
by night and sleep by day. 

1 Say: 'happy.' 2 pjace the subject after the object. 3 Say: ' go afoot.' 

4 Say: 'go on horseback.' ^ Say : 'go in (a) carriage.' 6 Qmit. ^Say: 

• permits it.* 8 Use creer, 9 Say : ' I spoke it well.' l^ ^, 11 Dative. 
12 XJsQponerse. 13 a, 14 informarse de. 



LESSON XXXIV 



200. Qualifying Suffixes. — The Spanish diminutive and 
augmentative suffixes consist of endings all of which may be 
attached to nouns, while most diminutives may be attached to 



LESSON XXXIV 177 

adjectives and adverbs. They occur commonly in colloquial 
language, but rarely in elevated diction. The foreigner should 
use them with the utmost caution. It is generally safe to use 
-ito, but one not to the manner born would best avoid the other 
suffixes until he has become familiar with their use. 

a. The qualifying suffixes are attached to the stem of a word after it 
has dropped a final unstressed vowel or, often, an unstressed diphthong. 

pajaro, pajarillo. amigo, amiguito. rosario, rosarito. 

201. Diminutives. — There are three forms of most diminu- 
tive suffixes, as follows : (i) -ito, -illo, -uelo, etc. ; (2) -cito, -cillo, 
-zuelo, etc. ; and (3) -ecito, -ecillo, -ezuelo, etc. 

a. The third form (-ecito,^ -ecillo, -ezuelo, etc.) is used : 

(i) With monosyllables. 

flor, flower, florecita, little flower. pez, fish, pececito, little fish. 
rey, king. reyezuelo, little king. 

(2) With words of more than one syllable, ending in -e. 

viaje, journey. viajecito, little trip. 

madre, mother. madrecita, dear little mother. 

(3) With words ending in -a or -0, that have the radical 
diphthong -ie or -ue.^ 

viento, wind. vientecito, slight breeze. 

piedra, stone. piedrecita, httle stone. 

pueblo, village. pueblecillo, Kttle village. 

(4) With some words ending in unstressed -ia, -io, -ua, -uo. 

bestia, beast. bestiecita, little beast. 

genio, genius. geniecillo, little genius. 

lengua, tongue. lenguecita, little tongue. 

arduo, arduous. arduecito, rather arduous. 

1 Pie makes piececito, piececillo, etc. 

2 In old Spanish the radical diphthongs ie and ue usually reverted to e and 
when a qualifying suffix was added : as in puerta, ' door,' portezuela, ' carriage 
door ' ; but in modern Spanish the diphthongs are usually retained : nieto, 
nietecillo ; huevo, huevecillo ; etc. 



178 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

b. The second form (-cito, -cillo, -zuelo, etc.) is used with 
words of more than one syllable, ending in -n or -r, especially if 
they have the stress on the final syllable. 

Iadr6n, thief. ladroncillo, petty thief. 

galan, gallant. galancete, ladies' man. 

joven, young man. jovencito, youth. 

autor, author. autorcillo, young author. 

But, arbol, tree. arbolito, little tree. 

c. The first form (-ito, -illo, -uelo, etc.) is used in all other 
cases. 

hermano, brother. hermanito, little brother. 

polio, fowl. poUuelo, chick. 

d. There are some exceptions to the above rules ; such as 

mano, hand. manecita (or manita), little hand. 

abuelo, grandfather. abuelito, dear little grandfather. 

agrio, sour. agrillo, rather sour. 

jardin, garden. jardinito (or jardincito), little garden. 

senora, lady. senorita, young lady. 

202. The meaning of the various diminutive suffixes is as 
follows : 

a, -ito (-a), -cito (-a), -ecito (-a), express smallness of size, 
quahty, or degree, together with fondness, admiration, and 
respect. They may usually be translated 'httle,' ^ dear Httle,* etc. 

pobre hijita mia, my poor dear child. madrecita, dear little mother. 

gatito, kitten. un poquito, a very little. 

toditos los dias, almost every day. cerquita, quite near. 
una nina grandecita, a rather large girl. 

b, -illo (-a), -cillo (-a), -ecillo (-a), express smallness of size, 
quahty, or degree, with indifference, or with depreciation, ridi- 
cule, or pity. 

ladroncillo, little thief. pobre viejecillo, poor old m^n. 

sonrisilla, faint smile. pobrecillo, poor little fellovi^. 



LESSON XXXIV 179 

c, -uelo (-a), -zuelo (-a), -ezuelo (-a), express smallness, 
together with ridicule, disdain, or mockery. 

plazuela, little square, autorcillo, poor author, sus ojuelos, his little eyes. 

d, -ico (-a), -cico (-a), -ecico (-a),^ have the force of -ito, ex- 

^cept that they are generally used somewhat humorously or 

sarcastically. 

un perrico, a pretty little dog. 

e, -ete (-a), -cete (-a), are used in a diminutive and often 
depreciative sense. 

un pobrete, a poor fellow. un caballerete, a * dandy.' 

/. -ejo (-a) usually denotes contempt. 

librejo, worthless book, caminejo, wretched road, amarillejo, yellowish. 

g. The dialectal forms -in (-ina) and -ino (-a) are sometimes 
used in Castilian to express smallness. 

nino chiquitin, wee little child. cebollino, young onion. 

203. Augmentative Suffixes. — a, -on (-ona) denotes large 
size, with or without grotesqueness. Feminine nouns usually 
become masculine upon assuming this ending, unless sex is 
indicated. 

hombr6n, big man. sill6n, easy chair. barb6n, thick beard. 

picar6n, great rogue. cuchar6n, ladle. 

b, -azo (-a) has a meaning similar to that of -on, but it is 
used less often. 

bocaza, big mouth. mujeraza, large, coarse woman. 

c, -ote (-a) is augmentative or depreciative. 

palabrota, harsh word. ricote, rich and pretentious. 

1 In some parts of the Spanish-speaking world, e.g. Cuba, -ico replaces -ito 
after a stem ending in -t : as platico for platito, gatico for gatito, etc. 



l8o SPANISH GRAMMAR 

d, -acho (-a), -ucho (-a), and -ajo (-a) express disdain and 
contempt. 

vinacho, poor wine. casucha, hut, trapajo, dirty rag. 

204. Combinations of diminutive and augmentative endings 
occur. 

chico,^ chiquito, chiquitin, wee little child. 
hombre, hombr6n, hombronazo, big, awkward man. 
picaro, picar6n, picaroncillo, small man who is a great rogue. 
picaro, picarillo, picarill6n, large man who is a little rogue. 

205. The endings -azo and -ada are often used to denote a 
blow, thrust, discharge, etc. These endings are neither diminu- 
tive nor augmentative, but denote the result of an action. 

bastonazo, blow with a walking-stick. fusilazo, rifle-shot. 

punalada, stab with a dagger. 

206. Idiomatic Expressions.^ 

a principios de mayo, the first of May. 
a mediados de junio, the middle of June. 
a fines (liltimos) de julio, the last of July. 

ik c6mo estamos hoy? what day of the month is this ? 

k los pocos anos de estar en Madrid, after being in Madrid a few years. 

al otro lado, on the other side. a lo rnenos, at least. 

d la francesa, after the fashion of the French. 

poco k poco, little by little. uno a uno, one by one. 

I a cuanto se vende ? what is it worth ? 

k peso la vara, el metro, a dollar a yard, a metre. 

quinientos pesos al ano, five hundred dollars a year. 

caer de rodillas, (to) fall on one's knees. 
trabajar de sastre, (to) work as tailor. 
servir de guia, (to) serve as guide. 

1 Note chico, chiquito, chiquitito (chiquitico) . 

2 Most of these illustrate the use of prepositions. 



LESSON XXXIV l8l 

ciegO de c51era, blind with anger. 
temblar de frio, (to) tremble with cold. 

estoy mejor (peor) de salud, I am in better (worse) health. 

huerfano de madre (padre), orphan on the mother's (father's) side. 

camino de Cadiz, by way of Cadiz. 

un billete de a diez pesos, a ten-dollar bill (bank note). 

de esta manera, de este modo, in this way. 

desde luego, at once. 

pobre de mi, poor me. 

la buena de la Justina, good Justine. 

estar en casa, (to) be at home, ir a casa, (to) go home. 
esta en casa del Senor Montejo, he is at Mr. Montejo's. 
va a casa de un vecino, he is going to a neighbor's. 
viene de casa de mi tio, he comes from my uncle's. 



Exercise XXXIV 

A. I. S6lo un pillete hubiera cometido tal maldad. 2. El 
bombrecillo se acerc6 a mi y me present6 a su hijita. 3. Al salir 
le dijo al portero : " Ahorita estare de vuelta." 4. Ese hom- 
br6n es un montanes : esa mujeraza es su hermana. 5. Las 
dos grandecitas son sus nietas ; las pequefiitas son sus sobrini- 
tas. 6. El politiquejo se enoj6, y volviendose le ech6 dos 
6 tres palabrotas. 7. El reyezuelo os6 desafiar al empera- 
dor. 8. El soldadote sali6 de la casa, y ciego de c61era 
se dirigio hacia la plazuela. 9. i Esta Vd. mejor de salud? 
— Si; un tantico. 10. El jovencito que le present^ a Vd. 
anoche es huerfano de padre y madre. Trabaja de ingeniero 
en el Ferrocarril del Norte. Dicen que tiene un talentazo 
descomunal. 11. La ensalada esta cargadita de mostaza 
como a Vd. le gusta. 12. Cambieme este doble hidalgo 

por dos billetes de a diez pesos, 6 cuatro de a cinco. De 
esta manera podr^ pagar mis deudas. 13. "j Pobre de mi ! " 
exclam6 el abogadillo, "no fu^ mas que un descuidillo." 



1 82 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

14. " Caballerito, una limosnita, un centavito, 6 cualquiera 
cosita que quieraVd. darme," exclam6el mendigo. 15. Poco 
a poco, caballero. Se defender a mis amigos ausentes cuando 
se les insulta sin que puedan defenderse. 16. Uno a uno 
6 dos a dos marchareis por el puente, pero por ningun con- 
cepto en pelot6n. 17. ^Acaba de llegar Vd. de casa de mi 

padre? — No; vengo de casa de su hermano. 18. A mi 
me gusta andar aprisa. Este tren anda con una velocidad de 
cuarenta kilometros por hora; pero en Alemania hay trenes 
que andan ciento cincuenta y aun doscientos kil6metros por 
hora. 19. P6ngase Vd. este sombrero a ver qu^ tal le esta, 
y si le gusta, saiga con ^1 y traigamelo cuando encuentre el 
suyo. 20. Su amigo habra tenido que ir a declarar ante 
el juez : este esta en el Palacio de Justicia y es un anciano 
muy venerable. 21. El emperador Guillermo se cay6 del 
caballo y se lastim6 una pierna. 22. Estuve de pie (parado) 
toda la funcion, y estoy muy cansado. 23. En esa caja no 

caben mas de trescientos volumenes : la caja es demasiado 
pequefia. 24. Sefiora, (Jc6mo esta su hijito? — Muy bien, 
gracias ; y (:c6mo esta la hijita de Vd. ? 25. A las ninas 
grandecitas no les gusta jugar con las chiquillas. 26. El 
pobrecito esta enfermo. El medico desea que tome el sol 
toditos los dias. 

B. I. My little soni has two kittens that he loves dearly. 

2. My dear little mother,^ may I go to Henry's to play with him? 

3. Little Anna 1 has a little sister ^ that is only two months old. 

4. The little thief ^ is a great rogue. ^ 5. I shall return home in a 
moment ^ if I can find the book that I am looking for. 6. He has 
a large mouth ^ and a thick beard,^ and he says many harsh words.^ 
7. I was talking with a dear friend ^ of mine when the little man^ 
came out of his house and approached us. 8. The sun sets at 
five and rises at seven o'clock today. 9. He turned pale and 
dropped the purse that he had in his hand. 10. This coat fits 
you better than that one, but I do not like either one. 11. My 



LESSON XXXIV 183 

watch doesn't go. — Mine goes, but it is slow. 12. Cecilia, set 
the table. It is dinner time, and I am very hungry. 13. Is the 
coffee ready? — It is ready, and it will get cold if you do not drink 
it soon. 14. The color of the hat does not match that of your 
coat. If I were you, I should not buy that hat. 15. He is usu- 
ally wrong, but he always believes that ^ he ^ is ^ right. 16. I must 
work today, or they will discharge me. — There is nothing strange 
about that. 17. It should be noted that he is a native of Spain, 
but he does not speak Spanish w^ell. He is a Catalan. 18. When 
will your work be published? — Next year. — It is better late than 
never. 19. When his son died, we gave him the fatal news little 
by little. 20. Do you wish to go afoot? — No; I prefer to go 
on horseback, but the ladies need to go in a carriage. 21. Please 
tell me what day of the month this is. — It is the fourth of July. 
22. He always goes out with his mother or his sister. He loves 
his mother and his sister tenderly. 23. He speaks Spanish and 
English well, but he does not write these languages correctly. 

24. Where are you coming from, and where are you going to? 

25. Is your brother's bride pretty? — Yes ; very. 

1 Use diminutive. 2 Use augmentative. 3 Omit. 4 Use infinitive. 



THE VERB 

207. Like its prototype, the Latin verb, the Spanish 
verb shows changes of mood, tense, and person, by the 
addition to a verb stem of certain inflexional endings : 

habl-ar, to speak. habl-o, I speak. 

habl-aba, I used to speak, or habl-e, I spoke. 

I was speaking. habl-ando, speaking. 

It resembles the English verb in forming compound 
tenses by adding to an auxiliary verb the past participle, 
or the present participle, of a principal verb ; e,g, 
he hablado, I have spoken ; estoy hablando, I am speaking. 

208. For the sake of convenience we may consider the 
Spanish verb under five different headings : (i) the regular 
verb, (2) the verb with inceptive endings, (3) the radical- 
changing verb, (4) the -uir (-iiir) verb, (5) the irregular verb. 

209. There are six principal parts, a knowledge of which 
will aid in the formation of the other parts of many verbs : 
these are the present infinitive, the past participle, the present 
participle (or gerund), the first person singular of the present 
indicative, the first person singular of the preterite indicative, 
and the third person singular of the preterite indicative. 

(i) The present infinitive is the basis of the future and the con- 
ditional of the indicative of all verbs. For the future, there are added 
to the infinitive of the verb in question the forms, or the ending (as 
in the case of the second plural), of the present indicative of the 
verb haber, ^ to have.' The initial h of the forms of haber disappears 
in the composition. For the conditional, there are added to the 

184 



THE VERB 185 

infinitive of the verb in question the endings of the imperfect indica- 
tive of haber. Irregular verbs may show a certain alteration of the 
infinitive basis. 

(2) The past participle enters into the composition of all perfect 
tenses. 

(3) The present participle, or gerund, enters into the composi- 
tion of the periphrastic progressive tenses. 

(4) The first person singular present indicative has, in regular 
verbsj the same stem as the rest of the verb, except the future and 
the conditional of the indicative. In irregular, inceptive, and -uir 
(but not in radical-changing) verbs, it often furnishes the stem for 
the whole present subjunctive. 

(5) The first, person singular preterite indicative has the same 
stem as all the rest of that tense in regular, inceptive, -uir, and irregu- 
lar verbs ; and as the second singular and the first and second plural 
of this same tense in radical-changing verbs. Its stem is also the 
same as that of the subjunctive imperfect tenses and the hypotheti- 
cal (or future) subjunctive of all but radical-changing verbs. 

(6) The third person singular preterite indicative has, in radical- 
changing verbs, the same stem as the third plural of that tense, and 
as the subjunctive imperfect tenses and the hypothetical subjunctive. 

(Apart from regular verbs, the above rules are not complete guides, 
and practice must be relied on.) 

210. The Regular Verb. — It is the custom to speak of three 
regular conjugations in Spanish, classified, according to their 
endings, as the -ar, or first ; the -er, or second ; and the -ir, 
or third conjugation. In actual practice, however, we find that 
there are but two entire conjugations, for in all but four forms 
(the present infinitive, the first and second persons plural of the 
present indicative, and the second person plural of the impera- 
tive) the -ir or third conjugation has the same endings as the -er, 
or second. In the four exceptional forms, the third conjugation 
has the distinctive vowel i (-ir, -imos, -is, -id), whereas the second 
has e (-er, -emos, -eis, -ed). The following are the paradigms ; 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



Present 

habl ar, to speak. 



Present 

(Gerund) 

habl ando, speaking. 

Past 
habl ado, spoken. 



II 

INFINITIVE MOOD 

Present 

tern er, to fear. 

PARTICIPLES 
Present 

(Gerund) 

tern iendo, fearing. 

Past 

tem i^o, feared. 

INDICATIVE MOOD 



III 

Present 

viv ir, to live. 



Present 

(Gerund) 

viv iendo, living. 

Past 
viv ido, lived. 



I speak, do speak, am 


I fear, do fear, am 


/ live, do live, am 


speaking, etc. 


fearing, etc. 


living, etc. 


habl 


tem 


viv 


habl as 


tem es 


viv es 


habl a 


tem e 


viv e 


habl amos 


tem emos 


viv imos 


habl ais 


tem eis 


viv is 


habl an 


tem en 


viv en 


Imperfect 


Imperfect 


Imperfect 


/ spoke, was speaking, 


I feared, -was fearing. 


/ lived, ivas living, 


used to speak, etc. 


used to fear, etc. 


used to live, etc. 


habl aba 


tem ia 


viv la 


habl abas 


tem ias 


viv ias 


habl aba 


tem ia 


viv ia 


habl abamos 


tem iamos. 


viv iamos 


habl abais 


tem iais 


viv iais 


habl aban 


tem ian 


viv ian 





THE VERB 


i8; 


Preterite 


Preterite 


Preterite 


/ spoke, etc. 


I feared, etc. 


/ lived, etc. 


habl e 


tern i 


viv i 


habl aste 


tern iste 


viv iste 


habl 6 


tern i6 


viv i6 


habl amos 


tern imos 


viv imos 


habl asteis 


tern isteis 


viv isteis 


habl aron 


tern ieron 


viv ieron 


Future 


Future 


Future 


/ shall speak, etc. 


I shall fear , etc. 


I shall live, etc. 


hablar e 


temer e 


vivir e 


hablar as 


temer as 


vivir as 


hablar a 


temer a 


vivir a 


hablar emos 


temer emos 


vivir emos 


hablar eis 


temer eis 


vivir eis 


hablar an 


temer an 


vivir an 


Conditional 


Conditional 


Conditional 


/ should speak, etc. 


/ should fear, etc. 


/ should live, etc. 


hablar ia 


temer ia 


vivir ia 


hablar ias 


temer ias 


vivir ias 


hablar ia 


temer ia 


vivir ia 


hablar iamos 


temer iamos 


vivir iamos 


hablar iais 


temer iais 


vivir iais 


hablar ian 


temer ian 
IMPERATIVE MOOD 


vivir ian 


speak, etc. 


fear, etc. 


live, etc. 


2^5^. habl a 


tem e 


viv e 


2^/^/. habl ad 


tern ed 


viv id 



1 88 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 





SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 




Present 


Present 


Present 


{That I may) speak, 


( That I may) fear, 


( That I may) live. 


{let me) speak, etc. 


{let me) fear, etc. 


{let me) live, etc. 


habl e 


tern a 


viv a 


habl es 


tern as 


viv as 


hable 


tern a 


viv a 


habl emos 


tern amos 


viv amos 


habl eis 


tern ais 


viv ais 


habl en 


tern an 


viv an 


Imperfect 


Imperfect 


Imperfect 


First Form 


First Form 


First Form 


(-se Imperfect) 


(-se Imperfect) 


(-se Imperfect) 


{That ox if I might) 


{That ox if I might) 


{That ox if I might) 


speak, etc. 


fear, etc. 


live, etc. 


habl ase 


tern iese 


viv iese 


habl ases 


tern ieses 


viv ieses 


habl ase 


tern iese 


viv iese 


habl asemos 


tern iesemos 


viv iesemos 


habl aseis 


tern ieseis 


viv ieseis 


habl asen 


tern iesen 


viv iesen 


Imperfect 


Imperfect 


Imperfect 


Second Form 


Second Form 


Second Form 


(-ra Imperfect) 


(-ra Imperfect) 


(-ra Imperfect) 


/ should speak, {that ox if I should fear, {that or if 


/ should live, {that or 


I might) speak, etc. 


/ might) fear, etc. 


if I might) live, etc. 


habl ara 


tern iera 


viv iera 


habl aras 


tern ieras 


viv ieras 


habl ara 


tern iera 


viv iera 


habl aramos 


tern ieramos 


viv ieramos 


habl arais 


tern ierais 


viv ierais 


habl aran 


tern ieran 


viv ieran 



THE VERB 



189 



Hypothetical 



Hypothetical 



Hypothetical 






(or Future) (or Future) (or Future) 
/ {may or shall) speak, etc. I {may or shall) fear, etc. I {may or shall) live, etc, 

habl are tern iere viv iere 

habl ares tern ieres viv ieres 

habl are tern iere viv iere 

habl aremos tern ieremos viv ieremos 

Jiabl areis tern iereis viv iereis 

habl aren tem ieren viv ieren 

211. Compound Perfect Tenses. — The compound tenses 
of. all verbs, regular or not, are formed by adding then- 
past participle (invariable) to a part of the auxiliary 
haber, *to have ' (see § 237); e.g. 

INFINITIVE PARTICIPLE 

Present Perfect Present Perfect (Perfect Gerund) 

to have spoken having spoken 

haber hablado habiendo hablado 

INDICATIVE 

Present Perfect Preterite Perfect (Past Anterior) 

/ have spoken, etc. I had spoke7i, etc, 

he hablado hube hablado 

has hablado etc, 

etc. 

Pluperfect Future Perfect 

/ had spoken, etc, I shall have spoken, etc, 

habia hablado habre hablado 

etc. etc. 

Conditional Perfect 

I should have spoken, etc. 

habria hablado 
etc. 



igo SPANISH GRAMMAR 

SUBJUNCTIVE 
Present Perfect Pluperfect 

Second Form (-ra Pluperfect) 
( That I may) have spoken, etc, I should have spoken, etc. 

haya hablado hubiera hablado 

etc. etc. 

Pluperfect Hypothetical (or Future) Perfect 

First Form (-se Pluperfect) 

( That I might) have spoken, etc. I {may or shall) have spoken, etc, 
hubiese hablado hubiere hablado 

etc. etc. 

212. Periphrastic Progressive Tenses. — These are 
formed by adding the present participle to a part of 
the auxiHary estar, *to be' (or ir, 'to go,' venir, * to 
come,' etc.); e.g. 

estoy (voy, etc.^ hablando, I am speaking, etc. 
See § 121, a. 

213. Orthographic Variations. — It is an inviolable rule 
of Spanish conjugation that the consonantal sound occurring at 
the end of the infinitive stem {i,e, immediately before the end- 
ings -ar, -er, -ir) shall be preserved throughout the verb. When, 
therefore, there is a change of the vowel beginning the flectional 
ending, the written character denoting the consonantal sound 
at the end of the infinitive stem may have to be changed, for 
the original character may not denote the original sound before 
the new vowel ; thus it is obvious that a first conjugation verb 
in -car cannot continue to have c before the preterite ending, 
first person singular in -e ; the original k sound of the infinitive 
stem can now be indicated only by qu before the -e. 

Many of the changes here indicated for regular verbs occur 
also in the case of irregular verbs. 



THE VERB 191 

214. The usual variations in spelling are the following : 

(i) Verbs in -c-ar change c to qu before flectional e. The 
change can occur only in the present subjunctive and in the first 
person singular of the preterite indicative. 

Sacar, to take out 
Pret. 1st Sing, saque 
Pres. Subj. saque saques saque saquemos saqueis saquen 

(2) Verbs in -g-ar insert u between the g and flectional e. The 
cases of change are the same as for -car verbs. 

Pagar, to pay 

Pret. 1st Sing, pague Pres. Subj. pague, etc. 

(The u has no pronounceable value : it is a mere sign that the g is " hard " 
before the following e.) 

(3) Verbs in -gu-ar write a diaeresis over the u before flectional e. 
This is necessary in order to indicate that the u, which has a pro- 
nounceable value before the infinitive ending -ar, continues to have 
one before the -e. Without the diaeresis u is silent in the combina- 
tion gue. 

Apaciguar, to pacify 

Pret. 1st Sing, apaciglie Pres. Subj. apacigUe, etc, 

(4) Verbs in -z-ar change z to c before flectional e. The cases 
concerned are the same as in the three preceding classes, but the 
variation in spelling is a purely conventional one (due to the fact 
that modern Spanish does not write z before e or i), and no possible 
change of sound is involved. 

Rezar, to pray 
Pret. 1st Sing, rece Pres. Subj, rece, etc, 

215. The preceding cases concern only verbs of the first 
conjugation. In the ensuing ones we deal with second and 
third conjugation verbs. 



1 92 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

(i) Verbs in -c-er or -c-ir preceded by a consonant change c to z 
before flectional o or a. The cases concerned here and in the three 
following classes are the first person singular of the present indica- 
tive and all of the present subjunctive. 

Veneer, to conquer 
Pres. Indie. > 

Pres, SubJ, venza venzas venza venzamos venzais venzan 

Esparcir, to scatter 

Pres, Indie, \st Sing, esparzo Pres. Subj. esparza, etc. 

a. For verbs in -car and -cir preceded by a vowel, see the Inceptive 
Conjugation, § 220. 

(2) Verbs in -g-er or -g-ir, whether regular verbs or not, change 
g to j before flectional or a. 

Coger, to gather, take, etc. 
Pres. Indie. ^ ist Sing, cojo Pres. Subj, coja, etc. 

Corregir, to correct 
Pres. Indie. y 1st Sing, corrijo 
Pres. Subj. corrija, etc. (A radical-changing verb.) 

(3) Verbs in -qu-ir change qu to c before flectional or a. 

Delinquir, to be delinquent 
Pres. Indie. ^ \st Sing, delinco Pres. Subj. delinca, etc. 

(4) Verbs in -gu-ir omit the u before flectional or a. The u is 
a mere sign of " hard " g in the infinitive, and is not needed before a 
following or a. 

Distinguir, to distinguish 

Pres. Indie. J ist Sing, distingo Pres. Stibj. distinga, etc. 

216. In the second and third conjugations the diphthongs 
-ie- and -io occur in certain endings (present participle, third 
person singular, and third person plural of the preterite indica- 
tive, and throughout the two imperfects and the hypothetical of 



[ 



THE VERB 193 

the subjunctive). If the verb stem end in a vowel (e.g. le-er, 

' to read '), the i of these diphthongal endings must be changed 

to y, for it is a general rule (and therefore applicable to all 

verbs, whether regular or not) that unaccented i cannot stand 

between two vowels. 

Le-er, to read 

Fres. Part. le-yendo (^for le-iendo) 

Pret. Indie. ^ -^d Sing. le-yo {for le-io) 

2,d PI. le-yeron (^for le-ieron) 

Imperf. SubJ.j ist Form le-yera, etc. {for le-iera, etc.) 

2d Form le-yese, etc. {for le-iese, etc.') 

Hypothetical le-yere, etc. {for le-iexe, etc.) 

This change is particularly common in -uir verbs (huir, ^ to flee,' 
huyendo, etc.). 

217. If the verb stem end in 11 or n, the i of the diphthongal 
endings -ie- and -io disappears. This is true of all verbs, regular 
or not. Certain irregular verbs (especially decir, ^ to say,' traer, 
* to bring,' and -ducir derivatives) likewise lose the i of their -ie- 
endings after the j of their preterite stem. 

Bullir, to boil 

Pres. Part. bull-endo {instead of bull-iendo) 

Pret. Indie, 3^ Sing. bull-6 {instead of bull-id) 

3<i PL bull-eron {instead of buU-ieron) 

Impf. Subj., 1st Form bull-ese, etc. 

2d For77i bull-era, etc. 

hyp. Subj. bull-ere, etc, 

Planir, to lament 
plan-endo plan-6 plan-eron 

plaii-ese, etc, plan-era, etc. plan-ere, etc. 

Traer, to bring 
Pret . In die .^-^d PL, traj -e r o n 
Stibj. traj-ese, etc. traj-era, etc. traj-ere, etc. 



194 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



218. In the three persons singular and in the third plural of 
the present tenses (indicative, subjunctive, and imperative), 
certain -iar and -uar verbs take an accent on the i or the u. 

Variar, to vary 
Pres, Indie, vario varias varia (variamos) (varidis) varian 
Pres. Subj\ varie varies varie (variemos) (varieis) varien 
Imper, Sing, varia 

Acentuar, to accentuate, to accent 
Pres, Indie, acentiio acentuas acentua acentuan 
Pres, Subj, acentue acentues acentue acentuen 
Imper, Sing, acentua 

219. Not all the -iar and -uar verbs take this accent; cf. 
principiar, ' to begin ' ; principio, * I begin ' ; presenciar, * to 
witness ' ; presencio, ' I witness ' ; diferenciar, ' to differentiated ; 
diferencian, ' they differentiate.' By practice only can it be 
determined whether the accent should fall on the i and the u or 
not. The verbs in the following lists are among the commonest 
taking the accent. 



(I) -iar 


: 










acuantiar 


calo friar 


cuantiar 


enfriar 


guiar 


telegrafiar 


aliar 


cariar 


desafiar 


enviar 


hastiar 


triar 


ampliar 


ciar 


descarriar 


espiar 


liar 


vaciar 


arriar 


confiar 


desconfiar 


estriar 


piar 


vanagioriar 


ataviar 


contrariar 


descriar 


expiar 


porfiar 


variar 


averiar 


correntiar 


desvariar 


fiar 


resfriar 


vigiar 


aviar 


criar 


desviar 


gloriar 


rociar 


zurriar 


(2) -uai 












acentuar 


continuar 


extenuar 


habituar 


perpetuar 


situar 


actuar 


desvirtuar 


fluctuar 


individuar 


puntuar 


tuniultuar 


arruar 


efectuar 


ganzuar 


infatuar 


redituar 


usufructuar 


atenuar 


evaluar 


graduar 


insinuar 


ruar 


valuar 


conceptuar 


exceptuar 











I 



THE VERB 195 

220. Verbs with Inceptive Endings. — There are certain 
verbs of the second and third conjugations whose infinitives end 
in -cer or -cir preceded by a vowel and the great majority of 
which are derived from Latin inceptive (^-scere) verbs. In the 
present stem (indicative and subjunctive) these insert a z 
before the c, wherever the verb ending begins with or a. 
Only seven forms undergo this change ; namely, the first person 
singular present indicative, and the six forms of the present 
subjunctive. All other forms of these verbs are regular.^ 

Conocer, to know, conociendo, conocido 

Pres. Indie, 

conozc-o conoc-es conoc-e conoc-emos conoc-eis, conoc-en 

Pres. Subj. 
conozc-a conozc-as conozc-a conozc-amos conozc-ais conozc-an 

Pres. Imperat. conoce, conoc-ed 

Indie, hnperf. conocia, ete. Pret. conoci, ete. 

Fut. conocere, ete. Cond. conoceria, ete. 

Subj. Imperfs. conociese, ete. conociera, ete. 

Hyp. conociere, ete. 

Lucir, to shine, luciendo, lucido 
Pres. Indie, luzc-o luc-es luc-e luc-imos luc-is luc-en 

Pres. Subj. luzc-a luzc-as luzc-a luzc-amos luzc-dis luzc-an 

All other forms regular as in the third conjugation. 

Exceptions : — a. mecer, *to rock' (and its derivative remecer), sim- 
ply changes c to z before or a (mezo, meza, etc.) ; it is a regular verb 
of the second conjugation. Cocer, 'to boil,' recocer, 'to boil again,' and 
tiSCOCer, 'to smart,' likewise change c to z; they are radical-changing 
verbs of the first class, e.g. cuezo, cueza, etc. ; cf. § 223 (4) ; but cocer 
i? little used in forms taking z. Hacer, ' to do,' * to make,' decir, ' to say,' 
and their derivatives, are irregular verbs and not of the inceptive class. 

"*" The inceptive or " beginning " sense is not necessarily present in theSQ 
verbs. It was already gone to a large degree in Latin, 



196 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Irregular, too, are yacer, * to lie,' and placer, 'to please.' Pacer, *to 
graze,' and balbucir, ' to stammer,' are hardly used in the forms that 
would have an inserted z. 

b. Certain irregular verbs conjugate their present tenses after the fashion 
of the inceptive verb. Thus the -ducir derivatives (conducir, inducir, 
etc.) have in the pres. indie, -duzco, and in the pres. subj. -duzca, -duzcas, 
-duzca, -duzcamos, -duzcais, -duzcan. The rest of their present forms are 
also like those of lucir; that is, are those of regular verbs of the third con- 
jugation. Their preterite tenses are irregular. See § 256. 

221 . Radical-changing Verbs. — Quite a number of verbs are 
regular as to their flectional endings, but under certain conditions 
modify the vocalic nature of their radical or root syllable. In 
these verbs the infinitive shows the unmodified root vowel, which 
must be either e or 0. As a result of accentual influences or of 
apparent umlaut {e,g, the influence of the i of one of the diph- 
thongs ie, io, in the following syllable) the e may become ie or 
even i and the may become ue or even u. 

222. There are three main classes of these radical-changing 
verbs. Their variations may be represented by this scheme : 

I. Root vowel e becomes ie 



^ , , , under the accent. 

Root vowel becomes ue 



\- under the accent. 



] 

II. Root vowel e becomes ie 

Root vowel becomes ue 

Root vowel e becomes i ) , ^ . i -r.. rn • 

^ , , r when not accented, if the followmo; 

Root vowel becomes u ) 

syllable have a or one of the diphthongs ie, io. 

III. Root vowel e becomes i, both (i) under the accent and (2) 

when not accented, if followed by a syllable with a or 

one of the diphthongs ie, io. 

Note. — It is well for students to be on their guard against all verbs 
shovi^ing e or in vi^hat seems to be the root vowel of the infinitive. A 
verb list should be consulted for the purpose of ascertaining whether they 
are radical-changing or not. 



THE VERB 



197 



223. This first class of radical-changing verbs embraces 
only -ar and -er verbs. In these, e becomes ie and becomes 
ue when the root syllable has the accent. It can have the 
accent only in the three persons singular and the third person 
plural of the present indicative and present subjunctive, and 
in the second person singular of the imperative. These forms 
alone, then, show any change : all the other forms are per- 
fectly regular. The variations may be illustrated by the verbs 

pensar, to think. contar, to count, to tell. 

perder, to lose. mover, to move. 

(i) Pensar, pensando, pensado 

pens-amos ^ 
pens-dis 



r piens-o 
Pres. Indie, J piens-as 

(^ piens-a 

r piens-e 
Pres, Stibj. J piens-es 

1^ piens-e 
Imperat. piens-a 

Iinperf, Indie, 

Pret. Indie, 

Ftit, Indie, 

Cond, Indie, 

Imp erf. Subj.^ ist Form 

Imp erf ' Subj., id Form 

Hyp, Subj, 



piens-an 

pens-emos 

pens-eis 

piens-en 

pens-ad 

pens-aba, pens-abas, ete, 
pens-e, pens-aste, ete, 
pensar-e, pensar-as, ete, 
pensar-ia, pensar-ias, etc, 
pens-ase, pens-ases, ete, 
pens-ara, pens-aras, ete, 
pens-are, pens-ares, ete. 



All other forms 
are regular. 



(2) Perder, perdiendo, perdido 

rpierd-o perd-emos 

Pres. Indie, J pierd-es perd-^is 

l^pierd-e pierd-en 

rpierd-a perd-amos \- 

Pres. Snbj. ^ pierd-as perd-dis 

l^pierd-a pierd-an 

Imperat, pierd-e perd-ed 



All other forms 
are regular. 



198 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



Imperf. Indie. 

Pret, Indie. 

Fut. Indie. 

Cond. Indie. 

Imperf. Stibj., \st Form 

hnperf. Subj.^ id For7n 

Hyp. Subj. 



perd-ia, perd-ias, ete. 
perd-i, perd-iste, ete. 
perder-e, perder-ds, ete. 
perder-ia, perder-Ias, ete. 
perd-iese, perd-ieses, ete. 
perd-iera, perd-ieras, ete. 
perd-iere, perd-ieres, ete. 



(3) Contar, contando, contado 



rcuent-o 
Pres. Indie. J cuent-as 

(^ cuent-a 

r cuent-e 
Pres. Stcbj. J cuent-es 

1^ cuent-e 
Imperat. cuent-a 



cont-amos ^ 

cont-dis 

cuent-an 

cont-emos 

cont-eis 

cuent-en 

cont-ad 



y 



All other forms 
are regular. 



Cont-aba, etc. ; cont-e, ete. ; contar-e, ete. ; contar-ia, ete. ; cont-ase, 
ete. ; cont-ara, ete. ; cont-are, ete. 

(4) Mover, moviendo, movido 



r muev-o 
Pres. Indie. J muev-es 

1^ muev-e 

r muev-a 
Pres. Subj. J muev-as 

(^ muev-a 
Imperat. muev-e 



mov-emos ^ 

mov-eis 

muev-en 

mov-amos y 

mov-dis 

muev-an 

mov-ed 



All other forms 
are regular. 



Mov-ia, ete. ; mov-I, ete. ; mover-e, ete. ; mover-ia, ete. ; mov-iese, 
ete. ; mov-iera, ete. ; mov-iere, ete. 

Note. — The change of the root vowels e and to ie and ue under 
the accent started with verbs having as their root vowels in Latin e or ae 
(vulgar Latin open e) and 0. In the development of Latin into Spanish 
these vowels could not remain under the accent (as the long vowels did), 
but when stressed they broke into the corresponding diphthongs ie, ue. 



THE VERB 199 

When not under the accent, they ordinarily preserved their integrity in 
Spanish: cf. Latin /^/r«, Spanish piedra, 'stone'; Latin ferra, Spanish 
tierra, * earth ' ; Latin certus, Spanish cierto, * certain ' ; Latin caectis, 
Spanish ciego, * blind ' ; Latin foj^tis^ Spanish fuerte, * strong ' ; but with 
unaccented and therefore retained root vowel, Latin "^ petrdrius^ Spanish 
pedrero, 'stone-cutter '; Latin terrenus, Spanish terreno, *land,' etc., etc. 

224. Certain verbs in -olver are of this first radical-changing 
class, but have only an irregular past participle in -uelto. 

These are chiefly 

volver, to return, to come back ; 
Pres. Indie, vuelvo, vuelves, etc. ; Past Part, vuelto ; 

and its derivatives, devolver, ' to give back ' ; envolver, ' to wrap 
up ' ; revolver, ^ to stir,^ etc.^ and solver, ' to loosen,' and its deriv- 
atives, absolver, ^ to absolve ' ; disolver, ^ to dissolve ' ; resolver, ' to 
resolve,' etc. 

225. Orthographic changes already indicated for regular 
verbs are to be observed also in radical- changing verbs ; cf. 
§§ 213-217, e.g.: 

r Pret., istShig. me revolque 

c to qu, revolcarse, ' to wallow': < Pres. Sbj., ist Sing, me re- 

L vuelque, etc. 

, ,. , , f Pret. 1st Sing, ceo^u^ 

g to gu, cesrar, ^ to bhnd ' : ^ „ <-/:• ^ o • 

^ ^ ^ \ Pres.Sbj.ist Sg.Qx^gM^^etc. 

,' r Pret. 1st Sing, tropece 

z to c, tropezar, ' to stumble : ^ ^ c^. . ^ >, . ^ 

I Pres. :^oj. 1st Cii7ig.X.r o^itce 

r Pres. Ind. tuerzo, but 

. , tuerces, tuerce, etc. 

c to z, torcer, ^ to twist ' : < „ oz. • ^ 

' ' I Pres. ^ibj. tuerza, tuerzas, 

L etc. 

r Pres. Ind. deguello, de- 

(g)o to (g)ue, degollar, ' to behead ' : < gUellas, etc. 

L Pres. Sbj. deguelle, etc. 



200 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



226. The verbs errar, ^ to err,' and oler, ^ to have an odor/ * to 
smell/ are of this first radical-changing class, but wherever they 
stress their root syllables, the resulting ie of errar is changed to 
ye, and the resulting ue of oler to hue, because of the rule that 
no word should begin with the diphthongs ie or ue. 

(i) Errar, errando, errado 

Pres. Ind, yerr-o y err-as yerr-a err-amos err-dis yerr-an 

Pres. Subj, yerr-e yerr-es yerr-e err-emos err-eis yerr-en 

Imperat. yerr-a err-ad 

etc. etc. 



hud-en 
huel-an 



(2) Oler, oliendo, olido 

Pres. Ind. huel-o huel-es huel-e ol-emos ol-ds 

Pres. Subj. huel-a huel-as huel-a ol-amos ol-dis 

Imperat. huel-e ol-ed 

etc. etc. 



a. An h is also inserted before the ue of the stressed root syllables of 
desosar, *to bone,' *to unbone,' and desovar, *to spawn.' Here the h is 
due to the analogy of the related nouns hueso. * bone,' and huevo, * egg.^ 



Desosar, desosando, desosado 

Pres. Indie. 
deshueso deshuesas deshuesa desosamos desosdis deshuesan 

Pres. Subj. 
deshuese deshueses deshuese desosemos desoseis deshuesen 

hnperat. 



deshuesa 
etc. 



desosad 
etc. 



In similar fashion desovar has 

deshuevo deshuevas deshueva desovamos etc. 



THE VERB 20 1 

227. Instead of in the unaccented syllables, to correspond 
to ue of the accented syllables, jugar, ^ to play,' now shows u. 
But the u has simply taken the place of older 0. The ue 
-remains wherever originally developed. Before flectional e of 
the ending, u is inserted after the g. 

Jugar, jugando, jugado 
Pres. Ind. juego juegas juega jugamos jugdis juegan 

Pres. Subj. juegue juegues juegue juguemos jugueis jueguen 

Imperat. juega jugad 

Pret. hid, jugue, etc. 

All other forms have u. 

228. Three verbs in -ir seem to belong to this class, which 
regularly comprises only -ar and -er verbs. These are discemir, 
^to discern,' concernir, ^ to concern' (cf. § 264), adquirir, * to 
acquire,' and inquirir, ^ to inquire.' But they are derivatives 
and are related to simple verbs in -er, viz. cerner and querer.^ 
Adquirir and inquirir show the further peculiarity of an i in the 
unstressed root forms, to correspond to the ie of the stressed 
root syllables ; but it is to be observed that querer shows the 
original e. 

(i) Discernir, discerniendo, discernido 

Pj-es. Indie. 
discierno disciernes discierne discernimos discernis disciernen 

Pres. Subj. 
discierna disciernas discierna discernamos discerndis disciernan 

hnperat, 
discierne discernid 

All other forms are regular as of the -ir conjugation. 

1 Querer is irregular, adquirir and inquirir are regular, in the preterite and 
allied forms. 



202 SPANISH GRAMMAR * 

(2) Adquirir, adquiriendO; adquirido 

Pres, Indie. 
adquiero adquieres adquiere adquirimos adquiris adquieren 

Pres. Subj, 
adquiera adquieras adquiera adquiramos adquirais adquieran 

hfiperat. 
adquiere adquirid 



All other forms are regular as of the -ir conjugation. 

229. The second radical-changing class embraces only verbs 
of the third conjugation with the root vowel e or 0. 

As in the first class, e becomes ie and becomes ue under 
the accent. When not accented the e is changed to i and the 
to u, if the strong vowel a or one of the diphthongs ie, io 
occur in the next syllable. In all other cases the original e 
and remain. This class may be illustrated by the conjugation 
of the verbs sentir, ' to feel,' and dormir, ' to sleep.' 

(i) Sentir, sintiendo, sentido 

Pres, Indie, 
sient-o sient-es sient-e sent-imos sent-i's sient-en 

Pres, Subj, 
sient-a sient-as sient-a sint-amos sint-dis sient-an 

Imperat, 
sient-e sent-id 



Fut, Indie, sentir-e, ete, {Regular^ 

Cond, Indie, sentir-ia, ete, {Regular) 

Imperf, Indie, sent-ia, ete. {Regular) 

Pret. Indie, 
sent-i sent-iste sint-io sent-imos sent-isteis sint-ierou 

l7nperf, Subj,^ \st For?n 
sint-iese sint-ieses sint-iese sint-iesemos sint-ieseis sint-iesen 



THE VERB 



203 



Imperf, Siibj, , 2d Form 
sint-iera sint-ieras sint-iera sint-ieramos sint-ierais sint-ieran 

Hyp. Subj. 
sint-iere sint-ieres sint-iere sint-ieremos sint-iereis sint-ieren 



(2) Dormir, durmiendo, dormido 



Pres. Indie, 
Pres. Subj, 

l7nperat. 

Fut. Indie. 
Cond. Indie. 
Imperf. Indie. 

Pret. Indie. 
Imperf. Subj., 
Imperf. Subj., 
Hyp. Subj. 



j duerm-o 
t dorm-imos 



r duerm-a 



t *durm-amos 



l- 



ist Form- 



id For77i 



duerm-es 

dorm-is 

duerm-as 

durm-ais 

duerm-e 

donn-id 

{Regular^ 

{Regular) 

{Regular) 

dorm-iste 

dorm-isteis 

durm-ieses 

durm-ieseis 

durm-ieras 



duerm-e 
duerm-en . 
duerm-a 
duerm-an 



dormir-e, ete, 
dormir-ia, ete. 
dorm-ia, ete. 

dorm-i 
donn-imos 
r durm-iese 
durm-iesemos 
r durm-iera 

[ durm-ieramos durm-ierais 
r durm-iere durm-ieres 

1 durm-ieremos durm-iereis 



durm-io 
durm-ieron 

durm-iese 
durm-iesen 

durm-iera 
durm-ieran 

durm-iere 
durm-ieren 



It is a useful fact to remember that in this class the subjunctive imper- 
fects and hypothetical always show the same stem as the preterite, third 
person singular. 

a. The number of verbs in this second radical-changing class is 
small : dormir, * to sleep,' and morir, * to die,' are the only simple verbs in 
it. Morir is conjugated exactly like dormir except in its past participle, 
which has only the irregular form muerto. The past participle muerto 
is not only intransitive, meaning ' died,' ' dead ' (el hombre ha muertO, 
*the man has died,' 'the man is dead'); but with 2. personal object it may 
be transitive, meaning * killed ' (hemos muerto al soldado, * we have killed 
the soldier '). 



204 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



230. The third radical- changing class consists only of third- 
conjugation verbs with the root vowel e. A change occurs 
only in the same cases as in Class II, viz. under the accent, 
and where the root syllable is not accented if it be followed by 
a or one of the diphthongs ie, io. In both these cases the e 
becomes i (so that there is no diphthong in the root syllable of 
these verbs). In all other forms the e remains and those forms 
are regular as of the third conjugation. The class may be 
illustrated by the conjugation of vestir, ' to clothe.' 

Vestir, vistiendo, vestido 

Pres. Indie. 

vest-imos vest-is 
Pres. Subj. 

vist-amos vist-dis 
Imperat. 



vist-o 



vist-a 



vist-es 



vist-as 



vist-e 



vist-a 



vist-en 



vist-an 



vist-e 



vest-id 



(^Regular) 
{Regular) 
{Regular) 

vest-isteis vist-ieron 



Fut. Indie. vestir-e, etc. 
Cond. Indie. vestir-ia, ete. 
Imperf. Indie, vest-la, ete. 

Pret. Indie. 
vest-i vest-iste vist-io vest-imos 

Imperf. Stibj.^ \st Form 
vist-iese vist-ieses vist-iese vist-iesemos vist-ieseis vist-iesen 

Imperf. Subj.^ 2d For7n 
vist-iera vist-ieras vist-iera vist-ieramos vist-ierais vist-ieran 

Hyp. Subj. 
vist-iere vist-ieres vist-iere vist-ieremos vist-iereis vist-ieren 

As in the second class, it is to be noted that the steni of the 
preterite, third person singular, prevails throughout the sub- 
junctive imperfects and hypothetical. 



THE VERB 205 

231. The orthographical changes stated for regular verbs 
are to be observed here : cf. §§ 213-217. 

. , , r n -, \ Pres, Indie. \st Sin^. sisfo 
gu to g, seguir, * to follow ':H„ ^7.. . 

° L Pres. Subj. siga, sigas, etc, 

. . , . , r Pres. Indie. \st Sins', elijo 
g to 1, elegir, ^ to elect ' : \ ^ o /:• r- t- 
** •" ^ ' L Pres. Subj, elija, elijas, etc. 

Pres. Part, ciiiendo {for cifiiendo) 

_. ^ ^ ^ Pret. "xd Sins^. cifio, '\d PL cineron 

nie to ne, ^ j <5 ? j 

ni6 to 



' V cenir, ^ to gird '1 -^ Imp erf. Subj.^ \st Form., cinese, etc. 
' Imp erf . Subj.^ id Form^ cinera, etc. 

L Hyp. Subj. cinere, etc. 



232. The verb erguir, 'to erect/ may in the stressed root 
syllables of its present tenses have either the diphthong ie 
(written ye because it is at the beginning of the word) or the 
vowel i. It may be conjugated throughout as of either the 
second or the third radical-changing class. Of course its u 
disappears before or a. 

Erguir, irguiendo, erguido 

( yerg-o yergu-es yergu-e ) . ( yergu-en 

Pres. Ind. i . • . Ver2:ui-mos ero^u-isi • 

(irg-o irgu-es irgu-e \ ^ * (irgu-en 

( yerg-a yerg-as yerg-a ) . . i yerg-an 

Pres. Subi.\ . . . hr2:-amos irg-ais \ • 

-^ (irg-a irg-as irg-a \ ^ => |irg-an 



Imperat. \ 



yergu-e 
iro^u-e 



ergu-id j 



Fi^t. Ind. erguir-e, etc. {Regtdar) 

Cond. Indie, erguir-ia, etc. {Regular) 

Imp. Ind. ergu-ia, etc. {Regular) 

Pret. Ind. ergu-i ergu-iste irgu-io ergu-imos ergu-isteis irgu-ieron 

Imp. Subj. \ 

1st Form, [irgu-iese, etc. 

Imp. Subj. \ 

2d Form, ^irgu-iera, ./.. 

Hyp. Subj. irgu-iere, etc. 



206 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

233. There are certain verbs in -eir that belong to this 
class. They change their e to i in the same cases as vestir, 
but whenever that i comes into conjunction with i of a follow- 
ing diphthong ie or 16, one of the two i's disappears, as in reir, 
^ to laugh.' 

Reir, riendo \for ri-iendo), re-ido 

Pres. Indie, ri-o ri-es ri-e re-imos re-is ri-en 
Pres, Subj, ri-a ri-as ri-a ri-amos ri-dis ri-an 
Imperat, ri-e re-id 

Fut. Indie, reir-e, ete. {Regtdar) 
Cond. Indie, reir-ia, ete, {Regular) 
Imperf, Ind, re-ia, ete, {Regular) 

Pret. Indie, re-i re-iste \ "°. (^f [ re-imos re-isteis| "^^^C/f 

( ri-ioj \ { ri-ieron) 

Imperf. Subj.^ \st For7n riese {for ri-iese) rieses, etc, 

Imperf. Subj.^ 2d Form riera {for ri-iera) rieras, ete. 

Hyp. Subj, riere {for ri-iere) rieres, etc, 

a. This is now the customary conjugation of reir and other -eir verbs 
of this class. Formerly — at least in the case of reir itself — the i was 
not lost necessarily, and there resulted such forms as riyendo (unaccented 
i changed to y between vowels), riy6, riyeron, riyese, etc., riyera, etc., 
riyere, etc. Note the many forms of reir requiring a written accent. 

234. The verb podrir, ^to putrefy,' was once included in this 
class as an example of a change of to u in conjugation. But 
in practice it has become a regular verb of the third conjuga- 
tion, with u everywhere in the root syllable. The is retained 
only in by-forms of the infinitive and past participle, podrir 
and podrido. Pudrir is preferred to podrir, but as the passive 
participle podrido seems to be still the commoner form. 

235. -TJir Verbs. — These include only verbs with a pro- 
nounced u (written with a diaeresis when g precedes, as in 
argiiir, * to argue '). 



THE VERB 



207 



Their peculiarity consists in adding y to their stem vowel u, 
except where the flectional ending begins with i (whether 
stressed i or i of the diphthongs ie, io). Of course, the future 
and conditional indicative do not take the y, being based on 
the infinitive. Besides this y added to the stem, the conjuga- 
tion of these verbs shows a y (in the present participle, the 
preterite, third singular, and third plural, and the subjunctive 
imperfects and hypothetical) which is not an addition, but 
merely represents the unaccented i of the diphthongal ending, 
which has chanced to come between vowels : cf. § 216. 

The class may be illustrated by the conjugation of huir, ^to 
flee/ 

Huir, huyendo {for hu-iendo), huido 

Pres. Indie. 



huy-o 


huy-es 


huy-e 


hu-imos 
Pres. Snbj. 


hu-is 


huy-en 


huy-a 


huy-as 


huy-a 


huy-amos 


huy-ais 


huy-an 




huy-e 




Imperat. 
Ftd. Indie. 


hu-id 




huir-e, 


etc. {Reg?dar) 














Cond. Indie, 






huir-Ia, 


etc. {Regular) 

Imp erf . Indie. 






hu-ia 


hu-Ias 


hu-ia 


hu-iamos 
Pret. Indie. 


hu-iais 


hu-ian 


hu-i 


hu-iste 


hu-yo 


hu-imos 


hu-isteis 


hu-yeron 






Imperf. Siibj.^ \st Form 






hu-yese 


hu-yeses 


hu-yese 


hu-yesemos 


hu-yeseis 


hu-yesen 






Imperf. Stibj.^ 2d Forin 






hu-yera 


hu-yeras 


hu-yera 


hu-yeramos 
Hyp. Stibj. 


hu-yerais 


hu-yeran 


hu-yere 


hu-yeres 


hu-yere 


hu-yeremos 


hu-yereis 


hu-yeren 



208 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



a. Verbs in -giiir require their diaeresis only before a written i : it dis- 
appears before y : e,g, 

argiiir, ' to argue,' but arguyendo, arguyo, arguye, arguyen, arguya, etc. 
argiiia, argiii, but arguy6, arguyese, etc. 







The Irregular 


Verb 










236. 


Ser, to be 










Ser, 


siendo, sido 






Pres, Indie, 


soy 


eres 


es 


somos 


sois 


son 


Pres. Sicbj. 


se-a 


se-as 


se-a 


se-amos 


se-ais 


se-an 


Imperat. 




se 






sed 










Fut. Indie. 


ser-e 


ser-^s 


ser-a 


ser-emos 


ser-eis 


ser-an 


Cojid. Iridic . 


ser-ia 


ser-ias 


ser-ia 


ser-iamos 


ser-iais 


ser-ian 


Imp erf. Indie. 


era 


eras 


era 


eramos 


erais 


eran 


Pret. Indie. 


fu-i 


fu-iste 


fu-e 


fu-imos 


fu-isteis 


fu-eron 



Iini)erf. Sub?., ] r r r 

^ -^ -^ ^ \ lu-ese lu-eses lu-ese 
\si Form ) 

I mi) erf. Snbi.. ] c r r 

r J y 7 L tu-era fu-eras fu-era 
2.d Form ) 

Hyp. Sicbj\ fu-ere fu-eres fu-ere 



fu-esemos fu-eseis fu-esen 

fii-eramos fu-erais fu-eran 
fu-eremos fu-ereis fu-eren 







237. Haber, to have 










Haber^ habiendo, habidc 


) 








Pres. Indie. 






he 


has 


ha hemos 
Pres. Stibj. 


hab-eis 


han 


hay- a 


hay-as 


hay-a hay-amos 


hay-ais 


hay-an 




(he) 


Irnperat. 
Fut. Indie. 


hab-ed 




habr-d 


habr-^s 


habr-d habr-emos 
Cond. Indie. 


habr-eis 


habr-dn 


habr-ia 


habr-ias 


habr-ia habr-iamos 


habr-iais 


habr-ian 



THE VERB 



209 



I 



Imp erf. Indie. 
hab-ia hab-ias hab-Ia hab-iamos hab-iais hab-ian 

Pret. Indie. 
hub-e hub-iste hub-o hub-imos hub-isteis hub-ieron 

I?nperf. Stibj.^ ist Form. 
hub-iese hub-ieses hub-iese hub-iesemos hub-ieseis hub-iesen 

I?nperf. Subj.j id Form. 
hub-iera hub-ieras hub-iera hub-ieramos hub-ierais hub-ieran 

Hyp. Stibj. 
hub-iere hub-ieres hub-iere hub-ieremos hub-iereis hub-ieren 

a. Note that the future and the conditional of the indicative are based 
on a contract form of the infinitive. The form he is, in accordance with 
the example set by the Spanish Academy, usually classed as imperative 
singular of haber; it may, however, represent a peculiar phonetic devel- 
opment of the imperative singular of the verb ver, ' to see,' as the gramma- 
rian Cuervo suggests. It is most common in combination with the adverb 
aqui, *here,' he aqui, * behold.' As the impersonal verb ' to be,' haber 
takes the suffix y (an old adverb meaning * there ') in the present indica- 
tive, whence hay, * there is ' or * there are.' For the other moods and 
tenses it simply has the third person singular forms without the appended 
y: habia, 'there was (were),' habra, 'there will be,' etc. 

It is characteristic of many irregular verbs that in the first and 
third singular of the preterite indicative they stress the stem vowel 
and not the ending : compare hube, hubo with temi, temi6. 



est-oy est-as 
est-e est-^s 
est4 



238. Estar, to be 
Estar, estando, estado 

Pres. Indie. 
est-a est-amos est-dis 

Pres. Siibj. 
est-e est-emos est-eis 

Imperat. 
est-ad 



est- an 



est-en 



2IO 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



Fut. Indie. 
estar-e estar-as estar-d estar-emos estar-eis estar-an 

Cond, Indie. 
estar-Ia estar-ias estar-ia estar-iamos estar-iais estar-ian 

Imperf. Indie. 
est-aba est-abas est-aba est-abamos est-abais est-aban 

Pret. Indie. 
estuv-e estuv-iste estuv-o estuv-imos estuv-isteis estuv-ieron 

Imperf. Subj., ist Forjn 
estuv-iese estuv-ieses estuv-iese estuv-iesemos estuv-ieseis estuv-iesen 

Imperf. Subj., 2d Form 
estuv-iera estuv-ieras estuv-iera estuv-ieramos estuv-ierais estuv-ieran 

Hyp. Subj. 
estuv-iere estuv-ieres estuv-iere estuv-ieremos estuv-iereis estuv-ieren 

a. The present tenses of estar are perfectly regular as of the first con- 
jugation, except for the y appended to the first person singular, present 
indicative form (cf. the y of soy, ' I am,' from ser ; of doy, * I give,' from 
dar; and of voy, *I go,' from ir). Estar is the Latin verb stare, *to 
stand,' which has had its sense weakened to ' to be,' and has received an 
initial (prosthetic) e, because in Spanish no word properly begins with 
s plus a consonant. All Latin words beginning with such a combination 
and surviving in Spanish take this e prefix (cf. also French etat from Latin 
statM7n, etc.). 

239. Tener, to have 

Tener, teniendo, tenido 

Pres. Indie. 
teng-o tien-es tien-e ten-emos ten-eis tien-en 

Pres. Subj. 
teng-a teng-as teng-a teng-amos teng-dis teng-an 

Imperat. 
ten ten-ed 



THE VERB 



211 



Fut. Indie. 
tendr-e tendr-as tendr-a tendr-emos tendr-eis tendr-an 

Cond. Indie. 
tendr-Ia tendr-ias tendr-ia tendr-iamos tendr-iais tendr-ian 

l7Jiperf. Indie. 
ten-ia ten-ias ten-ia ten-iamos ten-iais ten-ian 

Pret. Indie. 
tuv-e tuv-iste tuv-o tuv-imos tuv-isteis tuv-ieron 

Imp erf . StibJ., ist Form 
tuv-iese tuv-ieses tuv-iese tuv-iesemos tuv-ieseis tuv-iesen 

Fnperf. Subj.^ id Form 
tuv-iera tuv-ieras tuv-iera tuv-ieramos tuv-ierais tuv-ieran 

Hyp. Subj. 
tuv-iere tuv-ieres tuv-iere tuv-ieremos tuv-iereis tuv-ieren 

a. The infinitive basis of the future and the conditional of the indica- 
tive is contract, but with inserted d. The second and third person singu- 
lar and the third person plural, present indicative, have the peculiarity 
of a radical-changing verb. The imperative singular has no inflectional 
ending. 

240. Andar, to go, walk 



Andar, andando, andado 



Pres. Indie. 
Pres. Subj. 
Imperat. 
Fut. Indie. 
Cond. Indie. 
Imp erf . Indie. 



j and-o 
( and-amos 
j and-e 
{ and-emos 



' andar-e 
. andar-emos 
' andar-Ia 
, andar-iamos 
and-aba 
. and-dbamos 



and-as 

and-dis 

and-es 

and-eis 

and-a 

and-ad 

andar-ds 

and-eis 

andar-ias 

andar-iais 

and-abas 

and-abais 



and-a 
and-an 
and-e 
and-en 



andar-d 

andar-dn 

andar-ia 

andar-ian 

and-aba 

and-aban 



212 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



Pret, Indie, 

Imp erf . Subj.^ 
1st Form 

Imperf. Subj.^ 
id Form 

Hyp. Subj. 



( anduv-e 
( anduv-imos 
f anduv-iese 
( anduv-iesemos 
j anduv-iera 
( anduv-ieramos 
5 anduv-iere 
( anduv-ieremos 



anduv-iste 

anduv-isteis 

anduv-ieses 

anduv-ieseis 

anduv-ieras 

anduv-ierais 

anduv-ieres 

anduv-iereis 



anduv-o 
anduv-ieron 

anduv-iese 
anduv-iesen 

anduv-iera 
anduv-ieran 

anduv-iere 
anduv-ieren 



a. This verb is perfectly regular as of the first conjugation in all its 
forms except the preterite indicative and the three subjunctive tenses 
based on it. Note the resemblance of the preterite stems of estar, tener, 
and andar, i,e. estuv-, tuv-, and anduv-, to that of haber, i,e, hub- (spelled 
with V instead of b in earlier Spanish), 



Pres. Indie, 
Pres, Subj. 
Imperat, 
Fut, Indie. 
Cond. Indie. 
Imp. Indie. 
Pret. Indie. 
Imp. Subj.., 

\st Form 
Imp. Subj. J 

id Forin 
Hyp, Subj. 



d-oy 
d-e 

dar-e 
dar-ia 
d-aba 
d-i 



iese d-ieses d-iese d-iesemos d-ieseis d-iesen 



[• d-iera 
d-i ere 



241. Dar, to give 
Dar, dando, dado 



d-as 

d-es 

d-a 

dar-ds 

dar-ias 

d-abas 

d-iste 



d-a 
d-6 

dar-a 
dar-ia 
d-aba 
d-id 



d-amos 
d-emos 



dar-emos 
dar-iamos 
d-dbamos 
d-imos 



d-ais 

d-eis 

d-ad 

dar-^is 

dar-iais 

d-abais 

d-isteis 



d-an 
d-en 

dar-dn 
dar-ian 
d-aban 
d-ieron 



d-ieras d-iera d-ieramos d-ierais d-ieran 
d-ieres d-iere d-ieremos d-iereis d-ieren 



a. The stem of this verb is d-. Thereon are based the present tenses 
and the imperfect indicative with the regular endings of the first conjuga- 
tion. The first person singular, present indicative, has also a y suffix (cf. 
ser, estar, and ir with soy, estoy, and voy). The preterite and the sub- 
junctive imperfect and hypothetical tenses simply add to d- the regular 
endings of the second and third conjugation. 



THE VERB 213 

242. Querer, to wish, want 
Querer, queriendo, querido 

Pres, Indie. 
quier-o quier-es quier-e quer-emos quer-eis quier-en 

Pres, Siibj. 
quier-a quier-as quier-a quer-amos quer-ais quier-an 

I 7n per at. 



I 



quier-e quer-ed 

Fut. I 71 die, 
querr-e querr-as querr-a querr-emos querr-eis querr-an 

Co lid. Ifidic. 
querr-ia querr-ias querr-ia querr-iamos querr-iais querr-ian 

Imperf, Indie. 
quer-ia quer-ias quer-ia quer-iamos quer-iais quer-ian 

Pret. Indie. 
quis-e quis-iste quis-o quis-imos quis-isteis quis-ieron 

Imperf. Subj.., \st Form 
quis-iese quis-ieses quis-iese quis-iesemos quis-ieseis quis-iesen 

I)nperf. Snbj.^ 2d Fon7i 
quis-iera quis-ieras quis-iera quis-ieramos quis-ierais quis-ieran 

Hyp. Subj. 
quis-iere quis-ieres quis-iere quis-ieremos quis-iereis quis-ieren 

a. In the present tenses the verb is conjugated exactly like a radical- 
changing verb of the first class. The future and conditional indicative are 
based on a contract infinitive querr-, whose rr must be carefully pronounced, 
especially to distinguish the conditional from the imperfect indicative. 

243. Poder, to be able 
Poder. pudiendOj podido 

Pres. Indie. 
pued-o pued*es pued-e pod-emos pod-eis pued-en 

Pres. Snbj. 
pued-a pued-as pued-a pod-amos pod-dis pued-an 



214 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

hnperat. 



Flit. Iridic. 
podr-^ podr-ds podr-d podr-emos podr-^is podr-dn 

Cond. Indie. 
podr-ia podr-Ias podr-ia podr-iamos podr-iais podr-ian 

hnper'f. Indie. 
pod-ia pod-ias pod-ia pod-iamos pod-iais pod-ian 

Pret. Ill die. 
pud-e pud-iste pud-o pud-imos pud-isteis pud-ieron 

l77iperf. Subj., \st For 771 
pud-iese pud-ieses pud-iese pud-iesemos pud-ieseis pud-iesen 

l77iperf. Stibj.^ id For 771 
pud-iera pud-ieras pud-iera pud-ieramos pud-ierais pud-ieran 

Hyp. Subj. 
pud-iere pud-ieres pud-iere pud-ieremos pud-iereis pud-ieren 

a. The present indicative and subjunctive follow the model of a radical- 
changing verb of the first class, but the present participle has the same stem 
as the preterite. The future and conditional indicatives are based on a 
contract infinitive. The verb has no imperative. 

244. Caber, to be contained, find room 
Caber, cabiendo, cabido 

Pres. Indie. 
quep-o cab-es cab-e cab-emos cab-eis cab-en 

Pres. Subj. 
quep-a quep-as quep-a quep-amos quep-dis quep-an 

l77iperat. 
cab-e cab-ed 



Fut. Indie. 
cabr-^ cabr-ds cabr-d cabr-emos cabr-dis cabr-dn 



THE VERB 215 

Cond. Indie. 
cabr-la cabr-ias - cabr-ia cabr-iamos cabr-Iais cabr-ian 

Imp erf. Indie, 
cab-ia cab-ias cab-ia cab-iamos cab-iais cab-ian 

Pret. Indie, 
cup-e cup-iste cup-o cup-imos cup-isteis cup-ieron 

Imp erf , Subj,^ \st For?n 
cup-iese cup-ieses cup-iese cup-iesemos cup-ieseis cup-iesen 

hnperf, Subj, , 2.d Form 
cup-iera cup-ieras cup-iera cup-ieramos cup-ierais cup-ieran 

Hyp. Sicbj. 
cup-iere cup-ieres cup-iere cup-ieremos cup-iereis cup-ieren 

a. Note the two stems, one regular and the other irregular, in the 
present tenses. As is frequently the case, the present subjunctive uses 
throughout the irregular stem as found in the first person singular, present 
indicative. The future and conditional are based on a contract infinitive. 
The preterite cupe represents the Latin capui become cope and then cupe. 







245. Saber, to know, be aware 








Sabei 


', sabiendo, sabido 
Pres. Indie. 






S^ 


sab-es 


sab-e 


sab-emos 
Pres. Subj. 


sab-eis 


sab-en 


sep-a 


sep-as 


sep-a 


sep-amos 


sep-dis 


sep-an 




sab-e 




Iinperat. 


sab-ed 





Fut. Indie. 
sabr-e sabr-ds sabr-d sabr-emos sabr-eis sabr-dn 

Cond. Indie. 
sabr-ia sabr-ias sabr-ia sabr-iamos sabr-lais sabr-ian 

Iniperf. Indie. 
sab-ia sab-ias sab-ia sab-iamos sab-iais sab-ian 



2l6 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Pret. Indie, 
sup-e sup-iste sup-o sup-imos sup-isteis sup-ieron 

l7nperf. Subj.. ist Forjn 
sup-iese sup-ieses sup-iese sup-iesemos sup-ieseis sup-iesen 

I?nperf. Subj.^ 2d Form 
sup-iera sup-ieras sup-iera sup-ieramos sup-ierais sup-ieran 

Hyp. S7ibj. 
sup-iere sup-ieres sup-iere sup-ieremos sup-iereis sup-ieren 

a. The conjugation of saber is quite like that of caber. In the first 
person singular, present indicative, however, saber has a contract form se 
instead of a form sepo, vi^hich might have been expected : but the irregular 
stem sep- has remained in the present subjunctive. 

246. Hacer, to do, make 
Hacer, haciendo, hecho 

Pres. Indie. 
hag-o hac-es hac-e hac-emos hac-eis hac-en 

Pres. Subj. 
hag-a hag-as hag-a hag-amos hag-dis hag-an 

Bnperat. 
haz hac-ed 

Fut. Indie. 
har-e har-ds har-a har-emos har-eis har-an 

Cond. Indie. 
har-ia har-ias har-ia har-iamos har-iais bar-fan 

Imperf. Indie. 
hac-ia hac-ias hac-ia hac-iamos hac-iais hac-ian 

Pret. Indie. 
hic-e hic-iste hiz-o hic-imos hic-isteis hic-ieron 



THE VERB 



217 



Iinperf. SubJ., ist For?n 
hic-iese hic-ieses hic-iese hic-iesemos hic-ieseis hic-iesen 

Imp erf, Subj., id For in 
hic-iera hic-ieras hic-iera hic-ieramos hic-ierais hicieran 

Hyp, Subj, 
hic-iere hic-ieres hic-iere hic-ieremos hic-iereis hic-ieren 

a. The past participle is irregular (from Latin factU77i). The impera- 
tive singular has no flectional ending, but consists only of the regular pres- 
ent stem as found in hac-es, etc., with, of course, z, and not C, in the final 
position. The future and conditional are based on a contract infinitive 
har. The preterite hice represents the Latin y<?<ri". Like hacer are conju- 
gated its derivatives. Some of these, like satisfacer, *to satisfy,' have 
instead of h the original \jdX\r\ f oi facer e. Besides an imperative singular 
satisfaz there is found also a regular form satisface. 









247. Ir, to go 












Ir, yendo, ido 












Fres. Indie. 






voy 


vas 


va 


vamos 
Fres, Subj. 


vais 


van 


vaya 


vayas 


vaya 


vayamos 


vaydis 


vayan 




ve 




Imperat. 

vamos 
Fut, Indie. 


id 










ir-e 


ir-as 


ir-a 


ir-emos 
Co7id. Indie. 


ir-eis 


ir-dn 


ir-ia 


ir-ias 


ir-ia 


ir-iamos 
Fnperf. Fidie. 


ir-iais 


ir-ian 


iba 


ibas 


iba 


ibamos 
Fret. Indie. 


ibais 


iban 


fu-i 


fu-iste 


fu-^ 


fu-imos 


fu-isteis 


fu-eron 



2l8 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



l7nperf. Subj.^ ist Form 
fu-ese fu-eses fu-ese fu-esemos fu-eseis fu-esen 

hnperf, Subj., id For 771 
fu-era fu-eras fu-era fu-eramos fu-erais fu-eran 

Hyp. Subj, 
fu-ere fu-eres fu-ere fu-eremos fu-ereis fu-eren 

a. There are three different Latin verbs discernible in the make-up of 
this verb. The infinitive, present participle, past participle, imperative plu- 
ral, future and conditional indicative, and imperfect indicative are asso- 
ciated with ire, 'to go.' The present indicative and subjunctive and the 
imperative singular forms come from vadere, ' to go.' The preterite and the 
subjunctive imperfects and hypothetical represent the Latin fui, fuissem, 
etc. ; that is, they are simply borrowed from the corresponding tenses 
of the Spanish ser, * to be.' Cf. in colloquial English * I ivas to Boston 
yesterday' =: ' I went (and returned).' 

b. Ir is apparently the only Spanish verb having an imperative first 
plural form, viz. vamos. But authorities regard this as another form of 
the first plural, present subjunctive {i.e. while vayamos may represent a 
Latin vadeamuSy vamos may represent a Latin vadamus which passed 
through the stage vaamos). In Cervantes and other classic writers there is 
found also a second form of the second plural, present subjunctive, viz. vais 
{i.e. while Latin vadeatis gave vayais, vadatis gave vais through vaais). 
In optative constructions vamos, 'let us go,' etc., alone can be used: 
vayamos is restricted in use to subordinate clauses. Vamos and vaya 
are frequently used as interjections (cf. French allofts), meaning * come 
now ! ' etc. 

248. Venir, to come 
Venir, viniendo, venido 

Pres. Indie. 
veng-o vien-es vien-e ven-imos ven-is vien-en 

Pres. Subj. 
veng-a veng-as veng-a veng-amos veng-dis veng-an 



THE VERB 219 

I?nperat. 

ven-id 



Fut. Indie. 

vendr-e vendr-as vendr-a vendr-emos vendr-eis vendr-an 

Co7id. Indie. 

vendr-ia vendr-ias vendr-ia vendr-iamos vendr-iais vendr-ian 

l7nperf. Indie. 

ven-ia ven-ias venia ven-iamos ven-iais ven-ian 

Pret. Iiidie. 

vin-e vin-iste vin-o vin-imos vin-isteis vin-ieron 

Imperf. Snbj.^ \st For?n 

vin-iese vin-ieses vin-iese vin-iesemos vin-ieseis vin-iesen 

Imperf. Subj., 2d Forin 

vin-iera vin-ieras vin-iera vin-ieramos vin-ierais vin-ieran 

Hyp. Subj. 

vin-iere vin-ieres vin-iere vin-ieremos vin-iereis vin-ieren 

a. Certain forms have characteristics of a radical-changing verb (cf. 
present participle, second and third singular and third plural of present 
indicative, etc.). The imperative singular is without a flectional ending. 
The future and conditional of the indicative are based on a contract infini- 
tive with inserted d. The preterite vine represents Latin ve7ii. 

249. Poner, to put 
Poner, poniendOj puesto 

Pres. Indie. 
pong-o pon-es pon-e pon-emos pon-eis pon-en 

Pres. Subj. 
pong-a pong-as pong-a pong-amos pong-ais pong-an 

Imperat. 
pon pon-ed 



220 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

FtU. Indie. 
pondr-e pondr-as pondr-a pondr-emos pondr-eis pondr-dn 

Cond. Indie. 
pondr-ia pondr-ias pondr-ia pondr-iamos pondr-iais pondr-ian 

hnperf. Indie. 
pon-ia pon-ias pon-ia pon-iamos pon-iais pon-ian 

Pret. Indie. 
pus-e pus-iste pus-o pus-imos pus-isteis pus-ieron 

hnperf Subj. , i st Form 
pus-iese pus-ieses pus-iese pus-iesemos pus-ieseis pus-iesen 

l7nperf. SubJ.j 2d For in 
pus-iera pus-ieras pus-iera pus-ieramos pus-ierais pus-ieran 

Hyp. Subj. 
pus-iere pus-ieres pus-iere pus-ieremos pus-iereis pus-ieren 

a. The present stem shows both a regular and an irregular (pong-) 
form. The imperative singular is without flectional ending. The future 
and conditional indicative are based on a contract infinitive with inserted 
d. The preterite puse came through an intervening pose fram Latin 
posui. The past participle puesto is irregular; cf. Latin positum. 







250. 


Asir, to grasp 






Asir, asiendOj asido 








Pres. Indie. 


asg-0 


as-es 


as-e 


as-imos 
Pres. Subj. 


asg-a 


asg-as 


asg-a 


asg-amos 
Imperat. 



as-is as-en 



asg-ais asg-an 



as-e as-id 

Fut. Indie. 
asir-e asir-ds asir-a asir-emos asir-eis asir-dn 

Cond. Indie. 
asir-ia asir-ias asir-ia asir-iamos asir-iais asir-ian 



THE VERB 221 

Imperf. I 71 die. 
as-ia as-ias as-Ia as-iamos as-iais as-ian 

Pret, l7idic. 
as-i as-iste as-io as-imos as-isteis as-ieron 

I7npe7'f. Subj.. \st For77i 
as-iese as-ieses as-iese as-iesemos as-ieseis as-iesen 

l77iperf. Sicbj., 2d For 771 
as-iera as-ieras as-iera as-ieramos as-ierais as-ieran 

Hyp. S2cbj. 
as-iere as-ieres as-iere as-ieremos as-iereis as-ieren 

a. This verb is irregular in only seven forms, viz. the first singular, 
present indicative, and all the present subjunctive, which show a stem asg-. 
All other forms are as of the third regular conjugation. 

251. Valer, to be worth 
Valer, valiendo, valido 

Pres. I 71 die. 
valg-o val-es val-e val-emos val-eis val-en 

P7'es. Siibj. 
valg-a valg-as valg-a valg-amos valg-dis valg-an 

I77ipe7'at. 
val^'rvale val-ed 



Fut. I 71 die. 
^'aldr-e valdr-as valdr-a valdr-emos valdr-eis valdr-an 

Co7id. I 71 die. 
valdr-ia valdr-Ias valdr-ia valdr-iamos valdr-iais valdr-Ian 

l77iperf. I 71 die. 
Vctl-ia val-ias val-Ia val-iamos val-iais val-ian 

P7'et. hi die. 
val-i val-iste val-i6 val-imos val-isteis val-ieron 



222 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



val-iese val-ieses 



val-iera val-ieras 



Imperf. Subj., \st Form 
val-iese val-iesemos 

Imperf. Subj., 2d Forjn 
val-iera val-ieramos 

Hyp. Subj. 



val-ieseis val-iesen 



val-ierais val-ieran 



val-iere val-ieres val-iere val-ieremos val-iereis val-ieren 

a. The present tenses have both a regular and an irregular (valg-) 
stem. The imperative singular may have a flectional vowel or not; it 
usually does nowadays. The future and conditional indicative are based 
on a contract stem with inserted d. All other forms are perfectly regular. 

252. Salir, to go out, come out 

Salir, saliendo, salido 

Pres. Indie, salg-o sal-es sal-e sal-imos sal-is sal-en 
Pres. Subj. salg-a salg-as salg-a salg-amos salg-ais salg-an 
Imperat. sal sal-id 

a. All other forms follow the model of valer, from which, moreover, 
salir differs only in the four flectional forms characteristic of the third 
conjugation and in having only the imperative singular without a flec- 
tional vowel. 





253. Caer, to fall 






Caer, cayendo, caido 




Pres. Iridic. 


( caig-o ca-es 


ca-e 




( ca-emos ca-eis 


ca-en 


Pres. Subj. 


5 caig-a caig-as 
1 caig-amos caig-dis 

( ca-e 

( ca-ecl 


caig-a 




caig-an 


Imperat, 










Put. Indie 


1 caer-e caer-ds 


caer-1 




( caer-emos caer-eis 


caer-dn 


Cond, Indie. 


5 caer-ia caer-ias 


caer-ia 




( caer-iamos caer-iais 


caer-ian 





THE 


VERB 


2 


Imperf, Indie 


5 ca-ia 
( ca-iamos 


ca-ias 
ca-iais 


ca-ia 
ca-ian 


Pret, Indie, 


5 ca-i 
( ca-imos 


ca-iste 
ca-isteis 


ca-yo 
ca-yeron 


Imperf, Subf. 
1st Form 


, ( ca-yese 
\ ca-yesemos 


ca-yeses 
ca-yeseis 


ca-yese 
ca-yesen 


Imperf. Subj. 
id Form 


, C ca-yera 
\ ca-ydramos 


ca-yeras 
ca-yerais 


ca-yera 
ca-yeran 


Hyp, Subj. 


( ca-yere 
( ca-yeremos 


ca-yeres 
ca-yereis 


ca-yere 
ca-yeren 



223 



a. The present tenses have a regular and an irregular (caig-) stem. 
The rest of the verb is perfectly regular. Note, however, that a written 
accent is required on the i of the past participle and of the second singular 
and the first and second plural of the preterite, and that unaccented i 
between vowels has been changed to y in the preterite third singular and 
third plural, in the subjunctive imperfects and hypothetical, and in the 
present participle. 

254. Oir, to hear 
Oir, oyendo, oido 



Pres. Indie. 


oig-o 


oy-es 


oy-e 


o-imos 


o-is 


oy-en 


Pres. Subj. 


oig-a 


oig-as 


oig-a 


oig-amos 


oig-dis 


oig-an 


Iinperat. 




oy-e 






o-id 










Fut. Indie. 


oir-e 


oir-as 


oir-d 


oir-emos 


oir-eis 


oir-dn 


Cond. Indie. 


oir-ia 


oir-ias 


oir-ia 


oir-iamos 


oir-iais 


oir-ian 


Iinperf. Indie. 


o-ia 


o-ias 


o-ia 


o-iamos 


o-iais 


o-ian 


Pret. Indie. 


o-i 


o-iste 


o-yd 


o-imos 


o-isteis 


o-yeron 



Imperf. Subj., } 

^ fp C O'Y^se o-yeses o-yese o-yesemos o-yeseis o-yesen 

^^^^dF ^^'^*' f o-yera o-yeras o-yera o-yeramos o-yerais o-yeran 
Hyp. Siibj. o-yere o-yeres o-yere o-yeremos o-yereis o-yeren 

a. Three stems are visible in the present, viz. oig- (first singular, present 
indicative, and all of present subjunctive), oy- (second and third singular 
and third plural of present indicative and imperative singular), and the 



224 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



regular stem 0- (first and second plural, present indicative, and imperative 
plural). The rest of the verb is regular, but unaccented i between vowels 
is changed to y (third singular and plural of preterite, and all of sub- 
junctive imperfects and hypothetical, as well as present participle). Note 
that stressed i after o requires a written accent. 



255. Traer, to bring 
Traer, trayendo, traido 



Pres, Indie. 
Pres. Siibj. 
Iniperat, 
Fut. Indie, 
Cond. Indie. 
Imp 67' f. Indie. 
P7'et. Indie. 



( traig-o 
( tra-emos 

\ traig-a 
( traior-amos 



j traer-e 
( traer-emos 

f traer-ia 
{ traer-iamos 

( tra-ia 
{ tra-iamos 



C traj-e 
\ traj-imos 

Imperf. SiibJ., \ traj-ese 
\st For7n \ traj-esemos 

hnperf. Subj.^ < traj-era 
2d Por/n i traj-eramos 



Hyp. Subj. 



( traj-ere 
( traj-eremos 



tra-es 
tra-eis 

traig-as 
traig-ais 

tra-e 
tra-ed 

traer-as 
traer-eis 

traer-ias 
traer-iais 

tra-Ias 
tra-iais 

traj-iste 
traj-isteis 

traj-eses 
traj-eseis 

traj-eras 
traj-erais 

traj-eres 
traj-ereis 



tra-e 
tra-en 

traig-a 
traig-an 



traer-a 
traer-an 

traer-ia 
traer-ian 

tra-ia 
tra-ian 

traj-o 
traj-eron 

traj-ese 
traj-esen 

traj-era 
traj-eran 

traj-ere 
traj-eren 



a. The present tenses show a regular and an irregular (traig-) stem; 
the present participle exhibits the change of unaccented i between vowels 
to y (tra-iendo — tra-yendo). Note the written accent of the past par- 



THE VERB 



225 



ticiple. The preterite traje represents the Latin traxi (a Latin x between 
vowels has usually become j in Spanish). The i of the diphthong ie has 
disappeared after the j; cf. § 217. 

256. -ducir, to lead 

This verb (from Latin ducere) is found in modern Spanish 
only in certain derivatives (conducir, deducir, inducir, reducir, 
etc.). Its conjugation may be illustrated by one of these. 

Conducir, to conduct 
conduc-es 



Pres. Indie. 
Pres. Subj\ 
Imperat, 
Fut, Indie. 
Cond. Indie. 
Imp erf. Indie 
Pret. Indie. 



j conduzc-o 
( conduc-imo 
( conduzc-a 
( conduzc-amos 



conduc-e 
conduc-is conduc-en 

conduzc-as conduzc-a 

conduzc-ais conduzc-an 

conduc-e 

conduc-id , 

conducir-as conducir-a 

conducir-^is conducir-an 

conducir-Ias conducir-ia 

conducir-iais conducir-ian 

conduc-ias conduc-ia 

conduc-iais conduc-ian 

conduj-iste conduj-o 

conduj-isteis conduj-eron 

conduj-eses conduj-ese 

conduj-eseis conduj-esen 

conduj-eras conduj-era 

conduj-erais conduj-eran 

conduj-eres conduj-ere 

conduj-ereis conduj-eren 

a. The present tenses show the pecuharities of the inceptive verbs, 
to which, because there is a vowel before the -cir, this verb has been 
attracted. The preterite -duje represents the Latin duxi^ and as usual the 
j absorbs the i of a following diphthong -ie-. 



( conducir-e 
( conducir-emos 
( conducir-ia 
( conducir-iamos 
( conduc-ia 
( conduc-iamos 
j conduj-e 
\ conduj-imos 



Imp erf . Siibj.., j conduj-ese 

\st Form { conduj-esemos 
Imperf. Subj., ( conduj-era 
2d Form ( conduj-eramos 
( conduj-ere 
< conduj-eremos 



Hyp. Subj. 



226 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



257. Decir, to say 
Decir, diciendo, dicho 



Pres, Indie, 


dig-o 


dic-es 


dic-e 


dec-imos 


dec-is 


dic-en 


Fres, Subj. 


dig-a 


dig-as 


dig-a 


dig-amos 


dig-dis 


dig-an 


Fnperat, 




di 






decid 




Fut. Indie. 


dir-d 


dir-as 


dir-d 


dir-emos 


dir-eis 


dir-an 


Cond. Indie. 


dir-ia 


dir-Ias 


dir-ia 


dir-iamos 


dir-iais 


dir-ian 


Imp. Indie. 


dec-ia 


dec-ias 


dec-la 


dec-iamos 


dec-iais 


dec-ian 


Pret. Indie. 


dij-e 


dij-iste 


dij-o 


dij-imos 


dij-isteis 


dij-eron 


Imp. Subj., ) 
1st Form ) 


dij-ese 


dij-eses 


dij-ese 


dij-esemos 


dij-eseis 


dij-esen 


Imp. Subj.y ) 
2d Form f 


dij-era 


dij-eras 


dij-era 


dij-eramos 


dij-erais 


dij-eran 


Hyp. Subj. 


dij-ere 


dij-eres 


dij-ere 


dij-eremos 


dij-ereis 


dij-eren 



a. The present tenses and the present participle show vocalic condi- 
tions like those of the third class of radical-changing verbs. The past 
participle is irregular (from Latin dictutti) ; the imperative singular lacks 
a flectional ending (cf. Latin die). The future and conditional indicative 
are based on a contract infinitive, dir. Dije represents the Latin dixi^ and 
after the j the i of the diphthong ie has disappeared (in preterite third 
plural and subjunctive imperfects and hypothetical). There is an indefinite 
form diz, * it is said,' * people say,' etc., which may represent a contraction 
of dice H- se. 

b. Derivatives of decir are bendecir, * to bless,' and maldecir, * to 
curse.' These imitate decir in their conjugation, except that they base 
their future and conditional indicative upon the uncontracted infinitive 
decir, whence the forms bendecir^, etc., maldecire, etc., and have a flec- 
tional vowel in their imperative singular, bendice and maldice. Further- 
more, they have regular past participles, bendecido and maldecido. The 
participles bendicho and maldicho are now antiquated, and the forms 
bendito and maldito occur only as adjectives. The derivatives contrade- 
cir, * to contradict,' desdecir, * to gainsay,' and predecir, * to predict,' differ 
from decir only in having the full form of the imperative singular, contra- 
dice, desdice, predice. 



THE VERB 



227 



258. Ver, to see 
Ver, viendo, visto 



Pres. Indie. 


ve-o 


v-es 


v-e 


Pres, Subj, 


ve-a 


ve-as 


ve-a 


l7nperat. 




v-e 




Fut. Iridic, 


ver-e 


ver-as 


ver-a 


Cond. Indie. 


ver-ia 


ver-ias 


ver-ia 


Iinperf. Indie 


:. ve-ia 


ve-ias 


ve-ia 


Pret, Indie. 


v-i 


v-iste 


v-io 


Imp erf. Siibj.. 
\st Fo7'?n 


' >- v-iese 


v-ieses 


v-iese 


I?nperf. Subj., 
id For 711 


' V v-ieia 


v-ieras 


v-i era 


Hyp. Subj. 


v-iere 


v-ieres 


v-iere 



v-emos v-eis v-en 

ve-amos ve-ais ve-an 

v-ed 

ver-e m OS ver-eis ver-dn 

ver-iamos ver-iais ver-ian 

ve-iamos ve-iais ve-ian 

v-imos v-isteis v-ieron 

v-iesemos v-ieseis v-iesen 

v-ieramos v-ierais v-ieran 

v-ieremos v-iereis v-ieren 



a. The true present stem of this verb is ve-, which is seen in the first 
singular, present indicative (ve-o), and throughout in the present sub- 
junctive (ve-a, etc.) and the imperfect indicative (ve-ia, etc.). Before a 
flectional e the stem loses its e, as in the remaining forms of the present 
indicative, the infinitive, and the imperative. It also loses the e in the 
present participle. The past participle is irregular. The preterite vi 
represents the Latin vidl?^ In poetry an imperfect indicative via, vias 
(with reduced stem v-) is sometimes found even now. 

b. Compounds of ver which show the reduced present stem (v-), such 
as antever, * to foresee,' prever, * to foresee,' rever, ' to see again,' * to 
review,' are conjugated exactly like it. On the other hand, the derivative 
proveer, * to provide,' which shows the full present stem (ve-), is conju- 
gated throughout as a perfectly regular verb. It has, however, both a 
regular past participle, proveido, and an irregular one, provisto ; and in 
the present participle, the preterite, third singular and third plural, and the 
subjunctive imperfect and hypothetical, it changes the i of the diphthongs 
-ie-, -16, to y. 



1 Vide, for vi, still survives in some dialects, for instance, in New Mexico. 



228 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Proveer, proveyendo, proveido or provisto 



Pres. Indie. 
Pres. Subj. 
Imperat. 
Fut, Indie. 


prove-o 
prove-a 

proveer-e, etc. 


prove-es, etc. 
prove-as, etc. 
prove-e, etc. 




Cond. Indie. 


proveer-ia, etc. 






Imperf. Indie, prove-ia, etc. 






Pret. Indie. 

hnperf. Subj., 
1st Form 


f prove-i 
I prove-imos 

' I prove-yese, etc. 


prove-iste 
prove-isteis 


prove-y6 
prove-yeron 


Imp erf. Subj., 
id Form 


' > prove-yera, etc. 






Hyp. Subj. 


prove-yere, etc. 







Note the accent required in the regular past participle and the second 
singular, and the first and second plural of the preterite. 

Anomalous Past Participles 

259. Four regular verbs of the third conjugation have only 
irregular past participles. 

abrir, to open, abierto. ;t«r.ri«,ir S to pi*int > ;^^^^o« 

' ^ imprimir -, ^ Y , impreso 

cubrir, to cover, cubierto. ( to impress > 

escribir, to write, escrito. 

This peculiarity is shared by their compounds. 

a. The participle escribido is found in what is perhaps punning use in 
such an expression as un hombre (bien) leido y escribido, * a man who 
can read and write ' (cf. the influence of the participle leido ; its attrac- 
tive force may explain escribido). 

260. Two regular verbs of the second conjugation have both 
a regular and an irregular past participle. 

prender, to catch, prendido and preso. 
romper, to break, rompido and roto. 



THE VERB 



229 



Preso and roto are preferred for the compound tenses ; rompido, 
however, is far more common than roto in the intransitive use. 

261. Two regular verbs of the third conjugation hav^e both a 
regular and an irregular past participle. 

oprimir, to oppress, oprimido and opreso. 
suprimir, to suppress, suprimido and supreso. 

The regular participle alone seems now to be used in the com- 
pound tenses ; the other forms are practically adjectives. 

Defective Verbs 

262. Placer, ^ to please.' Used now chiefly as an impersonal 
verb, i.e, only in the third person singular forms of its tenses. 
Traces of other forms are occasionally found in the present 
tenses ; e,g. placen. Its impersonal conjugation is this : 

Pres. Ind. place Pres. Siibj. plega, plague or plazca 

Iiwbf. Ind. -^ , . . ^ - plu^iiese 0?' placiese 

^^ ( (rare) ist Form > * 

. , ( plu^o or Impf. Siibj.^ ) 1 • 1 • 

Pret. hid. -^ , • , j r^ I pluguiera or placiera 

{ placio 2.d Porm \ 

Flit. Ind. placera Hyp. Siibj. pluguiere or placiera 

Cond. ind. placeria Pres. Pa?'! placiendo 

a. The commonest form is pluguiera, which is used in optative ex- 
pressions : i pluguiera a Dios ! ' would to God 1 ' 

b. The derivative complacer is of the class of verbs with inceptive 
endings; another derivative, aplacer, is found in the third person singular 
and plural forms, such as aplace, aplacen, aplacia, and aplacian. 

263. Yacer, ^to He.' This verb has many pecuharities of 
the inceptive class. It is nearly obsolete, and is chiefly used 
in the third person forms. 



230 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



Yacer, yaciendo, yacido 

r yazco "^ 
Pres. Indie, J yazgo y yaces yace yacemos yaceis yacen 

Lyago J 

r yazca yazcas, etc. 
Pres. Subj. \ yazga yazgas, etc, 

L yaga yagas, etc, 
Imperat. yace or yaz 

The other forms are regular. 
yaci, etc. ; yaciese, etc. ; yaciera, etc. ; yaciere, etc. ; yacere, etc. ; 
yaceria, etc. 

264. Concernir, ^ to concern/ occurs only in the third person 
singular and plural forms. 

Pres. Indie. concierne conciernen 

Pres. Subj. concierna conciernan 

Fut. Indie. concernird concerniran 

Cond. Indie. concerniria concernirian 

Imperf. Indie. concernia concernian 

Pret. Indie. concernid concernieron 

Imperf . Subj. ^ \st Form concerniese concerniesen 

Imperf. Subj. , id For?n concerniera concernieran 

Hyp. Subj. concerniera concernieren 

265. Soler, ' to be accustomed/ is used now in hardly any 
forms except those of the present and imperfect indicative. 

Pres. Indie. suelo sueles suele solemos soleis suelen 
Imperf. Indie, solia solias solia soliamos soliais solian 

The present participle soliendo, the past participle solido, and 
the preterite soli, etc., are exceedingly rare. All other forms 
do not occur. . 

266. Ataner, ' to appertain/ is only found in the third person 
forms, especially of the present indicative. 

atafie atanen 



THE VERB 231 

267. Raer, ^to erase/ is but little used. Its conjugation 
is like that of caer, with the additional forms raya, rayas, etc., 
in the present subjunctive. 

268. Roer, ' to gnaw.' This may have any one of three 
present stems before its endings -0 and -a ; otherwise it is a 
regular verb of the second conjugation. 

fro-o ^ 
Pres. Indic, -{ roig-o ^ roes roe roemos roeis roen 

l^ roy-o J 

C ro-a ro-as, etc. 
Pres. Subj. < roig-a roig-as, etc. 

L roy-a roy-as, etc. 

But the first person singular, present indicative, and all the 
present subjunctive are rather shunned in actual use. 

a. The derivative corroer, * to corrode,' avoids the stems ending in -ig 
and -y. 

269. It is generally stated that the preterite forms repuse, ' I 
repHed,' repusiste, 'thou didst reply,' etc., are from the verb 
reponer, which does not in its other tenses and forms connect 
itself with the sense of " reply." But repuse, etc., may rather 
connect themselves with the Vulgar Latin irregular preterite of 
respondere, viz. * resposi, etc. 

270. Some ten verbs of the third regular conjugation occur 
only in the forms whose flectional ending begins with i. 
These are 

abolir, to abohsh. despavorir, to become frightened, 

aguerrir, to make warlike. embair, to impose upon, 

arrecirse, to become numb. empedernir, to harden. 

aterirse, to become numb. garantir, to guarantee, 

desmarrirse, to become sad. manir, to become tender. 



232 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



For these there can occur in the present indicative and 
imperative only the forms in -imos, -is, and -id {e.g, abolimos, 
abolis, abolid). They have no subjunctive present forms. 
They may have all the rest of the conjugation, since the 
endings begin with i. 



271. List of Verbs. 

The following list embraces radical-changing, -uir, irregular, and 
anomalous verbs. The verbs with inceptive endings (-cer or -cir preceded 
by a vowel) are not included: they simply follow the models given in 
§ 220. In the case of derivatives reference is made to the conjugation 
of the simple verbs, which they follow. The numbers refer to paragraphs. 



abnegar, renounce: Rad.-ch, I, 223 

(i) ; of. 214 (2) and 225. 
abolir, abolish : 270. 
abrir, open: /./. irr., 259. 
absolver, absolve : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4) ; 

p. p. irr., 224. 
abstenerse, abstain: irr., 239. 
abstraer, abstract: irr., 255. 
abunolar, make fritter-shaped : Rad.- 

ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. abunuelar, reg. 
acertar, hit the mark: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
aclocarse, stretch out, brood : Rad.-ch. 

I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225. 
acordar, resolve, remind, tune ; — se, 

to remember: Rad.-ch. I., 223 (3). 
acostar, lay down : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3)- 
acrecentar, increase: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
adestrar, guide : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; 

also adiestrar, reg. 
adherir, adhere: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i). 
adormir, make drowsy: Rad.-ch. II, 

229 (2). 
adquirir, acquire : Rad.-ch. I, 228. 
aducir, adduce: irr., 256. 
advertir, observe, advise: Rad.-ch. II, 

229 (i). 



afoUar, blow with bellows : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3). 
aforar, give a charter: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3). Aforar, gauge, reg. 
agorar, divine, prognosticate: Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225. 
aguerrir, inure to warfare : 270. 
alebrarse, squat, cower: Rad,-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
alentar, breathe, encourage : Rad,-<h, 

I, 223 (i). 
aliquebrar, break the wings: Rad.', 

ch. I, 223 (i). 
almorzar, breakfast: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(3) ; cf. 214 (4) and 225. 
alongar, lengthen : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3) ; 

cf. 214 (2) and 225. 
amoblar, furnish : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 

Also amueblar, reg. 
amolar, whet: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
amover, remove, dismiss : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (4). 
andar, go, walk : irr., 240. 
antedecir, foretell: irr.^ 257. 
anteponer, put before, prefer : irr., 249. 
antever, foresee : irr., 258. 
apacentar, graze : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (i). 
apercoUar, collar, snatch : Rad.-ch. I, 

223(3)- 



THE VERB 



233 



apernar, seize by the legs : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
aplacer, please : irr„ 2.6'2. 
apostar, bet, post : Rad.-ch, I, 223 (3) ; 

post troops, reg, 
apretar, squeeze, press : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
aprobar, approve : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
argiiir, argue : 235. 
arrecirse, become benumbed : 270. 
arrendar, rent, hire: Rad.-ch.\,2.2.'^{'L). 
arrepentirse, repent: Rad.-ch. II, 

229 (i). 
ascender, ascend : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2). 
asentar, seat, set down: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
asentir, assent, acquiesce : Rad.-ch. II, 

229 (i). 
aserrar, saw: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
asir, seize, grasp : irr., 250. 
asolar, level to ground, raze : Rad.-ch, 

I. 223 (3). 
asoldar, hire: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
asonar, assonate, be in assonance: 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
asosegar, v. sosegar. 
ataner, belong, appertain : 266. 
atender, attend, mind: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (2). 
atenerse, abide, hold: irr., 239. 
atentar, try: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

Atentar, to attempt a crime, reg. 
aterirse, become rigid with cold : 

270. 
aterrar, fell : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; ter- 
rify, reg. 
atestar, cram, stuff: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(i). Atestar, attest, r^^. 
atraer, attract : ^Vr., 255. 
atravesar, cross: Rad.-ch. 1,223 (i)- 
atribuir, attribute : 235. 
atronar, make a thundering din, stun : 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
avenir, reconcile: irr., 248. 
aventar, fan, winnow: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 



avergonzar, shame: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(3) ; cf. 214 (4) and 225. 
azolar, shape with the adze : Rad.-ch. . 

I. 223 (3). 

balbucir, stammer : 220 a. 
bendecir, bless : irr., 257. 
bienquerer, esteem, wish well: ?>r., 242. 
brunir, burnish : 217. 
buUir, boil : 217. 

caber, be contained, find room : irr., 

244. 
caer, fall: irr., 253. 
calentar, warm : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
cegar, blind: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf. 

214 (2) and 225. 
cenir, gird: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; cf. 217 

and 231. 
cerner, sift: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2). 
cerrar, close: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
cimentar, found, establish: Rad.-ch. 

^ 1,223 (i). 
circuir, encircle : 235. 
clocar, cluck : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 

214 (i) and 225. 

COCer, boil, bake: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ; 
cf. 220, Exceptions {a) . 

coextenderse, be coextensive: Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (2). 

colar, strain, filter : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) . 

COlegir, collect: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; cf. 

215 (2) and 231. 

COlgar, hang up: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; 

cf. 214 (2) and 225. 
comedirse, behave: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 
comenzar, commence : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i); cf. 214 (4). 
competir, compete: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 
complacer, please, content: irr., 262. 
componer, compose : zVr., 249. 
comprobar, verify, confirm : Rad.-ch. 

I. 223 (3). 
concebir, conceive: Rad.-ch. 111,230. 
concernir, concern: Rad.-ch. I, 223; 

but cf. 264. 



234 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



concertar, concert, regulate : Rad.-ch. 

I, 223 (i). 
concluir, conclude : 235. 
concordar, accord, agree : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3). 
condescender, condescend : Rad.-ch. 

1,223 (2). 
condolerse, condole: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (4) . 
conducir, conduct: irr., cf. 256 and 

220 b. 
conferir, confer : Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i) . 
confesar, confess : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (i) . 
confluir, join : 235. 
conmover, move, affect: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (4). 
COnseguir, obtain, attain : Rad.-ch. Ill, 

230; cf. 215 (4) and 231. 
consentir, consent: Rad.-ch. II, 

229 (i). 
consolar, console ; Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3). 
COnsonar, be in consonance, rhyme: 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
constituir, constitute : 235. 
constrenir , compel, constrain : Rad.-ch. 

Ill, 230; cf. 231. 
construir, construct : 235. 
COntar, count, tell : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) . 
contender, contend : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (2). 
contener, contain : irr.^ 239. 
contorcerse, be distorted, writhe: 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ; cf. 215 (i). 
contradecir, contradict : irr., 257. 
contraer, contract: irr., 255. 
contrahacer, counterfeit : irr., 246. 
contraponer, oppose, compare: irr., 

249. 
contravenir, contravene : irr., 248. 
contribuir, contribute : 235. 
controvertir, controvert : Rad.-ch. II, 

229 (i). 
convenir, agree, fit: irr., 248. 
convertir, convert : Rad.-ch. ll,^^^ (i). 
corregir, correct: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; 

cf. 215 (2) and 231. 
corroer, corrode: irr.^ 268, 



costar, cost: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
creer, believe : cf. 216. 
cubrir, cover : /./. irr., 259. 

dar, give: irr., 241. 

decaer, decay: irr., 253. 

decentar, begin to use: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (I). 
decir, say: irr., 257. 
deducir, deduce: irr., cf. 256 and 

220 {b). 
defender, defend : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2). 
deferir, defer: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i). 
degollar, behead, cut the throat: 

Rad.-ch, I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225. 
demoler, demolish : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4). 
demostrar, demonstrate: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3)- 

denegar, deny: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; 
cf. 214 (2) and 225. 

denostar, insult: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 

dentar, tooth, indent; teeth: Rad.-ch, 
I, 223 (i). 

deponer, depose, depone : irr., 249. 

derrengar, sprain the hip, cripple : 
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 
225. 

derretir, melt: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 

derrocar, pull down, demolish : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i) and 225. 

derruir, cast down, destroy: 235. 

desacertar, blunder, err: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i). 

desacordar, make discordant; — se, 
forget: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 

desaferrar, loosen, unfurl : Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i). 

desalentar, put out of breath, discour- 
age: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

desamoblar, unfumish, remove furni- 
ture : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). Also 
desamueblar, reg. 

desandar, retrace steps, undo: irr., 
240. 

desapretar, slacken, loosen : Rad.-ch, 
I, 223 (i). 



THE VERB 



235 



desaprobar, disapprove: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3). 

desarrendarse, shake off the bridle : 
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

desasentar, disagree, displease ; — se, 
get up: Rad.-ck. I, 223 (i). 

desasir, let go, release hold : irr., 250. 

desasosegar, disturb, disquiet : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i) ; of. 214 (2) and 225. 

desatender, disregard, neglect : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (2). 

desatentar, perturb, perplex : Rad.-ch. 
I, 223 (i). 

desavenir, discompose, disconcert : 
irr., 248. 

descender, descend : Rad.-ch . 1 , 223 (2) . 

descenir, ungird: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; 
cf. 217 and 231. 

descolgar, unhang, take down : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 

descollar, stand forth, excel : Rad.-ch. 
I. 223 (3). 

descomedirse, be disrespectful, be- 
have ill: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 

descomponer, disconcert, decompose : 
irr., 249. 

desconcertar, disconcert, confound : 
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

desconsentir, dissent: Rad.-ch. II, 
229 (i). 

desconsolar, make disconsolate : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (3). 

descontar, discount: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(3). 
descouvenir, disagree, be unlike : irr., 

248. 
descordar, remove cords : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3)- 
descornar, remove horns : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3). 
descubrir, uncover, discover ; /./. irr., 

259. 
desdar, untwist: irr. 241. 
desdecir, gainsay : irr., 257. 
desdentar, remove teeth: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (I). 



desempedrar, unpave: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i). 

desencerrar, release from confine- 
ment: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

desencordar, remove strings, loosen : 
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 

desengrosar, make lean: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (3). 

desentenderse, disregard, feign not to 
notice: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

desenterrar, disinter: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i). 

desenvolver, unfold, unravel: Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (4) ; p.p. irr., cf. 224. 

deservir, neglect duty, do a disser- 
vice: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 

desflocar, remove flocks (of wool) : 
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 225. 

desgobernar. derange the government, 
misgovern: Rad.-ch, I, 223 (i). 

deshacer, undo, destroy: irr., 246. 

deshelar, thaw: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

desherbar, pluck out herbs : Rad.-ch. 
I, 223 (i). 

desherrar, uniron, remove horse- 
shoes : 223 (i). 

desleir, dilute: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230 and 

233- 
deslendrar, remove nits (from hair) : 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
desmajolar, uproot vines: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3) . 
desmarrirse, become sad : 270. 
desmedirse, go beyond bounds, be 

unreasonable: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 
desmembrar, dismember: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
desmentir, belie: Rad.-ch. II, 229 

(I). 

desnegar, retract denial: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 

desnevar, melt away (of snow) : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i). 

desobstruir, remove obstruction : 235. 

desoir, not to heed, feign not to hear: 
irr., 254. 



236 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



desolar, make desolate: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3) • 
desoldar, unsolder: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(3). 

desollar, flay: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 

desosar, remove bones: Rad.-ch, I, 
223 (3) ; cf. 226 a. 

desovar, spawn: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; 
cf. 226 a. 

despavorir, be terrified, stand aghast : 
270. 

despedir, dismiss ; — se, take leave : 
Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 

despernar, remove legs, cripple : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i). 

despertar, awaken : Rad.-ch. 1,223(1). 

despezar, arrange (stones) at inter- 
vals, taper at the end: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i) ; cf. 225. 

desplacer, displease : 262. 

desplegar, unfold, unfurl : Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 

despoblar, depopulate: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3)- 
desproveer, leave unprovided, deprive 

of supplies : 216 ; cf. 258 b. 
destenir, discolor, fade: Rad.-ch. Ill, 

230; cf. 217 and 231. 
desterrar, exile: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
destituir, deprive, remove from office : 

235. 
destorcer, untwist : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4) ; 

cf. 215 (i) and 225. 
destrocar, return a bartered object: 

Rad.-ch, I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i) and 

225. 
destruir, destroy: 235. 
desventar, vent, let out air : Rad.-ch. 

1,223 (i). 
desvergonzarse, be shameless or im- 
pudent: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3); cf. 

214 (4) and 225. 
detener, detain : irr.^ 239. 
detraer, detract : irr., 255. 
devolver, give back: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(4) I P'P' ^^^M 224. 



diferir, defer, delay, differ: Rad.-ch, 

II, 229 (i). 
digerir, digest: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i). 
diluir, dilute : 235. 
discernir, discern: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2) 

and 228 (i). 
disconvenir, v. desconvenir. 
discordar, disagree, be discordant: 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
disentir, dissent : Rad.-ch, II, 229 (i). 
disminuir, diminish, 235. 
disolver, dissolve : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) : 

p.p. irr., 2.2,/^. 
disonar, be in dissonance : Rad.-ch, I, 

223 (3)- 
dispertar, v. despertar. 
displacer, displease : irr., 262. 
disponer, dispose: irr., 249. 
distender, distend : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (2). 
distraer, distract : irr., 255. 
distribuir, distribute : 235. 
divertir, divert: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i). 
dolar, plane, smooth (wood, etc.) : 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
doler, pain, grieve : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) . 
dormir, sleep: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (2). 

educir, educe, bring out : irr., 256 ; cf. 

220 b, 
elegir, elect: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; cf. 

215 (2) and 231. 
embair, impose, deceive : 270. 
embestir, invest, attack: Rad.-ch. Ill, 

230. 
emparentar, be related by marriage : 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
empedernir, harden, make inveterate : 

270. 
empedrar, pave: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
empeller, urge, push : 217. 
empezar, begin : Rad,-ch. I, 223 (i) ; 

cf. 214 (4) and 225. 
emporcar, sully, befoul: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i) and 225. 
encender, light, kindle: Rad.-ch, I, 

223 (2). 



THE VERB 



237 



encentax, begin to use for first time : 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
encerrar, shut up, confine : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
enclocar, cluck : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; 

cf. 225. 
encomendar, commend: Rad.-ch, I, 

223 (i). 
encontrar, meet, find: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3). 
encorar, cover with leather, renew the 

skin: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
encordar, string (musical instru- 
ments), lash: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(3). 

encovar, put into a cave or cellar, lock 

up: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
encubertar, cover over: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
endentar, mortise in : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
engorar, lay addled eggs: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3) ; cf. 225. 
engreir, elate, puff up: Rad.-ch. Ill, 

233- 
engrosar, fatten, strengthen : Rad.-ch. 

1.223 (3). 
enhestar, erect, set upright: Rad.-ch. 

I, 223 (i). 
emnelar, honey, sweeten: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
enmendar, amend, correct: Rad.-ch. 

1,223 (i)- 
enrodar, break on the wheel : Rad.-ch. 

1.223 (3). 
ensangrentar, cover with blood: 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
entender, hear, understand : Rad.-ch. 

I, 223 (2). 
enterrar, inter: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
entortar, make crooked; deprive of 

one eye: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
entredecir, interdict : irr., 257. 
entremorir, pine away: Rad-ch. II, 

229 (2) ; /./. irr., 229 a. 
entreolr, hear indistinctly : irr., 254. 



entrepernar, put the legs in between 
(something else) : Rad.-ch. I, 
223(1). 

entreponer, interpose : irr., 249. 

entretener, delay, entertain : irr.^ 

239- 

entrever, see imperfectly, catch a 
glimpse of: irr., 258. 

envolver, involve, wTap up, compli- 
cate : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ; p.p. irr., 
224. 

equivaler, equal, be equivalent: irr., 

251. 
erguir, erect: Rad.-ch. II or III, 232, 

229, and 230 ; cf. 215 (4) and 226. 
errar, err, wander : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; 

cf. 226. 
escarmentar, give warning example, 

learn by experience: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (1). 
escocer, smart: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4); 

cf. 220 {a) and 225. 
escribir, write: p.p. irr., 259. 
esforzar, strengthen- — se, attempt: 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (4) and 

225. 
estar, be : irr., 238. 
estatuir, establish, 235. 
estregar, rub, scour, grind: Rad.-ch. 

I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 
estrenir, bind, restrain: Rad.-ch. Ill, 

230 ; cf. 217. 
excluir, exclude : 235. 
expedir, expedite, despatch : Rad.-ch. 

Ill, 230. 
exponer, expose : irr. , 249. 
extender, extend : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2). 
extraer, extract : irr., 255. 

ferrar, put on iron points, etc. : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i). 
fluir, flow : 235. 
foliar, blow with bellows : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3). 
forzar, force: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3); 
cf. 214 (4) and 225. 



238 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



fregar, rub, cleanse: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 
freir, fry: Rad.-ch. Ill, 233. 

garantir, guarantee : 270. 
gemir, groan, moan : Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 
gobernar, govern : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
gruir, cry like cranes : 235. 
grunir, grunt : 217. 

haber, have : irr., 237. 

hacendar, transfer property : Rad.-ch. 

I, 223 (i). 
hacer, do, make : irr., 246. 
heder, have a stench, stink : Rad.-ch, I, 

223 (2). 
helar, freeze: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
hencbir, stuff, cram : Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 
bender, cleave, split : Rad.-ch, 1, 223 (2). 
herbar, dress skms : Rad.-ch. 1, 223(1). 
herir, wound: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i). 
bervir, boil, bubble: Rad.-ch. II, 229 

(I). 

herrar, shoe (horses), brand (cattle) : 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
holgar, rest, cease working: Rad.-ch. 

I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 
bollar, trample on, tread on : Rad.-ch. 

I. 223 (3). 
buir, flee : 235. 

imbuir, imbue : 235. 

impedir, impede: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 

imponer, impose : 2>r., 249. 

imprimir, print: /./. irr., 259. 

improbar, disapprove, censure : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (3). 

incensar, perfume, incense; Rad.-ch. 
I, 223 (i). 

incluir, include : 235. 

indisponer, indispose, disincline : irr., 
249. 

inducir, induce : irr., 256 ; cf. 220 b. 

inferir, infer: Rad.-ch., 11,229 (i). 

infernar, damn, vex: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i). 



influir, influence : 235. 

ingerir, graft, insert: Rad.-ch. II, 
229 (i). 

inquirir, inquire: Rad.-ch. I, 228 (2). 

instituir, institute : 235. 

instruir, instruct : 235. 

interdecir, indict : irr., 257. 

interponer, interpose : irr., 249. 

intervenir, intervene: irr., 248. 

introducir, introduce: irr., 256; cf. 
220 b. 

invernar, winter: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

invertir, invert, spend, invest: Rad.- 
ch. II, 229 (i). 

investir, invest, gird: Rad.-ch.lll, 230. 

ir, go : irr., 247. 

jugar, play: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3); cf. 
227. 

leer, read : 216. 

Hover, rain: Rad.-ch. I, impers., 2.2.2, 

(4). 

maldecir, curse: irr., 257. 
malberir, wound seriously: Rad.-ch. 

II, 229 (i). 
malquerer, dislike, abhor : irr., 242. 
malsonar, make cacophony : Rad.-ch, 

I, 223 (3). 
maltraer, maltreat : irr., 2^^. 
manifestar, manifest: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
manir, mellow, mature meat : 270. 
mantener, maintain : 239. 
mecer, rock, lull, mix: 220 a. 
medir, measure: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 
melar, boil to honey, deposit honey 

(of bees) : Rad.-ch. I., 223 (i). 
mentar, mention : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
mentir, lie: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i). 
merendar, lunch: Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (i). 
moblar, furnish: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 

Also mueblar, re^. 
moler, grind: Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (4). 
morder, bite : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) . 



THE VERB 



239 



morir, die: Rad.-ck. II, 229 (2) ; p.p. 

irr., 229 a. 
mostrar, show: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
mover, move: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4). 

negar, deny: Rad.-ch, I, 223 (i) ; cf. 

214 (2) and 225. 
nevar, snow: Rad.-ch. I, impers.^ 

223 (i). 

obstruir, obstruct : 235. 

obtener, obtain : irr.,2.y^. 

oir, hear: irr.^ 254. 

oler, smell, have an odor: Rad.-ch, I, 

223 (4) ; cf. 226 (2) . 
oponer, oppose : irr.^ 249. 
oprimir, oppress : 261. 

pedir, ask: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 

pensar, think, mean, believe : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i). 

perder, to lose, spoil, destroy: Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (2). 

perniquebrar, break the legs : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i). 

perse guir, pursue, persecute : Rad.- 
ch. Ill, 230; cf. 231. 

pervertir, pervert : Rad.-ch. II, 229. 

placer, please : irr., 262. 

planir, lament, bewail : 217. 

plegar, fold: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf. 
214 (2) and 225. 

poblar, found, people, fill : Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (3). 

poder, be able, can : irr., 243. 

podrir, rot : 234. 

poner, put : irr., 249. 

poseer, possess : 216. 

posponer, place after, postpone : irr., 
249. 

predecir, predict: irr., 257. 

predisponer, predispose: irr., 249. 

preferir, prefer: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i). 

premorir, die first or prematurely: 
Rad.-ch. II, 229 (2) and a. 

prender, arrest, catch : 260. 



preponer, put before, prefer : irr.^ 249. 
presentir, forebode, foresee : Rad.-ch. 

II, 229 (i). 
presuponer, presuppose : irr., 249. 
prevalerse, prevail : irr.,2^1. 
prevenir, forestall, prevent: irr., 248. 
prever, foresee : irr., 258. 
probar, prove, try, taste : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3). 
producir, produce : irr., 256 ; cf. 220 b. 
proferir, utter, pronounce : Rad.-ch. 

II, 229 (i). 
promover, promote: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(4). 

proponer, propose: irr., 249. 

proseguir, pursue, prosecute: Rad.- 
ch. Ill, 230; cf. 215 (4) and 231. 

prostituir, prostitute : 235. 

proveer, provide : 216 ; cf. 258 b. 

provenir, proceed : irr., 248. 

pudrir, rot : 234. 

quebrar, break: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
querer, wish, like : irr., 242. 

raer, scrape, grate, erase: irr., 267. 
rarefacer, rarify: irr., 246. 
reapretar, squeeze again : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
rebendecir, bless again: irr., 257. 
recaer, fall back, relapse: irr., 253. 
recalentar, treat again : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 
recentar, leaven: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
recluir, shut up, seclude: 235. 
recocer, boil again: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(4) ; cf. 220 a, 215 (i), and 225. 
recolar, strain again: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(3)- 
recomendar, recommend: Rad.-ch. 

1.223 (i). 
recomponer, recompose, mend : irr., 

249. 
reconducir, renew lease or contract; 

irr., 256; cf. 220 b. 
reconstruir, reconstruct : 235. 



240 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



recontar, recount : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3). 

reconvenir, accuse, rebuke : irr., 248. 

recordar, remind : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 

recostar, lean against, recline : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (3). 

redargiiir, reargue : 235. 

reducir, reduce: irr., 256; cf. 220 b. 

reelegir, reelect: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; 
cf. 215 (2) and 231. 

referir,relate,refer:i?^a'.-^/^. 11,229(1). 

refluir, flow back : 235. 

reforzar, strengthen, fortify : Rad.-ch, 
1,2.2.0, (3); cf. 214 (4). 

refregar, rub over again : Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 

refreir, fry again : 233. 

regar, water: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf. 

214 (2) and 225. 

regimentar, raise a regiment: Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i). 
regir, rule, direct: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; 

215 (2) and 231. 

regoldar, belch, eruct: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (3) ; cf. 225. 

rehacer, make again, mend : irr., 246. 

rehenchir, fill again, restuff : Rad.-ch, 
III, 230. 

reherir, wound again : Rad.-ch. II, 
229 (i). 

reherrar, shoe (horses) again : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i). 

rehervir, reboil: Rad.-ch. 11,229 (i). 

rehollar, trample under foot: Rad.- 
ch.^ 1,223 (3). 

rehuir, withdraw, deny : 235. 

reir, laugh, 233. 

remendar, repair, patch: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i). 

rementir, lie again: Rad.-ch. II, 
229 (i). 

remoler, grind again: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (4) . 

remorder, bite repeatedly, cause re- 
morse : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4). 

remover, remove, alter: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (4). 



rendir, subdue, render ; — se, surren- 
der: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 

renegar, deny, disown : Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 

renovar, renovate, renew : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3)- 

renir, quarrel, scold: Rad.-ch. Ill, 
230; cf. 217 and 231. 

repensar, think over again : Rad.-ch. 
I, 223 (i). 

repetir, repeat, recite: Rad.-ch. Ill, 
230. 

replegar, refold, double again : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 

repoblar, repopulate: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3)- 
repodrir, decay, rot inwardly : 234. 
reponer, put back, replace : irr. , 249. 
reprobar, reject, condemn: Rad.-ch. 

I. 223 (3). 
reproducir, reproduce: irr., 2^6; cf. 

220 d. 
repudrir, decay, rot inwardly : cf. 234. 
requebrar, court, make love: Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i). 
requerer, wish much, like well: irr., 

242. 
requerir, investigate, require, request : 

Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i). 
resaber, know well: irr., 245. 
resalir.project, be prominent: irr., 2^2. 
resegar, reap again: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 
resembrar, sow again: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (i). 

resentirse, begin to give way, resent : 
Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i). 

resolver, resolve : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ; 
p.p. irr., 224. 

resoUar, respire: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 

resonar, resound : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) . 

resquebrar, crack, split, burst : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i). 

restituir, restore, reestablish: 235. 

restregar, scrub : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; 
cf. 214 (2) and 225. 



THE VERB 



241 



retemblar, shake, tremble much, 
brandish: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

retener, retain: irr., 239. 

retentar, threaten with a relapse : 
Rad.-ch, I, 223 (i). 

retenir, dye over again: Rad.-ch. Ill, 
230; cf. 217 and 231. 

retorcer, twist, contort: Rad.-ch, I, 
223 (4) ; cf. 215 (i) and 225. 

retostar, toast again, scorch well: 
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 

retraer, retract: irr., 255. 

retribuir, make retribution, recom- 
pense: 235. 

retronar, thunder again : Rad.-ch. I , 

223 (3) • 
retrotraer, make retroactive, retroact : 

irr., 255. 
revenirse, be consumed gradually, 

sour, ferment: irr., 248. 
reventar, burst : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) . 
rever, see again, review, revise : irr., 

258. 
reverter, revert : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) . 
revestir, put on vestments : Rad.-ch. 

Ill, 230. 
revolar, fly again: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
revolcarse, wallow: Rad.-ch. I, 223 

(3) ; cf. 214 (i) and 225. 
revolver, stir, revolve: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (4); p.p. irr., 224. 
rodar, roll: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
roer, gnaw : irr., 268. 
rogar, entreat, ask : Rad.-ch. \,'22.'^ (3) ; 

cf. 214 (2) and 225 ; derivatives 

reg. 

saber, know : irr., 245. 

salir, go out, come out : irr., 252. 

salpimentar, season with pepper and 

salt: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
sarmentar, gather prunings of vine : 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
satisfacer, satisfy : irr., 246. 
segar, reap: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; cf. 

214 (2) and 225. 



I seguir, follow: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230; cf. 
215 (4) and 231. 
sembrar, sow: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
sementar, sow: Rad.-ch, I, 223 (i). 
sentar, seat, set, suit: Rad.-ch. 1,223 

(I). 
sentir, feel, regret : Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i) . 
ser, to be : irr., 236. 
serrar, saw: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
servir, serve: Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 
sobre(e)nteiider, be understood: 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2). 
sobreponer, put above, add : irr., 249. 
sobresalir, rise above, surpass : ij-r., 

252. 
sobresembrar, sow over again : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (i). 
sobresolar, pave again, put on new 

sole: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
sobrevenir, happen, supervene : z>r., 

248. 
sobreventar, get the weather gauge : 

Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
sobreverterse, overflow: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (2). 
sobrevestir, put on an outer coat : 

Rad.-ch. Ill, 230. 
sofreir, fry slightly : Rad.-ch. Ill, 233. 
solar, floor, pave, sole: Rad.-ch, I, 

223 (3) . 
soldar, solder, mend: Rad.-ch, I, 

223 (3)- 

soler, be wont or accustomed : Rad.- 
ch. I a7id defective ; cf. 265. 

SOltar, untie, loosen : Rad.-ch, I, 

223 (3)- 
solver, loosen: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4); 

/./. irr., '2'2j\. 
sonar, sound: Rad.-ch, I, 223 (3). 
sonreir, smile : Rad.-ch. Ill, 230 and 

233. 

sonrodarse, stick in the mud: Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (3). 

sonar, dream: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 

sorregar, change channels : Rad.-ch, 
I, 223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 



242 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



SOSegar, appease, rest: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i) ; ct. 214 (2) and 225. 

sostener, sustain : irr., 239. 

soterrar, put underground, bury : 
Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

subarrendar, take a sublease, sub- 
rent: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

subentender, subintend : Rad.-ch, I , 
223 (2). 

subseguir, be next in sequence : Rad.- 
ch. Ill, 230; cf. 215 (4) and 231. 

substituir, v. sustituir. 

substraer, v. sustraer. 

subtender,subtend: /?a^.-r/I.I,223 (2). 

subvenir, aid, give a subvention : irr., 
248. 

subvertir, subvert: Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i). 

SUgerir, suggest : Rad.-ch. II, 229 (i). 

SUperponer, superimpose : irr., 249. 

supervenir, supervene : irr., 248. 

suponer, suppose : irr., 249. 

suprimir, suppress : 261. 

sustituir, substitute : 235. 

sustraer, subtract: irr., 255. 

.taner, ring, peal, touch : 217. 
temblar, tremble : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
tender, stretch: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (2). 
tener, have, hold : irr., 239. 
teutar, feel, try: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 
tenir, tinge, dye, stain: Rad.-ch. Ill, 

230; cf. 217 and 231. 
torcer, trust, lend : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (4) ; 

cf. 215 (i) and 225. 
tostar, toast: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 
traducir, translate : irr., 256 ; cf. 220 b. 
traer, bring: z>r., 255. 
transcender, v. trascender. 
transferir, transfer: Rad.-ch. II, 

229 (i). 
transfregar, v. trasfregar. 
transponer, v. trasponer. 
trascender, transcend : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (2). 
trascolar, filter through : Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3). 



trascordarse, forget: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3). 

trasegar, upset, decant: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i) ; cf. 214 (2) and 225. 

trasfregar, rub: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i) ; 
cf. 214 (2) and 225. 

trasoir, misunderstand, hear imper- 
fectly : irr., 254. 

trasonar, dream : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3). 

trasponer, transpose ; — se, set (of 
sun) : irr., 249. 

trastrocar, change about, invert or- 
der : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i) 
and 225. 

trasverter, overflow: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (i). 

trasvolar, fly across or beyond : Rad.- 
ch. I, 223 (3). 

travesar, cross: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

trocar, exchange, barter: Rad.-ch. I, 
223 (3) ; cf. 214 (i) and 225. 

tronar, thunder : Rad.-ch. 1,223 (s)- 

tropezar, stumble : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (3) ; 
cf. 214 (4) and 225. 

valer, be worth : irr., 251. 

venir, come: irr., 248. 

ventar, blow: Rad.-ch. I, 223 (i). 

ver, see : irr., 258. 

verter, pour, shed : Rad.-ch. 1, 223 (2). 

vestir, dress, clothe: Rad.-ch. Ill, 

230. 
volar, fly, rise, blow up: Rad.-ch. I, 

223 (3). 
VOlcar, overturn : Rad.-ch. I, 223 (3) ; 

cf. 214 (i) and 225. 
volver, return, come back: Rad.-ch. 

I, 223 (2) ; p.p. irr., 224. 

yacer, lie : irr., 263. 

yuxtaponer, put in juxtaposition : irr., 

249. 

za(m)bullirse, dive: 217. 

zaherir, reproach, censure: Rad.-c^ 

II, 229 (i). 



VOCABULARY 



VOCABULARY 



SPANISH-ENGLISH 



d, to, at, on, from, sign of the personal acometer, to attack. 



accusative, 

abandonar, to abandon, leave. 

abandono, m., neglect, slovenliness. 

abierto, //. of abrir. 

abogadillo {fr, abogado), m., little 
lavi^yer. 

aborrecer, to abhor. 

abrazar, to embrace. 

abrigo, m.^ shelter, wrap, overcoat. 

abril, in., April. 

abrir, to open. 

abuelo, -a, m. and /, grandfather, 
grandmother ; w. //., grandpar- 
ents. 

aburrir, to weary, bore; refi,, to be 
bored. 

aca, hither, here. 

acabar, to end, finish; — de, to have 
just. 

acci6n,/, deed, action. 

aceite, w., oil. 

aceptar, to accept. 

acera,/, sidewalk. 

acerca de, about. 

acercarse a, to approach, go near. 

acero, w., steel. 

aclarar, to light up, brighten. 



acompanar, to accompany, go with, 

sympathize with. 
aconsejar, to advise. 
acontecer, to happen. 
acontecimiento, w., happening, 

event, occurrence. 
acostar, to lay down, put to bed; 

refl,, to lie down, go to bed. 
active, -a, active, 
acusar, to accuse, acknowledge. 
adelantar, to advance, go forward, 

be fast {as a watch). 
advertir, to observe, warn, 
aficionado, -a (a), fond (of). 
af mo = af ectisimo, most affectionate. 
agosto, w., August. 
agradar, to please. 
agradecer, to thank, be grateful for. 
agua,/, water. 
aguardar, to wait for, await. 
aguardiente, w., distilled liquor 

{such as brandy, whiskey, ru77i), 
ahi, there. 
ahora, now. 
ahorita {Jr. ahora), very soon, in a 

minute. 
ahorrar, to spare, save. 
245 



246 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



al, to the. 

alabar, to praise. 

aldea,/, village. 

alegar, to allege. 

alegre, happy, joyous, merry. 

Alejandro, m., Alexander. 

Alemdn, -ana, m. and f., German. 

alemdn, -ana, German. 

Alemania,/, Germany. 

alfiler, m., pin. 

Alfredo, m,, Alfred. 

algo, something, anything; some- 
what. 

alguien, some one, somebody. 

algiin ; cf, alguno. 

alguno, -a, some, any; //., some, 
certain, a few; no . . . — , not . . . 
any, no . . . whatsoever; ni . . . — , 
nor . . . any ; sin . . . — , without 
any . . . whatsoever. 

alma,/, soul. 

almorzar, to breakfast. 

alquilar, to rent, hire. 

alto, -a, high, tall, loud. 

altura,/, height. 

alia, there, thither. 

alll, there. 

amable, kind, lovable. 

amar, to love, like. 

amarillo, -a, yellow. 

ambos, -as, both. 

America,/, America. 

Americano, -a, m. and f.^ American. 

americano, -a, American. 

amigo, -a, m. and f,^ friend. 

amiguito, -a, m, and f., little friend. 

amistad,/, friendship. 

anciano, -a, aged. 



ancho, -a, broad, wide ; noun^ 
breadth, width. 

anchura,/, breadth, width. 

andar, to go, walk, run {as a watch), 

animal, w., animal. 

anoche, last night. 

anochecer, to become night; arrive 
(at) ^rbe (in) at night; anochece, 
night is coming on. 

anteayer, the day before yesterday, 
two days ago. 

antes, before, beforehand; — de, be- 
fore; — (de) que, before; cuanto 
— , as soon as possible ; — de ayer, 
the day before yesterday. 

anticipaci6n, /, anticipation; con 
— , in advance. 

antiguo, -a, old, early, ancient. 

Antonio, w., Anthony. 

ano, m.^ year; — bisiesto, leap year; 
tener . . . anos, to be . . . years old. 

apagar, to put out {afire or light), 

aparecer, to appear. 

apariencia, /, appearance. 

aposento, w., room, apartment. 

apreciable, estimable, kind. 

apreciar, to appreciate, esteem. 

aprender (a), to learn to. 

aprisa, fast, quickly. 

apuntar, to note down. 

aquel, -ella, adj.^ that, the former. 

aquel, aquella, aquello, that one, 
that, the one, the former. 

aqui, here. 

arancelario, -a, relating to the tariff. 

drbol, w., tree. 

arguir, to argue ; arguyamos, pres. 
subj,, ist pi. 



VOCABULARY 



247 



argumento, w., argument. 

aritmetica, /, arithmetic. 

armaduras, / //., armor. 

armeria,/, armory. 

arque61ogo, m.^ archaeologist. 

arquitecto, m,, architect. 

arte,/ {andm,'), art. 

artista, m., artist. 

arreglar, to arrange, regulate, see to. 

arrepentirse, to repent. 

asesinar, to assassinate. 

asi, as, so, thus; — como, as well as. 

Asiria,/, Assyria. 

asistir, to be present. 

asno, -a, m, and f.^ ass, donkey. 

asunto, w., matter, affair, business. 

atenci6n,/, attention. 

atrasar, to retard, be slow {as a 

watch), 
atrevimiento, w., daring. 
atribuir, to attribute, ascribe. 
aunque, although, even if. 
ausente, absent. 
autor, -ora, m, and f.^ author. 
avanzar, to advance. 
avariento, -a, m. and f.^ miser. 
averiguar, to ascertain; averigiie, 

pret. indic.f ist. sing. 
avisar, to inform, advise, give notice. 
ayer, yesterday; antes de — , day 

before yesterday. 
ajruda,/, aid. 
azul, blue. 

bajar, to go down, take down, 
bajo, -a, low. 
bala,/, ball, bullet. 
barato, -a, cheap. 



bastante, enough, sufficient; suffi- 
ciently, quite, rather. 

bautismo, m,, baptism. 

beber, to drink. 

bello, -a, beautiful. 

besar, to kiss. 

biblioteca, /, library. 

bibliotecario, w., librarian. 

bicicleta, /, bicycle. 

bien, well, comfortable. 

billete, w., bill, bank-note, ticket. 

bianco, -a, white; lo — , white. 

bobo, -a, in. and f.^ fool. 

bola,/, marble. 

bolita, /. ( fr. bola) , marble. 

bondad,/, goodness, kindness. 

bonito, -a, pretty. 

botar, to throw away. 

brasas,/ //., glowing coals; quien 
huye del fuego, da en las — , out 
of the frying-pan into the fire. 

brazo, w., arm. 

brillante, briUiant. 

brindar, to drink a toast to, offer. 

Bruto, w., Brutus. 

buen, cf. bueno. 

bueno, -a, good, well. 

bullir, to boil, seethe. 

burlarse (de), to make fun, make 
sport (of). 

buscar, to seek, look for. 

buz6n, m., letter-box. 

caballerito {fr. caballero), m., young 

gentleman. 
caballero, w., gentleman, sir. 
caballo, w., horse. 
caber, to be contained. 



248 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



cabeza,/, head. 

cabo, m,, end ; Uevar a — , to carry 
out. 

cada, adj., each, every ; — uno 
(-a), prn,, each, each one. 

caer, to fall ; refl,, to fall down. 

caf§, m.y coffee. 

caja,/, box. 

caliente, hot, warm. 

calificaci6n, /, qualification, grade. 

calor, m., heat, warmth; tener — , 
to be warm {as a person) ; hacer 
— , to be warm {as the weather), 

calumniar, to calumniate. 

callarse, to hush, be silent. 

calle,/, street. 

cama,/, bed. 

camale6n, m., chameleon. 

cambiar, to change, exchange. 

cambio, m,, change. 

caminar, take one's way, journey 
along, walk. 

camino, w., road, way. 

campesino, -a, m. andf,, peasant. 

campo, m., field, country ; casa de 
— , country house. 

cansado, -a, tired, {zvith ser) tire- 
some. 

cansar, to tire, fatigue. 

cantar, to sing. 

capital, 7n., capital; /, capital (city). 

capitan, m., captain. 

carb6n, m., coal. 

cardinal, cardinal. 

carecer de, to be without, lack. 

carga,/, burden. 

cargadito, -a {fr, cargado), slightly 
seasoned. 



cargar, to load, charge, season. 

Carlos, ;/?., Charles. 

carta, /, letter. 

cartero, ?;?., postman, letter-carrier. 

carrera, /, course of (professional) 

study. 
carro, m., wagon, car. 
casa, /, house ; en — , at home ; 

a — , home. 
casar, to marry ; casarse con, to 

marry, be married to. 
casi, almost. 

caso, m,, case ; en — que, in case, 
castellano, -a, Castilian ; el — , 

Spanish. 
castigo, ni., punishment. 
catedral,/, cathedral. 
catedratico, ?/?., university professor, 
catorce, fourteen. 
causa, /, cause, lawsuit; a — de, on 

account of. 
cautiverio, m., captivity. 
cegar, to blind. 
celebre, celebrated. 
cenar, to have supper, sup. 
centavito (/r. centavo), m., only a 

cent, mite. 
centavo, -a, hundredth. 
centavo, m., centavo, cent, 
centesimo, -a, hundredth. 
centimo, m., centime. 
central, central. 
ceremonia, /, ceremony. 
certificar, to certify, register. 
Cervantes, Cervantes. 
cerveza,/, beer. 
cerrar, to shut, close. 
Cesar, ;;?., Caesar. 



VOCABULARY 



249 



cesta,/, basket. 

ciego, -a, blind. 

Cielo, ?/?., heaven, sky. 

ciencia,/, science. 

ciento, cien, one hundred. 

cinco, five. 

cincuenta, fifty. 

ciudad,/, city. 

ciudadano, ;;?., citizen. 

clase, /, class, kind, sort. 

Cliente, m. and f., patient. 

Clima, w., climate. 

coalici6n,/, coalition. 

cobarde, m, and f.^ coward. 

COCina,/, kitchen, cooking. 

cofre, /;/., box, trunk; hacer un — 
a, to pack a trunk for. 

COger, to catch ; COJamos, pres, subj,, 
I St pi. 

colecci6n,/, collection. 

c61era,/, anger. 

colmado, -a, filled {^to overflowing), 

Col6n, m., Columbus. 

color, ;;/., color. 

comedor, ;;/., dining-room. 

comer, to eat, dine. 

cdmeter, to commit. 

como, as, like; while. 

c6mo, how. 

c6modo, -a, comfortable. 

COmpanero, -a, m. and /, com- 
panion. 

compania,/, company. 

compatriota, m. and f.^ compatriot. 

completamente, completely, entirely, 
wholly. 

completo, -a, complete. 

c6mplice, m, a7td f.^ accomplice. 



comportamiento, m., deportment, 
conduct. 

comprar, to buy. 

comun, common; por lo — , com- 
monly. 

con, with, toward; para — , toward; 
— tal que, provided that. 

concebir, to conceive. 

COncepto, w., conception, sense; en 
mi — , to my mind. 

conciudadano, -a, m, and f.^ fellow- 
citizen. 

conde, w., count. 

condici6n, /, condition. 

conducir, to conduct, lead, guide. 

conducta,/, behavior, conduct. 

conjugaci6n, /, conjugation. 

conmigo, with me. 

COnocer, to know, be acquainted with. 

COnocimientos, in. pL, attainments. 

COnozco, pres, indie, ist sing, of 
conocer. 

conquistador, w., conqueror. 

conquistar, to conquer. 

COnseguir, to obtain, succeed in. 

consentir (en), to consent (to). 

conservar, to preserve, keep. 

considerar, to consider. 

consigo, with himself, herself, etc. 

consiguiente, w., consequence; por 
— , consequently. 

constante, constant. 

constar (de), to consist (of). 

constituir, to constitute. 

contar, to count, tell, relate. 

contendiente, w., contestant, oppo- 
nent. 

contener, to contain. 



250 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



contestaci6n, /., answer. 

contestar, to answer. 

COntigO, with you, with thee. 

continuar, to continue. 

contrario, -a, contrary. 

contribuci6n, /, tax. 

conveniencia, /, convenience. 

convert ir, to convert. 

convidar, to invite. 

copiar, to copy. 

COpO, m., flake. 

cortar, to cut. 

COrte,/, court, capital, Madrid. 

cortes, polite, courteous. 

corto, -a, short. 

corregir, to correct ; corrijan, pres. 

subj., 3d pL 
correo, w., mail, post-office. 
correr, to run. 
corrida, yC, coursing match; — de 

toros, bull-fight. 
COrriente, present (month), current. 
COsa,yC, thing, affair; matter. 
COsita (/r. cosa), /, little thing, 

trifle. 
costar, to cost. 
COstoso, -a, costly, expensive, 
costumbre, /., custom, manner. 
creer, beUeve, think; creyendo, 

pres. p. 
criada,/, servant, maid. 
criado, m.^ servant, 
cristal, w., pane. 
cristiano, -a, m. and f.^ Christian. 
Cristo, m,^ Christ. 
Crist6bal, m.^ Christopher. 
cuadra, /, city block. 
cuadro, w., picture. 



cual, which; el (la) cual, who, which, 
whom. 

cual, interrog. adj. and pron., which, 
what. 

cuando, when; cuando, when, in- 
terrog. ; de — en — , from time 
to time. 

cuanto, -a, how much, as much, all 
the, all that; todo — , all that; — 
antes, as soon as possible; — ... 
tanto, the . . . the; -os, -as, //., 
how many, as many, all the. 

cuanto, -a, inter rog. and ex clam. ^ 
how much; //., how many; — 
tiempo, how long; i — s anos 
tienes? how old are you? 

cuarenta, forty. 

cuarto, m., room. 

cuarto, -a, fourth. 

cuatro, four. 

cuatrocientos, -as, four hundred. 

Cuba,/, Cuba. 

Cubano, -a, m. andf.^ Cuban. 

cubano, -a, Cuban. 

cuenta,/, account, bill. 

cuidado, m., care ; ten — , look out 1 
no tengas — , don't worry. 

cumpleanos, m., anniversary of birth- 
day. 

cumplir, to fulfil, complete. 

cunado, -a, m. and f., brother-in-law, 
sister-in-law. 

cuyo, -a, whose, of which. 

Ciiyo, -a, interrog., whose. 

chino, -a, Chinese. [tot. 

chiquillo, -a {fr. chicd), little fellow, 
chismes, m. pi., tittle-tattle, gossip. 



VOCABULARY 



251 



chiste, w., witty saying, jest. 
chocolate, w., chocolate. 

D. ( = don), Mr. 

dar, to give, face, hit, strike {of a 
clock) ; — en, to strike against, fall 
upon. 

de, of, from, since, with, in. 

debajo de, under, beneath. 

deber, to be (morally) obliged to, 
ought, owe. 

deber, ;;?., duty. 

decidido, -a, decided, resolved, 
determined. 

dlcimo, -a, tenth. 

decir, to say, tell. 

decisi6n,y;, decision. 

declarar, to make a declaration, de- 
pose upon oath. 

defecto, w., fault. 

defender, to defend. 

dejar, to leave ; — de, to cease to ; 
no — de, not to fail to, not to 
omit. 

del, of the, from the; — cual, of 
whoni. 

deleitar, to delight. 

delincamos, pres, sbj. ist pi. of de- 
linquir, 

delinquir, to be delinquent, to trans- 
gress. 

demas, other, rest. 

demasiado, -a, adj., too much 
(many) ; adv,, too, too much. 

denominador, 7n., denominator. 

dentro de, inside of, within. 

derecho, -a, right, straight. 

derrotar, to rout. 



desafiar, to challenge. 

desagradable, disagreeable. 

desaparecer, to disappear. 

descansar, to rest. 

descanso, w., rest. 

descender, to descend, to be de- 
scended. 

descomunal, extraordinary, unusual. 

descubrir, to discover. 

descuidillo {fr. descuido), w., slight 
neglect. 

desde, from, since ; — ... hasta, 
from ... to ; — que, since. 

desear, to desire, wish. 

desgracia,/, misfortune. 

desgraciado, -a, unfortunate, 
wretched. 

designio, w., design, purpose. 

despacho, w., office; — de billetes, 
ticket office. 

despedirse, refl., to take leave. 

despertar, to awake, w., wake up ; 
refl., to awake. 

despues, afterward ; — de, after ; 
— que, after. 

detalle, w., detail. 

deuda,/, debt. 

devolver, to return, give back. 

dia, m., day ; de — , by day ; ocho 
dias, a week ; quince dias, a fort- 
night; dias, saint's day. 

diamante, m., diamond. 

dibujo, 771., drawing. 

diccionario, w., dictionary. 

dice, pres. indie, ^d siftg. of decir, to 
say. 

diciembre, w., December. 

dicho, -a, said, the said. 



252 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



diente, m.^ tooth. 

diez, ten. 

diferir, to defer, differ. 

dificil, difficult. 

difunto, -a, deceased. 

digno, -a, worth, worthy. 

digO, /r^^. indie, ist. sing, ofdecir, 

dijeron, pret. indie ^d pi. of decir. 

dinero, w., money. 

Dios, m., God. 

directo, -a, direct, through. 

dirigir, to direct ; refl., to make one's 

way, address, turn, direct one's self. 
discipulo, -a, m. and f., pupil, 

scholar. 
discolo, -a, peevish. 
discurso, ?;/., discourse, speech. 
disminuir, to diminish. 
dispensar, to excuse. 
disputar, to dispute. 
distancia, /, distance. 
distingamos, /r^^. sbj. ist pi. of dis- 

tingui7\ 
distinguir, to distinguish. 
distribuir, to distribute. 
diversi6n, /., diversion, amusement, 

sport. 
divino, -a, divine. 
doble, doubje. 
doce, twelve. 
docena,/, dozen. 
doler, to ache. 
dolor, m., pain, ache, grief ; — de 

cabeza, headache, 
domesticar, to tame. 
domingo, m., Sunday. 
dominio, w., dominion, domain, 

power. 



don, dona, m. and /, Mr., Mrs. and 
Miss ; — Quijote, Don Quixote. 

donde, where, in which ; en — , 
where, in which. 

d6nde, interrog.^ where. 

dondequiera, wherever. 

Dn = don. 

Dna = dona. 

dormir, to sleep ; refi., to fall asleep. 

dos, two ; los (las) — , both. 

doscientos, -as, two hundred. 

duda,/, doubt. 

dudar, to doubt. 

dueno, m., master. 

duque, w., duke. 

durar, to endure, last. 

duro, m.^ dollar. 

duro, -a, hard, severe. 

e, and. 

echar, to throw, cast, pour {as 

waie?') ; ^'efi., to throw one's self 

down, lie down. 
Edad, /, Age; — Media, Middle 

Ages. 
edificio, ?;?., building. 
educaci6n, /., education. 
educar, to educate. 
Eiffel, Eiffel; la torre ■— , the Eiffel 

tower. 
ejercicio, m., exercise. 
ejercito, w., army. 
el (la, lo, los, las), the, that, the 

one, those ; — que, who, whom, 

he who, etc. 
61, he, him, it. 
electrico, -a, electric. 
elefante, -a, m. and f, elephant. 



VOCABULARY 



253 



elegantemente, elegantly. 

ella, she, her, it. 

ello, it. 

ellos, ellas, they, them. 

emperador, m., emperor. 

empezar, to begin. 

emplear, to employ, use. 

emprender, to undertake. 

empresa,/, enterprise, undertaking. 

en, in, into, on. 

enamorado, -a, in love. 

encantar, to delight. 

encarnado,-a, flesh-colored, (bright) 
red. 

encender, to light, kindle. 

encontrar, to meet, find. 

enemigo, -a, m, and /, enemy; 
adj,, hostile. 

enero, w., January. 

enfadar, to vex, anger; rejl.^ to be- 
come angry. 

enfermedad,/, illness, sickness. 

enfermo, -a, ill, sick. 

enojarse, to become (get) angry. 

Enrique, /;/., Henry. 

ensalada,/, salad. 

ensenar, to teach, show. 

entender, to understand; — de, to 
understand, be skilled in. 

entero, -a, entire, whole, firm. 

entonces, then, at that time. 

entrada,/, entrance. 

entrar, to enter, go into; hacer — , 
to show in, admit. 

entre, between, among. 

entregar, to deliver, hand over. 

entristecer, to sadden. 

enviar, to send. 



eran, v. ser. 

errar, to err. 

error, m,, error, mistake. 

es, pres. ind. ^d sing, of ser, 

escapar, to escape. 

esclavo, -a, m, and f.^ slave. 

Escorial, //?., Escurial (town and 

palace). 
escribir, to write. 
escrito, /. /. of escribir, 
escuchar, to listen. 
escuela,/, school. 
escultor, sculptor. 
Esdras, Esdras. 
ese (esa, eso, esos, esas), that 

(those); ese, etc., that one, etc.; 

eso, that which you say. 
esencialmente, essentially. 
Espana,/, Spain. 
Espanol, -ola, m, a^id f, Spaniard, 

Spanish woman. 
espanol, -ola, Spanish. 
esperar, to hope, wait for, expect. 
espllndido, -a, splendid, fine. 
esposo, -a, i?i. and f, husband, 

wife. 
esquina,/, corner, 
establecerse, refl., to establish one's 

self, settle. 
estaci6n, /, station, season. 
estado, /;/., state. 
Estados Unidos, w. pL, United 

States. 
estar, to be. 
estatua,/, statue. 
^ste (6sta, estos, §stas), this, this 

one (these), the latter; 6sta, yC, 

this place (city, town). 



254 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



este (esta, esto, estos, estas),^^'., 

this (these), the latter. 
estiniaci6n, /, esteem. 
esto, this (that I say). 
estrecho, -a, narrow. 
estudiar, to study. 
evitar, to avoid. 
exacto, -a, exact. 
excepto, except. 
exclamar, to exclaim. 
6xitO, w., outcome, result, issue, 

success. 
extranjero, -a, foreign. 
extranjero, -a, m, and /, stranger, 

foreigner. 

fabricar, to make, manufacture. 

facil, easy. 

facilidad,/, ease, facility. 

facilitar, to oblige with. 

falso, -a, false. 

falta, /, fault, mistake; defect, 
want, lack; hacer — , to be 
needed; nos hacia — , we needed. 

familia,/, family. 

famoso, -a, famous. 

fatigado, -a, fatigued, tired. 

favor, m., favor; hacer el — , to do 
the favor. 

favorable, favorable. 

favorecer, to favor. 

febrero, m., February. 

fecha,/, date. 

fechar, to date. 

f elicidad, yC, happiness. 

felicitar, congratulate. 

Felipe, m., Philip. 

feliz, happy. 



feo, -a, ugly, homely. 

ferrocarril, w., railway. 

festin, w., banquet, feast. 

fiebre,/, fever. 

fiel, faithful. 

fiesta,/, feast, festival, festivity. 

figurar, to figure; reji., to fancy, 

imagine. 
filosofia,/, philosophy. 
finalmente, finally. 
fino, -a, courteous, refined, 
flor,/, flower. 
fonda,/, inn, restaurant. 
fondo, m,^ bottom, depth; k — , 

thoroughly, perfectly. 
formar, to form. 
fortuna,/, fortune. 
Frances, -esa, m. and f,. French- 
man, Frenchwoman. 
f ranees, -esa, French. 
franco, -a, frank. 
franqueza,/, frankness. 
f rente, /., front, forehead; — a — , 

face to face. 
fresco, -a, fresh, cool. 
frio, m., cold; tengo — , I am cold; 

hace — , it is cold. 
frio, -a, adj,^ cold. 
fuego, m., fire; quien huye del — , 

da en las brasas, out of the 

frying-pan into the fire. 
fuente,/, fountain, spring. 
f uera, impf. subj. ^d sing, of i?-, to go. 
fuera de, apart from, outside of. 
fuerte, strong, mighty, powerful; 

— resfriado, bad cold. 
fumar, to smoke {as tobacco), 
funci6n,/, performance. 



VOCABULARY 



255 



gana, /, inclination, desire ; tener 

ganas de, to have a desire to. 
ganado, m., live stock. 
ganar, to earn, make {money), gain, 

win; — a, to surpass. 
gastar, to spend, waste. 
gatito, -a, m, and f,, kitten. 
gato, -a, m. and /, cat. 
gemelos, m. pL, (opera or field) 

glasses. 
gemir, to groan, moan. 
general, w., general. 
generalmente, generally. 
Gentil, m,, Gentile. 
geografia,/, geography. 
giro, in,, turn, revolution; draft, 

order. 
Godo, -a, m, and f., Goth. 
Goya, m., Goya (modern Spanish 

painter). 
gracia,yC, name, grace; //., thanks, 

I thank you. 
gramatica, /, grammar. 
gran, cf. grande. 
grande, great, big, large, grand. 
grandecito, -a (/r. graiide), rather 

large, biggish. 
grave, important, serious. 
guante, m., glove. 
guardar, to keep, protect ; — cama, 

to stay in bed. 
guardia, /, guard; ;;/., guardsman, 

guard, policeman. 
guarismo, w., numeral, cipher, fig- 
ure. 
guerra, /, war. 
guerrero, w., warrior. 
Guillermo, m., William. 



gustar, to taste, please; me gusta, 

I like. 
gusto, m,, taste, pleasure. 

ha, pres. indie, jd sing, of haber. 

haber, to have, be ; hay, there is 
(are) ; — de, to have to ; ha de 
suceder, is to happen. 

hablador, -ora, talkative. 

hablar, to speak, talk. 

hacendoso, -a, active, industrious. 

hacer, to make, do ; — un cofre a, 
to pack a trunk for ; — falta, to 
be needed ; — hacer, to have 
made ; hace frio, it is cold ; hace 
una hora y media, an hour and 
a half ago ; hace cuatrocientos 
doceanos, it is4i2years; ^^cuanto 
tiempo hace? how long is it? 
refl.,io become; hacerse el tonto, 
to play the fool. 

hacia, toward (s). 

hallar, to find. 

hambre,/, hunger ; tener — , to be 
hungry. 

hambriento, -a, hungry. 

haragan, -ana, lazy. 

hasta, to, up to, until, as far as, 
even. 

hay, cf. haber. 

hecho, m., deed. 

helar {also reji.), to freeze. 

hembra,/, female. 

herido, //^., wounded man. 

herido, -a, wounded, with a wound. 

herir, to strike, wound. 

hermano, -a, 7?i. and f, brother, 
sister. 



256 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



hermoso, -a, beautiful, handsome, 

fine. 
heroico, -a, heroic, 
hervir, to boil, bubble. 
hidalgo, w., Mexican coin = 10 dol- 
lars ; doble hidalgo = 20 dollars. 
hierro, m., iron. 
hija,/, daughter. 
hijito, -a, m, and f, {fr. hijo), little 

son, daughter. 
hijo, -a, m. and f., son, daughter; 

m. pL, sons, children. 
hirviente, boiling, bubbling. 
historia,/, history. 
historiador, m.^ historian. 
hogar, 7n., hearth, home. 
hola, hello. 
hombre, m., man. 
hpmbrecillo (/r. hombre), ;//., Uttle 

man. 
hombr6n {fr, hombre)^ m., large 

(big) man. 
honra, /, honor. 
hora, /, hour ; i que — es ? what 

time is it ? 
hoy, today. 

hubo, there was, there were ; cf. haber, 
huele, pres, indie, ^d sing, of ole7\ 
huelga,/, strike (of workmen). 
huerfano, -a, m. attd f., orphan. 
huevo, m., Qgg. 
huir, to flee. 
humano, -a, human, 

ideal, ideal. 
idioma, m., language. 
imaginar, to imagine ; rejl., to ima- 
gine. 



impaciente, impatient. 

impedir, to prevent, impede. 

imperativo, m., imperative. 

importante, important. 

importar, to be of importance, con- 
cern ; i no importa ! no matter ! 

imposible, impossible. 

imprimir, to print, impress. 

indicativo, w., indicative, 

indio, -a, Indian. 

industrioso, -a, industrious, 

inexplicable, inexplicable. 

influir (en), to influence. 

informes, m. pi., information. 

ingeniatura,/, engineering. 

ingeniero, w., engineer. 

Inglaterra, /, England. 

ingles, -esa, English. 

Ingles, -esa, m, and f., English- 
man, Englishwoman. 

inmediatamente, immediately. 

inmortal, immortal. 

insigne, illustrious. 

instante, ^., instant; al — , instantly. 

instruir, to instruct. 

insultar, to insult. 

inteligente, inteUigent. 

intenci6n, /, intention. 

interes, m., interest. 

interesante, interesting. 

interesar, to interest. 

interior, m., interior. 

intervenir, to interfere. 

intimo, -a, intimate. 

invalido, -a, incapacitated, crip- 
pled. 

invencible, invincible. 

invierno, m., winter. 



VOCABULARY 



257 



ir, to go, go on, continue ; reji.^ to 

go off, go away, 
ira,/], anger. 
irritar, to provoke, anger. 
Israel, Israel. 

Israelita, m. and f.^ Israelite. 
Italiano, -a, m. and f.^ Italian. 
italiano, -a, Italian. 
izquierdo, -a, left. 

jamas, ever, never; no . . . jamas, 

never. 
Jicara, Jicara; as a com7non noun, 

coffee cup. 
Jorge, m., George. 
Jose, m., Joseph. 
joven, m. and f., (young) man, 

woman, youth. 
joven, young. 
jovencito, -a, (/r. joven), VI. and 

f.^ young fellow, youth, young 

girl. 
Juan, ?//., John. 
Juana,/, Jane, 
jueves, in., Thursday. 
juez, m., judge. 
jugar, to play. 
Julian, m., Julian. 
Julio, m., Julius. 
junio, m., June. 
junto, -a, united, joined together; 

— d, near, 
justicia,/, justice. 
juzgado, m.y tribunal, court of jus- 
tice. 
juzgar, to judge. 

kil6metro, w., kilometre. 



la, /, the, that, the one, she, her, 

it; //., the, those, they. 
\di, pers. prn., her, it; //., them. 
lado, m., side. 

Iadr6n, -ona, m. and f., thief. 
lagrima,/, tear. 
lampara, /, lamp. 
lapiz, m., pencil. 

largo, -a, long; largo, n.y length. 
lastima,/, pity. 
lastimar, to hurt, injure. 
lavandera, /, laundress. 
lavar, to wash. 

le, him, it, you; to him, her, it, you. 
Iecci6n, /, lesson. 
leche,/, milk. 
leer, to read. 
lejano, -a, distant. 
lejos, far. 

lengua,/, tongue, language, 
lena,/, wood. 
Le6n, m., Leo. 
les, to them, to you. 
levantar, to raise; refl., to rise, 

get up. 
ley,/, law. 
libertad,/, liberty, 
libra, /, pound. 
libre, free. 

librero, in., bookseller, 
libro, in., book. 
Iim6n, m., lemon, 
limosna, /., alms, 
limosnita (/r. limosna), f., little 

alms, trifle for charity's sake. 
Undo, -a, pretty. 
linea,/, line. 
lingiiistico, -a, linguistic. 



258 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



lirio, m.^ lily. 

lo, the, it, him, you, so; lo que, 

that, which, what ; lo cual, which. 
lodo, ni.^ mud. 
longitud, /., length. 
los, the, them, you; — que, those 

who (whom) ; — suyos, his own. 
Louvre, ;//., I.ouvre (palace and 

museum at Paris). 
lucir, show off, display. 
lucha,/, struggle. 
luego, directly, soon; — que, as 

soon as. 
lugar, w., place. 
Luis, m.y Lewis, Louis. 
luna,/, moon. 
lunes, m,, Monday. 
luz,/, light. 

llamar, to call, knock, ring; refl.^ to 

be named. 
llegar, to arrive. 
llevar, to bear, carry, take, lead; 

— a cabo, to carry out. 
llorar, to weep, cry. 
Hover, to rain. 

macho, ;;/., male. 

madre,/, mother. 

maduro, -a, ripe. 

maestro, -a, m. and /, (school) 
master, mistress, teacher. 

magnifico, -a, magnificent, splen- 
did. 

mal, badly, poorly; noun^ evil, 
harm ; adj.^ cf. malo. 

maldad, /, misdeed, wicked act. 

malisimo, -a (/r. malo), very bad. 



malo, -a, bad, ill, sick. 
mama,/., mamma, mother, 
mandar, to command, order, send, 
mando, w., command, 
manera,/, manner, way. 
mano, /, hand. 
mantequilla, /, butter. 
manzana, /, apple, city block. 
manana, /, morning, tomorrow; 

— por la • — , tomorrow morning; 

pasado — , day after tomorrow. 
mar, m. or /, sea. 
marchar, to march, go; refl., to go 

away. 
margen,/, margin, bank. 
Maria, /, Mary. 
martes, w., Tuesday. 
marzo, w., March, 
mas, but. 
mas, more, most, plus; no — que, 

only. 
matar, to kill. 
mayo, m., May. 
mayor, greater, greatest; elder, 

older, oldest. 
me, me, to me. 
Media,/, Media. 
mediados, m,pl, : a — de, about the 

middle of. 
medicamento, w., medicine. 
medicina, /, medicine. 
medico, ?«., physician, doctor (of 

medicine). 
medio, -a, half, a half, middle; 

Edad Media, Middle Ages. 
Mejicano, -a, 7n. and f,, Mexican, 
mejicano, -a, Mexican. 
M6jico, w., Mexico. 



VOCABULARY 



259 



mejor, better, best. 

mendigo, -a, w. a^id f.^ beggar. 

menester, w., necessity, need; ser 

— , to be necessary. 
menor, smaller, smallest; younger, 

youngest. 
menos, less, least; a — que, unless. 
mentir, to lie. 
mentira,/, lie, lying. 
menudo: a — , often. 
merecer, to merit, deserve. 
mes, fn.i month. 
metro, w., metre. 
mezclar, to mix; mezclarse con, to 

mingle with. 
mi, my. 
mi, me. 
miedo, m.^ fear; tener — de, to be 

afraid of. 
miercoles, w., Wednesday. 
Miguel, m., Michael. 
mil, (one) thousand; nourt w., 

thousand. 
militar, /«., soldier, officer. 
milla,/, mile. 
mill6n, m., million. 
minuto, w., minute. 
mio, -a, my, mine; el (la, los, las, 

lo) mlo (-a, -OS, -as, -o),mine. 
misericordia, /, mercy, 
mismo, -a, self, himself, etc.; 

same, very ; — que, same as. 
modo, w., way, mode, manner. 
molestar, to annoy, trouble, dis- 
turb. 
molestia,/, trouble. 
momento, w., moment, 
moneda, /, coin. 



mono, -a, ;;/. and f., monkey. 

montanes, -esa, w. and yC, moun- 
taineer. 

montar, to mount, ride; — a ca- 
ballo,to ride on horseback; mon- 
tado en, riding on. 

morar, to dwell, live. 

morir, to die; 7'efl,, to die, be dying. 

mosca, /., fly. 

mostaza, /, mustard. 

mover, to move, actuate. 

mozo, -a, youth, lad, lass; waiter, 
waitress. 

muchacho, -a, m. and f.^ boy, girl. 

muchisimo, -a (/r. mucho), very 
much. 

muchisimos, -as, very many. 

mucho, -a, much, a great deal; //., 
many; adv.^ much, a great deal, 
very. 

mueble, w., article (piece) of furni- 
ture; //., furniture. 

muerte,/., death. 

mujer,y^, woman, wife. 

mujeraza, /, large, coarse woman. 

mula,/, mule. 

multitud,/, multitude. 

mundo, w., world; todo el — , 
everybody. 

Murillo, w., Murillo (Spanish 
painter). 

muro, w., wall. 

museo, w., museum. 

musica, /, music. 

muy, very. 

nacer, to be born. 
nacionalidad, /, nationality. 



26o 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



nada, nothing, anything, any respect; 
no . . . nada, nothing. 

nadador, m., swimmer. 

nadie, no one, nobody, any one, any- 
body; no . . . — , nobody, not any- 
body. 

naranja,/, orange. 

nariz,/, nose. 

neblina,/, fog, mist. 

necesario, -a, necessary. 

necesitar, to need, want. 

negar, to deny. 

negocio, w., business, affair. 

negro, -a, black. 

nevar, to snow. 

ni, nor, or ; ni . . . ni, neither . . . 
nor ; ni . . . tampoco, not . . . 
either, nor . . . either. 

nieto, -a, 7ri. and /., grandson, 
granddaughter. 

nieve,/, snow. 

ninguno, -a, no, none ; no . . . nin- 
guno, -a, not any. 

nino, -a, m, and f., child, (small) 
boy, girl. 

no, not, no ; no poder menos de, 
not to be able to help. 

noble, noble. 

noche,/, night ; esta — , tonight. 

nombre, w., name. 

nono, -a, ninth. 

norte, m., north. 

Norte-Americano, -a, m, and /, 
North American. 

norte-americano, -a. North Ameri- 
can. 

nos, us, ourselves, each other, one 
another ; to us, to ourselves. 



nosotros, -as, we, us. 
noticias, /. //., news. 
novecientos, -as, nine hundred. 
novela,/, novel. 
noveno, -a, ninth. 
noventa, ninety. 
noviembre, m.^ November. 
nuestro, -a, our, ours ; el (la, lo, 

los, las) nuestro (-a, -o, -os, 

-as), ours. 
nueve, nine, 
nuevo, -a, new. 
numerador, m,, numerator. 
numero, m., number; gran — , a 

large number. 
nunca, never, ever ; no . . . nunca, 

never, not ever. 

6, or. 

obedecer, to obey. 

objeto, m,^ object. 

Obligar, to oblige, compel. 

obra, /, work ; — maestra, master- 
piece. 

octavo, -a, eighth. 

OCtubre, w., October. 

0CUpaci6n, y;, occupation. 

ocupado, -a, busy, occupied. 

ochenta, eighty. 

ocho, eight ; las — , eight o'clock. 

ochocientos, -as, eight hundred. 

odiar, to hate. 

oido, m.^ hearing, (inner) ear. 

oir, to hear. 

Ojo, m., eye. 

oler, to smell ; — d, to smell of. 

once, eleven ; las — y media, half- 
past eleven o'clock. 



VOCABULARY 



261 



onza,/, ounce. 

6pera,/, opera. 

opinar, to opine, be of the opinion. 

opinion,/, opinion. 

6ptimo, -a, best, excellent. 

Opuesto, -a, opposite, opposed. 

orador, m., orator. 

orar, to pray. 

orden,/, order. 

ordinal, ordinal. 

oriental, oriental. 

origen, m.^ origin. 

original, original. 

oro, m., gold. 

OS, you. 

osar, to dare. 

oscurecer, to grow dark. 

Otro, -a, other, another. 

Pablo, m., Paul. 

padre, m., father, priest; //., fathers, 
parents. 

pagar, to pay. 

pdgina,/, page. 

pagu6, pret, indie, ist sing, of 
pagar. 

pague, pres. subj. ^d sing, of pagar. 

pais, m., country, region, land. 

palabra,/, word. 

palabrota (/r. palabra), f.y coarse 
expression, harsh word. 

palacio, 7n., palace. 

pan, m.f bread. 

panuelo, m.y handkerchief. 

papa, m., papa, father. 

papel, m., paper; — secante, blot- 
ting paper. 

paquete, ;;/., package. 



para, for, to, in order to; — que, in 
order that, that. 

parado, -a, stopped, erect, standing. 

parecer, seem, appear; parecerse a, 
to be like to, resemble. 

pariente, -a, m. and f, relative, re- 
lation. 

parte, /, part; por todas partes, 
everywhere ; la mayor — , most. 

partir, to depart, leave; to split, 
crack; — de, to leave. 

pasado, -a, past^ last; lo — , the 
past; — manana, day after to- 
morrow. 

pasar, to pass, pass through, pass 
over, spend (time). 

pasearse, to take a walk or a ride, 
go about. 

paseo, w., public promenade. 

pasi6n, /, passion. 

patria,/, (native) country. 

paz,/, peace; paces,/ //., peace. 

pecado, 7n., sin. 

pedir, to ask for; — d, to ask of. 

pelear, to fight. 

peligro, m., peril, danger. 

pelota, /, ball. 

pelot6n, w., platoon. 

pensar, to think, intend, mean 
(^followed directly by an infini- 
tive) \ — en, to think of, recall; 
— de, to think of, form an opinion 
of. 

peor, worse, worst. 

pequenito, -a (/r. pequeno), very 
small, wee, little, tiny. 

pequeno, -a, little, small, slight. 

perder, to lose; — a, to ruin. 



262 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



perd6n, m., pardon. 

perdonar, to pardon. 

perecer, to perish. 

perezoso, -a, lazy, idle. 

peri6dico, m., newspaper, periodi- 
cal. 

permitir, to permit. 

pero, but. 

persona,/, person. 

personaje, ?;/., personage. 

pertenecer, to belong. 

perro, w., dog. 

pesar, to weigh. 

peseta, /, peseta, franc (nearly 
twenty cents). 

peso, ;;/., weight, dollar. 

piano, ni., piano. 

pie, w., foot. 

piedad,/, pity, piety. 

pierna,/, leg. 

pillete (/r. pilld)^ 7n.j low rascal, 
base rogue. 

pintar, to paint. 

pintor, ;;/., painter. 

pintura,/, painting. 

Pio, Pius. 

piso, ?n., story, floor. 

pizarra,/, slate. 

plan, m.j plan. 

planchar, to iron. 

plata,/, silver. 

plato, m., plate. 

plazuela {fr. plaza) ^ f., little square. 

pluma, /, pen, feather; — tintero, 
fountain pen. 

pobre, poor. 

pobrecito, -a {fr. pobre), poor little 
(fellow). 



pOCO, -a, little; un poco, a little; 
pocos, -as, few; — ha, a short 
while ago. 

poder, to be able, can, may; — 
mas, to have the more power, be 
the stronger; no — mas, to be 
played out, be able to do no more; 
no — menos de, not to be able to 
help; puede que, it is possible 
that. 

poder, w., power. 

poderoso, -a, powerful. 

poeta, m., poet. 

politico, -a, political; noun m., 
politician. 

politiquejo (/r. politico), m., low 
politician. 

poner, to put, place, set (a table), 
lay (eggs) ; refl,, to put on (cloth- 
ing), become, begin. 

por, for, through, by, along, on ac- 
count of, per; — alii, over there; 
— la manana, in the morning. 

pormenor, w., detail. 

porque, because; por que, why 
(ijiterrog.). 

porque, why. 

portero, w., porter. 

poseer, to possess, own. 

posible, possible. 

postal, postal. 

ppdo. = pr6ximo pasado. 

Prado, m., meadow; name of a 
promenade and park at Madj'id, 

preferir, to prefer. 

preguntar (a), to ask (of). 

pregunt6n, -ona, inquisitive. 

premio, w., prize. 



VOCABULARY 



263 



prensa,/, press. 

presentar, to present. 

presente, present; lo — , the present 
{time) ; al — , at present. 

presente, w., present. 

prestar, to lend. 

prinier(o), -a, first. 

primo, -a, m. and f., cousin. 

principal, principal, leading, of 
importance. 

principio, w., beginning; a prin- 
cipios de, near the beginning of. 

prisa, /, hurry; tener — , to be in 
a hurry; de — , quickly, fast. 

pr6, 771., advantage; en — de, in 
favor of. 

probable, probable. 

probablemente, probably. 

probar, to prove, test. 

profesor, w., professor. 

prof eta, /;/., prophet. 

progenitor, w., progenitor. 

prohibir, to forbid, prohibit. 

prometer, to promise. 

pronto, soon, quickly. 

proposici6n, /, proposition, pro- 
posal. 

prop6sitO, 771., purpose, plan, propo- 
sition. 

prosperidad,/, prosperity. 

proteger, to protect. 

proverbio, w., proverb. 

pr6ximo, -a, next; — pasado, last 
month, iilti77io. 

proyecto, ?//., plan. 

prueba,/, proof. 

publico, -a, public. 

pueblo, 771., people, town. 



puente, 771., bridge. 

puerta, /, door, gate; Puerta del 
Sol,/, Gate of the Sun {na77ie of 
the chief squa7'e iTt Madrid). 

pues, well, why. 

puesto, 771., situation, position. 

punto, 771., point, element; a — de, 
on the point of. 

puro, -a, pure. 

que, el (la, las, los, las) — , w^ho, 

which, that; lo — , that which, 

what. 
que, i7tte7'7'og. a7id excla77i., what. 
que, C071J., that, for, than, as; tener 

— , to have to, must ; de — , of 

the fact that. 
que, excla77i., w^hat a ! 
quebrado, 771., fraction. 
quebrar, to break. 
quedar, to remain ; reji., to remain, 

stay. 
quejarse (de), to complain (of). 
querer, to wnsh, want, like, try ; — 

a, to love, like; — decir, to mean, 

signify. 
querido, -a, dear. 
queso, 771., cheese. 
quien, who, whom, he who, him who; 

quien . . . quien, some . . . some, 

(the) one . . . (the) other. 
quien, inte7'rog., who, whom. 
Quijote, Quixote, 
quince, fifteen. 
quince-avo, fifteenth. 
quinientos, -as, five hundred. 
quinto, -a, fifth. 
quinzavo, fifteenth. 



264 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



quitar (d),to take (fvom or off of). 
quizas, perhaps. 

raro, -a, strange, odd, queer. 

raudal, m., stream, torrent, lot. 

rayo, w., ray, beam. 

raza,/, race. 

raz6n, /, reason, right ; tener — , 
to be right. 

real, royal, real. 

real, m.y silver coin worth about five 
cents. 

xece, pres. sbj. 3 d sing, ofrezar, 

recepci6n, /, reception. 

recibir, to receive. 

recibo, m., receipt. 

recomendar, to recommend. 

recordar, to recall, remind. 

recuerdo, m,^ recollection ; //., com- 
pliments, regards. 

redondo, -a, round. 

referir, to relate, utter. 

reforma,/, reform. 

refrdn, in.^ refrain, proverb. 

regalar, to give, present. 

regalo, m,^ present, gift. 

regreso, m.^ return. 

reina,/, queen. 

reir, to laugh ; reirse (de), to laugh 
(at). 

relaci6n,/, account. 

relacionarse (con), to be related (to). 

religiose, -a, religious. 

reloj, m., v^^atch, clock. 

relojeria,/, vi^atch-making. 

relucir, to shine, glisten, gleam. 

remangado, -a, turned up, snub. 

remendar, to mend, repair. 



renir, to quarrel. 

repasar, to recite, repeat. 

resfriado, m,, cold. 

resistir, to resist. 

respetar, to respect. 

responder, to respond, answer ; — de, 
to answer for, be responsible for. 

resto, ni., remnant. 

resultado, m., result, outcome. 

resultar, to result. 

retirarse, to retire, retreat. 

retrato, w., portrait, picture. 

reunido, -a, united, gathered, as- 
sembled. 

rey, w., king. 

reyezuelo (/r. rey)y /?/., petty king. 

rezar, to pray. 

rico, -a, rich. 

rio, m., river. 

rodilla, /, knee. 

rogar, to ask, entreat. 

rojo, -a, red. 

Roma,/, Rome. 

Romano, -a, m, and f.^ Roman. 

romano, -a, Roman, Romanic, Ro- 
mance. 

ropa,/, clothing, clothes. 

roto, -a, broken. 

ruido, w., noise. 

Ruso, -a, m, andf.y Russian. 

S. S. Q. B. S. M. (P.) = seguro (-a) 
servidor (-ora) que besa sus 
manos (pies). 

sabado, m., Saturday. 

saber, to know, know how, learn, 
be able; — a, to taste of. 

sacar, to take out. 



VOCABULARY 



265 



sacerdote, m., priest. 

sacrificio, w., sacrifice. 

sacudir, to shake off. 

sala,/, room. 

salida, /, going out, departure ; 

— del sol, sunrise. 
salir, come out, go out, issue, leave. 
salud, /, health ; bien de — , in 

good health. 
saludar, to salute. 
sanar, to cure, heal. 
santo, -a, holy, saint. 
saque, /r^j. sbj. jd sing, of sacar, 
sastre, ;;?., tailor. 
se, himself, herself, itself, one's self, 

yourself, themselves, yourselves ; 

(=le, les), to him, to her, to it, 

to them, to you. 
secante, drying, blotting, 
sed,/, thirst ; tener — , to be thirsty. 
seda,/, silk. 

seguir, to follow, succeed. 
segun, prep., according to ; cottj., 

according as, as. 
segundo, m., second. 
seguridad,/, security, safety, 
seguro, -a, secure, sure, firm, 
seis, six. 

seiscientos, -as, six hundred. 
semana, /, week ; la — que viene, 

next week. 
semejante, such a. 
semejanza,/, resemblance. 
senador, m., senator. 
sencillo, -a, simple, unmixed, un- 
qualified. 
sentar, to set, seat; to fit, suit; rejl,, 

to sit down, be seated. 



sentimiento, m., feeling, grief, sor- 
row. 

sentir, to feel, regret ; reJl., be sorry, 
feel. 

Senor, w., Lord. 

senor, w., sir, gentleman, Mr. 

senora, /, madam, lady, wife, Mrs. 

senorita,/, young lady, miss. 

se(p)tiembre, m., September. 

s6(p)timo, -a, seventh. 

ser, to be. 

servidor, -ora, w. and f., servant. 

servir, to serve ; servirse de, to 
make use of; sirvase Vd., please, 
be kind enough. 

sesenta, sixty. 

setecientos, -as, seven hundred. 

setenta, seventy. 

severo, -a, strict, severe. 

Sevilla,/, Seville. 

sexto, -a, sixth. 

si, if; whether {in indirect ques- 
tio7t)\ indeed {in exclamations). 

si, yes. 

si, himself, herself, itself, yourself, 
one's self, themselves, yourselves. 

siempre, always, ever, still. 

siete, seven. 

siglo, m.y century. 

significar, to signify, mean. 

siguiente, following. 

silencio, w., silence. 

Silvestre, m., Silvester. 

silla,/, chair, saddle. 

sin, without. 

singular, ;«., singular. 

sino, but ; no . . . — , only. 

sistema, w., system. 



266 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



sobre, above ; — todo, above all, 

especially. 
sobre, m., envelope. 
sobresaliente, excellent, surpassing. 
SObrinitO, -a (/r. sobrino)^ m, and 

f., little nephew, niece. 
sobrino, -a, m, and f.^ nephew, niece. 
sol, m., sun. 
soldado, w., soldier. 
soldadote (/r. soldado)^ m., big, 

rough soldier. 
solo, -a, alone, solitary. 
s61o, adv., only, merely, 
sombrero, w., hat. 
son, see ser. 
sonreirse, to smile. 
sopa,/^, soup. 
sordo, -a, deaf. 
sorprender, to surprise. 
sortija,/, ring. 
Sr., Sor.=:senor. 
Sra., Sora. = seiiora. 
Srta. = senorita. 
su, his, her, its, their, your, one's ; 

— . . . de Vd., your. 
suavidad, /, suavity, gentleness; 

//., soft words or acts. 
subir, to go up, take up. 
su(b)scribir, to subscribe ; refl., to 

sign one's self. 
subjuntivo, w., subjunctive. 
subrayar, to underscore, underline. 
suceder, to happen, follow (in order). 
sueno, w., sleep ; tener — , to be 

sleepy. 
sufrir, to suffer. 
suplicar, to beg, entreat, 
suponer, to suppose. 



suyo, -a, your, yours ; el (la, lo, los, 
las) suyo (-a, -o, -os, -as), yours; 
los suyos, his men. 

tabaco, w., tobacco. 

tal, such, such a ; un — , a certain ; 

con — que, provided that ; — 

vez, perhaps ; que — , how. 
talentazd, m, (/r. talento)^ great 

talent. 
talento, w., talent. 
tambien, also, too. 
tampoco, as little, neither, nor . . . 

either ; ni . . . — , not . . . either, 

nor . . . either. 
tan, so, as; idiomatic in exclamations. 
tantico, -a (/r. tanto); un — , a 

little bit, somewhat. 
tanto, -a, as much, so much; tantos, 

-as, as many, so many ; — ... 

como, as (so) much ... as ; por 

lo — , therefore. 
tanto, adv.^ so much, so. 
tardar, to delay; no tardara en 

venir, it will not be long before 

he comes. 
tarde,/, evening, afternoon. 
tarde, late. 
tarea, /, task. 
tarjeta, /, card; — de visita, 

visiting card. 
te, ;?/., tea. 
te, you, thee. 
teatro, w., theatre, 
tejado, m., roof. 
tela,/, cloth, fabric. 
tema, w., theme, exercise. 
temer, to fear, 



VOCABULARY 



267 



templar, to temper, soften. 

temprano, early. 

tener, to have, hold ; — que, to 
have to. 

teoria, /, theory. 

tercer(o), -a, third. 

tercio, -a, third. 

terminar, to finish, end. 

terquedad, /, stubbornness, obsti- 
nacy. 

tertuliano, -a, m. and f., guest, per- 
son present at a party. 

ti, you, thee. 

tia,/, aunt. 

tiempo, w., time, weather ; i cuanto 
— hace ? how long is it ? 

tienda, /, shop, store. 

tienen, pi-es. iiidic. jd pi. of tener. 

tierra, /, earth, land. 

tinta, /, ink. 

tio, -a, m. and f.^ uncle, aunt. 

tirano, w., tyrant. 

tocar, to touch, play {a musical 
instru7nent) ; knock {j)n a door^ ; 
be one's turn. 

todavia, still, yet. 

todito, -a (/;-. todo) ; toditos los 
dias, almost every day. 

todo, -a, all, every ; w., all, every- 
thing ; — el dia, all day ; todas 
las noches, every night. 

tomar, to take. 

tonelada,/, ton. 

tonto, -a, 7n. ajid /, fool ; hacerse 
el — , to play the fool. 

torno, w., turn ; en — de, around. 

toro, m., bull ; corrida de toros, 
bull-fight. 



tortuoso, -a, crooked. 

torre, /, tower. 

trabajar, to work. 

trabajo, m., work. 

traer, to bring. 

traidor, -ora, w. and f., traitor ; 

adj.^ treacherous. 
traje, w., suit, costume. 
trajeron, prel. indie, jd pi. of 

traer. 
tranvia, w., tramway, street car. 
tratar, to treat, have dealings (with), 
trece, thirteen. 
treinta, thirty. 
tren, ;;/., train, 
tres, three. 

trescientos, -as, three hundred. 
tribu,/, tribe. 
triste, sad, gloomy, dismal. 
tronar, to thunder ; por lo que 

pudiere tronar, for a rainy day, 

against contingencies. 
tropa, /, troop. 
tii, thou, you. 
tu, thy, your. 
turista, m. and f, tourist. 
tuyo, -a, thine, yours ; el tuyo, etc., 

thine, yours. 

u, or. 

ultimo, -a, last. 
uniforme, w., uniform. 
uniformemente, uniformly. 
universidad, /, university. 
uno, -a, one ; unos, -as, some, any, 
about ; a la una, at one o'clock, 
usted (//. ustedes)^ you. 
util, useful. 



268 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



V. (=usted), you; VV., //. ( = 

ustedes), you. 
vaca,/, cow. [better. 

valer, to be worth; mas vale, it is 
valor, m.^ valor, courage ; con — , 

courageously. [ceited. 

vanaglorioso, -a, boastful, con- 
vanidad,/, vanity. 
vara,/, yard. 

variar, to vary, change. [several. 
vario, -a, various, different ; //., 
var6n, ?/?., male. 
Vd. (= usted), you; Vds. ( = 

ustedes), you. 
vecino, -a, m. andf., neighbor. 
veinte, twenty. 

vela,/., candle. \^ painter). 

Velazquez, Velazquez {Spanish 
velocidad,/, speed. 
veneer, to conquer, win. 
vencido, -a, conqueror. 
vender, to sell. 
veneno, m.y poison, venom, 
venerable, venerable. 
venir, to come, happen. 
ventana,/, window. 
Venzan, pres. sbj, jd pi. of veneer. 
ver, to see. [it so? 

verdad, /, truth ; ^ no es — ? isn't 
verdadero, -a, true, real. 
verde, green, 

verter, to pour forth, shed. 
vestido, m., garment, clothes, suit. 
vestir, to dress, clothe; rejl., to 

dress (one's self). 
vez, /, time ; otra — , again ; una 

— , once ; dos veces, twice ; en 

— de, instead of. 



viajar, to travel. 

viaje, w., journey, travel. 

vicioso, -a, vicious. 

vida,/, life, living. 

viejo, -a, old. 

viento, m.^ wind. 

viernes, m., Friday, 

vino, m.y wine. 

visita,/, visit. 

visitar, to visit. 

vista,/, sight, view. 

visto, -B.,p.p. of ver, to see. 

viudo, -a, m. and f, widower, widow. 

vivir, to live. 

volar, to fly. 

volumen, m., volume. 

voluntad,/, will. 

volver, to turn, return, come back ; 

— a, again ; refl.., to turn around.. 
VOS, you. 

vosotros, -as, you, ye. 
VOy, ist pers. sing. pres. indie, of ir, 

to go. 
vuelta, /, turn, return; a — de 

correo, by return mail ; estar de 

— , to be back, have returned, 
vuestro, -a, your, yours. 

y, and. 

ya, already, now ; — no, no longer, 

no more. 
yerro, pres. indie, ist sing, of e^^rar. 
yo, I. 
yugo, w., yoke. 

zapato, w., shoe. 

Zurbaran, Zurbaran (^Spanish 
painter). 



VOCABULARY 



ENGLISH-SPANISH 



Note. — Not all the words used in the Exercises will be found in the English- 
Spanish part of the General Vocabulary. If an English-Spanish exercise involves 
the use of Spanish words already employed in the preceding Spanish- English 
exercise of the same lesson, as occurs especially in the second half of the 
Grammar, those words are often not included in the English-Spanish part of 
the Vocabulary. In such cases the student needs no help, provided he trans- 
late properly the Spanish-English sentences of the particular lesson. 



a, an, un, una. 

about, (= approximately') cerca de, 
aproximadamente, ( = of) de, ( == 
with regard to) respecto de. 

absent, ausente. 

accompany, acompanar. 

according to, segdn. 

acknowledge, reconocer; — the re- 
ceipt (of), acusar recibo (de). 

act, hecho, 7n. 

admire, admirar. 

advise, aconsejar (a). 

affectionate, carinoso, -a; very 
(most) — , afectisimo, -a, afmo, -a. 

afoot, a pie. 

afraid: be — (of),tener miedo (de). 

aAtQXf prep., despues de; cofzj., des- 
pues que. 

again, otra vez, de nuevo, volver a. 

age, edad, // Middle — s, Edad 
Media. 

ago: a long time — , hace mucho 
tiempo, mucho tiempo ha. 



agreeable, agradable. 

agree (to), convenir (en), (^ = get 

along together) entenderse. 
Alfred, Alfredo, w. 
all, todo, -a; — day, todo el dia. 
almost, casi. 
aloud, alto, en voz alta. 
Alphonsus, Alfonso, m, 
already, ya. 
also, tambien. 
although, aunque. 
always, siempre. 
a. m., de la manana. 
America, America,/ 
American, Americano, -a, m, andf, ; 

Norte-Americano, -a, w. and f, 
American, adj., americano, -a, norte- 

americano, -a. 
and, y, e {bef. i- or hi-), 
angry, enojado, -a, irritado, -a, en- 

fadado, -a; be — , enojarse, irri- 

tarse, enfadarse, 
animal, animal, m» 



269 



2/0 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



Anna, Ana,/ 

another, otro, -a; one — , los unos 

(a) los otros. 
answer, responder, (Jo a letter) con- 

testar. 
Anthony, Antonio, m, 
any (one), alguno, -a; not any 

(one), no . . . ninguno, -a, no 

. . . alguno, -a (<2/?. noun) ; 

not ... in any way, no . . . 

en nada. 
anything, algo, alguna cosa; not — , 

no . . . nada. 
appear, aparecer, ( — seem) parecer. 
apple, manzana, f.; — tree, man- 

zano, m.; — orchard, manza- 

nar, m. 
approach, acercarse a. 
April, abril, m. 
argue, argiiir. 
arise, levantarse. 
arithmetic, aritmetica, / 
arm, brazo, m, 
army, ejercito, m, 
arrive (at, in), llegar (a). 
as, como ; as ... as, tan . . . 

como; — soon — , luego que, tan 

pronto como. 
ascertain, averiguar. 
Asia, Asia,/ 
ask, (^ = question) preguntar; (== beg, 

request) pedir, rogar; — of, 

pedir a; — for, pedir. 
at, a, (= in) en. 
attack, acometer. 
August, agosto, m. 
aunt, tia,/ 
Australia, Australia, / 



autumn, otono, m, 

avoid, evitar. 

awake, despertarse, {lit, * to arouse 

one's self^), 

back, {of person) espalda, // {of 
animal) lomo, m, ; {of chair) 
respaldo, m. 

bad, nialo, -a; — cold, fuerte res- 
friado; it's tOO — ! es lastima ! 

badly, mal. 

ball, pelota, // play — , jugar a la 
pelota. 

barber, barbero, m. 

bark, ladrar. 

be, ( per7nanently or inherently) ser ; 
{temporarily ; position) estar; 
— cold, tener fri'o {cf a person, or 
animal) ; estar frio {of 'an inani- 
mate object) ; hacer frio {of the 
weather). 

beard, barba,/ 

beautiful, bello, -a, (= handsome) 
hermoso, -a. 

because, porque. 

bed, cama, / / go to — , acostarse. 

beer, cerveza,/ 

before, {position) ante, delantede; 
{time) antes de; (= formerly, 
beforehand) antes; conj, antes 
que. 

beg, mendigar; {— request) pedir, 
rogar. 

behavior, conducta,/ 

believe, creer. 

beloved, amado, -a; querido, -a. 

best, mejor. 

better, mejor. 



VOCABULARY 



271 



between, entre. 

bible, biblia,/ 

bicycle, bicicleta, / 

bill, (= account) cuenta, // ( = 
poster) cartel, ni.; (= bird^s — ) 
pico, m.; { = bank-note) billete, 
m. 

bird, pajaro, m.; 2iWQ,f. 

birthday, dia de cumpleafios, cum- 
pleanos, m. 

black, negro, -a. 

blind, ciego, -a. 

blotting-paper, papel secante, m. 

blow, soplar; the wind — s, hace 
(hay) viento. 

blue, azul. 

book, libro, m, 

borrow, pedir (tomar) prestado, -a. 

boy, muchacho, w. / (= young boy) 
nino, m. 

brandy, aguardiente, 771. ; conac, m. 

bread, pan, m. 

bride, novia, / 

bring, traer; — down, bajar. 

broken, roto, -a. 

brother, hermano, ?;/. / — in-law, 
cufiado, 171, 

brush, cepillo, ?n. ; vb., acepillar. 

build, construir. 

building, edificio, ;;/. 

burn, quemar ; i7itr., arder; —7 up 
{or down), quemarse. 

burnish, brunir. 

busy, ocupado, -a. 

but, pero, mas, sino {aft. nega- 
tive) . 

butter, mantequilla, f, 

buy, comprar. 



by, {with passive verbs) por, de; 
(= near) junto a, cerca de, al la- 
do de; — day, de dia; — my 
watch, en mi reloj. 

call, llamar. 

can, poder ; {= know how) saber. 

candle, vela.,/ 

cap, gorra, / 

captain, capitan, 7n, 

care, cuidado, ;??. 

carriage, coche, ;«. ; carruage, 771. 

carry off, llevar, llevarse. 

case, caso, 771. ; in — , en caso que. 

Catalan, Catalan, -ana, w. and f. 

Catalonia, Cataluna,/ 

catch, coger ; ( = take) tomar, ( = tie^ 
fasten) amarrar ; — cold, coger 
un resfriado (resfrio), tomar ca- 
tarro, resfriarse. 

cause, causa,// motivo, 771, 

cent, centavo, 771. 

centime, centimo, ;;/. 

certain, a certain, cierto, -a. 

chair, silla, / 

change, cambiar. 

Charles, Carlos, ;;/. 

child, nifio, -a, 7n. a7id f ; children, 
ninos, 771. pi. ; {= sons a7td daugh- 
ters) hijOS, 771. pi. 

chin, barba,/ 

city, ciudad,/ 

clean, limpiar. 

clock, reloj {de pared, de 77iesa) ; at 
six o^clock, a las seis ; what 
o'clock is it? iqu^ bora es? 

clothes, ropa,/ 

Co. {co>7tpa72y),C\di. 



2/2 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



coalition, coalicion,/ 

coat, levita, // {=.boys — ) cha- 
queta, / / ( = " sack " — ) " saco," 
m. \ ( = evening or " dress " — ) 
frac, w. / {of uniform') casaca,/ 

coffee, cafe, m. 

cold, noun, frio, 7?t. ; ( = illness) 
resfriado, m., resfrio, w., catarro, 
m. ; catch — , coger un resfriado 
(resfrio), resfriarse. 

cold, adj., frio, -a ; be — , see be. 

collar, cuello, m. 

collection, coleccion, / 

color, color, m. 

comb, peine, m. ; vb., peinar. 

come, venir ; — out, salir. 

comfortable, comodo, -a. 

command, mandar. 

company, compania,/,- Co., Cia. 

conquer, veneer. 

consequently, por consiguiente. 

content, contented, contento, -a, 
satisfecho, -a. 

contentedly, tranquilamente, con- 
tentamente. 

continent, continente, m, 

continue, continuar. 

copy, copia, f ; {of a work) ejem- 
plar, m. 

cordially, cordialmente. 

correct, corregir. 

correctly, correctamente. 

costly, costoso, -a. 

country, pais, m, ; { — native land) 
patria, f ; {as distinguished from 
the city) campo, m. ; — house, 
casa de campo. 

cousin, primo, -a, w. and f. 



COW, vaca, / 

crack, parti r. 

cravat, corbata,/ 

cry, gritar, dar voces; {—weep) 

llorar. 
Cuba, Cuba,/ 

Cuban, Cubano, -a, m. and f 
Cuban, adj., cubano, -a. 
cuff, puno, m. 

cup, taza,// { = wine cup) copa,/ 
cure, sanar. 
cut, cortar. 

daily, diariamente, todos los dias, 
cada dia. 

danger, peligro, m. 

date, fecha,/ / vb., fechar. 

daughter, hija,/ 

day, dia, m, ; good — , buenos 
dias. 

deal ; a great — of, mucho, -a. 

dear, {^beloved) querido, -a, caro, 
-a ; ( = expensive) caro, -a, cos- 
toso, -a ; — Sir, muy Sefior mio ; 
— Madam, muy Sefiora mia. 

dearly, { — expensively) caramente, 
costosamente ; ( = affectionately) 
tiernamente, carinosamente. 

death, muerte,/ 

December, diciembre, m, 

decide, resolver (a.) 

deed, hecho, m. 

defend, defender. 

desire, desear. 

destroy, destruir. 

die, morir. 

difficult, dificil. 

discharge, despedir. 



VOCABULARY 



273 



distinguish, distinguir. 

do, hacer. 

dog, perro, m. 

dollar, {in Spain) duro, m. ; (in 

America) peso, m. 
door, puerta,/ 
doubt, duda,// vb., dudar. 
dozen, docena,/ 
draft, giro, m. 
draw, sacar. 
drawing, dibujo, m. 
dress, vestir ; intr., vestirse. 
drink, beber. 
drop, ( = let go of) soltar, ( = let fall) 

dejar caer. 
dry, secar, ( = wipe) enjugar. 

each, cada ; — other, el uno (al) 
otro. 

ear, oreja, f ; (= inner ear, or hear- 
ing) oido, m. 

early, temprano. 

earn, ganar. 

easy, facil. 

eat, comer. 

^%%,i buevo, 7n, 

eight, ocho. 

eighteen, diez y ocho. 

eighth, octavo, -a. 

eighty, ochenta. 

elevated, elevado, -a. 

else, something — , otra cosa. 

embrace, abrazar. 

employ, emplear. 

employee, empleado, -a, m. and f 

end, extremidad, f ; extremo, in. 

enemy, enemigo, -a, in. and f 

England, Inglaterra, / 



English, Ingles, -esa, m, and f; 
adj., ingles, -esa. 

enough, bastante, suficiente. 

enter, entrar (en). 

envelope, sobre, m. 

err, errar. 

Europe, Europa, / 

even, adv., aun ; — if, aunque. 

evening, tarde,/; good — , buenas 
noches. 

ever, ( = always) siempre ; {in a 
question) jamas, alguna vez ; not 
— , no . . . nunca,no . . . jamas. 

every (one), todo, -a; cada 
(uno, -a); — body, todos {pi.), 
todo el mundo, m. ; — night, 
todas las noches ; — time, cada 
vez. 

exercise, ejercicio, w. 

expensive, costoso, -a, caro, -a. 

eye, ojo, ?n. 

face, cara, / 

faithful, fiel. 

fall, caer ; — down, caerse. 

false, falso, -a. 

family, familia, / 

far, lejos ; as — as, hasta. 

fast, {=firm) firme, seguro, -a; 

( = swift) veloz, ligero, -a ; be — 

{as a watch), adelantar, estar 

adelantado. 
fast, adv., {= firmly) fuertemente, 

firmemente ; ( = rapidly) aprisa, 

de prisa. 
fatal, fatal. 

father, padre, m., papa, m. 
fault, culpa,/. 



274 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



favor, favor, ;;/. 

fear, temer. 

February, febrero, m. 

feel, sentir ; i7itr., sentirse. 

feeling, sentimiento, m. 

few, a few, pocos, -as ; unos (-as) 
cuantos (-as). 

fifteen, quince. 

fifth, quinto, -a. 

fifty, cincuenta. 

find, hallar, ( = meei) encontrar. 

fine, bueno, -a. 

finger, dedo, in. ; — nail, una (de 
dedo),/ 

fire, {in the abstract) fuego, m,; 
(^ burning wood or coal) 
lumbre, /, candela {e.g. in 
Cuba),/.; {= conflagration) in- 
cendio, ;//. 

firm, casa,y^, {z^Jirm name) firma,y. 

first, primer (o) -a ; {in compound 
ordinals) primo, -a. 

fist, puno, m. 

fit, sentar, caer, estar. 

five, cinco ; — hundred, quinientos, 
-as. 

floor, suelo, w., ( = story) piso, m. 

flower, flor,/ 

fog, neblina, f. ; niebla, f. 

foggy; it is — , hay neblina. 

food, aliment o, m, 

foolish, bobo, -a. 

foot, pie, m. 

for, { — for the sake of, in ex- 
change for) por; (= destination) 
para. 

forbid, prohibir. 

forehead, frente,/ 



forest, monte, m. ; bosque, m. 

fork, tenedor, 7n. 

forty, cuarenta. 

four, cuatro. 

fourteen, catorce. 

fourth, cuarto, -a. 

fragrant, oloroso, -a, fragante. 

Frances, Francisca,/ 

French, frances, -esa. 

Frenchman, Frances, m. ; French- 
woman, Francesa,/ 

Friday, viernes, ?n. 

friend, amigo, -a, m. and f. 

frighten, espantar, asustar ; be 
frightened, asustarse. 

from, de, desde ; — ... to, de . . . 
a, desde . . . hasta. 

furniture, muebles, m. pi. 

garlic, a jo, m, 

gentleman, sefior, m. ; caballero, m, 

geography, geografia,/ 

George, Jorge, m. 

German, Aleman, -ana, 7n. and f; 

adj., aleman, -ana. 
get, (= obtain) conseguir, obtener; 

{ — go after) ir a buscar; go and 

— , ir a buscar; (= become) 

ponerse. 
gift, regalo, w. 
girl, muchacha, f ; nina, f. 
give, dar. 
glad, alegre, contento, -a; I am — 

(to), me alegro de, me da gusto 

(placer) de, tengo mucho gusto 

(placer) en. 
glass, vaso, m. 
glove, guante, m. 



VOCABULARY 



275 



go, ir; — out, salir; — up, subir; 

— into, entrar (en) ; (^of a watch) 

andar. 
god, dios, m. 
gold, oro, m. 
good, bueno, -a; be — for nothing, 

no vaier nada, no servir para nada. 
good-bye, adios; — for a while, 

hasta luego : — until we see each 

other again, hasta la vista. 
goodness, bondad,// (lo) bueno, «. 
grammar, gramatica,/ 
granddaughter, nieta,/ 
grandfather, abuelo, m. 
grandparents, abuelos, w., pL 
grandson, nieto, m. 
grant, otorgar, conceder. 
great, gran(de) ; a — deal, mucho, 

-a. 
Greek, griego, -a. 
guide, guia; vb.^ guiar. 

hair, cabello, ;;/., pelo, in. ; — of the 

head, cabellos, m. pi. 
half, mitad, // adj,, medio, -a; 

a — i or — a, medio, -a. 
hand, mano, f, ; come to — , venir 

a (mis) manos. 
handkerchief, paiiuelo, w. 
handsome, hermoso, -a. 
happen, acontecer, suceder. 
happily, felizmente. 
happy, feliz. 
hard, duro, -a; (= difficult) dificil; 

adv., diligentemente, mucho. 
harm, mal, ;;/./ (= damage) dano, 

m. 
hat, sombrero, m. 



hate, odiar, aborrecer. 

have, aux. vb.y haber; (— possess, 

hold) tener ; — tO, tener que, 

haber de. 
he, el ; — who, el que, quien. 
head, cabeza, / 

health, salud, / ; be in good (bet- 
ter) — , estar bien (mejor) de salud. 
healthful, saludable. 
healthy, sano, -a. 
heaven, cielo, w. 
help, ayudar. 
Henry, Enrique, w. 
here, aqui, aca. 
heroic, heroico, -a. 
high, alto, -a, elevado, -a. 
him, el, le, lo. 
himself, se. 
his, su, sus ; el (la, lo, los, las) 

suyo (-a, -o, -os, -as) ; el (la, lo, 

los, las) . . . de el. 
historian, historiador, m. 
holy, santo, -a. 
home, {= to one's — ) a casa ; at — , 

en casa. 
hope, esperar. 
horse, caballo, ni. 
horseback; on — , a caballo. 
hot, caliente. 
hour, hora, /. 
house, casa, f. 
how, como; interrog.y como ; — 

much (many), cuanto, -a (-os, 
^-as). 

hundred, one — , cien(to). 
hunger, hambre, / 
hungry, hambriento, -a ; be — , 

tener hambre. 



276 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



hurry, prisa, /. ; be in a — , tener 
prisa. 

if, si. 

ill, enfermo, -a, malo, -a. 

illness, enfermedad,/ 

in, en; (= within) dentro de ; 

{after a coniparative) de. 
independent, independiente. 
Indian, indio, -a. 
indispensable, indispensable. 
influence, influencia, / 
ink, tinta,/ 
instant, instante, m.; ( = present 

month) del corriente, del presente. 
instead of, en lugar (vez) de. 
intend, pensar, tener la intencion de. 
interesting, interesante. 
iron, hierro, m. 

is, see ser, tO be, or estar, tO be. 
island, isla, / 
it, el, ella, ello, lo. 
Italian, italiano, -a. 

January, enero, m, 
John, Juan, m. 
judge, juez, m. 
July, Julio, m, 
June, junio, m, 

just, adv.y justamente,exactamente; 
to have — , acabar de. 

keep, guardar. 

kind, clase,/., especie,// adj., bon- 
dadoso, -a ; apreciable or atenta 
(carta); be — enough, tener la 
bondad (de), servirse. 

kindness, bondad, /. 



kiss, besar. 

kitchen, cocina,/ 

knife, cuchillo, w./ (= claspknife), 

navaja,yi/ { = penknife) cortaplu- 

mas, m. 
know, {= be acquainted with) cono- 

cer, {= be aware of knozv how, be 

able) saber ; I — , conozco or se ; 

let them — , conozcan or sepan. 

lady, sefiora,/ 

lamp, lampara,yi 

language, lengua, f, idioma, m.; 

(= style of language) lenguaje, m, 
large, gran(de). 
last, durar. 
last, tiltimo, -a, postrer(o), -a; — 

week, la semana pasada. 
late, tarde. 
Latin, latin,;??, {the language)-, latino, 

-a, adj, 
laugh, reir; — at, reirse (^e. 
laundress, lavandera, / 
lawyer, abogado, m, 
lazy, perezoso, -a, haragan, -ana. 
leap year, ano bisiesto, ;;^. 
learn, aprender (a). 
least, menos ; at — , a (por) lo menos. 
leave, dejar, abandonar; (= depart) 

partir, { = go out) salir. 
leg, pierna,/ 
lend, prestar. 
less, menos. 
lesson, leccion, / 
let, {= leave) dejar; { = permit) 

permitir; (= rent) alquilar, arren- 

dar ; {sometimes que with the pres. 

subj, of the tnain verb). 



VOCABULARY 



277 



letter, carta,/ 
library, biblioteca, / 
lie, mentir. 

lie (down), acostarse. 
life, vida, / 

light, alumbrar, iluminar; (= kin- 
dle) encender. 
lighten, relampaguear. 
like, querer (a), gustar (de) ; I — , 

me gusta {lit., it pleases me). 
lily, lirio, m. 
line, linea, / 
listen, escuchar. 
little, poco, -a; (= small) pequeno, 

-a, chico, -a. 
live, vivir. 
living, vida,/. 
London, Londres, m. 
long, largo, -a; a — time, mucho 

tiempo; {see tardar)\ as — as, 

mientras, mientras que. 
look (at), mirar; — for, buscar; 

{— appeaj') parecer; — like, 

parecerse a. 
lose, perder. 
lot, porcion,/; a — of, mucho, -a, 

gran numero; a — of tears, un 

raudal de lagrimas. 
Louise, Luisa,/ 
love, amar, querer (a). 
low, bajo, -a. 

madam, sefiora,/ 
make, hacer; (= eani) ganar. 
man, hombre, m.; his men,los suyos. 
many, muchos, -as. 
marble, marmol, ?n. ; {in game of) 
bola,/; bolita,/ 



March, marzo, m. 

march, marchar. 

Mary, Maria,/ 

match, fosforo, 7n.; vb,y caer bien 

con. 
mathematics, matematicas,///. 
matter, vb.j importar. 
may, poder, tener permiso (de). 
May, mayo, m. 
me, to — , me. 
mean, {= to inte^td) pensar; {—to 

sig7iify) significar or querer decir. 
meat, came,/ 
medicine, {— science of) medicina, 

f,;{z=L drug) medicamento, m. 
meet, encontrar. 
melancholy, melancolfa, / 
mend, remendar, componer, reparar. 
merchant, comerciante, 771. 
metal, metal, m. 
Mexican, Mejicano, -a, w. and f. ; 

adj., mejicano, -a. 
Mexico, Mejico, w. 
middle, medio^ -a. 
milk, leche,/ 
million, millon, 7n. 
mine, mio, -a, -os, -as; el (la, lo, 

los, las), mio (-a, -o, -os, -as). 
minute, minuto, ni. 
miser, avariento, -a, 7n. and f 
Miss, (la) senorita; {bef. give7i 

7iames), dona. 
mistake, error, w., falta,/ 
moment, momento, ;;/. 
Monday, lunes, 7n. 
money, dinero, ni. 
month, mes, 7n. 
more, mas. 



278 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



moreover, ademas. 

morning, manana, // tomorrow 

— , manana por la manana. 
most, mas ; ( = very) muy. 
mother, madre,/ 
mouth, boca,/ 
Mr., (el) senor, m. ; {bef. given 

names') don. 
Mrs., (la) senora; {bef. given names) 

dona. 
much, mucho, -a; very — , muchi- 

simo -a; SO (as) — as, tanto, -a, 

como. 
mud, lodo, m. ; {— mh-e^ slime) 

fan go, m. 
mule, mulo, -a, m. and f. (the fern. 

form is generally used), 
music, mdsica,/. 
must, tener que, haber de ; ( = moral 

obligation) debar. 
mustache(s), bigotes, m, pL 
my, mi, mis ; mio (-a, -os, -as) . 

nail, clavo, w. / finger — , una (de 

dedo),/ 
name, nombre, m,.; (= surname) 

apellido, m. ; my — is, me llamo. 
napkin, servilleta, / 
native, natural, m, and f 
near, cerca de, junto a. 
nearly, casi. 
necessary, necesario, -a; be — , ser 

necesario, preeiso, menester. 
neck, cuello, w., pescuezo, m, 
necktie, corbata,/ 
need, necesidad,/! 
need, necesitar. 
negro, negro, -a, m, and f 



neighbor, vecino, -a, m. and f. 

never, nunca, jamas. 

new, nuevo, -a 

news, noticia,/, noticias, / //. 

next, proximo, -a, siguiente; — 

month, el proximo mes, el mes 

que viene (entra); the — page, 

la pagina siguiente. 
niece, sobrina,/! 

night, noche,/ / last — , anoche. 
nine, nueve. 
nineteen, diez y nueve. 
ninety, noventa. 
ninth, noveno, -a; {in co7npound 

ordinals) nono, -a. 
no, no. 

no, no one, none, ningun(o), -a. 
nobody, nadie. 
nor, ni. 

north, norte, m. ; adj., norte. 
North-American, Norte-Amerigano, 

-a, m, a7id f; adj., norte-ameri- 

cano, -a. 
nose, nariz,yC 
not, no; — ... either, ni . . . tam- 

poco. 
note, notar; be noted, notarse. 
nothing, nada. 
November, noviembre, m» 
now, ahora. 
nut, nuez,/ 

oblige, obligar. 
observe {= to keep) guardar. 
o'clock; at six — , a las seis. 
October, octubre, w. 
of, de; {with pensar) en; {with 
verb of separation) a. 



VOCABULARY 



279 



offer, ofrir. 

often, muchas veces, a menudo. 

old, viejo, -a, anciano, -a; (— an- 
cient) antiguo, -a; older (^of per- 
sons), mayor; be ten years — , 
tener diez anos, 

on, en; (= on top of) sobre, encima 
de; — time, a tiempo. 

once, una vez; at — , en seguida. 

one, un(o), -a; — or another, uno 
(-a) d otro (-a), alguno (-a) que 
otro (-a) ; that one, aquel, etc. 

only, solo, solamente, no . . . mas 
que, no . . . sino. 

Open, abrir. 

or, 6, d {bef. 0- or ho-) ; not ... — , 
no . . . ni. 

orange, naranja, / 

order, (= command) orden, f,; 
( = orderliness) orden, 771. ; in — 
to, para; in — that, para que. 

original, original. 

other, another, otro, -a; (= the 
rest) demas. 

ought, deber. 

our, nuestro, -a. 

ours, nuestro (-a, -os, -as); el (la, 
los, las, lo), nuestro (-a, -os, -as, 
-o). 

out, fuera; (= outside) afuera; go 
— , salir. 

outdoors, afuera. 

over, (= upon) sobre; (= above), 
encima de; {—to the other side 
of) al otro lado de ; — there, por 
alli. 

overcoat, sobretodo, ;;?., abrigo, m, ; 
(= cloak) capote, w. 



own, propio, -a, mismo, -a. 
owner, duefio, -a, m, and f 

package, paquete, m, 

page, pagina,/ 

pale, palido, -a. 

paper, papel, m,; {— newspaper) 

periodico, 771. 
pardon, perdon, 771. ; vb., perdonar. 
parents, padres, m, pi. 
Paris, Paris, 
parrot, loro, w.,'cotorra {species of 

S77iall )if' 

part, parte,/. 

pass, pasar. 

past (lo) pasado, n. 

past, adj., pasado, -a; at half — 

one o'clock, a la una y media, 
pastry, pasteles, fu. pL 
Paul, Pablo, w. 
pay, pagar. 
peace, paz,/ 
peach, melocoton, 771., durazno, t7i. 

{= a co77i77ion variety of S77iall 

peach). 
pen, pluma,/ 
pencil, lapiz, 7n. 
penknife, cortaplumas, m. 
people, pueblo, 7n. ; (= persons) 

gente, /. 
pepper, pimienta,/ 
perhaps, tal vez, quizas. 
permit, permitir. 
person, persona,/ 
personage, personaje, m, 
Peter, Pedro, ;«. 
Philippines, Filipinas, / //./ in 

the — , en Filipinas. 



28o 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



philosophy, filosoffa,/ 

physician, medico, m, 

piano, piano, m, 

picture, cuadro, ;;/. / (= portrait) 

retrato, m. ; (= engraving) gra- 

bado, w., lamina, yC 
piece, pedazo, m. ; {of music, etc.) 

pieza, // ( — of furniture) mue- 

ble, m, 
pity, piedad, /, misericordia, /, 

lastima, / / it is a — , es las- 

tima. 
plan, plan, m, 
plate, plato, m, 
play, jugar, {on a musical instru- 

7nent) tocar. 
please, gustar, agradar ; (= be 

kind enough), ; hagame Vd. el 

favor (de), tenga Vd. la bondad 

(de)! 
pleasure, gusto, 7n., placer, m, 
p. m., {till dark) de la tarde ; {aft. 

dark) de la noche. 
pocket, bolsillo, m., faltriquera, f 
poem, poesia,/ 
porter, portero, w. 
possess, poseer. 
possible, posible. 
post-office, correo, w., casa (admi- 

nistracion) de correos,y! 
potato, patata, f, {in most parts of 

Spanish America) papa,y^ 
pour, echar. 
praise, alabar. 
pray, rezar. 
prefer, preferir. 
present, regalo, m., presente, m,; 

vb,y presentar. 



prettily, lindamente, bonitamente. 

pretty, bonito, -a, lindo, -a. 

print, imprimir. 

probably, probablemente. 

promise, prometer. 

prove, probar. 

publish, publicar; be publishf^d, 

publicarse, salir a luz. 
punish, castigar. 
pupil, discipulo, -a., m, and f 
pure, puro, -a. 
purse, bolsa, /, bolsillo, m, 
put, poner; — out {a fire or li^ 

apagar. 

quarter, cuarto, m., at a — pa^t 
one o'clock, a la una y cuarto. 

rain. Hover. 

raise, levantar. 

rare, raro, -a. 

rarely, raramente. 

reach, alcanzar ; {—touch) tocar; 
{—extend) tender, extender; ( = 
arrive at) llegar a. 

read, leer. 

ready, listo, -a. 

reason, razon,/ 

recall, recordar. 

receipt, recibo, m, 

receive, recibir, 

red, rojo, -a ; (= bright red) encar- 
nado, -a ; ( = dark red, " brick- 
color ") Colorado, -a. 

regards, recuerdos, w. //. 

regret, sentir. 

regular, regular ; he is a — fool, es 
un bobo. 



VOCABULARY 



281 



relate, relaciDnarse con ; all relating 

to, cuanto se relaciona con. 
remain, queaar, quedarse, restar. 
remember, acordarse (de),recordar. 
respect, estimacion,/ 
rest, descansar. 
re' urn, volver, regresar. 
: uk, rico, -a. 
•/^ft.e, rifle, m. ; fusil, m. 
■ Ij^ht, justo, -a; (^as compared to left) 

ierecho, -a ; be — , tener razon. 
' *J, sortija,/ / anillo, m, 
hse, levantarse ; {of sun, moon, etc) 

salir. 
acggue, picaro, -a, m, and f ; pillo, 

-a, m. and f 
roof, tejado, m. 
room, cuarto, m, ; bed — , alcoba, 

/ / bath — , cuarto de bafio, m. ; 

class — , aula, f, sala de clase, 

f ; dining — , comedor, m, ; 

state — , camarote, m. / ( = space) 

lugar, w., espacio, m, 
run, correr. 
Russian, Ruso, -a, m and f, 

sacrifice, sacrificio, m. 
sad, triste. 

saint, san(to), -a, w. and f; — 's 

day, dia del santo, m,; di'as, m. 

pi. 

sale, venta ; for — , de venta. 
salt, sal,/ 

Saturday, sabado, m, 
save, salvar. 

say, decir ; they will say, diran. 
scholar, {= pupil) discipulo, -a, m. 
and f. 



school, escuela,/ 

second, segundo, -a. 

second, segundo, m, 

see, ver. 

seek, buscar. 

seem, parecer, figurarse. 

self, mismo, -a. 

sell, vender. 

send, enviar, mandar ; — for, man- 

dar a buscar. 
September, se(p)tiembre, m. 
serious, serio, -a ; {— dangerous) 

grave, peligroso, -a. 
servant, criado, -a, m, and f 
serve (as), servir (de). 
set, sentar; {of the sun, moon, etc) 

ponerse; ( — the table, etc) poner. 
seven, siete. 
seventeen, diez y siete. 
seventh, se(p)timo, -a. 
seventy, setenta. 
several, varios, -as. 
severe, severo, -a. 
Seville, Sevilla,/. 
shave, afeitar, rasurar; intr., afei- 

tarse, rasurarse. 
shed, verter. 
shine, lucir, brillar; the sun — s, 

hace (hay) sol. 
shirt, camisa,/ 
shoe, zapato, m, 
short, corto, -a; a — while (time) 

ago, poco tiempo ha. 
should, ( = ought to) deber. 
show, ensenar, mostrar. 
shut, cerrar. 
side, lado, m, 
silver, plata,/ 



282 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



since, desde ; conj.^ desde que. 

sincere, sincere, -a. 

sincerely, sinceramente. 

sir, senor, m. ; caballero, m, 

sister, hermana,/! 

sit (down), sentarse. 

six, seis. 

sixteen, diez y seis. 

sixth, sexto, -a. 

sixty, sesenta. 

skilful, experto, -a, habil. 

slate, pizarra,/ 

sleep, sueiio, m, ; vb., dormir ; go 
to — , fall a — , dormirse. 

sleepy : be — , tener sueiio. 

slow, lento, -a, detenido, -a, atra- 
sado, -a ; be — (^as a waUhy traiii, 
etc.'), atrasar, estar atrasado, -a. 

slowly, despacio. 

small, pequefio, -a, chico, -a. 

smell, oler ; — of, oler a ; it smells, 
etc., huele, etc. 

smoke, humear, echar humo ; — to- 
bacco, fumar tabaco. 

snow, nieve,/ 

so, tan ; — much (many), tanto, -a, 
tantos, -as; — ... as, tan . . . 
como ; he said — , lo dijo. 

soap, jabon, m. 

soiled, sucio, -a. 

soldier, soldado, 7n. 

some, alguno, -a ; //., algunos, -as, 
unos, -as, unos (-as) cuantos (-as). 

somebody, some one, alguien, al- 
guno, -a. 

something, algo, alguna cosa ; — 
else, otra cosa. 

son, hijo, m. 



soon, pronto, presto, temprano ; as 

— as, luego que, tan pronto como. 
Sophia, Sofia,/ 
sorry, afligido, -a, triste ; be — , sen- 

tir(lo). 
soul, alma,/ 
soup, sopa,/ 
Spain, Espaiia,/ 
Spaniard, Espanol, -ola, m. and f. 
Spanish, espanol, -ola ; {=the 

Spanish language) el castellano, 

el espanol, m. 
speak, hablar. 
spend, gastar. 
splendid, magnifico, -a, esplendido, 

-a. 
split, partir. 
spoon, cuchara, / / tea — , cucha- 

rita,/ 
spring, ( = season) primavera, / 
squirrel, ardilla, / 
station {of railway), estacion, /, 

paradero, m. 
statue, estatua,/ 
stay, quedar, quedarse ; — in bed, 

guardar cama. 
steal, robar. 

still, todavia, aun {or adn). 
story, cuento, m., relacion,/ 
stove, ( = cooking — ) fogon, m. ; 

( = heating — ) estufa, / 
strange, extrafio, -a, particular. 
stranger, extranjero, -a, m. and f. ; 

'{ = unknown) desconocido, -a, 

m. and f. 
street, calle,/ 
strong, fuerte. 
study, estudio, m. ; vb., estudiar. 



VOCABULARY 



283 



such, such a, tal. 

suffer, sufrir. 

summer, verano, m, 

sun, sol, m. 

Sunday, domingo, m, 

supper, cena,// have — , cenar. 

support, mantener. 

sweet, dulce ; sweets, dulces, 

m. pi. 
system, sistema, m, 

table, mesa, / 

tablecloth, mantel, m, 

tailor, sastre, m. 

take, tomar, (= carry) llevar. 

talk, hablar. 

tall, alto, -a. 

taste, gusto, 711. ; vb.f gustar ; intr., 

saber a. 
tea, te, m. ; — spoon, cucharita, f. 
teach, enseiiar. 

teacher, maestro, -a, m. and f. 
tear, lagrima, / 
tell, decir, contar. 
ten, diez. 

tenderly, tiernamente. 
tenth, decimo, -a. 
Tetuan, Tetuan. 
than, que, de {bef. numerals)^ del 

que, de la que, etc. {bef. dependent 

clauses) . 
thank, dar (las) gracias (a), agra- 

decer ; I — you ! ; gracias ! 
that {rel.), que. 
that {de7?t.), ese, -a, -o ; aquel, 

aquella, aquello. 
that (^conj.), que; (^— in order 

that) para que. 



that one, aquel, aquella. 

the, el, la, los, las, lo. 

their, su, sus ; el (la, los, las) . . . 
de ellos (ellas). 

them, los, les, las ; ellos, ellas. 

theme, tema, 711. 

then, entonces. 

there, alli, alia ; (near person ad- 
dressed) ahi ; over — , por alli ; 

— is (are), hay. 

therefore, por consiguiente, por 

esto (eso). 
they, ellos, ellas. 
thief, ladron, -ona, m. and f, 
thing, cosa, /. 
think, pensar ; — of, pensar en ; 

— about, pensar de ; ( = believe) , 
creer, opinar. 

third, tercer(o), -a ; {in compound 

ordinals) tercio, -a. 
thirst, sed, / 
thirsty : be — , tener sed. 
thirteen, trece. 
thirty, treinta. 
this, {dem.) este, -a, -os, -as, -o ; 

— one, {prn.) este, esta, etc. 
those who, los que, etc. 
thousand, one — , mil. 
three, tres. 

throat, garganta, / 

through, por ; — ticket, billete 

(boleto) directo, ;«. 
throw, echar, arrojar ; ( — a ball^ 

stone, etc.) tirar ; — away, botar, 

arrojar. 
Thursday, jueves, in. 
ticket, billete, 7?i. ; boleto, ;«. 

{A7nerican)» 



284 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



time, tiempo, ;;?., hora, / / what 

— is it ? i que hora es ? the 

first — , la primera vez ; on — , a 

tiempo. 
tired, cansado, -a. 
to, a, hasta ; ( = in order to) para. 
tobacco, tabaco, m. 
today, hoy. 
tomorrow, mafiana ; day after — , 

pasado maiiana ; — morning, 

manana por la mafiana. 
too, tambien ; — much, demasiado, 

-a ; it's — bad ! ; es lastima ! 
toothache: he has a — , le duelen 

los dientes {lit. ' the teeth ache to 

him'). 
toward(s),hacia. 
towel, toalla,/ 
town, pueblo, m, ; ciudad, f, 
train, tren, m, 

traitor, traidor, -ora, m, and f, 
travel, viajar. 
travelling-bag, maleta, / 
tree, arbol, 171, 

tremble (with), temblar (de). 
Trinity, Trinidad,/ 
trousers, pantalones, in. pi. 
true, verdadero, -a; { — faithful) 

fiel ; it is true, es verdad (cierto). 
trunk, bad], m. 
truth, verdad, / 
try, ( = test) probar ; ( = tempi) 

tentar; { — endeavor) tratar (de), 

procurar, esforzarse (a). 
Tuesday, martes, m. 
turn, (= — around) volverse ; 

(= become) ponerse, hacerse. 
twelve, doce. 



twenty, veinte. 

twice, dos veces. 

two, dos; — hundred, doscientos, -as. 

typewriter, maquina de escribir,/ 

ugly, feo, -a. 

umbrella, paraguas, m, 

uncle, tio, m.; uncle(s) and 
aunt(s), tios, m. pi. 

underscore, subrayar. 

understand, entender. 

unfortunate, desdichado, -a, des- 
graciado, -a. 

unhappy, infeliz. 

United States, Estados Unidos, m.pL 

unless, a menos que. 

until, hasta; conj.^ hasta que. 

us, nos, nosotros, -as, to — , nos. 

use, usar, emplear, servirse de; he 
used to do so, solia hacerlo, lo 
hacia. 

useful, dtil. 

usually, por lo comdn, por lo gen- 
eral, comdnmente. 

various, vario, -a. 

vary, variar. 

very, muy, mucho. 

vest, waistcoat, chaleco, m. 

village, aldea,/, pueblecito, w. 

visit, visitar; noun, visita,/ 

volume, tomo, m., volumen, m. 

waistcoat, chaleco, m. 

wait (for), esperar, aguardar. 

wall, muro, m.; (= inner — of 

house) pared,// {of fortification^ 

muralla, / 



VOCABULARY 



285 



want, {= lack) carecer de ; ( = 

wish) querer, desear. 
war, guerra,/ 
warm, caluroso, -a, calido, -a; lam 

— , tengo calor; it is — , hace 

calor; — water, agua caliente. 
wash, lavar. 

wash-basin, jofaina,/, palangana,/ 
watch, reloj. w. 
water, agua,/ 
way, camino, m., direccion, f.; 

(= manner) manera, /, modo, 

m, ; not ... in any — , no ... en 

nada. 
we, nosotros, -as. 
wealthy, rico, -a, opulento, -a. 
weapon, arma,/ 
weather, tiempo, w. / be good — , 

hacer buen tiempo. 
Wednesday, miercoles, m. 
week, semana, / / in a — , en ocho 

di'as; in two — S, en quince dias. 
weep, llorar. 
well, bueno, -a, bien de salud; adv., 

bien. 
wet, mojado, -a. 
what, prn, rel., lo que; — is mine, 

lo mio : interrog.j que, ( = which) 

cual. 
when, cuando; i^iterrog.y cuando. 
whenever, cuando, cuandoquiera 

'que, siempre que. 
where, donde; i7tterrog.^ donde; 

(== whither) a donde; ( = 

wherein) en donde. 
whether, si; {aft, dudar, etc.) que. 
which, que, el (la) cual, el (la) 

que; interrog., cual. 



while, (= tiine) tiempo; conj., 

mientras, mientras que. 
white, bianco, -a. 
who, que, el (la) cual, el (la) que, 

quien; inter rog., quien. 
whom, r<?/., que, quien, el que, etc., 

el cual, etc. 
whom, interrog., quien. 
whose, cuyo, -a; interrog., de quien, 

cdyo, -a. 
wicked, malo, -a. 
wickedness, iniquidad, /, (lo) 

malo, n. 
wide, ancho, -a. 

wife, mujer, /, seiiora,/, esposa, / 
wild, silvestre. 
will, (= be willing) querer: 

otherwise '' iviW denotes future 

time. 
willing, dispuesto, -a, inclinado, -a ; 

be — , querer. 
wind, viento, ;;/. 
window, vent ana,/ 
windy: it is — , hace (hay) 

viento. 
wine, vino, in. 
winter, invierno, m. 
wish, querer, desear. 
with, con. 
without, sin. 
woman, mujer, /; young — , jo- 

ven, / 
wood, lena, / 
word, palabra,/ 
work, trabajo, m. ; {= literary or 

artistic production) obra,// vb.^ 

trabajar. 
workshop, taller, w. 



286 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



world, mundo, m, 

worry, molestar ; (^— be zvorried) 

tener cuidado, atormentarse. 
worth : be — , valer. 
write, escribir. 
wrong : be — , no tenet razon. 

year, aiio, m. ; leap — , aflo bisiesto. 
yellow, amarillo, -a. 



yes, SI. 

yesterday, ayer. 

yet, todavia, aun {or adn), 

young, joven. 

your, tu, vuestro, -a, su, el (la, los, 
las) . . . de Vd. 

yours, tuyo, -a, vuestro, -a, suyo, -a, 
el (la, los, las) de Vd., el tuyo, etc., 
el vuestro, etc., el suyo, etc. 



INDEX 



a: bef. direct obj., 50; with names of coun- 
tries, 55 (5); al {d ia, etc.)=Eng. * a,' 
57, c; bef. infins., 120; with verbs meaning 
* take from,' etc., 49, a, 182; idioms, 123, 
206. 

Abstract Nouns: used with def. art., 55 
(i); plur. of, 81 (3). 

acabar (de), 184. 

accentuation, 15; of diphthongs and triph- 
thongs, 16; of monosyllables, 17; of 
compound words, 18; of -z'ar and -uar 
verbs, 218-219. 

Accnsative Case: see Direct Object and 
Personal d. 

acordarse, 109, 6. 

acostarse, 109, d. 

Adjectiyes: fem., 33; neuter gender, 54; 
plur., 34; use of plur., 81; position, 60, 
61; position of pred. adj., 195 (2); of su- 
perlative, 7i, £", agreement, 62 ; compari- 
son, 74, 75; t/ian, 78; repetition, 61, d; 
62, d; used substantively, 80; of nation- 
ality, 33, a, 55 (4) ; adj. for adv., 62, e; dif- 
ferent meaning with ser and estar, 46, c. 

Adverbs: position, 196; comparison, 76, 
77; lo used, 54, «, 76, a; aqui, acd, ahi^ 
alii, alld^ 176; mticho^ 177; comparison 
oimuchOyTj', muyyiTj', yUyij^; -ntentei 
179; tatiy 79, 143, a', idioms, 184. 

Agreement: of subj. and verb, 193; of 
adj., 62. 

ahi, alii, alia: see Adverbs. 

al = ^ el, 30, a, 

alegrarse, 109, 3. 

alguien, algo, alguno: see Indefinite Ad- 
jective Pronouns. 

alguno: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns. 

•■all,' 157, a. 

^ 9\jxi0%ty'* Poco /alto para qtie, 184. 

Alphabetical List of Verbs, 271. 

ambos: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns. 



andar: inflection, 240; meaning, 198; in 
periphrastic progressive tenses, 121, a. 

Anomalous Past Participles, 259-261. 

'any,' 151. 

Apocopation of Adjectives, 66-69. 

Apposition: noun in, 55 (2), b\ art. omit- 
ted, 56 (i), 57, a ; art. aft. noun, 74, g, 

aquel : see Demonstratives. 

aqui, aca: see Adverbs. 

Articles: see Indefinite Article and Defi- 
nite Article. 

' ask of ': verbs denoting, 49, a, 182. 

atreverse, 109, b, 

Augmentatiyes: see Qualifying Suffixes. 

-azo, -acho, -ajo, -ada: see Qualifying 
Suffixes. 

' be ' = ser or esiar, 46. 
bien: comparison, 77; mds bieUy 77, a. 
bonito: position, 61, a. 
bueno: apocopation, 66; position, 61, a\ 
comparison, 75 (i); buenos dias, etc., 59. 
' but,' 190. 

cada: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns. 

caer: inflection, 253; idioms, 199. 

' can ' : see poder and saber. 

Capitalization, 23. 

-car verbs : orthographic variations of, 214, 
214 (i). 

Cardinals : see Numerals. 

caro: position and meaning, 61, c% 

casa : idioms, 48, a, 206. 

Cases: see Possessive Case, Indirect Ob- 
ject, and Personal d. 

castellano, 55 (4), and footnote. 

-cer and -cir verbs : orthographic variations 
of, 215, 220. 

ciento: see Numerals. 

cierto: indef. art. omitted, 57,3; position 
and meaning, 61, c* 



287 



288 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



CollectiTes : see Numerals. 

color: adj. of, 54. 

como: tan . . . como, 79; used with saber y 

186, footnote. 
Comparison: see Adjectives and Adverbs, 

and * Than.' 
Compound words: accent of, 18. 
con: conniigo, etc., 98, a^ and footnote. 
Conditional Sentences: see Sentences. 
Conjunctions, 188-192; j)/,^', 188; o^u, 189; 

pero, jnas, sinOy 190; cuajido^ 191 ; donde, 

192 ; porque, 192. See also qiccy como, etc. 
COnocer : inflection, 220; meaning, 54, a, 

footnote, 186. 
Consonants, 5 ; labials and labio-dentals, 6 ; 

dentals or lingua-dentals, 7 ; gutturals and 

palatals, 8; sibilants, 9; aspirates, 10; 

tongue-trilled, 11; spirant jj/, 12; double, 

14. 
cosa: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns. 
countries, cities, etc.: names of, 55 (5). 
cual, el cual, cual: see Relatives and In- 

terrogatives. 
cuando: see Conjunctions. 
cuanto : as relative, 138; cuanto . . . tanto 

= * the . . . the,' 74, d. 

d: lost in imperatives, 86, a, 

dar: inflection, 241 ; idioms, 187. 

Dative Case: see Indirect Object; ethical 
dative, in. 

de: denotes possession, 48, 125; with names 
of countries, 55 (5); aft. superlatives = 
*in,'74, ^; = * than,' 78, «-, c; bef. infins., 
120; = * by,* 180, a, footnote; denotes 
material, etc., 181 ; idioms, 206. 

deber =* should,' 71, b\ with dependent 
infin., 120, Yj;. 

Defective Verbs, 262-270. 

Definite Article: forms, 30, 54; el for la, 
30, b\ use, 54, 55; used in place of pos- 
sessive, 119; with superlatives, 74, b,f,g\ 
with poss. pron., 124; with rel. pron., 135, 
137, b; with prepositional phrases and 
relative clauses, 125, 131; with infin., 
120 (3), 55 (7) ; omission, 56; omitted bef. 
poss. pron., 125, b\ lo, 54; lo, with super- 
lative adv., 76, a ; = Eng. * a,' ' an,' 57, c. 

del= de ely 30, a. 

Demonstratives: 

Adjectives, 128; meaning, 44, 129; posi- 
tion, 128, a\ repetition, 44, a. 



Pronouns, 130; 'the former,' 'the latter,' 
130, a', 'that,' 130, b; aquel bef. phrase 
and clause, 131, a; en {de, a) esta {esa), 
130, c. 

dia, 24 (2), a. 

diferente: position and meaning, 61, c. 

Diminutives: see Qualifying Suffixes. 

Diphthongs: kinds of, 4; accentuation 
of, 16. 

Direct Object (of verbs): with a, 50; posi- 
tion of, 195. 

' do ' : aux. * do ' not translated into Spanish, 
32. 

don, dona: use, 55 (2), footnote; art. not 
used, 55 (2), a. 

donde: see Conjunctions; = relative, 140. 

dormirse, 109, c. 

dos: los dos, 159. 

e: see Conjunctions. 

el, ella, ello, etc.: see Personal Pro- 
nouns. 

el: see Definite Article, 

Elision of Vowels, 3. 

en: with adjectives of nationality, 55 (4); 
with names of countries, 55 (5) ; idioms, 
206. 

estar: inflection, 238; meaning, 46; to 
express position, 46, a; in periphrastic 
progressive tenses, 121, a; estar para 
iPor), 184; idioms, 199. 

este, ese: see Demonstratives. 

-ete, -ejo: see Qualifying Suffixes. 

'for,' 180. 

' former ' (' the former,' * the latter '), 
130, a. 

Fractionals: see Ordinals, 

Future Indicative: see Tenses. 

Future Subjunctive: see Hypothetical Sub- 
junctive. 

-gar verbs: orthographic variations of, 

214 (2). 
Gender: of nouns, 24, 25; of adj., 33; of 

adj. modifying several nouns, 62; neuter 

genderof adj., 54; of def. art., 54; of poss. 

pron., 124, b; of demon, pron., 130; of 

relatives, 135, c. 
Genitive Case: see Possessive Case. 
-ger and -gir verbs '-. orthographic variations 

of, 215. 



JNDEX 



289 



grande: apocopation, 67; position and 

meaning, 61, <r, 67, b; comparison, 75 (2). 

-guar verbs: orthographic variations of, 214. 

-guir verbs: orthographic variations of, 215. 

haber: inflection, 237; meaning and use, 
38; hay, 38, «, 65 (2); ha in temporal 
clauses, 38, <^, 73, a; hi^ 92, footnote, 
237, a\ idioms, 38, <2, 40, 65, 199. 

hacer: inflection, 246; to express state of 
weather, 65; time, 72, 73, a\ idioms, 175; 
hacersCy 109, b. 

' have ' = tener or haber, 38. 

hay: see haber, 

hermoso, 61, a. 

Hypothetical Subjunctives: see Tenses. 

i changed to y in verbs, 216; omitted, 217. 

-iar verbs: accentuation of, 218-219. 

Imperative Mood: see Moods. 

Imperfect Tenses: see Tenses. 

Inceptive Verbs, 220. 

Indefinite Adjective Pronouns: alguien, 
algo, X50; alguno^ 151; apocopation of, 
66; unosy 152; nadie^ nada^ 153; nin- 
gunOf 154; apocopation of, 66; tnucho, 
15s; comparison of, 75 (3); muchisimOy 
i55» ^"-'^ pocOy 156; comparison of, 75 (3) ; 
todo, 157; mismOy 158; in refl. construc- 
tions, 109, a; atnboSy 159; cada^ 160; 
<7/r<?, 161 ; uno y otroy ^\.Q,.y\(ii\ elunOyel 
otro in reciprocal constructions, no; taly 
163; cosay 164; lay laSy in, b. 

Indefinite Article: forms, 26; repetition, 
26, a; un for tinay 26, b', omitted, 57; 
in expressions of measure, 57, c. 

Indicative Mood: see Moods. 

Indirect Object, 49; with verbs meaning to 

* take from,' * ask of,' etc., 49, rt, 182; ethi- 
cal dative, in. 

Infinitive Mood: see Moods. 

Interrogative Sentences, 51. 

Inter rogatives, 142-147; quiy 143; quien, 
144; qtiien in optative expressions, 107; 
cudly 145; cuyOy 146; cudntoy 147; que 
cosay 164, footnote. 

ir: inflection, 247; meaning, 198; in periphras- 
tic progress, tenses, 121, a', irsey 109, c\ 

* go and ' = ir a, 148, a ; idioms, 149, 206. 
Irregular Verbs, 236-258. 

-isimo, 74, h, 
* it,' 91. 



-ito, -illo, -ico, -in, -ino: see Qualifying 
Suffixes. 

jamas, 165. 

* know ' = conocer or saber y 54, «, footnote. 



la, las: with force of indef. pron., in, b. 
* last ' = ultimo y postrerOy or pasadoy 66, 

footnote. 
' latter ' (* the former,' * the latter '), 130, «, 
' let ' and inf. = Span, subj., 87. 
levantarse, 109, b, 
lindo, 61, a. 
lo (neuter art.), 54; with superlative adv., 

76, a', idioms, 54, a, 

mal : comparison, 77. 

malo: apocopation, 66; position, 61, a\ 

comparison, 75 (i). 
mano, 24 (2), a. 
mapa, 24 (2), a. 
mas: see Conjunctions. 
mas: comparative of /<?c^, 75 (3), 77: used 

to form comparatives, 74-77; mas bieuy 

77, a ; no mds . . . que, 78, b, 190, a ; in 
exclamations, 143, a; idioms, 167. 

mayor, 75 (2) ; la mayor parte de= ' most,* 
170, a. 

medio and mitad, 170, b. 

mejor, 75 (1), 77. 

menor, 75 (2). 

menos, 75, (3), 77; idioms, 167. 

-mente : see Adverbs. 

mientras . . . = * the . . . the,' 74, d. 

mil: see Numerals. 

mismo : see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns ; 
idioms, 184. 

Moods: 

Infin.: * to,' bef. infin., 120; with def. 
art., 120 (3); aft. prepositions, 120 (2); 
after expressions of * willing,' * fearing,' 
etc., 96, footnotes; after ^ir and very 187, 
footnote; idioms, 123 (2). 

Participles: use of pres. part., 121; of 
past part., 122. 

Imperative, 86, 87, a. 
Subjunctive: difference between ind. 
and subjunc. moods, 94; subjunc. to ex- 
press command, 87 ; in dependent clauses, 
94> 95) 96, 100; pres. subjunc. to denote fut. 



290 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



time, 96, a ; imp. subjunc. in -ra — pret. or 
pluperf. ind., 99, footnote; choice between 
imp. subj. in -se and -ra^ 99; imp. and 
hyp. subjunc. built on pret. 3d pers. stem, 
99, Uy 112 (3); hyp. subjunc, 114; condi- 
tion " contrary to fact," 106; subjunc. in 
indirect discourse, 116; idioms, 97, 107. 

morirse, 109, c. 

'most,' 74, h', 75 (3), a, 

mucho: pron., see Indicative Adjective 
Pronouns; adv-^ 177; comparison, 75 
(3% IT' =' very,' 177, a. 

Multiplicatives: see Numerals. 

muy : see Adverbs; = ' most,' 74, h. 

nadie, nada, ninguno: see Indefinite 
Adjective Pronouns. 

Negation: neg. sentence, 31 ; neg. prons. 
and advs., 165. 

Neuter Gender; see A?, 54. 

' never,' 165, footnote. 

ni . . . ni, 165. 

ninguno: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns. 

no: see Negation; no mds . . . que, 78, b\ 
que ?to, 184. 

nosotros, nos: see Personal Pronouns. 

Nouns: gender, 24, 25; plur., 29; use of 
plur., 81 ; plur. of abstract nouns, 81 (3) ; 
sing, noun to denote something that be- 
longs to every member of group, 81 (2) ; 
poss. case, 48, 125, a; dative case, 49, 
182; accusative case, 50; position of subj. 
and obj. noun, 194, 195; in predicate, 
46, b', in apposition, 55 (2), h\ requiring 
def. art., 55 (i); used as adj., 61, e, 181. 

nuevo: 61, c. 

Number: of noun, 29; of adj., 34; of adj. 
modifying several nouns, 62. 

Numerals: 

Cardinals, 168; apocopation of uno^ 
66; oi ctento,6g', used instead of ordinals, 
169, c, d, e. 

Ordinals, 169; apocopation of /r/w^?'^ 
and tercero^ 66. 
Fractionals, 170. 
Collectives, 171. 
Multiplicatives, 172. 
Phrases, 173. 

Def. art. omitted, 56 (2); denoting 
hours, 72; denoting days, 72, 169, e; after 
comparatives, 78, a, 

nunca, 165. 



6: see Conjunctions. 

oir: inflection, 254; followed by dependent 

infin., 187, footnote; idioms, 187. 
ojala, 107. 
olvidarse, 109, b. 
-on, -ote: see Qualifying Suffixes. 
'only': 78, b. 
Ordinals : see Numerals. 
Orthographic Variations, 213-219. 
Orthography: non-phonetic, 13. 
Otro : see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns. 

para, 180, 181; = * to,' 120, 3, 180, b\ with 
names of countries, 55 (5) ; idioms, 184. 

parte : in fractional expressions, 170, a* 

Participles, 39, 121, 122; anomalous past 
participles, 259-261. 

pasado, 66, footnote. 

peor, 75 (i), 77.^ 

pequeno: position, 61, a', comparison, 
75 (2). 

Perfect Tenses : see Tenses. 

Periphrastic Progressive Tenses: see 
Tenses. 

pero : see Conjunctions. 

Personal a, 50; omitted, 50, a,b\ to dis- 
tinguish object from subject, 50, c. 

Personal Pronouns: as subj. and obj. of 
verb, 89; tu and usted, 90; ello and lo, 
91 ; se and si, 108, 109 ; subj. pron. omitted, 
89, a; position of obj. pron., 89, 3, c, d, e; . 
of two obj. prons., 102, 103^ of refl. se, 
108, a; se for le, les, 102, a\ la, las for 
le, les, fem., 89, h; le and lo as masc. 
obj. pron., 89//; refl. prons. of ist and 
2d pers., 109; prepositional forms, 98; 
poss. case, 125; explicit obj. of verb, 103; 
conntigo, etc., 98, a, and footnote. 

Pluperfect Tense : see Tenses. 

Plural: of nouns, 29; of adjs., 34; use 
of, 81. 

pobre, 61, c. 

poco: pron., see Indefinite Adjective Pro- 
nouns; adv., comparison, 75 (3), 77. 

poder: inflection, 243; idioms, 167. 

poner: inflection, 249; ponerse, 109, b; 
idioms, 199. 

por, 180; = Eng. 'a' or *per,' 57, ^r; bef. 
el cual {que), 135 (2) ; idioms, 97, 184. 

porque: see Conjunctions. 

Position: of nouns, 194, 195; of adjs., 60, 
61; of advs., 196. 



INDEX 



291 



Possessiyes : 

Adjectives, 117; position, 118; def. art. 

forposs ,119; repetition, 44, «; idioms, 123. 

Pronouns, 124, 125; explicit forms, 125. 

Possessive Case, 48, 125, a\ elliptical for 
' at (to, from) the house, etc., of,' 48, a, 

postrero, 66. 

Prefixes in Syllabification, 21. 

Prepositions: see a, de, en, para^ por, 
etc. ; preposition retained bef substantive 
clause, 183; idioms, 184. 

Present Tense; see Tenses. 

Preterite Perfect: see Tenses. 

Preterite Tense: see Tenses. 

primero: see Numerals. 

Pronouns : see Personal Pronouns, Posses- 
sives, etc. 

Pronunciation, i ; table of English equiv- 
alents for vowel and consonant sounds, 2, 

Punctuation, 22. 

Qualifying suffixes, 200-205; diminutives, 
201; their meaning, 202; augmentatives, 
203 ; combinations of diminutive and aug- 
mentative endings, 204; -azo and -ada to 
denote result of action, 205. 

Quantity of vowels, 3. 

que and que: see Relatives and Interroga- 
tives. 

que {coHj.) : rarely omitted, 96, 3 ; = ' than,' 
78; que for c^iando, 191, a; idioms, 97. 

querer : inflection, 242; = * will,' 71, a; 
with dependent infin,, 120, a\ idioms, 107, 
167. 

quien and quien : see Relatives and Inter- 
rogatives. 

-quir verbs: orthographic variations of, 215. 

Radical-changing Verbs, 221-234. 

Reciprocal Construction, no. 

Reflexive Construction, 108 in. 

Regular Verbs, 210-219. 

reir: inflection, 233; reirse, 109, b. 

Relatives, 133-140; que, 134; el cnal, el 
qtie^i^S'' ^z^zV;^, 137; cua7ito,\i^\ cuyo, 
139; donde, 140; relative not omitted, 
133, b', del que, etc., after comparatives, 
78, c\ followed by subjunc. mood, 96 (6) ; 
cada cual, 160. 

s: lost in imperatives, 87, b, 
saber: inflection, 245 ; meaning, 54, a, foot- 
note, 186; idioms, 187. 



salir: inflection, 252; idioms, 199. 

santo, 68. 

seandsi: see Personal Pronouns. 

' self,' 158; in refl. constructions, 109, a, 

sentarse, 109, b. 

Sentences: negative, 31; interrogative, 51; 
conditions "contrary to fact," 106; com- 
mon forms, 115; when the verb of the 
apodosis is subjunc, 116. 

senor, seiTora, and senorita, prefixed to 
title, 55 i2). 

Sequence of Tenses: see Tenses. 

ser: inflection, 236; meaning, 46; with 
predicate nouns, 46, b\ periphrastic pro- 
gressive tenses, 121, a\ idioms, 47, 199. 

* should ' = cond. ind. or deber, 71, b. 

si: followed by cond. ind., = ' whether,' 
106, b, 

si C yes '), que si, 184. 

sin : followed by el cual {que)y 135 (2). 

sino: see Conjunctions. 

'some,' 151, 152. 

Subject (of verb): position, 51, 194. 

Subjunctive mood: see Moods. 

Syllabification, 19-21. 

' take from,' verbs of, 49, a, 182. 
tal: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns. 
tampoco, 165. 

tan: tan . . . covto, 79; in exclamations, 

143, a. 
tanto: tanio . . . como, 79; cuanto . . . 

tanto = ' the . . . the,' 74, d. 
tener: inflection, 239; meaning and use, 
38 ; d omitted after it, 50, a ; with nouns 
denoting bodily characteristics, 55 (6); 
idioms, 40, 199. 
Tenses: 

Imperf. and pret. ind., use of, 53; perf. 
ind. for pret., 53, b. 

Fut. and cond. ind., formation of, 71, 
footnote; use of, 71; fut. and cond. of 
probability, 84; cond. ind. with sz, 106, b; 
Span, pres., imp. and fut. ind.= Eng. perf., 
pluperf., and fut. perf., 73. 

Pluperf. and pret. perf., 64. 

Pres. subj. to express fut. time, 96, a, 

Imperf. and hyp. subj., on pret., 3d 
pers., stem, 99, a, 112 (3) ; choice bet. 
forms in -se and -ra, 99; imp. in -ra — 
pluperf. or pret. ind., 99, footnote. 

Hyp. subj., use of, 114. 



292 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



Perf. tenses, 211. 

Periphrastic progress, tenses, 212, 121, <?. 
Sequence of, loi, 116. 
In conditions, 106, 115, 116. 
tercero : see Numerals, 
•than,' 78. 

' the . . . the ' {correlative) , 74, d. 
'there,' expletive, 176, c. 
Time: expressions of, — with art., 55 (3); 
hours, days, etc., 72, 169, e; with haber 
and hacer^ 73, a', with fut. and cond. of 
probability, 84; ' for,' 180, c\ idioms, 184, 
206. 
Titles: def. art. bef. title, 55 (2). 
' to ' bef. infin., 120; —por ox para , 180, b, 
todo: see Indefinite Adjective Pronouns. 
Triphthongs: kinds of, 4; accentuation of, 

16. 
tii : see Personal Pronouns. 

u: see Conjunctions. 

-uar verbs: accentuation of, 218-219. 

-uelo, -ucho : see Qualifying Suffixes. 

-uir verbs, 235. 

ultimo, 66, footnote. 

un, una: 26; see Indefinite Article. 

uno: see Numerals. 

unos, uno y otro : see Indefinite Adjective 

Pronouns. 
' used to ' : expressed by imperf. ind., 53, a. 
usted : see Personal Pronouns. 

Taler: inflection, 251; idioms, 199. 

vario, 61, c. 

venir: inflection, 248; in periphrastic pro- 
gressive tenses, 121, a\ * come and' = 
venir a, 148, a\ idioms, 149, 

ver: inflection, 258; followed by dependent 
infin., 187, footnote. 

Verbs, 207-271. 

Principal parts, 209. 



Regular verbs, inflection, 210; perf. 
ten.ses, 211 ; periphrastic progress, tenses, 
212; orthographic variations, 213-219. 
Inceptive verbs, 220. 
Radical-changing verbs, 221-234. 
ist class, 223-228. 
2d class, 229. 
3d class, 230-234. 
-uir verbs, 235. 
Irregular verbs, 236-258. 
Anomalous past participles, 259-261. 
Defective verbs, 262-270. 
Alphabetical list, 271. 
Refl. construction, 108, 109, iii. 
Recip. construction, no. 
Followed by infin. with or without a or 
de^ 120. 

Position of subj., 194; ofobj., 195 (i); 
of pred. adj., 195 (2); of adv., 196. 
Agreement with subj., 193. 
' very,' 177, a. 
viejo, 61, a. 

Voices : refl. for passive voice, 109, d^ e, 
volver (A), 184. 

VOSOtros : see Personal Pronouns. 
Vowels: pronunciation of, 3; elision of, 3; 
quantity of, 3. 

weather: idioms, 65. 

'will': as independent verb or auxiliary, 

71, a. 
Word Order, 194. 
'would': expressed by imperf. indie, 

53, a. 

Y : see Conjunctions. 
ya: see Adverbs. 
yo : see Personal Pronouns. 
'you,' 90. 

-zar verbs, orthographic variations of, 214. 



LB S 20 



.-^ 



i!i 






SIsis 



